Transportation Highway Engineering by Besavilla

- -..---.
-·y
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
-
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
1. Planning of National Roads
1-3
2. Maximum Speed of Cars
3-5
3. Capacity of Roads
5-6
4. Turnouts
6-7
I
s. Parking Maneuvers
7-8
(I
I 6. Provisions of Safety Sight Distance
8-10
7. Curbs and Gutter
I
I
10-11
8. Traffic Lanes
11-12
9. Highway Intersections
' 10. Road Barriers
13-18
19-20
\I
u. Sizes and Colors for Traffic Signs 20-39
12. Pavement Markers 20-39
13. Lane Lines, Barrier Lines, Edge Lines 43-48
14.Pavement Messages and Pavement Markings 48-50
1s. Interchanges 51-60
16. Prohibitions of Traffic Signs 61-75
17. Types of Pavements (Rigid and Flexible) 76-79
18. Joints in Concrete Pavements 79-82
19. California Bearing Ratio 82-85
20. Modulus of Sub-grade Reaction 85 ~ 87
21. Plate Load Test 87-88

22. Thickness of Flexible Pavement Using Graphical Solution 88-90
23. Asphalt Mixture 90-118
24. Components of Pavements 119-125
25. Geometric Shape of Traffic Signs 125-126
26. Types of Crack and Wearing of Concrete Pavements 126-127
27. Practical Problems of Highway Costing 128-130
- --· -- A a
~--~----- · ····~
Table of Contents
Chapter 2
TRANSPORTATION & HIGHWWAY~
ENGINEERING
t. Traffic Capacity
2. Min. Radius of Curvature for Horizontal Curves
132'"' 135
3. Fundamentals of Traffic Flow (Braking Distance, Stopping Distance) 136-
140
4. Tractive Force, Rolling Resistance, Aerodynamic Resistance· 141-
156
and Grade Resistance
s. Space Mean Speed, Time Mean Speed and Mean Free Speed, 156-
160
St~mdard Deviation
6. Peak Hour F~ctor 161-

173
7. Capacity of Roads/Time Headway 173-
174
8. Jam Density, Free-Flow Speed and Space Mean Speed 174-
175
9. Highway Safety and Accident Analysts (Average Daily Traffic) 176-
193
10. Crash Reduction Factor 184-
192
11. Traffic Queue 192-
193
• Under-Saturated Infinite Queue
• Under-Saturated Finite Queue
194-199
12. Stochastic Queue
200-201
13. Service Rates of Ramps Connecting Freeways
201-203
14. Sight Distance, Braking Distance, Stopping Sight Distance,
203- 221
Distance for Horizontal Road Surface
15. Vertical (Summit) Parabolic Curves
221- 222
16. Vertical (Sag) Parabolic Curves 223
-227
17. Unsymmetrical Parabolic Curves 227
- 232
18. Spiral Transition Curve 233
- 236
19. Passing Sight Distance (Overtaking Distanc ) L 236-245
. . e on a evel Road Surface
20. Sight Distance for Vertical Summit Curves 246-248
21. Stopping Sight Distance for Vertical Summ ·t C
248-250
1 urves
251
Table of Contents
22. Passing Sight Dist

ance for s
23. Headlight Dlsta.nc (S umrnit Verttcal Curves
252
e topptn Si h
24. Stopping Sight Di t g g t Distance) for Sag Vertical
Curves 252 - 253
s ance for S
25. Sight Distance for H ag Curves
254
orizontal Curves
254- 256
26. Cross-Sectional Area 0 f
s Earthworks
256- 261
21. Volume of Earthw k
or s (End A
Prismoidal c . rea Method and Volume with
orrect1on Method
261 - 265
28. Finished Gra{ie of Roa dway .
266- 269
29. Limits of Free-Haul E
M . ' conomlcal Haul and Overhaul Volume
268- 269
30. ass 0 1agram
270-271
Chapter 3
-
PORTS and Harbor
1. Harbors
273-275
2. Waves, Wind and Tides ·
275- 292
3. Shallow Water Waves
293-294
4. Deep Water Waves
294-299
5. Significant Wave Height
299-300
6. Saint-Verant and Flamant Theory (Distance from Stillwater and
Center of Rotation of the Wave
300- 301
7. Long Waves
301- 303
8. Relation Between Deep-Water Wave Length and Shallow-Water
Wave Length
303- 304
9. Length of Fetch
304- 305
10. Residua l Water Level
305-307
11. Seismk Forces Acting on Marine Structures

307 -309
12. Ang1~ ar Frequency of a Wave

309 - 310
.. -
..... -
Table of Contents
13. Mooring and Bollards
3 11-313
l 4. Marine Structures
lS. Navigation Channels
314 - 316
16. Wind Pressure and Wind Forces Acting on Vessels and Pier
316 - 317
17. Maximum Width of Channels and Waterways
311 - 318
18. Length and Width of Pier and Slip
318- 322
19. Elements of Standard Ships in Relation to Its Depth of Fl
322 - 323
oatation
20. Forms of Littoral Drift
324- 325
21. Motions of Ships Caused by Sea Water Waves
326- 329
22. Principal Dimensions of Vessel
329-330
23. Dead Weight Tonnage, Gross Tonnage and Displacem t T
331- 332
en onnage
24. Design Water Depth
332- 334
334-340
"··· ......
•
HIGHVVAY
ENGINEERING
-
_,,,.---
~··
t
.A
I
Highway Engineering
~ - .4Df' _- -
~ ~·f?i ~
....
..
- . J
__m_:-------~
-
11
problem: L.1
.....
_._3_ _ P_r_o_b_le
r
~I
- nslble for zoning of
National Roads are continuous In exte
What office Is ]::ictlons and .final land
that form part of the main trunk :
their respective lanes to be submitted to
use and ~Ing P d Land use Regulatory
system; all road• leading to national 11Port:
~,, HLURB (Housing an
national seapo~, parks or coast-to..coa,t
808rd) for approval?
roads. National arterial roads are claaaiflecs
Municipal ·
Planning and
into different groups from the vieWs>olnt of
function:
a) Development Office (MPDO) ffice
b) City Planning Development 0
a) North-south backbone
1• (CPOO) . t
b) East-West Laterals
Provincial Planning Developmen
c)
\ c) Office (PPDO)
~ d)
Other Strategic Roads
All of the above

',
~ B" d) All of the above
l
1
I
. --:J
I
[ 1.•2 - Problem: .
I_
1.4 ~_ Pro~l•~i
l The following elements are to be
considered when planning Expressways:
The elements to consider when planning
National Roads are:
l. I.
II.
No frontage access II b k from the
Development set we ac
I. Limited frontage access
II. Development set well back from the

highway · .
highway ..
Ill. Grade separated intersect1dons thfor
extremely high flows an o er
Ill. All access to premises provided -via
provincial roads
intersecting expressways
IV. Number of intersections to be
IV. Number of intersections to be
minimize
minimized
v.
-Where necessary or for emergency
V. Suitable at-grade channelized
purposes, parking/stopping to be
intersections for minor flows and
provided clear of , the main
other elements
carriageway.
VI. No roadside vendors
a) I, II, IV and V only

a) I, II, IV and VI only
b) II, Ill, IV and V only
b) II, Ill, V and VI only
c) I, Ill, IV and V only
c) I, II, Ill and V only
~cl) All of the above
~ d) All of the above
·'
;...~.
-
Ill. Road narrowtng

(with due reg1rd for
1181
around . communities are :City needs)
can be to Induce
Uled
r Speeds n
trlfflc passes
S1f>'terrneasures aimed at Improving through the
community; ind:
co~ and reducing the volume of through IV. In order to
alert driven that they ire
I
I
•'~c inside the community. Where 1
tra ast can be justified, the most Important
~slderatlons are:
The opportunity should be taken to
entering a
community, It ts gentr1lly
regarded that
some form of pteway
treatment on the
approaches 11
beneflctal
(e.g., substandard curve,
1• reinforce the road hierarchy by tree lining, or
even non-rigid gate
downgrading the old road to structure).
discourage through traffic;
a) I, II and
IV only
Access to the bypass should be
11 b) 11, Ill
and IV only
• restricted to only a few points where
c) I, Ill
and IV only
safe Intersections and spur roads can
Q> d) All of
the above
be provided to line the existing
netw0rk. Direct access from frontage
land should not be permitted;
• . Provisions should be left for future [ 1.7 Problem:
1l
111
L
expansion or development of the ~

community but such developments
When choosing a design
speed for a road
should be served by service roads . project, the following
factors need to be
and spur roads. considered:
a) I and II only I. Function of
the road
b} I and Ill only 11. .Anticipated
operating speed
c) II and Ill only 111. Anticipated
speed limit
a" d) All of the above IV. Economics
a) I, II and
IV only
b) II, Ill
and IV only
[ 1.& Problem: c) I, Ill
and IV only
Q> d) All of
the above
Where a bypass cannot be justified,
countermeasures should be Implemented
to slow down the speeds of through traffic
J
L
as it passes through the community or

j 1.a Problem:
trading centers as follows:
· On open country roads
with no "blind
I. Warning signs and rumble strips can comers" not closely
bordered by
be used to alert drivers about speed· habitation, the
maximum speed for
reducir;g devices ahead; passenger cars and
motorcycles Is:
II. A serle:1 of road humps increasing in
height from 40 mm to around 80 mm ~a) BO kph
can be used gradually to slow down b) 60 kph
traffic in pedestrian predominated c) 40kph
area; d) 30 kph
[1.13
Problem: c
.. :J
probl•'!"'~:.----------
..
Q °tr hzz
road• wtth no "blind Through crowded

streets, •PPfOIChl
-an countrY I bOrdered by Intersectlons at
•blind comers", Pl••l~
On """"~- not clo•• Y -a11 for motor Ichool zones passing
other vehlcl• wt.le~
corners th• maximum • .,_.. are stationary, or
for slmllar dangerou,
habftltlO"d buses ls:
tfUCktan
circumstances, the
maximum •Pied for .
passenger cars,
motorcycl•, motor truck&
« c) 50 l<ph and busn 11:
a) 25 kph d) 30 kph
b) 60 kph
a)
25 kph c) 30 kph
Qr' b)
20kph d) 40 kph
" or boulevards clear of

On "through ·~ind comers" when so \
traffic, with n~ maximum speed for
designated, end motorcycles is: The maximum
speed for cars and motorist
passenger cars a
in high-risk
pedestrian areas ls:
~ c) 401<ph
a) 25 kph d) 30 kph a)
25 kph Q' c) 30kph
b) 60 kph
b)
50 kph d) 40kph
[ 1 •11. _.Pro~lem:_. \
tr ts" or boulevards clear of

\
~1_._1s~_P_r_o_bl_•~m_:_____________ .J
On "tlu~ ~o~blind comers" when so
traffic, th aximum speed for motor The maximum
speed for cars and motorist
designated, e m in low-risk
pedestrian areas is:
trucks and buses is:
f
c) 20 kph ~a)
60 lcph c) 25 kph
a) 25 kph
~ cl) 30kph
b) 30kph d) 45kph
b) 40 kph
[ 1.12 Problem~ \ \ 1.16

Problem: J
On city and municipal streets, with light ~attic I
The
speed limit appropriate on roads where
'Mlen not designated "through streets , the there
are no footpaths and pedestrians are
maximum speed for passenger cars,
motorcycles, motor trucks and buses is:
I I
I
required
to walk on the road is:
I
~-\;.--:. a) 40kph c) 35 kph

a) 25 kph c) 40 kph
b) 30 kph d) 25 kph .
Q" b) 30kph d) 60 kph
- -
-~l_GH~~y- E-~~INE~RING- - -- - - -- -
-- - - 5 \
- - ~ ~ -- - - - - - - -
--- - ----- '
Probl.;m:
Problem:
]
+·
The •peed llmlt appropriate on a high
standard dupllctted carriageway road It 11 the maximum
number of vehtclet,
where there 11 only occaslonal access fro which have a
renonable expectation of
adjoining properties Is: m paulng over a given
section of a 11ne or a
a) 50 kph roadwly In one
direction or In both
c) 60 kph directions during
one hour under
b) 30 kph ~ cl) 801cph prevalllng road and
traffic condltk>n•·
a)
Flow of traffic
[ 1.18 Problem: R' . b)
Road c•pac#ty
c)
Density
The speed llmlt appropriate on 8 very high d)
Free flow
standard expressways, which have low
crash rate Is:
\ 1.22
Problem: ]
a) 45 kph ~ c) 100 kph
b) 60 kph d) 75 kph The capacity of a
route can be affected by
the following
factors:
I. Number of
lanes
[ 1.19 Problem: II. Lane and
shoulder width
Ill. Terrain and
road gradient
At the start of a new speed zone, a speed IV. Traffic
composition
limit sign should be erected on the left and V. Side friction
such as the presence of
right sides of the road. T.hen within the first road
furniture and pedestrians
kilometer, there should be two (2) farther VI. Intersection
capacity (priority of
pairs of repeater speed limit signs. After movements,
traffic signal phasing,
that, repeater signs should be placed at number of
lanes etc.)
_ _ spacing.
a)
I, II, Ill and IV only
c) 500m b)
ll, Ill, lV and Vl only
~a) 1km
c}
I, IV. V and VI only
b) 2km d) 1.5km
ff'" d)
All of the above
[ 1.20 Problem:
{ 1.23
Problem: j
The speed limit appropriate on lower
standard expressways.
Ideal capacity
of a road is:
a) 50 or 60 kph
b) 60 or 75 kph ~ a)
2000vph
c) 90or100 kph b)
1800 vph
c)
1400 vph
~ d) 80 or90kph
1200vph
d)
---- . - H,-GHWAY
ENGINEERING____ I
. =--
.I --6-- = - ~
-- - -- ~ -- -- -
-- -
I -
problem~:- - -- -
[ 1_.~2~7--.~~r_o_b_l•_'!'_J-...._____ =:J
1.24 . f turnouts shall be . Turnouts shall
not be placed opposite each
Th• specific 1ocat1ol~t~ consideration the other but shall
be placed not 1111 than
I eel taking meters apart.
--
detertn n conditions:
followintl h be placed at a) 31.5
Turnout s a11 where
c) 30.5
I. 1ocations/poblaclon:re normally w b) 30.0
d) 31.0
pectestrtans
concentrat~. be placed at least 50.0
:J
II. Aturnout m yroad Intersection.
meterS after a two
l
'h_1_.2
~a__P_r_
ob_l__e_~-
· :__________
distance between The pavement

thickness of turnout shall no
111. Minimum outs In one dlrectiC?n case be less
than _for asphalt.
consecutive ~=s than 500 meters In
shall not be nters In other areas, a) 75 mm
Q> c) 100mm
cities/urban cedlsta~ce shall not be b) 150 mm
d) 200 mm
the minimum
less than 1kilometer.
IV. Turnouts
should be placed on or
horizontal and vertical
adjacenth ttollmltl the sight distances
j J
1.29 ~ Problem:
~------------- ~
curves t a The pavement
thickness of turnout shall no
in either direction.
case be less
than _for concrete.
a) 1, 11, and IV only a) 250 mm
c) 150 mm
b) I, Ill and IV ~ b) 230mm
d) 200 mm
B' c) 1, 11 and Ill only
d) All of the above
I~1___.3_0__P_ro_b_l•....._m,__:____....._. J
[ 1_.~5 _ _Problem: I For adequate
drainage of surface run·off
The requ1'red length of the turnout shall
f be drainage
facilities such as curb and gutter;
determined considering a length o - inlets and storm
sewer shall be provided
meters for each bus. within the
turnout. The folloWing shall be
observed:
~a) 15.0 c) 16.0
I. The cross
slope of the turnout shall
b) 14.5 d) 15.5
be 0.50o/o
steeper than the cross slope
of ~he
adjacent lane of the existing
carriageway.
L1.2~- Problem: I II. The gutter
alongside the turnout shall
Turnouts shall have a minimum width of have the
same slope as the existing
carriageway.
meters to accommodate all types of
~ehicles. Ill. On
carriageway ·with existing storm
sewer, the
turnout shall be provided
a) 4.00 c) 3.80 with inlets
(spacing of 20.0 meters)
ll'i" b) 3.60 d) 4.20 and
connecting pipes to the existing
sewer.
... .
on level carriageways
rJ. existing storm •ewer thWith no
•hall
alongside the tumout
to 0.30%
~ 9Utter
•loPed ~ Pr~1.1em1 =
]
Vehicles Plrktd near lntnectlons
can
a) I, II and IV only ~ the flow of turning trlffie.
Thus,
b) II, Ill and IV only Plrklng should be prohibited within
th•
c} I, Ill and IV only following minimum distances from
the
boundaries of Intersecting roads
for angle
~ d) All of the above Plrklng • _ m. on both approach
and
exit sides.
a) 10 ~ c)
12
__P_ro_b_le_m_:____
: ::J b) 6 d)
8
fhe following are vulnerable road users:

[j ·~ Problem:
The following guldellnn
should be
I. Pedestrians observed for angle parking:
11• People with disabilities I. The word "Angle Parking"
shall be
111. Non-motorized vehicles Indicated on the parking
signs as.well
JV. Motorcycles as the angle of parking to
the curb.
v. Dilapidated vehicles 11. Pavement marking of parking
bays ls
desirable, particularly where
the
required angle Is not 45 to
90 degrees.
~ a) I, II, Ill and IV only 111. Angle parking shall not be
Installed
b) I, Ill and IV only where vlsiblllty restrictions
would
c) I, Ill, IV and V only create a hazardous operating
d) All of the above environment, such as the
Inside of a
bend or on a crest..
a) I and II only
b) I and Ill only
c) II and Ill only
[ 1.32 Problem:
Q" cl) All of the above
Vehicles parked near Intersections can
obstruct the flow of turning traffic. Thus,
parking should be prohibited within the
!·1.i s Problem:
'""
following minimum distances from the When considering parking adjacent

to
boundaries of Intersecting roads for barrier lines the following
factors should
parallel parking • _ m. on both approach be considered:
and exit sid,;s.
I. If parking maneuvers can be
made
clear of through lanes.
Generally, at
Q'> a) 6 least 3 meters needs to be
available
b) 5 for moving traffic between
the parked
c) 3 vehicle and the barrier
line for a single
d) 8 lane of traffic.
-
H _IGHWAY E
11. The loll of capacity during ptrklng

maneuvtf'I If th• maneuvera ire not 1.37 Problem1
complttelY clear of through lann.
The areas where the
111. Thf lafetY and potential of vehlcln surface condition and state of the
cros1lng the blrrter llne to pa11 1 road surface Is GOOd texture
'otcs
vehicle In a parking or unparking
maneuver even though this 11 an
where vehlcln are P•rtlcularty
the1rn,!
maneuver suddenly s:u!r;t to
brak:':
unlawful maneuver.
I. On the approach to tr
II. At roundabouts lfflc
•lgn111
a) I and II only
Ill. Around tight curves
b) I and Ill only IV. On downhill slopes
c) II and Ill only
a) I, 11 and Ill only
~ cl} All of the above b) I, Ill and IV only
c) II, Ill and IV
only
Q'> dJ All of the above
[ 1.36 Problem:
I ~ .38 ~roblem:
The first aim of safe road design ts to
ensure that road users remain safely cm the
Other aspects that COUid •
.=:] .
of control on curves are:
contribute to loss
road. This depends on the following
I. Adverse superelevatlon·
factors: II. Poor sight distance; and
Ill. Poor surface condition
I. a sound road surface;
II. an adequate width or cross-section; a) I and II only
b) I and Ill only
Ill. horizontal and vertical alignment;
c) 11 and Ill only
IV. good visibility/sight distance;
Q'" d) All of the above
V. delineation and signing;
VI. provision for pedestrians, pedal
cyclists and people with disabilities; I 1.39 !roblam:
VII. management of traffic conflicts at
Intersections; and
The provision of safety . ·· ··
de.pends on the characte~~:t
distance
J
VIII. speed management dnver such as: cs of
the
I. Alertness of driver
a) I, II, Ill and VI only II. Re~ognition of the
hazard .
b) II, IV, V, VII and VIII only Ill.Actions available to the dnver
.
- to
st op or to change direction
c) I, IV, VI and VII only IV. Decision ot the driver
Q> d) All of the above a) I, II and IV only
b) 11, Ill and IV
only
~-.:-:.; .~; I, II and Ill only
d) All of the above
I - -- - -
: HIGHWAY ENGIN _
_ _ _
I --- - - -- ___ EERING
9 ·
- - - ~-~---
-- - ---- ----- -
[i.40 : i9ob18in: - $ - ]
.. ]
The provlelon of llfety h
Problem:
depend• on the charact 11g t dletance
vehicle such ae: ertet1c1 of the
Whit ire the components In 1topplng sight
dletance?
I. Type of vehicle - car and truck
II. Friction between the tire I.
Reaction dlltlnc• - th• dl1tance
111.Eye height of the driver and the road
traveled whlle the driver .,.,cefv" •
IV. Speed of vehicles
h1Unt, decides to like ICtlon, then
1ct1 by 1t1rtlng to apply th• bnik" to

a) I, II and Ill only
•tart slowing down; 1nd
b) I, 1.11 and IV only II.
Braking distance - the dl1tance
c) 11, Ill and IV only
required for the vehicle to 1low down
and stop
Ill.
Height of driver's eye above the
roadway
[1.41 . Problem: J IV.
Height of object
The provision of safety sight distance

a) I, II and IV only
depends on the characteristics of the road ~ b)
I and II only
environment such as:
c) I, II and Ill only

I. Road geometry - grade and curvature
d) All of the above
sight limitations
II. Road surface - sealed or unsealed
smooth or rough '
Ill.
IV.
Road illumination at night
Road topography
/7 .44
Problem:
s::;:
The
reaction time to be used for road
d"' a) I, II and Ill only
safety design is _ seconds. This value

b) I, II and IV only is
applied to the whole range of design
c) II, Ill and IV only
speeds.
d) All of the above
a) 1.5 ~ c) 2.5
b) 1.2 d) 2.0
[ 1.42 Problem:
Each type of sight distance consists of
three elements: !·1.45
Problem:
I. Driver Eye Height
II. Object Height The
length of superelevation development
Ill. Sight Distance from
zero cross slope to full design
.fV. Velocity of Vehicle
superelevation is known as:
a) Superelevation runout
~a} J, II and Ill only
~ b)
Superelevatlon runoff
b) I. II and IV only
c) Tangent runout
c} H, Ill and IV only
Tangent run off ·
d)
d) Ail of the above
-
[1 :46 Pl"C!b!e~: .. - J [~-.!~ , ~!.oblem:
~
gth of superelevltk>n development Shoulder paving Is a
valuable ~
™ len normal cross elope to the zero providing:
Od Of
trom theIAnA .-1nt on the tangent 11 known
crotl •-r t'V'
I. Integrity of
the pavement
II. Width to place
edgellne Pa .
··=a) superetevation runout markings
vellltnt
- b) Superetevation runoff
Ill. Additional
safety to prevent Vthl
c) T1ngent tunout skidding or
drivers losing co ,_ tltt
d) Tangent run off gravel
""'ol In
IV. low maintenance
costs
[1.47 CE Board M~y 2016 j with unpaved
shoulders coms>arect
Minimum K value vertical curves should be a)
I, II and Ill only
seleded on the basis of the different b)
I, Ill and IV only
controlling factors: c)
II, Ill and IV only
~ cl}
All of the above
1 Sight distance Is a requirement in all
· situations for driver safety;
II. Appearance Is generallyh reqitulatired In
low fill and flat topograp y s u ons; I. . .1___._s_o-_
P_r_o_b_le_m_:...__...._ _ ,::J
and Types of curb &
gutter:
Ill. Riding comfort is ifia eedgeneral
requirement with spec c n on I. Barrier
curb & gutter
approaches to a floodway where the II. Barrier
curb
length of depression needs to be Ill.
Mountable/drop curb &gutter
) minimized. IV.
Mountable/drop curb
a) I and II only a)
I, II and Ill only
b) I and Ill only b)
I, Ill and IV only
c) II and Ill only c)
11, Ill and IV only
t ff' cl) All of the above Q" cl}
All of the above
( 1.48 Problem:
j 1.s1
Problem:
Crittrias used for the establishment of sag
vertical curves: Types of curb suited
for the edge of the
I. Headlight sight distance traveled way where
it is generally
II. Passenger comfort considered that
drivers should not mount
Ill. Drainage control the curb or
sidewalk. This types are used
· IV. General appearance for areas where
operating speeds are
V. Velocity of cars passing thru the genera;1y less than
60 kph and where
curve pach!iig cf vehicles
is allowed.
a) I, II, IV and V only ~·
Barrier curb &gutter
! . .J ~.
Bi> b} I, II, Ill and IV only ' -. ·..~:·
Barrier curb
c) 11, IV and Vonly '
~·
'
Mountable/drop curb &gutt~r
d) All of the above ,...:.;'
Mountable/drop curb
- - - - -
[---- --- -- -~- ~-~~'~'=~~,r:i~

HIGH~~ - - -- - ------- ___ _____
---- --- -- ----------
_ ______ _
___1~-
I
[ 1.s2 . P_ro~••m: = -=-
[ 1~55
Types of curb that - - - _J

Problem: 1
the errant vehicle ~~vlde less vaulting of
0
less llkellhOOd of the :•ct with the curb, A pedestrf1n
bridge adjacent to the bridge
and less damage to ver lo1lng control used by
vehlcles can be an optJon where
vehicles compared to .,c:cupants of the Insufficient
width Is avatrable for
type shall be used i rrfer curbs. This pedestrians.
This can be canttrevered off
11
medians and the rfgh:r : traffic Islands, the structure
of the road bridge. A
where operating •Pied 1 e of the roadway
1 minimum width
of should be
1
kph. are greater than 60 provided,
although tt may need to be wider
for the higher
pedestrian and cycle
a) Ba~er curb & gutter volumes.
b) Barner curb
c) Mountable/drop curb &gutter a)
1.8 m c) 2m
d" d) Mountable/drop curb b)
1.2 m ~ d) 1.5m
em~=:______.___J
[1_.S_3~P_r_ob_l_
~
f 1.56
Problem:
They are essential part of any road that is
not on fill and must be incorporated into They are lane
In flat to rolling terrain, which
the road cross-section. These are designed are used to
break up platoons of traffic and
to accommodate t~e expected rainfall but to Improve
traffic flow over a section of
can often be haurdous to vehicles that road. A series
of such auxiliary lanes for
off the road. run both directions
of traffic can greatly
improve traffic
flow and driver satisfaction.
d" a) Longitudinal drainage ditches
b) Transverse drainage ditches a)
Line lanes
c) Drop curb and gutters b)
Climbing lanes
d) Shoulder
q:- c)
Overtaking lanes
d)
Auxiliary lanes
[ 1.54 Problem:
The most important criteria to consider to

avoid safe.ty hazards created by the
I~ 1.57 Problem:
_I
drainage ditches is the actual
reconnaissance survey during wet whether A special form of
overtaking lane but they
to identify the natural run-out locations. are only provided on
inclines where truck
Slopes on U1e side nearest the road should speeds fall to 40
kph or less and upgrade
~ot be stc:~per than _ and preferable traffic flow rate In
excess of 20 vehicles per
flatter as t~1is will minimize accident hour.
severity. Tf'it! slope farthest from the road
may be as steep as the ground will permit. ~ . a)
Climbing lanes
'
b) Tapered
lanes
a) 1.5:1 I& c) 3:1 c) Ramps
b) 2:1 d) 4:1 d)
Diverging lanes
-
.
CE Bol!r~ !'il!l 2016
~ .
1.81 Problem:
design of overtaking lanes and
!::~bing lanes requires the consideration Where long steep grades oc
of the: desirable to provide
emergen:ur, It 1,
ramps. There are to be located
~ "caPe
I. Initial diverge talperth stop an out of control
vehicle .,,:10wor
1
Auxiliary lane eng the main traffic stream. Out of
Y frolll
II. ta vehicles result from drivers
losin contro1
111. End or merge per
of their vehicle. The folloWlng
are ~h c~-°'
a) 1and II only
of escape ramps:
e·1.,..
b) I and Ill only
11 and Ill only I. Sand Pile
c)
Q> d} All of the above II. Descending Grade
Ill.Horizontal Grade
IV. Ascending Grade
[ 1 ~~9 . Problem:
I
A ry short section of fully constructed b) I, Ill and IV only
sh::lder or added lane that is ~rovlded
to c) II, Ill and IV
only
allow slow vehicles to pull aside and . be ~cl) All of the above
overtaken. It differs from an overtaking
1 due to its short length, different
:i;~lng and that the majority _of vehicles
are not encouraged to travel m the right j 1.&2 Problem:
lane.
Delineation of the road
alignment needs to
a) Climbing lanes be considered as part of the
design
w b) - Turnout process to ensure that adequate
guidance
' c) Diverge lanes

d) Merge lanes
is provided to road users.
Delineation is
generally provided by the use
of the
following devices:
I. Pavement Markings
Proble.m : II. Signs
Turnout Is a very short section ,of f~ll

m. Guide posts
constructed shoulder or added lane that 1s lV. Reflective delineators
provided to allow slow vehicles to pull V Ughting
aside and be overtaken. The length of ·i;L Curb or other physical
devices
turnout lanes for an average approach
•peed of 30 kph is equal to:·
<l) I, II, Ill and IV
only
a) 180 m b) 11, 111; IV and VI
only
c) 50 m
Q> b) 60m c) I, IV, V and VI
only
d) 200 m
~ d) ' All of the above
,.
• ....
[°&3 _ Problem: _ J .~
. I~
... : ................. .
An intersection Is the junction where two
road either cross or meet The types of
intersections that generally exist on the
road network are:
--==11
ur a)
parallel type of 4 leg Intersection
I. Unflared and unchannellzed • b)
unchannelized intersection
intersections (without widening or c)
multileg intersection
traffic Islands) d)
flared type of intersection
II. Flared and unchannellzed
intersections (with widening but
without traffic islands) and j 1.11
Problem:
Ill. Channelized Intersections (traffic
islands to guide traffic) The figure shown is
one type of a highway
IV. Multiple Intersections Intersection at grade
which is commonly
l
) known as:
B" a)
b)
I, II and Ill only
I, Ill and IV
only .......-....-...--
...........~
........
Jl
....--:-:
..+.i-···-···-···--···-···-
·..-...-..-.-
··················:1··r··············v·-
d) All of the above
~a)
flared type of 4 leg Intersection
b)
11.&4 Problem: c)
parallel type of 4-leg intersection
d)
multi-leg intersection
Common types of intersections are:
I. Cross-intersections I 1.67
Problem:
II. T·intersections
Ill. Y-intersectlons The figure shown is
one type of a highway
IV. Other multi-legged junctions Intersection at
grade, which is commonly
V. Roundabouts known as:
a) I, II, Ill and IV only

b) I, Ill and IV only
c) I, Ill, IV and V only
- ----. ··- - - - - - -- - -
~a)
multi-leg Intersection
The figure shown is one type of a highway b)
or road intersections at grade. This is c)
flared type intersection
commonly known as : d)
parallel type of intersection
~1.88 ''°-bl•nt=
1nteflldk>" 8 g
Is one type of a highway
Th• flgurt sh~rad• which Is commonly
~
~
k"°"" as: I
I
a) ·channelized
intersection
b) channelized
y.jntersection
,,,: ;. --- - I ~~=--- c)

S' cl}
flared intersection
3 leg Intersection
~-- -- ~:
t_1__._7_1 _ P_r_ob__l
__~_m......~*---:J
a) multi·leQ intersectio~s The figure shown Is one type of
hlghwa
b) . flared type intersecttons intersections at grade, which
Is commonly
unchannellzed /n~ectlon
IW c}
d) parallel type intersections knownas~IL
Y
~1r
8.89 _ Pr~ble_m: .. _
shown Is one type of highway
is
~:i:,..:ns at grade which commonly a) y·with turning
roadways
known as: ~ b) 4-leg
channelized type
intersection
c) rotary intersections
roundabout
d) channelized
y·intersection
' a)
b)
channelized y·intersection
rotary intersection
1.72 · Problem:
The figure shown is one type of

highway
_]
~ c} 3 leg intersection with y-turning intersections at grade which is
commonly
roadways known as:
d) four leg channelized type
intersection
[~.70 Problem:
The figure shown is one of highway channelized y-
intersection
intersections at grade whic~ is commonly
.,. y-i,vith turning
roadways
known as: rotary type
intersection
4-leg channelized
intersection
.._... -....
==
J
Ill.Control movements to reduce the
pos1lblltty of conflict and

The figure shown Is one type of hi h
IV. Clearly define vehicle paths by use of
Intersection at grade Which Is g way
known as: I commonly
pavement markings
~1L
c) 11,·111 and IV only

kl i -;-----
XU ~
""d) All of the above
a) rotary Intersections roundabout

d" b)
c)
4-leg channelized type
multi-leg intersection
t.1.11
Problem .I
d) flared type intersection
Traffic can be controlled at Intersections by
traffic control device such as

=
[ 1.74 Problem: I.
Regulatory signs
J
II. Traffic signals
The figure shown Is one type of highway
Ill. Roundabouts
Intersections at grade which Is commonl
known~~
a) I and II only
Y
~ b) I and Ill only
c) II and Ill only
~?-
""d) All of the above
1.77 Problem S<I

a) clover leaf I_
b) partial clover leaf

c) directional_interchange
Signs facing the minor road approaches at
~ d) rotary Intersections roundabout . an
intersection are used to give priority to
the major road.
a) thru street signs

/ 1.75 Problem:
b) fast moving vehicles ahead signs
B'
c) stop or give way signs
Principles of good design to reduce the
d) slow down signs
likelihood of traffic accidents include:
"'
I. Minimize the speed of vehicles at 11.11
Problem
pote'•'tL~! collision points
II. Sep;mit~ movements and points of
Purpose of traffic signals placed on
conflic~ by chann.elization, or in some
controlled Intersections is to:
situations, prohibit certain
movements (and provide for them at I.
Separate vehicle movements In time.
other intersections along the route)
This minimizes conflicts.
l
- ...
at an Intersection
a11ntrnizt dtl•Y' rrorn a eld• road to
[~·~1 .Pri~I•!" ,
Low relative
speed condltlona
::::J
11. en1bl• vehlcl~e rnaJOr road
111. rot• or enter In crossing the Intersections can
be obtained by: at
:...Stpedt•trtans 1. Choosing
a layout where COnfllctln
rv. road movements
cross at angles less thag
or equal
to 90 degrees n
I II and Ill only
a) 1' Ill and IV only 11. Providing
a layout or alignment that
~: 1j, Ill and IV only 111.
slows
down approaching vehicles
Providing
declaration lanes
~ dJ Alloftht'"°
__ve
_ _ _ __ a)
I and II only
· b)
I and Ill only
~probl•lll - J ~ d)
c)
nand Ill only
~ - where two travel
All of the above

A conflict point occurs Safe Intersection
ract or cross.
pathl lnte f uowtng principles:
design uses the o 1_._~_
LI 2-=ezz-
·
P...,...,r_. .~,. tl.b. ._l_e_m
_ .......
.· __ -
..._:z_ '*'·__]
th8 number of conflict

I. Minimizing The safety Qf an
Intersection can be
:~:izlng the area of co~fllct improved by
provision of right and left
II. ting points of confhct . auxiliary
turning lanes. Turning· lanes also
Ill. Separa ference to major Improve
intersection capacity and traffic
IV. Giving pre
flow. They are
particularly Important if the
movements peed f
MinimlzJng relative s ·0 volume of
traffic making these moves ls
V. conflicting movements high or If the
through or oncoming traffic
flows are high.
,• a) I, II, 111 and IV only Provision for
turning lanes can generally
b) 1, 111 and IV only be provided In
the following ways:
c) 1, 111, IV and Vonly
I. Shared
turning and through lane
w d) All of the above II. Flaring and
tape
Ill.Separate lane
for deceleration and
storage
(' 1.80 Problem IV. Establishment
of a traffic island
The speed of vehicles through an ~ a)

I, II and Ill only
intersection depends on the following: b)
I, Ill and IV only
I. Alignment c)
!I, Ill and IV only
H. Road environment d)
All of the above
Ill. Traffic volume and composition - --
··--· - - · ·- - - -- - - - -
IV. Traffic control devices

b) I, Ill and IV only Righi i.~h·n ~ ip
lanes are provided to
c) II, Ill and IV only minim;~{! th~
delays for right turning
Q> dJ All of the above vehic!eg and to
make the right tum
movement easier
and safer.
A traffic Island ls provided with this
treatment to: [ 1.88 .. -
Problem
I. Gulde traffic Into defined paths Roundabouts may be appropriate In the

followlng situations:
II. Separate through, turning and
opposing t~fflc movements • I. At Intersections with high
accident
Ill. Give advance warning of the rates
Intersection ~o approaching drivers II. When physical control of speed
11
IV. Provide refuge for ptdettrlans dnlrable
Ill. When the flows on each approach
are
V. Prohibit undetlrable or unnecetsary balanced and capacity analysts
traffic movements Indicates that volumes can be
managed
a) I, 11, Ill and IV only IV. When the volume of left turners
Is
b) I, 111 and IV only stgnmcant .
V. If traffic 1lgnal1 may be
Inefficient e.g.
c) I, 111, IV and V only due to a large number of phases
~cl) All of the above VI. For multi-legged intersections
a) I, II, Ill and IV only
b) II, Ill, iv and VI only
l 1_.8_4~_P_ro_b_le_m~---------.._d] .
~ c) I, IV, V and VI only
The types of slip lane arrangements are:
J
~
I. High entry angle slip lane 11.87 Problem

II. Free flow slip lane Roundabouts may not be appropriate in
the
Ill. Slow entry angle slip lane following situations:
l. Where satisfactory geometric
design
~a) I and II only cannot be provided due to
insufficient
b) I and Ill only space of unfavorable topography
c) II and Ill only II. Where unbalanced flows with high
d) All of the above
volumes are on , one or more
approaches
Ill. Where a major road intersects a
minor
road and a roundabout would
result In
! 1.as Problem unacceptabte delay to the major
rpad
IV. Where there is
considerable
One of the safest type of intersection pedestrian activity and due to
high
treatments. traffic volumes it would be
difficult for
pedestrians to cross at the
a) T~ir.tersection intersection
b) Y·intersection a) I, II, and IV only
~ c) rnundabout b) II, Ill and IV only ·
d) cross intersection c) I, Ill and IV only
~ cl) All of the above
~'!"'- ~
However, It must be
recognized that drtv
and riders are only
human and '"
~ design speed through
sometimes make mistakes
and 'lose
of their vehlcln.
01
eon:'"
Th• maximum d be generally - In
ndabe>Ul shoul The reasons that they
might lose COntr
rou • are many, for example:
OI
urban area c) 60 kph
a) 50 kph 70 kph I. Excessive speed
"" j,.d d) II. Fatigue or
Inattention
" b) .., "''" Ill.Alcohol or drugs
IV. Road condition
~.89 problem a) I,
II and Ill only
design speed through b) I,
Ill and IV only
Tb• rnaxlmuhm Id be no greater than - c) II,
Ill and IV only
roundabout s ou Q" d) All
of the above
In rural ~reas.
~ c) 501cph
a) 60 kph
b) 70 kph
d) 40 kph 11.9~ , Pro_b la8' ~
-c
Some typical road

environment hazards
] are:
1. Poles
Things to avoid in a design of a
II. Trees
roundaboUt: Ill. Steep side
slopes
IV. Water courses,
dams
I. Straight approaches on high-speed
V. Culvert endwalls
roads 'd VI. Fences and
encroaching buildings
II. Central island too small to prov• e VII. Bridge piers and
abutments
deflection
Ill. Unbalanced traffic flows VIII. speed management
IV. Splitter Islands
a) I,
II, Ill and VI only
b) II,
Ill, V and VII only
~ a) I, II and Ill only c)
Ill, IV, V and VI only
c) II, Ill and IV only ~ d)
All of the above
d) All of the above
\ 1.•_~1 Problem _\
Th•J ~·:. .<.~'11'!
for treating roadside hazards
Tht first objective in road safety is to keep arr::
road users safelY, on the road pavement
w1th a reasonable width, a sound rQad I. Rer.1ove the
hazard
surface, a predictable alignment and good II. Move the
hazard outside th~ clear
delineation and signs. zone
.......__
--
• •= ••
l__~~~~~~y -~~-~~N-E~~~N~-------- -------=--~19-_ J
--~ -
I
111.Modify the hazard so that It ls not so
dangerous
iv. Replace the hazard With something
that Is not 10 dangerous Different types of road
safety barrier
v. Shield the hazard With a barrier systems:
system
I. Flexible Wire Rope
Safety Barrier
a) I, II and IV only Systems
b) II, Ill, IV and V only II. Semi Rigid Systems
c) Ill, IV and V only
Ill. Rigid Systems
~cl) All of the above IV. Road Work Systems
a) I, II and
Ill only
[ 1.94 Problem .} b) I, Ill and
IV only
c) II, Ill
and IV only
They are used to shield errant vehicles ~ d) All of the
above
from running into hazards that cannot be
relocated or made more frangible.
a) roadside poles J 1.97 Problem

~ b) roadside barriers
The location safety
barriers In the vicinity
c) frangible wooden posts
of curb and gutter Is to
be c9nsldered
d) drivable culvert end carefully. If curb and
gutter Is essential In
high-speed locations,
the face of curb
should be located:
11.95 Problem
I. At least 3 m from
the face of concrete
In accordance with the National safety barriers
Corporative Highway Research Project 350 II. At least 3 m from
W-beam and wire
(NCHRP350) procedures, there are six test rope safety
barriers for concrete
levels to provide a range of restraint barrier curb
requirements and impact severity Ill. At least 3.0 m
from W·beam safety
conditions. The criteria is based on: barrier or wire
rope safety barrier for
concrete .
mountable/drop curb & ·
I. Structural adequacy of the barrier gutter
system IV. In areas where the
operating speed Is
II. Occupancy risk and the impact less than 70 kph,
an offset of 0.2 to
velocity and ride down acceleration 0.3 m can be
tolerated to minimize
limits damage to
vehicles
Ill. Vehicle trajectory after impact
a) I, II
and Ill only
a) I and II only b) I, Ill
and IV only
b) I and Ill only c) II, Ill
and IV only
c~ II and Ill only
B" cl) All of
the above
B" o? Ail of the above
• --- -~-----
~. 1 .~.rc1Ma,r201& J \ 1.1~1
P~Obl~ll'I ·~
~th• use of safety barriers Signs that Instruct
road:: '
...... warrant fOr ri certain trafflc rule
requlreme:. to 'nett
..... tabllshed conslde ng:
can b8 81 condition.
or 'otcs
fore slope or back slope steepness a) Roadwork
signs
I. and heig~t hazard• within the clear b) Overhead
signs
II. UnfOrVlv ng c) Traffic
signs
::~hazard• within the clear zone ~ cl) Special
Instruction signs
Ill.
a)
b)
1and II only
1and Ill only
\ 1: 102
Pr,oblell'I .· ==::J
c) II and Ill only Warn road users of
condition 0
~ d) All of th• above adjacent to the road
that ma n or
unexpected or
hazardous. Y be
a) Roadwork
signs
[ 1 .99 . Proble_m ~ b) Warning
signs
c) Traffic
signs
. mounted on a fixed support d) Gu.ide
signs
Device rtabl support
rmanent signs) or po e .
(pe igns) whereby a specific
(tempor:is :onveyed by means of words
mes:a:.bols placed or erected for ~he !1.103 ~E
Board ~,ov•.1!~©
;~~se of regulating, warning or guiding Inform and advice road
users of dlrectioni
traffic. distance, routes, the
location of services'
and points of
Interests. •
.. a) Roadwork signs
.. b)
~ c)
d)
Overhead signs
Traffic signs
Special instruction signs
I& a}
b)
c)
d)
Gulde
signs
Regulatory signs
Warning
signs
Traffic
signs
[ 1~.100 Problem
. .I
! 1 . 1 04 ,
Proble_rn
Signs that inform road users of traffic laws
and regulations which, if disregarded, will Warn or advise of
temporary hazardous ·
constitute an offense. ccinrlitbr.s that
could endanger road usert
o · :!·:,~ m~n and
equipment engaged on
a) Roadwork signs
~ bJ Regulatory signs
IGa ~;
Ffoadwork signs
c) Traffic signs
d) Warning signs \":} 0
1erhead signs
c) Guide
signs
d)
Special instruction signs
....... -
l~-~~~~Ai_E~_?~~-~~~~,-N~----- --- -
---------- --- ------ 21 -,
- --
- - -
(3 .1~ . Proble;.. _J
Problem .J
Signs which provide '!leans of dltplaylng
essential traffic Information on wide multi· Light retro-
reflecting devices mounted at
lane roads, where some degree of lane use the side of the
roadway, In series, to
control la required, or where side-of-road Indicate the
roadway alignment
clearance is Insufficient to accommodate a
road side sign. a)
Traffic cones
Q> b)
Dellneators
a) Roadwork signs c)
Flexible post or bollard
b) Guide signs ·
d)
Flashing Lamps
~ c) Overhead signs
d) Special instruction signs
!1.109
....
Problem
[t .106 Problem / · Devices which may

be conical In shape or
tubular-shaped
capable of performing
Highway appurtenances designed to channelization of
traffic which may be set
prevent vehicular penetration from the on the surface of
the roadway or rigidly
travel way to areas behind the barrier such , attached for
continued use.
as to minimize damage to impacting
vehicles and their occupants, and to
reduce the risk of injuries to pedestrians
Q> a)
b)
Traffic cones
Oelineators
••
and workers.
c)
Flexible post or bollard f
a) Traffic cones d)
Barriers
b) Delineators
~ c) Ba«iers
t
d) Temporary curbing j 1 •.110
Problem
Roadwork devices
consisting of pre-cast
concrete sections,
sandbag, and others
/ 1.107 Problem which, may be used
to guide traffic at the
construction site.
Warning devices used to supplement other
controls and devices necessary to alert a)
Barriers
motorists of construction and maintenance b)
Delineators
activities or obstructions in the roadway.
~ c)
Temporary curbing
a) Traffle cones d)
Flexible post or bollard
b Dehneators
.I Barriers
~ d} l:::Pshing Lamps
-
(
·'
....., ,,_
:;1 111 Pro~~m .. ] I[ 1.1 14

~OtYlct
Problem
• - laC8 of rigid barrier posll
used In ~ a minimum of 450 mm Sta
ndard sign shape
for STOP algrt
or traffic cones with alternate bands of
Q>
by 50 mm wide 1 seen by approaching a)
Octagon
ting color a
contra• delineation of traffic. b)
Circle
traffic for ·
c)
Equilateral triangle
a) BarrierS d)
Rectangle
b) Delineators .
c) Temporary curbing
~ d) Boll1rd
."-.-~
L1 ._1_1 _5
____P_r_o_J»_••......
standard sign shape
for GIVE AWAY atgn,
[~.112 Problem . ,.
. are classified a)
Octagon
Signs :. in the following
· groups
according to their use. b)
Circle
Q> c)
I. Regulat°'>: Signs d)
Rectangle
II Warning Signs . .
11i Guide Signs or Informative Sign
IV Signs for Expressways
V.. Signs for Special Purposes
• VI. Hazard Markers I
'., a)
b)
I, 11. 111 and IV only
II, 111, IV and VI only
Standard sign shape
for regulatory signs.
, Q" d)
c) 1, IV, Vand VI only
All of the above Q> b)
a)
c)
d)
Octagon
Circle
Rectangle
I1~.11~ Problem I
To be effective, the road sign should meet the
five basic requirements: [ 1.117
Problem
I. Fulfill a need
'
. £~ .]
II. Command attention Standard sign
shape for additional
Ill. Convey a clear, simple message information is:
IV. Command respect; and
V. Give adequate time for proper response ?. :
Octagon ·
ll$" f.i .i
C1rcl~
:: :·
.;•iateral triangle
b) II, Ill, IV and Vonly 0
· :.,: :·ngle
c) Ill, IV and Vonly
Q" d) All of the above
•
[1.111 Problem ] [ i .~ 22 Problem
+
J
Standard sign shape for warning signs. Standard color used as a
background for
STOP signs.
a) Pentagon
b) Circle I& aJ Red
~ c) Equilateral triangle b) Black
d) Rectangle c) Yetlow
d) White
[ 1.111 Problem
!1.123 Problem .
J
Standard sign shape for directional signs,
roadwork signs, signs for special Standard color used as legend
color for
purposes, and supplementary plates for signs having white, yellow,
orange,
warning signs. fluorescent orange,
fluorescent yellow
green background and as
chevron for
a) Pentagon hazard markers.
b) Circle
c) Equilateral triangle a) Red
I& d) Rectangle I& b) Black
c) Blue
d) Brown
I1.120 Problem
I 1.124
xe:: s --
Problem
Standard sign shape for facility information
signs, instruction signs, guide ~igns, and
destinations of point of interest. Standard color used as
background color
for roadwork signs.
a) Pentagon a} Red
b) Circle b} Black
c) Equilateral triangle
I& c) · Yellow
I& cl) Rectangle
d} White
11.121 Probletn . ~ I·1.125

?I SE
----- ..- --·· - -

---~ --
Problem
J
Standard sign sh~pt; \'t)r pGc!estrian and ·
Is the background color for
most signs and
school crossings -siG;i.
legends for some colored
background.
~ a) Penmgun a) Brown
b) Circle b} Green
(
c) Equilateral triangle ~ c) White
d) Rectangle d) Blue
] 1.130
• 1 problem
1 12
used 81
background color for slgns 11 reserved as b
;lated In pec1estrtan movement, school
1 tourist faclltty dlrackground
COio
zones, and road work hazard markers to
to signs. ectlonal and
Inf~ !or •II
rrnatJori
glV• addllional emphasis and guidance
vehicle operators. ~ •) Brown
« a) Ruorescent yellow green b)) Fluorescent Orange
C Green
b) Fluorescent Orange d) Blue
c) Green
d) Blue
~.127 Problem
11 used as background color for roadwork
J
How many lett8n and
for signs? numerals
being ultd
::J
signs wh09e legends relate to personneI
a) 5 c)
4
working.
~ b) 6 d)
3
a) Fluorescent yellow green
~ b) Fluorescent Orange
c)
d)
Green
Blue ·
rWh
1 ·132 Problem
.
:J
at series of letters and
used in directional signs?
numerals are
[ 1.128 Problem I
a) Modified series A
Is used as background color for direction b) Modified series F
signs. ~ c) Modified series E
a) Fluorescent yellow green d) Modified series c
b) Fluorescent Orange
~ c) Green
d) Blue 11 .133 Problem
series of .letters and numerals

not us
[.,____
1.129_Problem
_:__.....:.__J) si gns which have to be used f
ed .on
h!c!i3
vem".:i. as the legibility d'
taor moving
1s
nces are
Is used as background color for service s
signs.
~ S.:!rfo:s A and S
a) Brown
b) Fluorescent Orange
c) Green
,..
·-
··./.! . ....s F
..,,
.....
Senc?s D
~ dJ Blue
1
_.--- -·-- ~
HIGHWAY ENGIN~ERING - - ----------- ----

••
·- = 0
- 2s I
~__-':'. -~
------- .
rr.134 Problem
J 11.131 Problem
series of letters and numerals used In
Whit spacing Is always used for
tower
special cases of traffic signs.
case letters of traffic sign•?
a) Series Aand B
a) small spacing
~ b) SerlesC b) medium spacing
c) Series F c) narrow spacing
d) Series 0 Q" d) wide spacing
[1.135. Problem
11.139
I
Problem
)
Series of letters and numerals for traffic
signs, which are commonly used as they
The letter size of a traffic
sign Indicates the
provide the best legibility and aesthetics.
standard size as 160 DM which
means:
a) Series Aand B
b) Series C . Q" a) 160 mm series D
letters at
c) Series F medium spacing
I& d) Serles D and E b) 160 inches series D
letters at
medium spacing
c) 160 mm series OM
letters at
11.136 Problem medium spacing
d) 160 inches series
OM letters at
Series of letters and numeral~ of traffic medium spacing
signs which are not often used on large
signs' due to the wide space required.
a) Series A and B
11.140 Problem
b) Series C 1
Q" c) Series F
The letter size of traffic sign
Indicates the
d) Series D
standard size as 90 LC would
mean:
a) 90 inches lower
case letters that
f 1.1 ~7 Problem are always at wide
spacing
Standard letters and numerals of traffic Q" b) 90 mm lower case

letters that are
signs for capital letters comprises 3 steps always at wide
spacing
of spacings. c) 90 inches lower
case letters that
are always at
medium spacing
a) small, medium and wide
d) 90 mm lower case
letters that are
b) small, medium and large
always at narrow
spacing
Q" c) narrow, medium and wide
d) narrow. medium and large
J [ 1.143
Proble111 ~
Generally there
should not be
one 1lgn1 of •
P11rtJcular type
except when one sign
IUpPI
on= ~
Poat,
1nother or where
route or direction•~
must be grouped. When
It bee' 191\t
necessary to convey
two or more dtff0 "'-t
messages at one
location, ••Pirate ""-t
must be located a
minimum dlata •lgn,
_ .
nee Of
a) 30m
b) 40m
~ c)
0.6V where V Is the
percentile speed In kph IStt

d)
0.5V where Vis the 851h perce .
speed in kph Otile
Problem
The following conditions

should be
considered in the
erection of overhead
a) 1, 11 and Ill only displays:
s1gn
11, Ill and IV only I. Traffic volume at
or near capacity
J c)
II. Complex or
closely sp
,,... d) All ofthe above interchanges
acec1
Ill. Three or more
lanes in each direct1
IV. Restricted sight
distance. on
V. Multi-lane exits
VI. Large perce.ntage
of trucks
f ~.142 Problem J VII. Street lighting
background
VIII. High speed
traffic
Signs are normally located on what side of IX. Consistency of
sign message location
the road? through~ series of
interchanges
X. Insufficient space
for ground mounted
a) center sigrm
b) left
Q' c) right 1
:: '
"'J . : :. IV and V only

d) mounted over the road i.
t1 '
~ · .:.
'.· . VI and VII only
c~ :'
.:iq, IX and X only

~ ([; , AiJ C!
Jf the above
- a ..
. "' ,,.. ' . ~ ... z.. £J
, •.[ ~r
..,._. -, ~
,. , j -:~
·-
t.i .\k ...

- - ----- - - - - -- - - -------- ------ - -~------
-- - - -- -
27 1
i
I HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
--~-- ---~
~- -~~ - ----- -- - - - - - - ----------
[i.14i _ Problem · , : [ 1.147 ..roblem :

: J
Signs should be mounted approximately at What are the different slzel
for regulatory
right angles to the direction of and facing signs?
the traffic they are Intended to serve. At
curve alignments, the angle of placement 1. Size A for urban low
speed roads
should be determined by the course of 11. Size B for rural roads
with speed
approaching traffic rather than by the limits between 60 and 70
kph
roadway edge at the point where the sign Is
111. Size C for high-speed
rural highways'
located.
multi-lane urban roads
~To eliminate possible and undesirable
reflection from the surface of the sign, It IV. Size D for Expressways
should be turned about _ away from the v. Size E for Municipal roads
normal to the headlight beam. After signs
are installed, it is good practice to test a) I, Ill, IV and
V only
them by trial approach run In a motor
vehicle both by day and night Qi'" b) I, II, Ill and
IV only
c) II, Ill and V
only
B'" a) s· · c) s· d) All of the
above
b) 6° d) 10·
XC::Z
( 1.1_4_8 Problem
I 1.146 Problem Signs used to warn motorists
of potentially
hazardous conditions on or
adjacent to the
What are the classifications of regulatory road.
signs?
~a) Warning signs
I. Priority Signs b) Regulatory
signs
c) Direction signs
II. Direction Signs
d) Prohibitive or
restrictive signs
Ill. Prohibitive or Restrictive Signs
IV. Speed Signs
V. Parking Signs
VI. Miscellaneous Signs
I 1.149 . Problem
- \
What are the classifications
of warning
a) I, II, IV and VI only signs?
b) II, Ill, V and VI only
c} I, IV, V and VI only I. Horizontal. Alignment
Signs
B'" d) All of the above II. Intersection and
Junction Signs
Ill.Advance Warning of
Traffic Control
Device Signs
IV. Road Width Signs
V. Road Obstacle Signs
pedeltrtan and School Signs [ 1 T1,2 .
!';obl~m --..
:; RallwaY L•v.i crossing The different general
size of H0 n ~
. supPlernentafY Signs Alignment Signs:
rtzont.1
: , Ofher Warning Signs
I. Size A. for
use of urban or low
roads
'Peect
a) 1, 111. IV and V only 11. Size B, for
rural roads With
IV, V, VI and VII only llmlts
between 60 and 70 kph 'Peect
b)
II, Ill, VIII and IX only 111. Size C, for
high-speed rural high
c) IV. Size D, for
high-speed urban ro.':"'
JE d) AH of th• above
a)
I, II and Ill only
b)
I, Ill and IV only
Q-i-.1-5~0~,-~~b71e--m~_~_---_--.-_a~--_, c)
II, Ill and IV only
~ d)
All of the above
In urban areas, advance warning signs
should be placed at a distance of _ __
In advance of the hazardous area.
. ..:J
~ •) not /US than 30 m. or more than Types of Horizontal
Alignment Si
which are used to Indicate
the type of :na,
toom. curve ahead of the
motorist. <>ad
b) not less than 25 m. or more than
som. . I. Sharp tum
c) . not less than 20 m. or more than II. Reverse tum
45m. Ill. Curve tum
d) not less than 40 m. or more than IV. Reverse tum
V. Winding road
1oom. VI. Hairpin curve
a)
I, U, Ill and V only
[1.1s1 Problem ] b)
II, Ill, IV and VI only
c)
I, Ill, IV and V only
In rural areas, advance warning signs ~ d)
All of the above
should be placed at a distance of _ _
In advance of the hazardous area.
a) not less than 60 m. nor more than I 1.1s4
Problem • 5
150m.
Type of sign used in
advance of an
b) not less than 80 m. nor more than
intc:-:-gertion where two
roads cross at a
200m. 1. ' 1. . •" ,... .
1'n t .
ro ·.~--
..1\J. ~ ~·
~ c) not less · than 75 m. nor more .,

" r ority cross
than225m.
d) not less than 50 m. nor more than ~ ·r
1'::r:Jssroad sign
120m.
· .,. -junction sign
Skewed intersection
,--HIGHWAY E~GU~J-EER-IN~--
• --
- - - - --
WWW w
- ------------ --- 29-j

~ - - -- - - - ---- - - -- -- - - -- - ----------
- - ___,,----- - - -
[ 1:155 - Pr~ble,n: ±-
Problem ]
t1.159
Which of the following sign 11 not a Clearance
sign shall be rectangular In
supplementary sign? shape
which should be in black letters on
white
reflectorlzed background. The size of
a) Advisory sign
the sign
shall not be less than_
I& b) Crossroad sign
c) Playground a)
1000 mm x 500 mm with the long
d) School
axis horizontal
b)
800 x 400 mm with the long axis
horizontal
Q" c)
1500 mm x 600 mm with the long
f 1.156 Problem
axis horizontal
d)
1200 mm x 600 mm with th'e long
Which of the following sign is not an
axis horizontal
intersection or junction sign?
a) Priority cross f 1.160
Problem
b) Crossroad sign
~ c) Advisory sign The low
clearance sign shall be rectangular
d) Skewed intersection in shape
and not less than 1950 tnm x 600
mm in size
with the long axis horizontal. It
shall be
installed on all bridges,
underpasses
and other structures where
~J1_._15_7~_P_ro_b_le_m__~~~-lf · the
vertical clearance above the road
pavement is
__ or less to warn motorist
Sign used only in conjunction with another of the
restricted height of the approach
warning sign to indicate the desirable structures.
Vertical cle;1rance shall be
speed in good weather, traffic and road reckoned
from the highest flood level.
conditions.
a)
5.0 m. c) 5.2 m
~ a) Advisory speed sign ~ b)
4.8 m d) 4.5 m
b) Supplementary speed sign
c) Crossroad speed sign
d) Side road speed sign
f 1.1&1
Problem
The Slow
Down Accident Prone Area or
Bumagal
Madalas ang Aksidente Dito signs
f 1.1 sa Problem shall be
rectangular in shape and not less
than
·
A supplemental sign use to warn the road
~ a) . 1600
mm x 600 mm In size with
users of a hazard on a side road in close
long axis horizontal

proximity ~o the through road.
b)
1200 mm x 600 mm in size with
3) Slmd sign
b) Advisory speed sign c)
c) Siipping road warning sign
d)
~ d) On side road sign
- .. -
1pgw,..,..s3sh111iiil1-
- - - - -- -
probl•"' c~ ·'!!~ . .P.r!!

tl~m. . . ·~
road usersabOut the The
background color should be eaei1y
that inform of destinations on recognizable
by motorist as bet
SI!_"! n and dtstance,,swing or along other appllcable to
the particular category ~
dlr9""o are fo o guide signs
for which it Is used. Whet le
th• rout• th•Y ect their route.
road• that inters the color
combination of Information slant
street name
signs and kilometer P<>lts? '
supplementary signs
a)
Gu/designs
a) White legend on blue background
« b} warning signs
b) White legend on standard green
c) Stack signs
background
d)
~ c)
Black legend on White
background
L J
d) Black legend on yellow background
@s_')roblem ·· ·
-
Class•
'ficatJon of signs
•
Signing series are. .
In the Directional
~·_.P........r___o__b__le_.,.
i.....11:.:..·:..:1..:..66..:..... . ... .
&....._
- ___ ---::J
What is the
color combination oradvance
. • talled in advance of the
I. Those 1~sn direction
signs, intersection and Sr>ecial
1ntersect10 · · direction
signs, and reassurance direction
talled at the Intersection. signs,
Including signs giving direction to
II. Those ins departure from the
111. Those on expressways
from the adjacent ro~d and
intersection. stree.t
system?
IV. Those installed on expressways.
Q> a)
White legend on standard 91'8en
a) 1, II and Ill only
or blue background
1, 111 and IV only
b) White legend on brown background
b)
c) Black legend on yellow background

c) 11, 111 and IV only
d) Black legend on white background.

IW d) All of the above
[i.167
Problem . ~-~ :J
~j1~.1~64:___.:P::.....:r.::.:ob:.:..;le~m_ _ _ _J__. I What is the
color combination of signs
I i~;cllc~ting
roadside service and legends
Which of the following Is not classified as a I
guide sign?
Slack legend on white background

a) Intersection direction signs
b) Street name signs
•· S!ack legend on yellow background
~· White legend on green background

~ c) Supplementary signs
d) Tourist information signs ~ d)
White legend on blue
background
. ...
i ..:;;~~-~Av _E:NGl~_E_(':~~(;_- -~ ----------- - --- --- 3 1 -,
.- ---- ----
- - - --
~8 Problem =J ==
Problem
.
.. J
Classification of guide signs:
When distances are shown
on guide signs,
Advance Direction Sign the following ruin shall
apply:
I. Intersection Direction Sign
11
If1·. Reassurance Direction Sign I. The distance shall
be shown In meters
v.
1 Finger Board Direction Sign for distance up to
999 m
v. street Name Signs 11. The distance shall
be shown In 0.1 km
VI. Town Name and Geographical Feature Increments for
distances from 1 km to
Signs 4.9km
VII. service Signs Ill.. The distance shall
be shown In 0.5 km
VIII. Tourist Information and Tourist Increments for
distances from 5 m. to
Destination Signs 9.5km
IX. Route Markers IV. To the nearest
kilometer for greater
distances
a) I, II, IV, VII and IX only
b) II, Ill, V, VI and VII only a) I, II and
Ill only
c) IV, V, VII, VIII and IX only b) I, Ill and
IV only
~cl) All of the above c) II, Ill and
IV only
~cl) All of the
above
[1.1 &9 Problem

j 1.1i2 Problem
.J
What is the color combination of signs for
tourist interest? Lighting In signs more
than 2 m. high
a) White legend on blue background normally requires
lighting on _
~ b) White legend on brown
a) both sides
only
background
Black legend on green background B" b) both top
and bottom
c)
Black legend on white background c) bottom only
d) top, bottom
and both sides
d)
[1.170 Problem
\ 1.173 Problem
The principal legend on a guide sign
should be limited to the number of words.a Generally roadside
guide signs should be
driver can read and ;n time he can turn his located on the
where a driver
attention from iha mad to the sign. The would expect to see
them.
number of timo2: of legend or destination
names that a g:~ide sign should carry I& a) right side
of the road
should not be; ~ore than - lines of b) left side
of the road
legend or destim~·~lon names. c) at the.top
of the line post
d) at the
bottom of an underpass
a) 4 c) 5
b) 6 ~ d) 3
Aa
L1.17~ H~roblem ==::::;
Dl~on
I
I
l A
type of Advance - ·
Hat dntlnltlons together With ~ns, -.,lcti
!
J
direction arrows and If requF~
names and route markers. 'Id 'otcl
a) Intersection signs
b) Route markers
,-
B' c) Stack signs
d) Diagrammatic signs
s.sm cmin)
I__.1__._1_7 6___ __~_o_b_l,_m
P ___ .....,.~....._
,__ j
Shm1/drr
Traffic /aM
Types of Advance Direction Signs:
I. Stack Signs
11• Gantry Support
II. Diagrammatic signs
Ill. Reflectorized signs

•,
s.sm (min) I 0 .6(mio)
a) II and Ill only
b) I and Ill only

~
c) I and II only
111. Butterfly Support
d) All of the above
3 44 -
3.44 I
I ....
-
r I
l ,..
.
I
·-
1.75m
~[1_._17_7__,__P_ro_b_le_~~-----....~J
I I
r I J
T I
Stack signs shall indicate the following

.
information:
s.sm
I. Destinations together with
appropriate direction arrows

...
~
~~
~I, Road names
\ 1•
,H . Route markers
r · . . '"71
·;\) I and II only

a) I and II only
!)
. )I I and Ill only

b) I and Ill only
!;J II and Ill only
c) II and Ill only
[!.~""' d) All of the above
Q"' d) All of the above
·l·~··;
- - - - -- - --- - - - -- --
---- --- --- 33 \
1~1GHWAY _E~~IN~E-~ING ___
- - -----== - I
[1.111 _ Problem [ ~ .180

Proble_
m
What Is the shape, color and reflectivity of The
vertical sequence of panels of a stack
an advance direction sign? 1lgn1:
ur a) rectangul1r shape, In 1.
Straight ahead arrow - top of sign
renectorfzed white legend and II.
Angled arrow above horizontal arrows
reffectorfzed grien background
Ill.
Alternate panels to have arrows at
b} rectangular in shape, reflectorized
opposite ends of the sign

yellow legend and reflectorized
blue background
c) rectangular in shape, reflectorized
a) I and II only
white legend, and reflectorized blue
I and Ill only
b)
· background
d) rectangular in shape, reflectorized
c) II and Ill only
white legend, and reflecorized ~ d)
All of the above
brown background .
[ 1.179 Problem \
1:181 Problem
Advance direction signs are used in
Other factors which may affect the size of
advance of an intersection to Indicate
letter or sign Include:
destinations along each route leading away
from the intersection, providing prior I.
D\straction due to road side activities
information of the routes ahead by
showing place, names, arrows, symbols II.
Signs composed of short legends
and instructions to indicate directions.
may be enlarged to increase
Advance Direction signs should usually be
conspiculty
erected:
Ill. Signs containing short and long
.legends require a balance of legend

I. . in advance of intersections where two
size to ensure equal visual impact
arterial roads meet or cross; or an N.
The need to emphasize a more
arterial road crossing a feeder road
important direction by making larger
11. in advance of intersections where the
than other names on the sign
arterial road turns .
Ill. on feeder road intersecting arterial
road
a) I. II and Ill only
IV. In advance of intersections where
arterial road may be confused with
II, Ill and IV only
c)
another ro::id

a) I, 1' 1 ~.... i l!( O"''Y
. . . .. · ' .J
b} ~. iii a11d :vonly

c) ll, Ii! a~J IV only
I&' d) All af f1e above
{3 .182 ~roblem J L1~._1_a~
lJ s___
~_ro_b_l_
•_____
m .~
at which Advance Direction
Th• dlttan:be located In advance of an Street name
1lgn1 shall be rectangui.
sign shou rfn according to the shape with
their long axis horizontal. r lrt
lntersectio~aof approaching vehicles. In length of the
1lgn1 should be _ 1'ht
expected ,.,_..Advance Direction signs
rur11I ·~~ed at 8 minimum distance a)
not less than 800 mm or more lhao
shoukf ~Intersection of - If the 95111
1.4 m and vertical dimension
from th • peed (kph) is between 71 - 80
percentile
have a minimum of 250 mm ~Shaff
kph.
sign contains both street name the
house numbers and not less anci

" •} 125-150
150 mm for street signs having ~n
b) 100 - 125
one street name "''~
· c) 75-100
d) 180- 250 b)
not less than 400 mm or more th
1.8 m and vertical dimenSion s ari

/ 1.183 Problem.
have a minimum of 180 mm ff ~II
sign contains both street name a e

Which of the following · standard
house numbers and not less thlld
abbreviation of signs is not correct1
150 mm for street signs haVing ~
•• B' a) EX for exprenway
one street name 00
•1
·-'• / 1.114
c)
d)
b) HWY for highway
RD for road
AVE for avenue
Problem
Q=> c) not
less than 500 mm or lhOft
than 1.2 m and ~em
dimension shall have a minim~/

of
200 mm if the sign contain~
't Street name signs should be located on
both street name and hou-
numbers and not less than
•• posts as near as practical to the

intersection so that they are clearly visible
to both pedestrians and drivers. When. the
signs are erected in the footway, the height d)
150
mm
for street signs having on1y
one
street name
not
less than 600 mm or more than
shall be: 1.2
m and vertical dimension sha~
a) not less than 2.5 m. or more than
have a minimum of 250 mm ff the
3 m. measured to the bottom of the
sign contains both street name and
sign
house numbers and not Jess than
Q> b) not less than 2.2 m. or more than 200
mm for street signs having only
one
street name
3 m. measured to the bottom of
the sign
c) not less than 3 m. or more than
3.5 m. measured to the bottom of
the sign
d) not less than 1.8 m. or more than
2.8 m. measured to the bottom of
the sign .
[_H1~H~~y ~N~1NEE~1NG -, __ .... ~·~ " ,
----- 35- I
---- -~--
-
Problem Ill. beyond all

Intersections and Junctions
a- --S
with Important roads to
Indicate the
Town names signs and names of local correct route number of
the highway
geographical feature signs should be IV. just outside the built-up
area leaving a
expected on: city or town
1. right side of the road V. In rural areas at Intervals
of not more
than 2 km except where
reassurance
11. at the boundary or entrance to a town
signs have been erected
beyond
111. left side of the road
junctions which are
spaced less than
IV. at the entrance and exit to a town
2 km apart
a) I and IV only
VI. In urban areas at
Intervals of not more
than 2 km except where
reassurance
~ b) I and II only signs have been erected
beyond
c) I, II and Ill only junctions which are
spaced less than
. d) 11, Ill and IV only 2 km apart
VII.- at other locations
where reassurance
Is considered to be
desirable
[ 1.187 Problem
a) I, II, Ill, V
and VI only
The national highways could be identified . b) II, Ill, IV and
V only
by the shield of a route marker that has · c) Ill, IV, V and
VI only
black numerals and border on reflectorized B'" cl) All of the above
white background. The size of the shield
for route markers when erected as an
Individual sign on national roads shall be
11.119 Proble.m
a) 350 mm x 400 mm Asian Highway Route Markers
when
b) 360 mm x400 mm erected as an individual
sign, the size of
c) 300 mm x 360 mm the shield on national road
is:
~ d) 310 mm x 360 mm B'" a) 600 mm x 750 mm
b) 600 mm x 800 mm
c) 700 mm x 800 mm
11.188 Pro blem d) 700 mm x 850 mm
The Route Mar~ern should be incorporated

in the sign where advance direction signs 1.190 Problem
-\
are erected at .an intersection or junction.
Other Rcute Mcirke~ ~re located as Asian Highway Route Markers
when
follows: erected as an individual
sign, the size of
the shield on expressways
is:
I. at ail \n~~rs~.tti,o ns and junctions
wn~re mct~rh~ts need to be assured a) . 800 mm x 950 mm
of the route b) 820 mm x 950 mm
II. beyond intersections and junctions ~ c) 720mmx900mm
before which markers have been d) 700 mm x 900 mm
incorporated in the directional signs
~---- -~--- -- - -~--
--- ----- - -
r - -- _____ _ HIGHWAY
ENGINEER'N-c; ~
36
-- ----
~[1~.1!!.9~1~P:..ro
a:;.......b_-1_em .. ......., -------~ ]
......
[1.1.~~ .. ~~bJ,!I" ~
Th• Phtrfpplnes 11 one of the 32 member
Supplemental arrow board . sign~
countries of UN·ESCAP. Al part of our
Installed and shall have black arrcan be
commttment. , Route Markers and legend
and black border on refl..!~ Or
DirectfOnal Signs shall be put along the white
background. -w~
Asian Highway. Our country has been
assigned th• Asian Highway route n.umber The
direction of the arrows on the ·
AH2&. Th• route links major seaports and board
will depend on the r: arr~
cltln In the country comprising mostly of
Intersection geometry. In urban aOICI Or
IntervaIs not more than
reas
the oaang Maharlika which commence
except at
--.L
from Laoag - Manila - Legaspl-Matnog -

reassurance signs have been Ylhere
er.,...~
(Ferry) _ Allen·Tacloban (.O~oc-(Ferry) beyond
junctions, which are •Pacect-·~
Cebu) - Liloan - (Ferry) - Surigao-Davao (· than 2
km apart. 19'a
cagayan de Oro) - General Santos -
Zamboanga. The total length of AH26 is
a) 6 km c) 8 km
about_.
b) 4 km ~ d) 51un
~ a) 3,517km
b) 3,625 km
c) 4,825 km
.__l
1_.~1-.9_4---:......_Pr_o_b
__._ ......le_m
___ =:J
d) 4,675 km Traffic
Instruction sign should not ca
long
messages and where Possible rry
more than _
lines of messages sh no
used.
ould be
f 1.19~ Problem
~ a-
a) 6 c) 3
Supplemental arrow board signs can be
b) 4 Q'> d) 5
installed and shall have black arrows or
legend and black border on reflectorized
white background.
Pr_o_b.. : . .: 1•:. :.:m:. :__~·:J

/_1_.1--=:.!
J,_S_ _
The direction of the arrows on the arrow
board will depend on the road or Major types
of instruction signs used:
intersection geometry. In rural areas, at
Intervals of not exceeding __ except I.
Supplementary signs
where reassurance signs have been II.
Movement instruction signs
e~ed beyond junctions located within Ill.
Hazard marker signs
these limits. IV.
Advance direction signs
a) 12 km and not less than 8 km -·

: ..
; 11, Ill and IV only
i-,
1
!: and Ill only

~ b) 10 km and not /en than 5 km
1,!:
i.
n?( {';
.i .~nd II only
c) 8 km and not less than 4 km .
'-'.
';i, of the above

d) 6 km and not less than 4 km '·'.
[ 1.11& Problem ] [1.~99 ·
Probl;tii . J
The following signs are called One-Way hazard
markers Indicate to the
Supplementary Signs: approaching
driver the direction to be
followed If the
marker apf>*ars In the
I. USE OVERPASS driving path.
They may point to the left or
II. USE PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS right as
appropriate and are used as
Ill. TRUCK USE LOW GEAR follows:
IV. CHECK BRAKES I. · To
delineate an abrupt narrowing of
pavement,
for example, at a lane drop;
a) I, II and Ill only II. At exposed
ends of raised median
b) I, Ill and IV only Islands
where traffic Is required to
c) II, Ill and IV only pass to one
side;
Ill. On central
Island of a roundabout
facing
entering traffic; and
IV. To delineate
the curve approach just
prior to
entering an lntersectl~n.
11.197 Problem
. a) I
and II only
Type of sign used when there Is a . . b) I,
II and Ill only
possibility that through traffic may enter a c) · !I,
Ill and IV only
dead end local road in error. ~ cl) All
of the above
a) DO NOT ENTER
~ b) NO THROUGH ROAD ·11.20Q .
Problem .J
c) ALTERNATE ROUTE
d) ROAD CLOSED Signs used to
guide drivers through a
change in
horizontal alignment of the road.
[ 1.198 Problem Q" a)

Chevron signs
b)
Supplementary signs
c)
Guide post signs
What are the types of Hazard Markers?
d)
Delineators
I. One-Way Hazard Markers
II. Two-Way Hazard Markers
Ill. ·Width Markers j 1.201
Problem
IV. Obstruction Markers
It Is
recommended that the spacing of the
a) I, !; or d if! rr;.:y Chevron signs
should allow the driver to
.: 1.I .,, , ~. 1\. .1 on.y
I see at least _
signs in view while
b)
negotiating the
curve until the change in
c) !I. ~ii a;-cd I\/ only
alignment
eliminates the need for the sign.
~ cl) Alf of the above
a) 5
c) 4
I& b) 3
d) 2
----- -----"==-- ---- ---- -- --- --
HIGHWAY
ENGINE~~-;-------,
f 38
- -- -- - - - - - --- -
-- l\Jc;
[1.202 . ~rob!•m J HI. where any

bridge fess than 2
than the
approach ~pay,,;:·
What are the type• and sizes of Chevron running
portion of the carnagew': Or
IV. where
there Is no shoulder Y
signs? approach
road on tfat
1 HM·1A, 450 mm x 600 mm
· HM·1s, 600 mm x 800 mm a)
II, Ill and IV only
I.1 HM-1C, 500 mm x 800 mm Q' b)
I, II and Ill only
II
I ' HM·1D, 600 mm x 750 mm
IV. c)
f and II only
d)
All of the above
a) II, Ill and IV only
b) 1, II and Ill only
d'" c) I and II only / 1.205
~ Problem
d) All of the above
The size of markers
to be uaect
approaches to road
bridges: at
[ 1.203 Problem J
I. A size - rural
area where h
Markers used where it Is necessary to traffic volume
is less than •rag.30o
delineate an exposed obstruction on a vehicles per
day
traffic island nose at which traffic may pass II. B size - all
other cases
to either side. This sfgn can be used on a 111. C size - where
average traffic is leas
wide column of an overpass structure, or a than 300
vehicles per day
median island separating the carriageway IV. D size - where
average traffic is less
wfth traffic proceeding in the same than 300
vehicles per day
direction.
a)
I only
~ a) Two-Way Hazard Markers b}
II only
c)
Ill only
b) One-Way Hazard Markers
c) Width Markers ~ d)
I and II only
d) Obstruction Markers
J 1.20&
Problem
/ 1.204 Problem
They are used to mark
the edge of the road
Conditions when Width Markers are used formation and assist
the road users by
at approaches to road bridges: indicating the
alignment of the road ahead
espr.:r.rnily at
horizontal and vertical curves.
I. where clearance to bridge curb from
the end of the running lane is less '°:'
~:!ievronsigns
than the shoulder or curb width of the ( ·
t., }
Dbstruction markers
approach road
~ c)
Guide posts
11. where there are non-fragile vertical
d')
Concrete barriers
obstruction less than 600 mm clear
behind the bridge curb
.. as wwwi -= ...
[1~io~. =Pr:,o~~.;j~ _ ~ ~J [1.211 P_roa!i81; .__

Gulde posts should be erected at or near They are made of reflective
materials
the edge of the road formation wtth a capable of reflecting light
ctearty vlslble
uniform distance from the pavement edge. under normal atmospheric
conditions from
The nominal spacing of guideposts on a a distance of 300. - 500
m. when
stralQht section of road shall be wtth Illuminated by the upper beam of a
post in pairs, one on each side of the standard automobile head lamp.
formation.
a) 120 m c) 200 m a) Reflectors
~ b) 150m d) 250 m b) llluminators
~ c) Del/neators
[_1.201 _ Problem -' J d) Barriers
Spacing of guide posts when used in .

~urves, having radius up·to 150 m.
~ =_ . ]
[1.212 Problem
~a) S= 0.3R+5
b} =
S 0.6R + 5 Pavement markings have definite
functions
c) S =0.2R + 5 and limitations:
d) S =0.4R + 5
I. They are subject to traffic
wear and
require proper maintenance;
[ 1.209 Problem II. They may not be clearty
visible if the
road is wet or dusty;
Spacing of guide posts when used in
Ill. They may be obscured by
traffic;
curves having radius over 150 m.
IV. Their effect on skid
resistance
a) S =0.5R requires careful ch~ice of
materials;
I& b) ' S= 0.6R and
c) S =0.3R + 5 V. They cannot be applied on
unsealed
d) =
S 0.5R + 5 roads.
·
~--- · -- -·~~~~l a) I, II and IV only

[ 1.210 __!.~~~~~~-------- b) II, Ill and V only
Small reflecti~e rsanels or buttons mounted c) Ill, IV and V only
on guidepo!)ts or gue1rd fence as an
effective a~d to !t81beate the roadway for ~cl) All of the above
driving at nigh±.
a) Reflectors
b) liluminators
~ c) Delineators
d) Barriers
[1.2~~ ~.,-= f!Oa'!! '1;',!)! 2!J1~]
Problem
What are the four types of pavement and The color of
curb markings for PrOhl
curb markings? of parking.
bttt°"
a) longitudinal lines, transverse lines,
transition lines, and stop lines a)
white c) red
I r b} longitudinal /Ines, transverse B' b}
yellow
d) black
/Ines, other /Ines and other
marldngs .--~-~~~--~~ ~
c) longitudinal ljnes, transverse lines, 1.218 Problem
stop line and center line
d) longitudinal lines, transverse lines,
center line and lane lines The color of
markings of Islands In .
traffic.
11ne Of
a)
white c) red
f ~ .2~4 c~_ l!e»_~!d "!~r 2 011_J 2
q- b)
yellow d) black
Types of Reflectorized Markings:
1. Retro Reflector Raised Pavement
Matters
l_1_._2_19_
_P_r_o_"le....... m..........____·...___=:J
..
11. Hazard markers The color of
markings for bus and PUJ
111. Delineators lanes.
a) II and Ill only a)

white c) red
b) I and Ill only ~ b)
yellow
c) f and II only
d} black
I 1.220
. Problem
f 1_.215 Problem The color of
Keep Intersection Open
markings.
The color of pavement markings is _ .
a)
white c) red
~ a) white c) red
~ b)
yellow d) black
b) black d) blue
rL... ~; .;·,l;.
·!·
~~ :r~.-1~. -~
_u_
···; ·roblem
-~ .. ~ . _ _ _ _
. 1
_..___......:.-.....-J
Problem
The color of pavement markings for an 1~:·r'

1:>u~(:r .rA No Loading/Unloading Zone
unbroken portion of no-passing lines.
a) white c) red a)
white ~ c) red
~ b) yellow d) black b)
yellow d) black
r__ ~r?H~~~~E-N~~N~~~~l~G------------ -----
------=~41_- i
-- - - - ------
~, ]
( f.222 . _'9_rol;i;m [1.22~ ;. P~ble.;,
The color of Fire Lane Zone markings. A type of line that Is
used where crossing
of the line Is either •
discouraged or
a) white q- c} red prohibited. It Is
generally used to replace or
b) yellow d) black supplement a broken line
where required
e.g. barrier lines, and
center lines. It may
be either yellow or white
depending
1..1.22_3 Problem whether or not crossing
the llne Is legally
• - art
prohibited.
The width of solid or broken lines used as
a) broken lines
pavement markers.
w b) so/Id
unbroken /Ines
Q" a) varies from 100 mm to 300 mm c) lane line
b) varies from 150 mm to 300 mm d) straight line
c) varies from 100 mm to 200 mm
d) varies from 150 mm to 200 mm
[ 1.227 Problem
""*
l
!1.224 Problem Means any traffic control
device marked on
the surface of the
carriageway used to
, Color used in hazard markers to warn road regulate traffic or to
warn or guide road
users at locations where the protruding users.
objects such as bridge, piers, traffic
signals and other permanent objects on or a) Chevron signs
near the roadway. b) Delineators
c) Lane Line
a) white c) red Q" cl) Road Markers
b) yellow ~cl) black
""""
11.221 Problem .
]
! 1.22s Problem
Shall mean any public
thoroughfare, public
A type of line that consist of line segments boulevard, and avenue, but
shall not
with equal lengths separated by uniform include roadway upon
grounds owned by
gaps. The speed of vehicles on the section private persons, colleges,
universities, or
of road or :n tile are in question should be other similar
institutions.
taken Joto ~CC!)Unt in determining the
lengths c1i the line strokes and of gaps Q" a} Highway
between them. b) Expressway
c) Carriageway
~a) broken /Ines d) Intersection
b) solid unbroken lines
c) solid line
d) straight line
- -
- ----~-- =-----~--H1GH~~~-~~GINE~~~~ -
/4 2 --- -- -- ---- --- --=-~- -- -
~
Pi;!!,b18m .: : ;:::i
B~211! )roJtr•~ . . .. . J [jA ~~!,..
center line may be marked on an
u~
Means any level cro11~, junction, or rural road If one or more of
the follo~ I\
Including open areas foi'med by such conditions are met:
. "9
crossroad. 1. Two lane road (greater than
6 rn
width) carrying an AnRual
Avera 1"
a)
b)
Lane
Expressway Dally Traffic (ADT) In
excess of 1ot
c) Interchange vehicles
11. Two lane road (less than 6
mbut !l'Ore
~ d) Intersection
than 5 m In width) carrying
an ADT
excess of 300 vehicles
1I\
111. Winding roads with widths
of s rn or
( 1.230 Problem more.
IV. Two lane roads greater than
10 rn.
width
1I\
Max. speed limit for urban roads.
a) 80 kph ~ c) 60kph ~a) I, II and Ill only

b) 90 kph d) 75 kph b) I, Ill and IV only
c) II, Ill and IV
only
d) All of the above
11.231 Problem =tr
l1-1_.2_3_4~__ P_ro_b_le_m. ... .

. .,. _----~~::J
t S;- • -
Max. speed limit for rural roads.

If the bridge is 5 m. or more
be~
a)
b}
50 kph
30 kph
~ c)
d)
60kph
70 kph
curves, center line marks shall
be '
a)
-·
discontinued
across the bridge
~ b) continued across
the bridge
c) discontinued 30 m.
fro!Jl the bridge
j 1.2_3 2 · Problem abutments
d) discontinued 25 m.
from the bridge
It is used to separate opposite traffic abutments
movements of an undivided roadway and is
generally placed centrally on all roads and
bridges 6.0 m or more in width. Under
some circumstances this line may be ! 1~~~ -P_.r_o_b_le_m~--2 -~~-
~=~J
placed off-center (e.g., where an extra If tnP. br,idge is less, than 5
m. between
uphill traffic lane is provid~ or parking on curbs. Cft11t2r line marks shall
be
one side of the road only) .
~·
:·:: .; ·,,r ontinued

across the bridge
a) Edge line ·:;~ i-· :·ntmued
across the bridge
b) Barrier line ~ c} discontinued
30 m. from the
c) ConUnuity line
bridge
abutments
~ dJ Center line d) discontinued
25 m. from the bridge
abutments
HIGHWAY EN-~~EERIN; - - - - -- - - - - - -
- - -43 l
.-- - - -- ---- - - - - -~-----
- --
.. ]
The center line on a two-lane two-way rural Lane lines must not be
continued ·On the
road or any other road where the 85'h following cases:
percentile speed (or speed llmlt) Is greater
than 60 kph, shall be a broken line, with a I. Across slgnallzed
Intersections.
minimum width of 150 mm and 3 m. long However, lane llnes
of low priority
with gaps of_ spacing. road must be
discontinued at the
Intersection.
~a) 9m c) 6m II. Across side street
entrances unless
b) 8m d) 10 m the street Is one-way
street (going In
only)
Ill. Past the start of the
taper at which a
I1.237 Problem
multi-lane road
narrows down
IV. At approaches to
widened or
signalized
Intersection
A line used to sepaFate adjacent lanes of V. On divided roads
traffic moving In the same direction.
a) I, II and IV
only
~a) Lane line ~ b) I, II and Ill
only
b) Transition line c) II, Ill and V
only
c) Transverse line d) All of the above
d) Continu_ity line
11.238 Problem 11.241 Problem.
Lane lines on roads with 85th percentile As a guide, lane lines

should be used in the
speed (or speed limit) of 60 kph or less following cases:
shall have a minimum width of 150 mm and
3 m. long with _ gaps. I. Where the road is
wide enough for
two or more lanes of
traffic in one
IT-W c} 6m direction with a two
way annual
a) 9m
average daily traffic
(AADT) of 8000 or
b) 8m d) 10 m
more (depending on
whether parking
- ----·-- - - --- - is permitted)
II. At approaches to
widened or
11.239___ ~~~.;~~~~-~~~-~~~~ signalized
intersection
Ill. On divided roads
Lane lines er. rtids with 85th percentile IV. Across signalized
intersections
speed (or Slpe-ed iirn~t) i~ excess of 60 kph
shall be 150 mm wide, 3 m. long and _ I& a) I, II and Ill
only .
gaps. b) I, Ill and IV
only
c) !I, Ill and IV
only
~a) 9m c) 6m d) All of the above
b) 8m d) 10 m
1.245 Problem
The following are the cases
Where bah! ·
Lane llnn which lndlcatn that overtaking lines should be used:
~~,.._
from both direction• of the road are
prohibited. However, cros• movements are 1. Al center lines on
approach
permitted. Vehtcln muat always keep to algnallzed Intersections
" to
the right of the double yellow Hnn. II. Al center llne1 of
multJ.lane
where overtaking must be
Prohi~
a) Double white line with a broken because of sign
restrictions -~
yellow line Ill. 'No-Passing' zones where
there
Single yellow line with a broken
11
b) restricted sight distance
due •
white line horizontal or vertical
curves, or bottito
c) Double unbroken yellow line IV. Al center lines on
approaches
Q' d) SlngM unbroken yellow tine railway crossings
to
b) I, Ill and IV
only
( 1.243 Problem c) II, Ill and IV
only
ltS' d) All of the above
Barrier lines may consist of either:
I.
II.
Two unbroken yellow lines
Single unbroken yellow line
j 1.246 Problem
. . =::J
Ill.Single yellow line with a broken white Markings to 'No-Passing' Zones
are appUeci
line . to:
IV. Single white line with a broken yellow I. Vertical and horizontal
curves on a
line two-lane sealed road
II. Barrier lines shall not be
marked
· ~ •) I, II and Ill only unless the sight distance
available
b) I, Ill and IV only falls bel9V1 the appropriate
minimum
c) !I, Ill and IV only sight distance for at least
the length
d) All of the above allowed
Ill. If the length of road, with
sight
distance below the minimum
sight
distance, is less than the
minlinUm
Problem
F length of barrier line
allowed.
IV. Where the distance between
the end
Lane lines which indicates that overtaking of one bm fier line and the
beginning
from both directions of the road and all of the next barrier line
restricting
crossing movements are prohibited. tr21v11i·, :~~'.:' i ' l
t.raf1same direction is less
ttic'ln !..-::~·1• ::illowed
for roads and
a) Single white line with a broken h !gf~~;-jl~K',;
yellow line ·
b) Single yellow line with a broken a) !. !~ and Ill only
white line b) !, II and IV only
~ c) Double unbroken yellow line c) !I, Ill and IV
only
d) Single unbroken yellow line ltS' d) All of the above
:1
: ]
Lines used to delineate the edge of the The
recommended width of edge lines for
traveled way to distinguish It from the rural
roads with outer lane Width of 3.5 m.
shoulder area. It should be a solid white
llne between 100 mm and 200 mm wide. Q> a)
100mm c) 300mm
b)
200 mm d) 50 mm
a) Transition lines
B' b) Edge lines
c)
d)
Transverse lines
Continuity lines
[ 1.251
Problem -~
The
recommended width of edge llnes for
expressway
with outer lane width of 4 m.
[ 1.248 _ Problem
a)
100 mm Q> c] 300mm
The purpose of Installing edge lines is b)
200 mm d) 50 mm
generally based on the following:
I. to discourage travel on road

shoulders ! 1.252
Problem .l
II. to make driving safer and more
assured, particularly at night and The road
curb for No Parking Zones shall
during inclement weather by be
painted __
providing a continuous guide for the
driver a)
white I& c) yellow
Ill. to act as a guide past objects, which b)
blue d) red
are close to the edge of pavement and
which constitute a hazard
;s:::tl ;x:
IV. to prevent parking at or near . \ 1.253

Problem
intersections
Lines
used to Indicate the portion of a
carriageway assigned to through traffic. It
b) I, Ill and !V only is
intended to be ·crossed by traffic turning
c) !I, Ill and IV only a an
intersection, or entering or leaving an
~ d) All of the above auxiliary
lane at its start or finish.
--- - ~- -··------ --~·· 4- - - - -- - - -- - - -
a)
Transition line
---·--· -.·-··....·-·- --:i
-------""'7'"·~-.--;:- -~-·-,
b)
Lane line
__
I 1.249 --~~~~~~~~~m.:_. ---··-~-----·-~j c)
Transverse line
~ d)
Continuity line
The recommended width of edge lines for
urban road with outer lane width of 3.5 m.
~a) 100mm c) 300 mm

b) 200mm d) 50 mm
~6 ...,p .,., __,, . .
Hl~HWA-; E~G~~~E-R;~-; ----0-
- - - ----
- - - -- - - -
--
_r1_·._2_54
_ _ P_
io:..:b:.::.•~em::.::__..........._ __
J
Lines used to guide traffic safely past
Stop linn may be supplemented by WOrd
obstructions on roadways such as Islands,
"Stop" marked on the carriageway. The
median strips, bridge piers or Indicate
distance between the word STOP and the
changes In the width of the traveled portion
stop line should be between_ .
of the roadway and an Increase or
redudlon In traffic lanes.
a) 12m to30 m
b) 8mto15 m
~ 11) Transition lines ~
c) 10mto25.m
b) Lane lines
d) 12 mto 25 m
c) Transverse lines
d) Stop lines
~{_
1._2~5-~~-P_ro~b_l_e~m____......_......._J
l 1.25~ Problem
Types
of Pedestrian Crossings
Transverse lines may be classified Into the
following types: I.
Zebra
If.
Crosswalk
I. Stop lines
Ill.
Giveaway
II. Give Way lines
Ill. Pedestrian Crossing Markings IV.
Transition Crossings
IV. Roundabout Holding lines
~ a)
I and II only
b) I, II and Ill only
c) H, Ill and IV only
d) All of the above
/ 1.256 Problem
If a stop sign is used in conjunction with

the stop sign (P·1), it should generally be The
':II~-'";\~ r,~-:,i f;·" 3
zebra (non-signalized
placed in fine with the Stop sign. The stop cros~,
·nr:: r:\.,~s;~ts of a series of
sign should be placed at what distance
longiwdfr1Jl C.J1~ ZOO mm or 600 mm wtde
from the nearest pedestrian crossing line? and
generaUy not less than __ long.
a) 4m ~a)
4m
~ b) 3m
b) Sm
c) 2m
c) 3m
d) 1 m
d) 6m
,- -~_ l_G~~~y EN_G~':'l_E!:_R_IN~ · .
47
- ---
J
Crosswalks are defined by a pair of solid To ensure that the
flow of turning traffic Is
white lines across the road surface with a not Impaired,
parking near Intersections
distance between the llne which Is _ . should be
prohibited within the distance of
_ from the
boundaries of lateral roads
a) not less than 3 m. but not more for parallel
parking.
than 6 m.
~ b) not less than 4 m. but not more a) 3 m.
on both approach and exit
than 8 m.
sides
c) not less than 5 m. but not more b) 6 m.
than 8 m.
sides
d) not less than 4 m. but not more c) 4 m.
than 6 m.
sides
~ d) 5 m.
sides
/ 1.261 Problem
Lines used to guide vehicles through a
turning movement at intersections. It, if j 1.264
Problem
used, should be designed as to indicate the
proper course for turning vehicles without To ensure that the
being needlessly confusing to through not impaired,
parking near intersections
traffic or the traffic making other turns. should be
prohibited within the distance of
from tbe
boundaries of lateral roads
a) Holding lines for an angle
parking.
b) Roundabout holding lines
c) Lane tines a) 8 m.
on the approach side and 6 m.
on
the exit side
~ d) Turn lines
b) 10 m
on the approach side and 8
- - -- --- .. - ··--- - - -- - - - m.
on the exit side
~ c) 12 m
on the approach side and
9 m.
on the exit side
d) 6 m.
on the approach side and 4 m.
Types of parking bays on
the exit side
I. Parallel parking
=
II. Angle parking j 1.21s
Problem
Ill. Double parking
IV. Curb parking
To ensure that the
not impaired, no
parking Is allowed within a
~a) /and I/only minimum distance
of _ from the traffic
b) I, II and Ill only signal post.
c) !I, Ill and IVonl~
d) All of,.the above a) 15 m
c) 10m
I ~ b) 20m
d) Sm
/~_8 ·~- 1·· ··""'"'""·":. .~. ~~HIGHWAY ENGl~EERING -
,,....
-- - - - -
- - - - - -~ - - - - - ~-
j 1.2&& Problem J [..._1~·-

2.,__.
. i:,_9.~_
P_ro_b_le_m
_ ____.._
.. _ .. ___ J
Painted median Islands are used on wide Markings which are
placed on sealed
roads where light traffic volume cannot shoulders or other
sealed portion of the
justify the Installation of solid curbed road where traffic Is
not desired. Such
median island. markings are of the same
bar width as
The painted outline of the median shall be other diagonal markings.
The spacing
at least 100 mm wide with a minimum between bars is
generally 6 m.
median width of 2 . No painted median
should be Installed on roads less than a)
Pedestrian crossing markings
wide. ~ b)
Diagonal marlrings
c)
Chevron markings
a) 12 m c) 16 m d)
Zebra
b) 15 m ~ d) 10m
/ 1.267 Problem
/ 1.270 CE Board Nov.
2~1~ J
Is a type of
thermoplastic lane marking
The Bus and PUJ lane line is an unbroken designed to aid and
provide motorist with
yellow line 150·300 mm wide used to visual, audio and motion
warnings on the .
separate other vehicles from buses and road.
PUJs. The BUS and PUJ lane line can be
supplemented by raised pavement markers ®'' a)
Rumble strips
on concrete pavements. The line is tapered b)
Chevron markings
at the approach to the signali1u~d C)
Painted median
intersection. The distance betwetm the =11
Diagonal markings
taper and the stop line shouid bf:
determined according to the capacity of ~0'~ - --
·-·----·~-------
intersection and should generally be lest~ .._ .. - .. - ·-- - ·- - -

' ™ ""'*'"'""""I
than -~ ,..ZJ''"~ CE
Board 1
May 2016
~...... -·-- . .. ...
.
_., .
. ~ •. _. '
I& a) 100mm c) 200mm

b) 120 mm d) 150 mm · Messages when painted on
pavement
should be limited to _
words or less.
a) 5m
c) 6m
I" 1.268 Problem
b) 4m
11'.r d) 3m
Markings that are often used to guide
traffic into the right turning lanes separated
by an island, such as a comer island at a
signalized intersection.
/ 1.2-/2
CE Board Mayzo:I[
The color of Messages when
painted on
a) Pedestrian crossing markings pavements.
b) Diagonal markings
~ c) Chevron markings q:. a)
c) red
white
. d) Zebra
d) yellow
b)
black
-= =
[ 1.27'.3 Problem
E!£!
l[1.27a Problem
==== J,
Length of letters or numerals used on
Messages painted on pavement In urban Small devices which are
fixed to the
areas. concrete pavement surface
to stimulate or
supplement painted pavement
markings.
a) 2m Q> c) 2.5m
b) 3m d) 3.Sm ~a) Raised pavement
markings
b) Rumble strips
[ 1.274 Problem c) Zebra
d) Chevron markings
Lengths of letters or numerals used on
messages painted on pavement on high·
speed highways.
11.279 Problem
a) 3m c) 6m
b) 4m Q> . d) 5m Hazard markers either as
signs or painted
markings are to be used on
objects 10
close to the edge of the
roadway as to
I 1.275 Problem constitute definite hazard.
These include
such encroachments as
underpass piers,
Lengths of pavement arrows used for lane
abutments, culverts
headwalls, utility poles
use control on high-speed roads.
and ornamental buildings.
a) 6m c) 6.5 m Other adjacent objects which
are not likely
~ b) 7.5 m d) 5.5 m to be hit unless a vehicle
runs off the road,
- - -- - -- - - - - - -- - such as guardrails, trees
and rocks must
be painted _ _
/ 1 ~~~?~· Problem
a) reflectorized
silver
Length of pavement arrow used for lane b) reflectorized
yellow
use control on urban roads. c) reflectorized red
a) 6m c) 7.m ~cl) reffectorized
white
~ b} Sm d) 4m
1 :a:::;;::=
~ . .I
j 1.277 Problem ] Problem
...
Obstructions in the roadway, If not Type of raised pavement
markers placed
illuminated shall be marked with on undivided roadway.
reflectorized hazard markers.
For additional emphasis, it Is advisable a) Yellow raised
also to mark obstructions other than b) White raised
islands with reflectorized white paint with c) Single faced
no less than _ alternating reflectorlzed ~cl) Double faced
black and white stripes.
a) 6m c) 3m
q- b) Sm d) 4m
[so
-- ·- -
.,.....~, ,..-,.,."'. .. . .~.----. . . · -
~HIGHWA-~E~Gl~~~R~G--
- - - ·- - - -- - -- - -- . - ;;;;;:,__
" ]
$
Pr~blem
t% ·er· , .,]
Type of raised pavement markers placed
Markers supplementing center or lane lines
on divided roadways.
may be placed In the gaps mid-way
between the line segments at a spacing Of

a) Yellow raised
_ where fog or heavy rain occurs in the
b) White raised
built-up areas.
B' c) Single faced
a) 12m c) 6m
. d) Double faced
Q" b) 9m d) 8m
!1.2a2 Problem
Because of the high cost of Installation and I
1.285 Problem
maintenance, use of raised pavement
markers may be considered on the
Markers supplementing center or lane lines
following condition:
may be placed in gaps midway between the
line s~ments at a spacing of _ If these

I. In hilly areas where fog and rain are
is less likelihood of fog and where there Is
frequently the causes of traffic
no street lighting in the rural environment
accidents
II. In winding roads and accident-prone
a) 10 m Q' c) 12m
areas
b) 9m d) 15m
Ill. In overpass or underpass
Q" a)
b)
land II only
I and Ill only
[
1.286 Problem ]
c) !I and Ill only
Signs has its own numberipg system such
d) All of the above
as R2-7A{L). What does this sign denotes? '
-- -- --- - .......
a) It denotes a special traffic
· ._2_
l.__1_ 8_3 __
P_ro
_b_l_e_m__ . . ___ ..
instruction sign in the Direction
Type - R2 and the seventh in the

Reflective markers placed at r~11ul?r
series,·the smallest available and is
intervals in gaps along a tine msy he1p to
left hand version.

define the line particularly at night er undc::r
b} It denotes a warning sign in the

foggy or wet conditions.
Direction Type - R2 and the

The lines usually treated in this manner
seventh in the series, the smallest

are:
available and is left hand version.

I. Center lines
c) It denotes a guide sign in the
II. Edge lines
Direction Type - R2 and the
Ill. Tum lines
seventh in the series, the smalleSt
IV. Giveaway lines
available and is left hand version.
It denotes a regulatory sign In ~

~ •} J and II only
the Direction Type • R2 and t1tt j
b) I, II and_Ill only
seventh in the series, dtt I
c) !I, Ill and IV only .
smallest available ind Is ltft 1
d) All of the above
hand vwslon. J
[t .287 Problem .1 t 1.2ai Problem
standard road signs fall Into different The figure shown Is a type of
freeway
categories: Interchanges known as:
1. those for which ' a complete graphic
design is preset, or substantially
preset
11. those which are "made to measure"
111. those which conform to the graphic
design
IV. those which Include regulatory and
warning signs
~ a) I and II only ~ a) tor trumpet

b) I, II and Ill only b) partial clover leaf
c) !I, Ill and IV only c) diamond interchanges
All of the above
d) trumpet interchanges
d)
( 1·. 290 .Problem
4
The figure shown Is a type of
freeway
The figur~ shown is a type of freeway
intercha~i.WS
known as:
....
interchanges known as:
'
Q" a) clover leaf .

c) diamond interchanges a) clover leaf
d) trumpet interchanges ~ b) partial cloverleaf
c) diamond.interchanges
-
HWAY ENGINEERING
- - - - - -- - -------- --
-- -- --- -
l 1_.29~ .· . Problem I f 1.293 _ Problem

t ---
The figure shown Is a type of

freeway
Interchanges known as:
a) y-interchange
b) directional
c) trumpet
interchanges
~ d) flyover with round-
about
Q" a) diamond
b) clover leaf
c) partial cloverleaf
J 1~294 Probiem
The figure shown is a type of

freeway
/ 1.292 Problem interchanges known as:
· .
The figure shown is a type of freaway

interchanges known as:
Q> a) directional
a) directional b) ' y-interchange
q:. b) Y·interchange c) flyover with round-about
c) flyover with round-about d) trumpet interchanges
-
- H~~- HWAY ENGINEE~ING________
--53]
.- - -- - --- --~---- - -
; ™
1
.I
a s
Problem [~.297
Problem
The figure shown Is a type of grade The figure shown
is a type of 4-leg
Intersection known as: Intersection
known as:
-
. . .nr
5 ;. ...._
·J
~l!l~
,·:--lifI --=~=
--
WWW
- ----
,j//!- " -----
a) channelized
b) flared q:- a)
Unchannellzed .
B' c) multileg intersection b)
Flared
c)
channelized
d) rotary intersection d)
Multileg intersection
f 1.29!__ Problem ,I ( _1.298

Problem
The figure~ shown is a type of grade The figure shown

is a type of 4-leg
interscctlon known as: intersection
known as:
_j\L
-----
l1r
------
™ x •
JI t · -.
a) channelized
___AIL_______
-----
- - ---
b) flared
~ c)
d)
rotary intersection (roundabout)
multileg intersection
llf
a)
Unchannelized
b)
Flared
~ c)
channelized
d)
Multileg interseetion
I I
... " .... >
.
[ 1.299 Problem I Problema
trA
- . _, ]
The figure shown Is a type of 4-leg The figure shown Is a type of
3·1eg
intersection known as: intersection known as:
~:L -- -- -- -- - -
-
a) Y with turning roadways

b) Flared T
~. c) Unchannelized T
d) Unchannelized Y
a) · Unchannelized
j 1.302 Problem
~ b) Flared
c) channelized The figure shown is a type of 3-leg
d) Multileg intersection intersection known as:
.. . . ... . .!.~
f 1.300 Problem
~ b)
•
The figure shown is a type of 3-leg Flared T
intersection known as: c) Unchannelized T
d) Unchannelized Y
. ·- ·-- ----- -- - -- - --
··· --- ··· ~ -·~------~-----~~
LJ~
~ ~~~~-~-
P_r_o_b_l_e_rn_________·~··--~J
The figure shown is a type of 3-leg
intersection known as:

b) Flared T
c) Unchannelized T
~ · d) Unchannellzed y
Q> a) Twith turning roadways
b) Unchannelized T
c) Unchannelized Y
d) Y with turning roadways
II
I'
~
I
.......
l '
--- -
~HIGHWAY _E_~GINEERING
~-
[f 304 = Pro~lem = ~ ] f 1.308 Problem

The figure shown Is a type of 3-leg No parking is atraffic
sign classified under
Intersection known as:
No
Parking
a) T with turning roadways
b) Unchanrielized T
q:o a) Regulatory or
mandatory signs
c) Unchannelized Y
b) informatory
signs
~ cl) Y with turning roadways c) warning or
cautionary signs
d) warning ~r
mandatory signs ·
f 1.305 Problem
f 1.307 Problem
A highway intersection particularty
adopted to toll road connecting where the
toll can be collected from both ingoing and Speed limit Is a traffic
sign classified under
outbound traffic at the stem of the
interchange.
Q'> a) Regulatory or
mandatory signs
b) Informatory signs
c) Warning or
cautionary signs
a) multileg intersection d) Warning or
mandatory signs
b) Trumpet intersection
c) rotary intetsection
d) Orthotropic bridge
[s-6
~-~-
. . -.- . .· HIGHWAY E -NGINEERING
-- -- -- ~ -- -
-- - -- --
.J . :~
L..[1.:w .3_1_0___
P_r_o_b_le_m
____ :J
A type of Interchange which provides for Parking sign is a traffic
sign claaalflect
transfer of traffic from one road to another under
cross Ing it but with a reduced speed Is
known as:
Parking
I& a) Informatory signs

b) Regulatory or
mandatory signs
c) warning or
cautionary signs
a) trumpet interchange
d) warning or
mandatory signs
b) rotary flyover
~ c) Diamond interchange
d) directional interchange
j 1.311 Problem
End of freeway.. is a
traffic sign classified
I 1.309 Problem under.
A type of interchange which is sometimes

called a high speed interchange is known
as
~ a) informatory and
guiding signs
b) regulatory or
mandatory signs
c) warning or
cautionary signs
a) diamond interchange d) warning and
reguiatory signs
b) trumpet
c) y-type interchange
w d) cloverleaf
----- --
--
, _~~c_;~WAY E_N_Gl_~EE~N~
,
. Problem f.
1 [f.31~: Problem
one way is a traffic sign classified under An Interchange with inner
loops and outer
connections.
One Way
Cloverleaf
d" a) Informatory and guiding signs

a) trumpet
b) regulatory and mandatory signs
~ b) cloverleaf
c) warning or cautionary signs
c) diamond
interchange
d) warning or regulatory signs d) rotary
interchange
f 1.315 Problem
~ ·l
f 1.313 Problem
An interchange with a single
one-way.
An at-grade intersection in which there is ramp in each quadrant of a
shape and
division or regulation of conflicting position to provide easy
exit from and
movements irito definite paths of travel by entrance to the major
highway and to
the use of pavement markings, raised confine necessary left turns
at grade to the
islands, or i::-Uwr suitable means to minor highway or crossroad.
facilitate the sMe rmd orderly movement of
vehicles and pedestrian.
_j/L
----- -- -- - -
ll(
Four leg channelized
type intersections
Qianwnd Interchange
a) interchange
Q'" b) Channelized intersection a) trumpet
c) intersection roadway b) clover leaf
d) highway or grade separa!ion ~ c) dlatriond
Interchange
d) rotarY interchange
[ 1.316 Problem J
c a --·
A system of Inter connecting roadways in An

interchange with one or more highway
conjunction with one or more highway
separations and direct connections for the
separations providing for the inter change
major turning movements.
of traffic between two or more Intersecting
highways, usually without at grade
crossing of through and major turning
movements.
Y· Type Interchange
a) trumpet
b) clover-leaf
~a) interchange ~
c) directional interchange
b) multileg intersection
d) diamond interchange
c) channelized intersection
d) rotary intersection
11.31_7 Problem
An at-grade intersection in which the

number of traffic lanes or the pavement
width exceeds the normal number of lanes
· or the normal width of the approach
roadways.
....
_. ·----'""'
--------
----
---=
Jl
-..-...-... ;.+=-:
...-:=
........
....-...--
...-........ ._-,_
-··················1··r················.·····-
a) unchannelized intersection
a) skyway
~ b)
b) overpass
Flared intersection
c) interchange
d) multileg intersection w
d) freeway
[1.320 Problem
[1.322_ _ Problem I
An area within a roadway or between
roadway$ from which vehicular traffic is An at-grade intersection operating
with
Intended to be excluded. one-way traffic counterclockwise
around a·.
central area, circular or elliptical
In shape,
or sufficient size to produce
weaving
maneuvers In Heu of direct crossing
between the various movements.
a) median
~ b) island
c) outer separation ~ ·a) rotary Intersection
d) undercrossing b) multileg intersection
d) unchannelized
intersection
f 1.321 Problem
11.323 Problem
I
The figure shown is a type of fully
An intersection with five or more approa~h directional interchange which is
commonly
roadways. known as:
·VL
---~
l:
a) clover leaf
~ c) multiple Intersection ~a) three /eve/
directional
diamond interchange Interchange
d)
b) four level directional
interchange
c) two level directional
interchange •
d) level directional
interchange
H~GHWAY ENGINEE~~~G
- -- ~ - -- - - -
--- -
f 1 ~324 = Pr~blem .J [ 1 .~27 . Problem

The figure shown Is a type
of a highway
The figure shown is a type of highway Interchange at grade which
Is commonly
interchange at grade whic.h is commonly
known as: known as:
I
~lL
I
~ .a) Unchannellzed- T
I ~~·~
=------
- -- --
- -
b) Flared-T
c) T-with turning roadway a)
Unchannelized-T
d) Channelized-T b) Flared-T
~ c) T-wlth
turning roadway
-, d) . Channelized-T
f 1.325 Problem
The figure shown is a type of a highway
interchange at grade which is commonly
j 1.328 Problem
- t
~ : ~
known as: The figure shown Is a type

of a freeway
entrance which is commonly
known as:
-L 30m
a) Unchannelized-T
b) Flared-T a) taper type
entrance
b) channelized
entrance
~ c) T-with turning roadway ,v:..
~
unchannelized
entrance
d) Channelized-T
n.w d) parallel type
entrance
I.1.326 Problem 11.329 Problem
.~ . J
. ill
The figure shown Is a type of a highway The figure shown is a type

of a freeway
interchange at grade which is commonly entrance which is commonly
known as:
known as:
~•• m••• • •J·'·-~

- -- ------ -- -- --
a) Unchannelized-T ~a) taper type
entrance
~ b) Flared-T b) channelized
entrance
c) T-with turning roadway c) unchannelized
entrance
d) Channelized-T d) parallel type
entrance
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
---~ - - - - ---~--
. 61
$± •
[1.330_ Proble~ 1._33~ ~
lE
.,._ -•
[ Problem
d
The figure shown Is a type of a freeway exit

The traffic sign shown
Indicates:
which is commonly known as:
--
~ - - - - - ----- - -
Cs.~ :1:----~~
a) taper type freeway exit
b) channelized freeway exit a) right tum
only
c) unchannelized freeway exit Q" b) no right tum
~ d) parallel type freeway exit c) no u tum
d) no entry for
all vehicles
( 1.331 Problem
f 1.334 · Problem
The traffic · signs shown Indicates the
following prohibitions: The traffic sign shown lnd_
lcates:
a) no stopping B" a) no overtaking

for vehicles whose
b} no overtaking for trucks weight exceeds
3.51
('; no entry to all vehicles b) n.o entry for
cars and buses
~ ,J) prohibited to for trucks c) no parking for
cars and trucks
d) prohibited to
cars and trucks
Problem
11.33~. ~roblem
. -
..
The traffic sign shown Indicates the
The traffic sign shown indicates:
following:
a) pedestrians only Q> a) prohibited to

all motor vehicles
b} pedestrian crossing b) no parking to
all motor vehiclef?
c) walk signal c) no stopping to
all motor vehicles
d) no overtaking
to all motor vehicles
~ d) prohibited to pedestrians
...... •ex •--- aw . w.w .. ap

•~ rwwww
.... ,_..,_ HIGHWAY
ENGINEERING
-- - -- --
- ------ ~- - ----
-~
[ 1.~38 Problem Lt
~.:.; ;·. ;. 3 .:-.9-~_P...ro_b_l__
em_, -----:J
The traffic sign shown Indicates: The traffic
sign shown Indicates:
~ a) prohibited to animal drawn W

a) End of prohibition limiting
vehicle
weight greater than 3.5 Tons
b) animal drawn vehicles ahead
b) no entry to all cars and trucks
c) slow .down, animal drawn vehicles
c) no stopping to all cars and trucks
ahead
d) no overtaking for all cars and trucks
d) animal drawn vehicles crossing thru
street
I 1.•340
Problem ?%
_]
-j 1.337 Problem
a) parking area for buses only
'
h' I no entry for buses

a) no entry
~) Bus stop
~,
b) no stopping
r-') end of reserved lane for buses

W c) end of all indicates prohibition
' '
1 · - - -- - - - - -- - -
d) end of speed limit .... - · - a.,1..

--... ~ •. ---.-------~.......=~~
L.:·!.:~~.:~.
~..!:_o_b_l_e_m_____....._]
I 1.338 Problem
1l;~
traffic sign shown indicates:
a)
drive slow
a) min. speed limit b)
no blowing of horns
b) max. speed limn c)
noise prohibition
~ c) end of speed limit W · d)
end of prohibition using audible
d) distance to the next municipality
warning signal
- w··=·
'"--~------~-==----~--------- a" fY)
liVRQMjph . . -
SL Al
[1.342 Problem [ 1.344

Problem n J
The traffic sign shown Indicates:
The traffic
a) use right lane only

~a)
obligation to continue straight
~ b) obligation to follow the right
ahead
direction b)
continue straight at your own rist
c) obligation to tum right c) no
traffic straight ahead
d) obligation to tum the obstac(e by its d) dead
and straight ahead ·
right side
[ 1.343 Problem I1.345

Problem
.t
The traffic sign shown indi~ates: · The traffic

sign shown indicates:
a) use left lane only ·a)

obligation to follow the · right
direction
~ b) obligation to follow the left
direction ~ b)
obligation to turn right
c) fast moving vehicles use left lane c) no

right tum ~n stop signal
d) obligation to tum the obstacle by its d) · right
tum at your own rist
left side.
[_~~4 . .
. HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
--- - - - - - --- - - -- - - . --
- :---.
I f 1.349 t
Problem
ft a
, t k
a) u tum to the right

a) right tum then go straight ahead
b) obligation to tum around
b) no right tum straight ahead
q:. c) obligation to tum the obstacle by
Q" c} obligation to go straight ahead
Its right side
or to tum right
d} obligation to follow the right
d) go straight ahead then tum right on
direction
the next comer
- ~
f 1.347 . . Problem
f 1.350 Problem
ts .....

a) u-tum to the left

~a) bbllgatlon to go straight or to
b} obligation to tum around
turn left
~ c) obligation to turn the obstacle by
b) go straight ahea~ then tum left on
Its left side
the next comer
d) obligation to follow the left j i;n,tic11
c) left tum then go straight ahead
d) no left tum straight ahead

/._______
Problem --- --·-~· ~·-- ..1
1.348
-·.....:_::..:..
.. . . . .._. ..........,.,._... ... . ... ..... ·'
r~w351 Problem
'ii
The traffic sign shown indica.~e!i

--~-------------~
a) no left tum
b) left.tu~ for fast moving vehicles
~ a} obligation to tum left or right
c) obhgat1?n to follow left direction
b) tum left then tum right
c) no left or right tum

q:. dJ obligation to turn left
d) · tum left or right on the next comer

l
I Hi~H~A-~E~~~-~~ERtN~-- ----
------ --- -- 6s_~ I
- - - ---- - - - - - - - --- - ------
-- -
[1.352 . _Pr~~e!n , ~I Lj·!!~,

Problem
The traffic
sign shown lndlcat81:
a) u tum ahead
a)
.right curve ahead
d'" b) obligation to use the roundabout b)
curve to right
c) counter clockwise traffic ahead c)
dangerous double curve at right
d) no left or right tum allowed
Q'" d)
dangerous right curve
[ 1.353 Problem

11.356
Problem .I
The traffic
a) zigzag curve
b) dangerous left curve W a)
dangerous double curve at left
c) dangerous double cu..Ve at left b)
zigzag·road ahead
d) c)
curve to left
(@' dangerous curve ·
d)
tum left then straight ahead
~~--·~_·4_·.___P_r__
ob_le_m
____________ r
1.357 =
Problem
The traffic sign shown indicates The traffic
a) left curve ahead Q> a)

b) tum left b)
tum right then straight ahead
c) curve to left c)
curve to the right
~ d) dangerous left curve d)
zigzag curve ahead
--- - . ~. .
L66 -
------- · ---··--~. ._.,,. HIGHWAY
- -
EN~_INE~~,~-~
- ~--- -
[1.3$8 Problem
a - ~

: [ 1.~&.!
Problem
The traffic
~a) warning cross road ~a)

curve to the right
b) entering cross road b)
dangerous right curve
c) entering major cross road c)
sigzag curve to the right
d) accident prone area d)
f 1.359 Problem 1.362

Problem 1 . :
The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic

a) warning cross road ~ a)

curve to left ·
B' b) entering cross road b)
dangerous left curve
c) entering major cross road c)
sigzag curve to the left
d) accident prone area d)
dangerous double left curve
- - - - - -- -- ---- --- - .
------------·- ·--~~- ' • r-----
-------------....,...."""!!'!
P_ro_b_l_e_m_ ____~---~J
I 4 IY!h ~
p
"1
_1._3_&_o__
_I i~:'.:'~.
___r_o_b_l_e__m_ _ _ _ __
The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic
sign shown indicates:
a) entering cross road a)

airport ahead
b) warning cross road Q" b)
airport vicinity
c) road intersection at grade c)
warning airplanes ahead
S>' d) entering major cross road d)
airplane parking area
-
.... .. ...
·]
J
Th• traffic sign show Indicates: The traffic sign shown Indicates:
a) parallel road a) headlights required

b) merging traffic lane b) roads under repair
c) merging traffic c) construction holes ahead
d" cl) narrowed road ~cl) approaching traffic light
5 E
~ ± &£&,I
[ 1.365
Problem . '
.
The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic sign shown Indicates
warning
signs for:
'
a} entering major cross-road a) men working ahead

b) road intersection ahead b) slow men working ahead
c) road under repair c) excavation ahead
~ d) merging traffic ~cl) roads under repair
I 1.366 ' Problem 11.369

420
Problem
e:
EtW
m-== I
The traffic sign shown Indicates: The traffic sign shown Indicates
warning
signs for:
a) school zone
a) toil bridge
B" b) pedestrian croning
b) river ahead
c) disabled crossing
~ c) Hanging bridge parents and students area
d)
d) approaching river
--- ---~ -----
- - - - ---- -
-
• S£
Problem
- a
l, 1,~7:5 . Problem
:::
The traffic sign shown Indicates warning The traffic sign shown Indicates
warning
signs for: signs for:
a) animals plowing ~a) steep downward road

Q" b) Animal crossing b) steep upward road
c) disabled crossing c) excavation ahead
d) pedestrian crossing d) watch for falling
objects
11.371 Problem
The traffic sign shown indicates warning
t1.374 Problem
The traffic sign shown indicates
waming
-"i:
~a) narrowing road a) steep downward road

b) parallel roads ~ b) steep upward road
c) cars movement towards center c) excavation ahead
d) two way road d) watch for falling objects
--- ··- - -· . -- ·-··- · -- - -- -
I 1.372 Problem
The traffic sign shown indicates warning ~-;;,: &r.~1wn
indicates warning
~a) rough road a) check brakes

b) cut and fill ahead b) inclined road
c} excavation ahead c) exhaust free zone
d) smooth road Q'> cl) slippery road
------ --- - -- -- - ---
- - ----
, -H!_~-~-~~~ E":~~NE~-~IN? · _
6~ __ j
. ---=
[~.376 Problem
Problem
- §
-I
The traffic sign shown indicates warning The traffic sign
shown Indicates warning
" ' a) river ahead a) land fill

area
b) cliff ahead b) excavation
ahead
c) watch for falling objects c) caution for
landslide
d) slippery road ~ d) caution
fa/Hng stone
[ 1.377 Problem 1·1.380 Problem

I
The traffic sign shown indicates warning The traffic sign
shown Indicates warning
a) rotary interchange ahead

b) ~:ircumferencial road a) entering
cross road
n~~ :)arking b) no entry for
pedestrians
c)
c) disaster
area
I& d) .:•pproaching
~cl) railroad
crossing
1 .1.37~
~
Problem
j 1.381 Problem
The traffic sign shown Indicates warning
The traffic sign
shown indicates the
signs for:
following: ,..
....
r 'I
-
"
rt
-- ~
a) reversed direction ~ •) zigzag right

b) merging traffic b) ' dangerous
curve
Q> c) two way road c) curve at right
d) no overtaking on both sides d) accident prone
area
Afi' , ...
<' -· ~-
l
;
[ 1.~82 Problem [ 1.385 Problem
The traffic sign shown Indicates the The traffic sign

shown
following: following:
c r ....
~
I
·~
- ""
a) pedestrian
crossing
~ a) zigzag left
b) athletic
stadium
b) dangerous curve running track
and field
c)
c) curve at left
d) accident prone area Q" d) school
I 1.383 I 1.386 Problem

Problem
The traffic sign shown Indicates the
.
d'
The traffic sign shown in
rcates the
'
=:J
0
( -
r------"""
____
""
_,"
a) railroad crossing a) culdesac
b) pedestrian lane b) side road
~ c) level crossing (guarded) c) T-
intersection
d) level crossing (unguarded) Q'> d) dead end
cross road
_I1_._38_4_ _
Pr_o_b_le_m_ __ _ JIj 1.387 Problem
The traffic sign shown indicates the i - Th_ _ _ _ _ _....;,,:.:__
_ _- - . i
following: e traffl~ sign shown
indicates the.
following:
a) railroad station
t-
b) a) entering major
road
railroad crossing
c) ~ b) side road
(right)
level crossing (guarded) ,
Q> d) c) intersection
grade
level crossing (unguarded) d) tum right
........
.P~ble~.ss
(1.388
= 1 [ 1.39_
{ s: ~~Osbl~~
J
The traffic sign shown Indicates the The traffic sign shown
Indicates the .
~a) end of overtaking prohlbltio,n a) boat

b) no entry of all cars ~ b) ferry
c) no parking for all cars c) ferry station
d) car park d) speed boat.
[ 1.389 Problem I.1.392 Pr~ble~

The traffic sign shown Indicates the The traffic sign shown
Indicates the
following: following: ,.,
- ,----.°"
)(
,'-----,,
a) entering major road a)
-
parallel road
I& b) side road (left) ~ b) narrow bridge
c) intersecting grade c) narrowing road
d) tum left d) embankment
{ 1 .. 3~~ Problem 1·1.393 Si± Probl;.;; .=
The ~raffic sign shown Indicates the The traffic sign shown
indlc•es the
folh:w.~ ng : following:
a) follow direction
of arrow
Q" a) steephiH b) entering cross
roads
b) steep downward road c) no left tum
c) , steel upward rciad B" d) no tum
d) caution for land slide
ii ·· ·
>§klfll~1¥11¥litl§I.
lili~i~iiiiiiiiii:it_iiiiiiiiiii;iii•;•. ·:· 7 : )i!F';'?'f'l_....·-·-9!!-
··~
Indicates~
[ 1 •39_7
Problem
t1.394 Problema
The traffic sign
shown
The traffic sign shown Indicates the following:
following:
a) go straight ahead or tum at your ~a) comfort

room
own risk b) no
entry for both men and women
c} only
men and women allowed
~ b) no overtaking
d) gays
pot allowed
c) overtaking allowed
d) no u-tum
L1.395 Problem _]
L(1~·=3~9~~----
P_r_o_b_le_m_______ :J
fr· The traffic sign
shown indicates the
The traffic sign shown Indicates the following:
following: lo-,. ...
o_ ,
r
4
~
'-
....
a) bicycle lane B' a) picnic
area
b) no entry to bicycle b) forest
zone
W c) for disabled person c)
agricultural zone
d} bicycle crossing d) pine
tress ahead
j 1.396 Problem I 1 ~399

Problem J
The traffic sign shown indicates the The traffic sign
shown Indicates the
~
s.o.s.~
a} EMT
a) road
crossing
b) telephone office
b) Red
cross
~ c) emergency telephone c} Green
cross
d) telegraphic transfer ~ d)
hospital with emergency use
I
- -
(!.400 Problem ] L1.403 . Problem
J
The traffic sign shown Indicates the The speed llmlt sign shown
Indicates what
following: type of traffic signs.
- - 2'- --'
r. J
.. ... . . .. .
a) left lane move slow " (
b) two way traffic a) guide signs

c) right lane move fast b) warning signs
Priority to this direction ~ c) regulatory signs
"" d)
d) prohibitive signs
[ 1.401 Problem I 1.404
m= 42 • S££&Z2 ,
Problem
1
The traffic sign shown ' Indicates the
following: The traffic sign shows Indicates
what type
of traffic signs.
12'
·=- . o·. C-"

.,.,. ---~----:...:.
a) road closed I& a) guide signs

b) dead end
b) warning signs
c) cul de sac
c) regulatory signs
~ d) no through road d) prohibitive
signs.
[1.402 Problem ) 1:4os Prob••~ m

l
The stop sign shown Indicates what type
of traffic signs. •
i---- 1·2 ·---4 •.
The traffic signs shown indicates
what type
of traffic signs. .
Not Less
Than6'
.___ 12''---1..-
:..
o " e
· .- • IJ . .
L,.,r-----=--_·j
a) guide sign
a) guide signs
b) warning signs .~ b) wamingsign
c) regulatory
sign
~ c) regulatory signs
d) prohibitive
sign
cQ prohibitive signs
~4 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
lit-.
- -- -- - - --
-- ~ - ~
[ 1.406 Problem J
~[_1._4_o_e___P_ro_b_l_e_m_______ -:::J
Indicates:
c
c ..
'---·-·---""
c -
a) guide sign
~a) parking
~ b) warning sign
b) no parking
c) regulatory sign c) police
station
d) prohibitive sign d) thru stop
t 1.40?' Problem J
_f_1·-~~1-0--
~P_r_ob_l_e_m________ J
The traffic sign shown Indicates what type
of traffic signs. The traffic sign shown
indicates:
4'
a) go straight
ahead
a) guide sign b) cross road
ahead
c) tum left or
right
~ b) warning sign
I& d) road junction
approach
c) regulatory sign
d) prohibitive sign
11.408 Problem L1.411 Problem

indicates:
~a) end of speed limit Q=> a) no parking
b) do not enter b) park at your
own risk
c) resume speed c) parking from
8:00 • 11 :00 A.M. only
d) dead end d) parking from
2:00- 4:00 P.M. only
-
l ~-'-~~WAY ~~-~~~EERI~-~
75
(!.412 Problem l
a) 2
c) 4
~ b) 3
d) 5
~a)
b)
no blowing of horns
cross road ahead I 1.415 Problem
c) dead end ahead Reflectorlzed thermoplastic
rumble strips
d) quiet zone shall be bonded to typical
asphalt or
concrete surfaces to provide the
following
traffic controls.
[1.413 Problem I. Warn/alert drivers · of.
upcoming
roadway condition
such as
The traffic sign shown indicates: Intersections, sharp
horizontal
N.H. curves, narrow bridge
approaches,
toll plazas, ages and
tunnels
II. Use as
complimentary/enhancement
to advance warning signs
such as the
Deftnation
Stop Ahead or the various
Curve
Plate signs.
Ill. Use to prevent/lessen the
effect of
drowsiness during long
drive, In
attention and highway
synopsis.
...Gro11nd uvel
a) I and II only
~a) route marker sign b) I and Ill only
b) road junction approach c) II and Ill only
c) warning sign Q" d) All of the above
d) regulatory sign
I 1 ..41& Problem
I*1.414 Problem Types of Chevron signs:
Chevron signs shall be used to guide I. HM·1A < 60 kph

drivers through a change in horizontal 11. HM·1B > 60 kph
111. HM·1C < 70 kph
alignment of the road such as curves and
IV. HM·1D > 70 kph
less than sharp turns. It is recommended
that the spacing of the chevron signs S'" a) I and I/only
should allow the driver to see at least - b) II and Ill only
signs in view while negotiating the curve c) I, Ill and IV only
until the change In alignment eliminates d) All of the above
the need for the signs.
[ PAVEMENTS
I
luphiJ/t concf'Ptt P<Jl't mt>nt
Pavement Thickness Using

Shoulder Tra,·el way Shoulder
Expansion Pressure Method

A spitalt concrtlt paFt1'1tnl
Asphalt Portland u ment

concrt!te pavt!mt nt Asphalt
concrete
cone" '"
Rigid Pavement: (Olders

Subgrade \
~
~Theory)
Subbase Travel I
Aggregate
I base
base
- I
-!- -~ -
CD Without dowels or tie bars:
Shoulder Travel wa~· . Shoulder
The critical section is st the edge of a
Portla1td u11ttnl concrtlt pa-,untnl • M11ltilane
contraction joint it will crack
approximately 45· with the edges. ·
Two General Types of .A

M=Wx
-- , Pavements ·~
6M
f=-
bd2
A. Flexible Pavements
M=Wx
A flexible pavement is constructed
with asphaltic cement and aggregates
b=2x critical
and usually consists of several layers.
section ~f'=:::::::::----1
The lower layer is called the subgrade.

d=t
asphaltic f = 6Wx Cracks Cracks
conat!tr
2x t2
~
sh~~:ia
:250: 11'. . ~ ... '. .~r. .'.
t=~
1
50 100
I \\'taring .· :. .· ../.·. r.
100:
_ (thidcness of pavement
100 mm to 250 ,_ . . . s:,,f>.bqsi .
mm · . .' ·
'
• ·
'
at edge El1d at center)

- 0 • • • '
f =allowable tensile stress of concrete in

Subgrade (s<1i/J
psi or kglcm2
W =wheel load in lb. or kg

B. Rigid Pavements
A rigid pavement is constructed
with Portland cement concrete and
@ With dowels or tie bars:
aggregates as shown with flexible
Purpose of dowel is to transmit the
pavements, the subgrade (the lower
stresses due to the load from the adjacent
pavements), the base layer is optional.
pavement.
: :
•• I
I !> a
•I I
:iii 2:
•. · •la
I Thi_ckness
of Pavement I
Us1n
Mcleods Method
T=Klog10 - s
p =wheel
load
S
=Subgrade pressure
K
=const«Jt value from table
. California
Bearing Ratio
CraC'ks Crad.s
·
(CBR) •·-
CBR=------P_l_A_____
CBR for 5 mm penetraion

A=area of
piston plunger
P =load
applied
• Modulus of
Sub rade ..
K=-
0.125
F=-
A
- Flexible Pavements: ...... =
P load
causiJg a settlement of 0.125 an in kg
A =area of
sta1darrJ plcte (75 cm diam)
A=W A1 =n r 2 K=modulus of
subgrade in kg I cm3
2 f
By ratio and proportion : -;t< Shrinka
I
e Factor - ,
A1 - A2
s~(e, -e2 )100

• C""""1 arra of tirr
7- (t+r)2 ·
w ~o
S=shrinkage factor
1+e1
1Cf
2
=f e1 =in
situ void ratio
,2 (t + r)2
w e2
=void ratio after compacting
1
2
(t+ r )=--
w
n f Joints in
Cement Concrete
t+ r=0.564
. VT
rw ~ Pavements -
- -
Location of
joint:
t=0.564~-r
C1H11ructiun
101111 SLAB LENGTH
t, =0.564 lfi" _r .,
vr:
------ ------ ~--
' -
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
I7a __ ____ _ _ _
__ _ __ _ -
Expansion Joint
-· Lon itudinal Joint
(A) Plain Butt Joint
Sealer
. .. ' ' • ' I
. . '
(B) Butt Joint With Tie Bar
Sealer
1
" Transverse Contraction
.4 . . .: . :
Joint With Dowel Bar
17e Bar
(C) Tongue and Groove Warpi ng
Sealer
~ . . .
.. . .. .
Fully
Bonded
Painted
. .. ·.
DOWEL BAR
- 12 m,;. e. Im long
Tie Bar al 0 .610 0.7111
Centers
(A) Butt Joint With Dowd Bar

Sealing
1_1.41_8
CompQund
12mm
.. . .
Compute the thickness of a flexible
· . . . . ·..
~.
d/2
pavement for a wheel load of 50 kN, If the
d
allowable bearing pressure on the base of
the pavement is 0.15 MPa and the
equivalent radius of the contact are~ of the

Fully Bonded DOWEL BAR
Painted tires is equal to 165 mm.
Solution:
(B ) Butt Joint Witlt Tie Bar
Sealing
Compound
"-1=12rnm ~·
I =0.564 ff · r
a _:....
r
d t2
r · ---
J_ , .•• --
' .
.
/
/
~
.
n~
--
. .
.
'.
.
··
. .
\
.
~
. .
'.
••
. }i
. .'
"
I= 0.564 ~54000
0.15
: 165
I -- . -.- -,"''· . _.,, - _·

.... - ~ -
- - -·r-'¥--
. - ..,
--i t= 173.4mm
/ TIE BAR
Fully Bonded
f'u:!y /Jarid d
111rw11rew13aaw1 i
,
j
r
. _::
I _;;;;
~9 CE Board May 2015]

A =n r2
::i:::x · , · j~
- tiS the stiffn~ss factor of a pavement if
Jt..5
Wh~odulus of elasticity Is 180 MPa and
85806 =n r
2
=
r= 165mm
:ose subgrade modulus of 40 MPa?
~ t>? .,,\~
t 1 =0.564
-r ~ ~"
solution~: E =modOOs d e1astt1y
v~
t, =0.564~ -
165 ·. ~
•
Sf. = E, =subgrademodulus
SF = 3~ =0.605
t1 =39 mm
(thickness a ptW8fTlfldJ
.. vw t 2 =t'- t1
t2 =184-39
t 2 =145 mm
a baseJ
[i.A20 Problem J
(thickness
'
A flexible pavement carries a static wheel
load of 53.5 kN. The circular contact area
11.421 .
~roblem
of the tire is 85806 mm2 and the transmitted Determine
the thickness of a rigid
load is distributed across a wide area of pavement of
the proposed Nagtahan road
the subgrade at an angle of 45•. The to carry a
max. wheel load of 60 kN.
subgrade bearing value is 0.14 MPa, while · Neglect
effect of dowels. fc' = 20 MPa.
that of the base is 0.41 MPa. Design the Allowable
tensile stress of concrete
thickness of pavement and that of the pavement is
0.06 fc'.
base. Solution:
Solution:
Flexible Pavement :
t= rm
=J3(60000)
Vt
0.60(20)
= 387.3mm
r
w
A,=f
1 ~nts In
Coner~
A= 1t r 2
Pavements
A _ A,
2 2
3:422
f
Problem
r.:.-~-..~~~~--
~------~-
z:z zz=+ :a 1·
r (t + r )
Joints placed
in concrete pavements,
1tr2 = W/f1 · which are
usually placed transvel'1ely, at
r
2
(t ~ r)
2 regular
intervals, to provide adequate
expansion
space for the slab to expand
when the
pavement Is subjected to an
(t + r) 2 =0.564 {W_ - r
. VT · Increase in
temperature.
a)
Hinge joint
t =0.564
53500
0.14
~- 165 b)
c)
Contraction joint
Construction joint
t= 184mm ~ d)
Expansion joint
:: :: -
SolutJon:
I 1.423 Problem f
- 5 J
Joints placed In concrete pavemen~,
which are usually placed transve~:h!
w
regular Intervals across the width 0
pavement to release some of the tens11e
stresses that are Induced due to a
decrease In \emperature.
a) Hinge joint
Q> b) Contraction
joint .
c) Construction joint Consider only
half of the sectiOn
d) Expansion joint (Using Prineiples
of Mechanics)
W= ( }( ~ ~ }3)
(2400) = 720 L kg
( 1.424 F _ Prpblem J N=729L kg.
Joints placed In concrete pavements,
F=µN
which are placed transve..Sely across the
pavement width to prQvlde suitable =
F 1.5(720L)
transition between concrete placed at F =1080L kg
different times or on different days. T = 300(20)(0.8)
a) Hinge joint T =4800kg
b) Contraction joint T=F
~ c) Construction joint 4800 = 1080L
d) Expansion joint L=4.44 m.
L= 2f x1Q
4
=2(0.8)(10}4 = 4.4' m.
uD . 1.5(2400)
~ Contraction Joints·. ~~·.i~~;.
( 1.425 , Problem ] /l;i Spacing of

Longitudinal
Determine the spacing between contraction
. . Bars in
Pavements •
• joints for a 3.0 m. slab having a thickness
L
of 20 cm. Coefficient of friction between ( 1.426

Problem
concrete and subgrade is 1.5 and unit wt.
of concrete 2400 kg/cu.m. A11owable A concrete
pavement Sm wide and 150 mm
tensile stress of concrete is 0.8 kg/cm2 and thick is to be
provided with a center
that of stet)I is 800 kg/cm2• Unit weight of longitudinal
joint using 12 m111 e bars. The
steel is 7500 kg/cu.m steel bars having a unit' weight of
concrete Is 2,400 kglm3•
diameter of 1.6 cm. Total reinforcement is Coefficient of
friction of the slab on the
4 kg/m2 and is equally distributed in both subgrade is
2.0. Assuming an allowable
directions. For plain cement concrete working stress
in tension ·for steel bars at
(without dowels). 138 MPa,
determine the spacing of the
=
b 3m b 300 cm. = longitudinal
bars in mm.
--- ·~--··- ·· - _... -

-
=
Lt 2
1
w=0.60(0.15)(4.5)(2400)9.81
W=9535.32
W = N = 9 535.32
F=µN
F =2 (9 535.32)
T=F
T =19 070.64
T := '1dl U
19070.64=11(12) L (0.83)
L =609.5 mm •
2L =1219 mm (length of bars)
Ex ansion Joint
Length of Longitudinal Bars
-r· ·~.. in Pavements . _
,. [i .428 Problem
l
[1A27 Problem !h• width of expansion joint gap Is
24 mm
A 12 mm e bars is used as the longitudinal m a cement concrete pavement If the
bars of a concrete pavement It is spaced laying temperature ts 12·c and the
at 600 mm on centers. The width of maximum slab temperature 11
so·c,
roadway is meters and the coefficient of calculate the spacing between the
friction of the slab on the subgrade is 2.0. expansion joints. Assume
coefficient of
Thickness of slab is 150 mm. If the th~rmal expansion of concrete to be
9.5 x
allowable bond stress is 0.83 MPa, .10 per c·. The expansion joint gap
should
determine the length of the longitudinal be twice the allowable expansion In
concrete.
bars.
>
Solution:
Cvn-. ·
"-"t"'I' 1SIOl'lmconcrete = -24 =12
mm
•
2
Expansion in concrete =0.012
w
a
=0.012m.
b. =KL (T2 - T1)
0.012=9.5x10·5 (50-12)L
L=33.24 m. (spscilg
batweet> exptnioti pm)
• T
!•=ti!·::;,:· :::r : :
Construction Joints ...- Solution:
40000 33 · 2
Contact .ea= 120 =333. in
L1.429 r
Problem
- - a c J
Determine the spacing · between s =41 (333.33)(2.1)
construction joints for 3.5 m. slab width s =28699.71 lb.
~avlng a thickness of 200 mm, coefficient p
of friction Is 1.5. Allowable tensile stress T =K log10 S
In concrete and steel are 0.8 kg/cm2 and
1400 kg/cm2 respectively. Use plain cement 40000
concrete. T =50 log,0 28699.71
w
Solution: T =7.21 lnches (thiclcn6SS d
P* bsseJ
LI
~Thickness Of Pavement
Usin Ex ansion Pressure
w=~ (0.2)(3.5)(2400) w
£&!!!SL±
W=840Lkg
---L-~
T Problem
F
N
Compute the pavement thickness
by
N=840Lkg ~ expansion pr"sure method, if
the
~~~~(0.8) 1 1 }~~ {
expansion pressure ls 0.150
kg/crn2 and the
a~erage pavement density is
0.0025
kg/cm2.
5600 = 1.5 (840)L Solution:

L = 4.44m. t = _ expansion
_.!..._
pressure
___::___ _
average pavement density

,., Thickness Of Base Using'.~,i-
·~, Mcleod's Formula ":~t t = 0.150 =60cm
0.0025
L(1_._43_o~_P_r_ob_ l_e_
m~~~~~\ .
In a plate bearing test, a pressure of 41 psi ..:·:California Bearin
Ratio
was required to deflect a 30 inches
diameter plate by 0.2 in. A flexible runway \ 1 ..432 Problem
pavem9nt is to be designed for a deflection
of 0.5 in under a single wheel load of 40000 The CBR value of a
standard crushed rock
lb. with a tire prassure of 120 psi. Compute for a 5 mm penetration is
76 kg/crn2 when
the thickness of a granular base using it was subjected to a
penetration test by a
Mcleods method. Use the value of k = piston plunger 6 cm. dia.
moving at a
50 for the actual contact area and a certain speed. What is
the CBR of soil
conversion factor of 2.1 for a subgrade sample when subjected to
a load of 105 kg
pressure corresponding to the actual it produces a
penetration of 5 mm?
contact area and deflection of 0.5 in.
. ..... .,
- ---- ~ .. ....~··,..." illll'il!1811:!1~------
:
11 : :
so1ut1on:
Solution:
p
SfteSS =A
t= .JW [ 1.75 - ~]Vl
CBR p7t
= ~ =3.71 kg/cm2
stress ! (6}2
t
='14fXXJ [ 1.75 - _1 ]'fl
3.71 (100) = 4.88%
6 8 7t
csR= - 76
t
=31.14cm.
£ LC±
Problem ] f 1'. 435

: Proble'; .
The thickness of a pavement Is 31.74 cm.
The
1011 sample was obtained from the
A wheel load of 4000 kg with a tire
project
site and the CBR test was
pressure of 8 kg/cm2 Is acting on the
conducted at field density. The sample
surface of the pavement. What is the with the
same surcharge Imposed upon ft
maximum CBR value of subgrade soil Is then
subjected to a penetration by a
supporting this load? Use the formula piston
plunger 5 cm. diameter moving at a
developed by U.S. Corps of Engineers. speed of
0.127 cm/min. The CBR value of
the
standard crushed rock for 0.1 Inch (2.5
Solution: mm)
penetration Is 70.45 kg/cm2 (1000
lblln2)
and for 0.2 Inch (5 mm) penetration
. t= rw [1.75 - _1
CBR p 7t
]112 Is 1500
lblin2 (105.68 kglcm2). Compute
the- CBR
of the soil sample whose results
112 were as
follows:
1.75 1]
3174=J4<XYJ [ - - -
. CBR 87t
Penetration Load Penetration Load
(mm)
(kg) (mm) (kg)
0.502 = [ 1.75 - _1] 112 ' 0.0
0 3.0 59.6
CBR 87t 0.5
6.2 4.0 68.5
1.0
15.4 5.0 . 75.2
1 5 1 1.5
30.2 7.5 90.3
0.252 = .7 2.0
40.5 10.0 86.4
CBR 8 7t
\ 2.5
55.33 12.5 101.4
0.292 = 1.75
CBR So/u!fon:
CBR=6%
!!£ :szwssz. " I CBR(%)

=Untt load at 0.10 inch penetration. x 100
I 1.434 . Probl;m
1000 lb/in2
CBR% =
Unit load a 0.2 inch penetration x 1()()
Compute the thickness of a pavement if the
CSR value of subgrade soil Is 6%. Wheel Note: The
CBR valt»<» ~tandard crushed
load is 4000 kg with tire pressure of 8 rock for
0.2 inch (5 mm) penetration is 1500
kg/cm2. Use the formula developed by the lblin2
(105.68 kglcm2) and for 0.10 inch (2.5
U.S. Corps of Engineers. mm)
penetration is 1000 lb/in2 (70.45 kglcm2)
l•=ii :: . : :; 1' . ::: 1
For the 0.1inch (2.5 mm) penetrEiion :

Solution:
For the 0. 10 inch
penetrtiion,using a plunge,
(Using a 5 an diam. plunger)
diam.of 1.95 incheS.
F
Pressure= - F
A Pressure= A
55.33
Pressure= - - 1631
f (S)2 Pressure= f (1.9S)2
Pressure= 2.818 kwcm2
2
Pressure= 546.13
lblin
2 818
CBR = · x 100 546·13 x 100
=54.6% say 55%
70.45 CBR =
1000
..
CBR=4%
For the 0.20 inch
penetrtiion,using a p/f.l)ger
For the 0.2 inch (5 mm) penetrEiion :
diam. of 1.95 inches.
(using a 5 an. diam. plunger)
F
F Pressure= -
Pressure= - A
A
2102
2
75.2 Pressure =
= 703.84 lblin
Pressure= - - l-(1.95)
2
f(S)2
Pressure= 3.83 kg1cni2 CBR =70J.B4 x 100
=46.9% say 47%
1500
3 83
CBR = · x 100 Use CBR =55% (use
bigger value between
105.68
0.1inchand0.2 inch penetntion) •

CBR=3.62%
Use CBR =4% (use the bigger value of either
2.5 mm or 5 mm penetration)
I 1.437
Problem
J
f 1.436 Problem Using the design
curves for flexible
pavements with a
given California Bearing
Compute the CBR of the soil sample shown Ratio, compute the
thickness of the base
if the sample with the same surcharge and sub-base of a
flexible pavement with 3
imposed upon it is subjected to a inches surfacing on
top of the base for a
penetration by a piston plunger 1.95 inches 12000 lb wheel load.
CBR for poorly
in diam. The CBR value of the standard graded sub-base is
35% and CBR for
crushed rock for 0.10 inch penetration is {sand) subgrade is
20%.
1000 lb/in2 and for the 0.20 inch
Solution:
penetration is 1500 lb/in2.
For CBR =35%, draw a
horizontal line from
,
Penetration Load the intersection of
the 12000 lb. wheel load
Penetration Load
(inches) (lb) (inchea) (lb) diag. and the CBR
rating which is 35%, and
0.025 705 0.200 2102 the thickness 6
inches is indicated. Draw
'J.C59 1129 0.300 2359 another horizontal
line from the intersection of
0.075 1422 0.400 2574 the 12000 lb. wheel
load and the CBR rating
0.100 1631 which is 20% and the
thickness of 8 inches is
0.500 2675
0.150 1896 indicated.
.........._ -- '22 I .
-- -~-------
--i!M2'S'2!51!Sd
i 7
N cuRVF.S FOR FLEXIBLE ROADS

l:t:::ORNIA BEARING RATIO-PER CENT
67 910 u ft " .Ill la' B1 I)' 'ft
in ~lus Of ~ubgrade
0
-- 4
:
Reaction ·
-
l i..- __.... t::I-".
c;:;.- ;::~
!
i.-
'-
4 i..-
bW El L
OAI>
,,.. ~ -
~
f:_1.43B ~roblem
~
---
8 V"/ ;;..-""
10 ... i.-v
ll / i...,
The loadings and the corresponding
14 ..../ ... • l1U hWHI ... IU.n
settlement readings & ire recorded to
16
18
- ,/ /
-, / ( ~ ~~I llUM RA FtlCl
obtained the modulus of subgrade reaction
~
of soil sample. The standard diameter of

ll
- "· ,.....
lO ' ' v
''
,_,,,-I ~lb w ill E LOAD
plates used Is 75 cm In diameter. Compute
7 "
.,
the modulus of •ubgrade reaction of the
l4
26 ..
' I HI AV
I
'II It. ~I )
soil sample.
l8
'"'rl!'¢ ;e ..... ::a 1
Loads (kg) Settlement (cm)
S11rfaci11g
3"
IT----~B-
8 j
..
. - A}l -+
as.e. .,......---~ ~·
500kg
1000 kg
0.025
0.050
1200 kg 0.075
Poorly graded Sub-base
2"
_____ ....,_.____ .l
CBR=35%
1400 kg 0.100
1900 kg 0.125
(S011d) Sub-grade
CBR=20%
2000 kg 0.150
2250 kg 0.125
From the figure, the thickness of the sub-base
Solution: ·
is a-6 =2 In. and the thickness of the base is
For asettlement of 0.125 cm

6-3 =3 in.
_.,... Shrinkage Factor -·--

'.22
a =-
K=-
1900
A j(75)
F .
=0.43 kg/cm2
.l
[ 1.438 Problem
0.125
K= 0.43
An undisturbed sample of material taken
0.125
from a borrow pit.has a void ratio of 0.70.
Results of the Proctor compaction test
K =3.44 kg I cm' (modWs <i s009racle 1'88dionJ
indicate that the material as compacted on
the roadway will have a void r-atlo of 0.48.
What shrinkage factor should be used in
computing borrow and embankment
quantities?
r1.4..0 Problem
Upon completion of grading operations, a

Solution:
subgrade was tested for bearing capacity
by loading large bearing plates. It was

Shrinkage factor= ( e, -
1+e,
02
J100
found out that a load of 22290 N produced
a deflection of 3 mm under a plate 450 mm

In diameter. Based on this load, what Is the
Shrink~ factor= ( O.?O - 0·48 )100 =1194%
modulus of subgrade reaction?
1+0.70
ls6
l_ -
- HIGHWAY
------ ----
ENGINEER~NG .
- ~
Solution:
P =oA
22290 =a(f) (450) 2

Determine the modulus of
aubgl'aclt
reaction for a standard
plate 75 cm in dill'll
a =0.140 MPa The loadings and the
corresPondl~
settlement dial readings
as obtained Ullng
Modulus of subg~
, ........,,~I
= Oeftection
Stress 30 cm. diam. plate.
Loads
Settlement (mm)
Modulus of subgrooa reaction = 0·140 470kg
0.25mm
3
0.50mm
940kg
Modulus of subgrooa reaction =0.04667 N/mm3 1200 kg
0.75mm
1390 kg
1.00 mm
Modulus of subgrate reaction = 46670 l<N I m3
1.25mm
1490 kg
1600 kg
1.50 mm
1650 kg
1.75mm
L1.44.1 Problem
-z - - -
Solution:
Compute the modulus of subgrade reaction K=_£__ (modulus of
subgrade reaction)
for a 15 cm. thick cement slab, having a 0.125
modulus of elasticity of 210000 kglcm2, F= p
poisson's ratio of 0.13 and a· radius of A
relative stiffness of 67 cm. Use
For a settlement of
0.125 cm the load
Westergaard equation:
p =1490kg
Solution:
F = 1490
Eh3 ]114 ! (30)2
=
L ( 12k(1 • µ2)
F =2.108 kg/cm
2
114
3
210000(15) ] F
57 ( K, = 0.125
= 12k[1-(0.13)2 ]
114 K =2.108
60077815.07) 1
0.125
67= (
k
K1 =16.87 kg/cm
60077815.07 For a standard

ptcie the diam. is 75 cm.
20151121 = k'
K1 a1 =Ka
2
k = 2.98 kg I cm
16.87 (30) =K (75)
3
K =6.748 kg I cm
~~'-
- _P_r_o_bl_em , ~J
_________ T=A f
••
up0n completion of grading operations a T = n (16)2 (138
4
sut>grade was tested for bearing capacity
bY 1oadlng large bearing plates. If the T=2n46.55N
resulting modulus of subgrade r~ctJon Is T=F
equal to 196.49 psi per Inch, compute the T=µN
ioad which produces a deflection of 0.10
inch under a plate having a radius of g In. 2n46.55=1.4(23544)5
S=0.842m
solution: S=B42mm
redon stress T =n(16)x(0.76)
Subgrade = deflection
2n46.55 = n(16)(0.76)x
Stress
196.49 = 0.10 x=726mm
2x=1452mm
stress= 19.649 psi
F
streSS= -
A Plate Load Test Method
F =19.649 (n)(9)
2
.i
F =5000/b. J 1 ~5 .. ~Prob,l~m
Design the total thlckn'9S of a
highway
Spacing of Bars in Concrete pavement using the plate load
test method
-~\'<;~~'. ( Pavements _ , if the base course has a constant
value of
90. The wheel load Is 4100 kg. The
total
£W e subgrade pressure for the same
contact
Problem area, deflection and number of
repetitions
of the load Is equal to 2100 kg.
Provide .5
cm. of bituminous surfacing on the
top of
A pavement slab 15 m. wide and 200 mm
the computed thickness. Use Mcleod
thick is laid in three strips, each 5 m wide.
method.
The coefficient of friction between
pavement and subgrade is 1.40, allowable Solution:
tensile stress In steel Is 138 MP• and the
p
allowable bond stress betWeen concrete T=Klog10 -s
and steel Is 0.76 MPa, Determine the
length and spacing of 16 mm round tie
~~ . T=90log 4100
10
2100
Solution: T =2e.15 cm. (Thickness of
grWJu/w base)
W= S(0.2)(5)(2400)(9.81)
Total thickness= 26.15 +·s
W=23544S
N=W Total thickness= 31.15 cm.
,\
11:1:1 .: :: .
-··-- ··· ·-• Traffic Index ·- Solution:
residual strength
Factor of
safety =edge load stress
I ~ .446 Problem J .
Compute the traffic index if the annual 1.07 = 20.S6
value of. equivalent wheel load (EWL) is edge load
stress
32,600,000.
Edge load stress
=19.21 kg I cm'
Solution:
Traffic index = 1.35 (EWL)o.11
Stress Due to
Corner Load
Traffic index = 1.35 (32,600,000)0.11
,_ . in Pavements
-
Traffic index= 9.05
~f1_._44_9~_P_r_o_b_le_m~-----:J
Residual & War in Stress
A concrete pavement
having a thickness Of
I1_._441 . Problem 7
15 cm. carries a
wheel load of 5100 kg.
Compute the stress
if the load is acting at
the corner of the
slab. Use Goldbecks
Compute the residual strength in concrete Formula:
slab (pavement) at the edge region if the
alloWable flexural stress of concrete is 40 Solution:
kg/cm2 and the warping suess at the edge S = 3P
is 21.8 kg/cm2. c h2
Sc =stress due to
comer load, kg/cm2
Solution:
P =comer load in kg
Residual strength . h =thickness of slab
in cm.
= allowable flexural stress - warping stress
s = 3(5100)
Residual strength = 40 - 21 .8 c (15)2
Residual strength= 18.2 kg/cm2 Sc = 68 kg I cm2
f 1.448 Problem J
Compute the edge load stress for a
f 1.450
Problem J
concrete pavement having a residual Laboratory tests
indicate that a certain
strength of 20.56 kg/cm2 and a factor of subgrade has a CSR of
5. What thickness
safety of 1.07. of flexible pavement
structure should be
specified for a 12000
lb. wheel load?
: :-; ::
Thickness of Sub-base of
._
Flexible Pavement _.,
t1.452
Problem J
Using
the design curves for a flexible
pavement, compute the thickness of the

sub-
base (silty sand) having a CBR of 15%.
The
sub-grade (sandy clay) has a CBR of
8%.
The pavement is subjected to.12000
lb.
wheel loads. Use 3 In. as thickness of
the
surfacing.
Solution:
80 J 4 5 6 7 8 IO 15 20 30 40 60 80
DESIGN CURVF.S FOR FLEXIBLE ROADS
CBR in per u nt at 0 .1 ind r fHnetration
for compa<·ttd and soaked SJHcimtn 02
CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO-PER CENT
3 4 5' 789 • c ft •
40 ..... re:•
2
,.
..
4 '
Using t~e design chart for CBR Method of 6
~~ :;:.. i.--
design of flexible pavements for highways and
bWI 11.:1 '..<l1A ) ......-.:: ~
airport runways.
8
10
·-- -- - - ...
.. v
./~ -.-
Thickness of pavement = 17 In.

12
14
16
--- -- ·- ,. ,.
,.
,J'f"/ ,J 'f" ..
"'
• 11 bWA1 '1111 n.a.n

18
20 , / ,
~/ /
,/
If .t lo:l•RJM RA m e)
22 ,,
,' /
uaa llb WI II m;>
,... AV" ,.
~,,
24
J AD
26 /
R.t. , II \
28
I I
t ., 1
IT
Surfacing 3"
Compute the equivalent thickness in gravel

13"
E
Base
-· _.=sf 6"
of a bituminous concrete surface course
having a thickness of 10 cm. and a
=
cohesiometer value c 60 if a gravel sub
tW
Silty sand S11b-base
4"
- - ~ - "l -t
base having a thickness of 1O cm. has a
CBR=/5% j_
_, ---- ¥2£23
cohesiometer value c = 15.
(Sand) Sub-grade
CBR=8%
Solution:
( c Jlf.i Draw a
horizontal line from the intersection of
--
t
t
g -
-c the
CSR reading of 8% and the 12000 lb.
II curve,
it indicates a thickness of 13 inches.
Draw a
horizontal line from the intersection of
~-(~f the CBR
reading of 15% and the 12000 lb.
curve,
it Indicates a thickness of 9 inches. The
t, =13.2cm.
thickness of the sub-base is 13 - 9 =4
I#·*: : : :
Solution:
• Thickness of Pavement 1
1/3
Using Expansion Pressure

-.,.....,... Method . . . _ . Sti1fneSS tactor =( ~: )
1/3
( 1.~53 Problem StiffneSS tactor =( :

1 )
=o.434
Compute the pavement thickness by
expansion pressure method If the
expansion pressure ls 0.1 SO kg/cm2 If the
average pavement
0.0025 kg/cm3.
density Is I ASPHALT MIXTURE :
Solution: 1. Absolute specific

gravity of
composite aggregates
t = 0.150
2
kg/cm
100
0.0025 kg/cm3 G= p
p p
_s +-'
+_..!...
t= 60cm.
Gs G, G,
where:
G = absolute specific
gravity of
composite
aggregates
Gs = sp.gr. of sand
11.454 C~ Board May 2015 Gr= sp.gr. of filler
Ga = sp. gr. of asphalt
cement
~hat ,is the stiffness factor of a pavement if Ps .= percentage weight
of sand
its modulus of elasticity is 180 MPa and Pr= percentage weight of
filler
whose subgrade modulus of 40 MP~. Pa = percentage weight
of aspha#
cement
Solution:
2. Bulk specific gravity
(apparent
S.F. = 3{40 =0.605
~180 Sp.gr.)
w
d=
a
wa
-ww
1.455 Problem where:
d =bulk sp.gr. or
apparent sp.gr.
If pavement and sub grade are considered Wa = weight of compacted
test specimen
as two layer system a stiffness factor is to in air
be introduced to take into account the Ww =weight of compacted
test specimen
different values of modulus of elasticity of in water
the two layers. If the modulus of elasticity .
of the subgrade is 100 kg/cm2 and the 3. Porosity:
modulus of elasticity of the pavement Is
1000 kg/cm2, what is the stiffness factor? G-d
n=-
G
1 HIGHWAY ENG~NEERING
91 I
- -j
' ----
Absolute Specific Gravity of -- Fineness
Modulus _....
- - As halt Mixture -
!XE
]
J
~.456 Problem
When a sample of
sand having a dry weight
A sheet asphalt mixture Is to be made of 600 grams Is
passed through a set of
using the following percentages by weight standard sieves, the
weight In grams
of the total mix. retained on the
various slevea are as
follows.
Material Specific ' Percentage
, Gravity of Weight
% of individual fraction
Sand 2.68 80% Sieve No.
retained in grams
filler 2.70 12% 318 in
0
Asphalt Cement 1.01 8% #4
108
#8
90
A compacted test specimen weighing 11.18 #16
150
N In air was found to weigh 6.33 N when #30
66
suspended In water. #50
114
#100
72
<D Compute the absolute specific gravity
of the composite aggregates. Determine the
fineness modulus.
~ Compute the bulk specific gravity.
~ Compute the porosity.
Solution:
Solution:
© Absolute specific gravity of the composite
aggregates
%of
100
individual Commutative Commutative
G=---- Sieve
fraction %passing in % retained in
p p p No.
retained grams grams
-·+-'+ -• in
arams
G1 G, G1
100 318
0 600 600-600=0
G= - - - - - =2.37 #4
108 492 600-492=108
_80, +12- +8- #8
#16
90
150
402
252
600-402=198
600-252=348
2.68 2.70 1.01 #30
66 186 600-186=414
#50
114 72 600-72=528
(2) Bulk specific gravity
#100 .11 0 600-0 =600
600 2196
w. 11.18
d= = =2.31
wI -w W 11.18-6.33
2196
Fineness Modulus =
® Porosity
600
n =G-d =2.37 - 2.31 =0.0235 Fineness Modulus
=3.66
G 2.37
n =2.53%
)
/-g2 HIGHWAY E':'IG_l_
NE~~-~~-G _ 1
I -- - -- - - -- ~ - - -
=---
Solution:
fl 1.458 Problem Q
J 100
A core of compacted asphalt concrete G=---
p P,
pavement was tested for specific gravity. _c +-
The following weights were obtained. Ge G,
Weight of dry specimen In G=absolute specif;c
grsvity of composite agg~
=
air 2007.5 grams ~ =percentages of
coarse materials by weight
Weight of sj>eclmen plus paraffin coating In P, =percentages of
fine materials by weight
air= 2036.5 grams I
Gc =specific gravity
of coarse mcterial
Weight of specimen plus paraffin ·coating in
water= 1135.0 grams G, =specific gravity
of fine material ·
Bulk specific gravity of the paraffin = 0.903 100
G=----
Calculate the bulk specific gravity of the
92 8
-+-
core. 2.63 2.72
G = 2.64
Solution:
d= A
D-E- (DFA)
d =bulk specific gravity of the core
L1 .460
6
Problem
J
A= weight of dry specimen in air A bituminous mat
consisting of an
D=K9ght of specimen plus parsffjn coating in air aggregate mixture
which is composed of
90 percent crushed
rock (sp.gr. = 2.64) and
E =weight of specimen plus paraffin coating in water 10 percent limestone
dust (sp.gr. = 2.71).
F =bulk specific gravity of paraffin Determine bulk sp.gr.
of the bituminous
mixture so that the
compacted mixture Will
d= 2007.5
have a porosity 5
percent.
(2036.5 - 1135) - (2036J.9of>7·5)
d=2.309 Solution:
d =2.31 (bulk specific gravity of core) 100
G=---
p
_c +-
P,
Ge
G,
f 1_.459 Problem
c
100
G=----
A bituminous mat is to be constructed 90 10
- +-
using the upper limits of grading.based on 2.64 2.71
AASHO Specifications. This aggregate G =2.65
j
mixture la composed of 92'• crushed rock n = 100 (G- d)
(sp.gr. = 2.63) and 8% limestone dust
=
(sp.gr. 2.72). Determine the theoritical G
maximum density of the combine 5 = 100(2.65 - d)
aggregate. Note that this is also the 2.65
absolute specific gravity of the aggregate 2.65-d =0.1325
mixture.
d =2.5175 (bulk
Sp.gr.)
.
jii;'f''9 1f'Fl'f'ilti!i"FQl!!!!llll!l!!!!11!!1!!!11!!!!!1!1!
~1 _Proble; Solution:
:-:••
G= 100
A sheet asphalt mixture Is to be made P,Gc +PG +PG
I I I I
using the following percentages by weight
of total mix. G= 100
80 12 8-
sand (sp.gr. =2.67) 78'/o - +- +
filler (sp.gr. =2.71) 12%
2.68 2.70 1.01
Asphalt ce~ent (sp.Qr. = 1.01) 10% G =2.37 (absolute sp.gr.)
Find the theoritical maximum density of the Bulk sp. gr. = W,

W-W
mixture. I W
d =bulk sp.gr.
Solution:
100 d=-1_140_
G= p p p 1140-645
_1- + _, + .--:..!,_
d =2.30
Gc G.. G
l 8
100 Porosity (n) =G- d

G
G= 78 12 10
-+-+ - n = 2.37 - 2.30
2.67 2.71 1.01
2.37
G=2.30 (absolute sp.gr.)
n =0.0295%
Density = (2.30)( 1000) n = 2.95% (porosit}')
Density= 2300 kg Im'
2£!M± ±L££2!!3S
11.462 Problem
A plant mix Is composed ·
of materials
combined in the following
proportions by
A sh~t asphalt mixture is to be made weight
using the following percentages by weight
of total mix.
Crushed stone (sp.gr.
=2.70) 50%
Sand (sp.gr. =2.65)
39'/t
=
Sand (sp.gr. 2.68) 80%
Limestone dust (sp.gr. =
2.70) 5%
=
Filler (sp.gr. 2.70) 12%
Asphalt cement (sp.gr.
=1.01) 6%
Asphalt cement (sp.gr. 1.01) = 8%
. The compacted mixture has
a bulk sp.gr. of
~ compacted test specimen weighing 2.36 after rolling.
Determine the porosity of
40 9 in air was found to weigh 645 g the compacted mixture.
When suspended in water. What is the
PC>rosity of the compacted specimen.
,., :: :
Solution:
G=------
100
~l_1._4_&s__~P_r_o_bl_e_m______
::J
p p p p A bituminuous mat is to be
constructect
_c+ - •+ - l+ - •
Ge G, Gl G1 using an aggregate mixture which
i.
composed of 90 percent crushed
'OCk
G = -::-::----100
_ _ __ (sp.gr. = 2.60) and 10 percent
limestone
50 + 39 +~+~ =
dust (sp.gr. 2.70). What is the
apparent
2.70 2.65 2.70 1.01 or bulk specific gravity of the
bltuminuoui
G=2.44 mixture If the compacted mixture
will have
a porosity of 5 percent.
G-d
n=-
G Solution:
2.44-2.36 100
n=--- G=----
2.44
P,Gr + PdGd
n=0.0328
n =3.28% 100
G=----
90 10
- +-
2.60 2.70
f 1.464 Problem G =2.61 (absolute sp.gr.)
G-d .
An asphaltic concrete is mad~ up of the n= G (porosity)
following materials proportion by weight as
shown. 0.05 = 2.61 - d
=
Crushed stone (sp.gr. 2.67) 45% 2.61
=
Sand (sp.gr. 2.70) 44% 2.61-d=0.1305
Stone dust (sp.gr. = 2.60) 7%
d =2.4795 (apparent or bulk
sp.gr.)
Asphalt cement (sp.gr. = 0.98) 4%
Compute the weight of a 50 mm thick

surface course in kg/m2.
(. 1.466 Problem
j
Solution:
100 Data on a particular asphalt
concrete
G=------
p p p p paving mixture are as follows:
_c+-•+-d+-•
Ge G, Gd G, Materials
Specific Percent
100
Gravity by Weight
G=--------
45 44 7 4 Asphalt Ct!ment 1.02
6.3
-+-+-+- Limestone dust 2.82
9.0
2.67 2.70 2.60 0.98
40.0
Sand 2.65
G=2.5 absolute sp.gr. Crushed gravel 2.65
44.7
W=VxD
w=(1) 0.05 (2.5)(1000) For this mixture, determine the
theoritical
specific gravity of a voidless
mixture.
1
W= 125kglm
: ::--: .:
a :::: ib'll
so1ut1on:
'!""!!
100 ( 1_.468 ..
Problem
G== - p p
P, +~+ -• + - g The
proportion of the weight and specific
-G Gd G• Gg
• gravities of
a particular asphalt paving
100 mixture are
as follows.
G== -63 • 9.0 40 44.7 Materials
Specific Percent
. +-+-+-
1.02 2.82 2.65 2.65
Gravity by Weight
Asphalt
cement 1.00 10.4
G== 142 Limestrone
dust 2.80 12.2
Sand
2.60 28.8
Crushed
gravel 2.65 48.6
0.467 Problem , ·] Calculate
th·e weight of a square meter of
38 mm wearing
surface composed of this
From the given data of a particular asphalt sheet asphalt
mixture.
. concrete pavement mixture, compute the
percent voids, if the measured bulk Solution:
specific gravity is 2.37.
. 100
G=------
p p p p
Materials Specific Percent -•+-d+-•
+-g
;
Gravity by Weight G, Gd G,
Gg
Sand 2.64 40.0
100
Crushed Gravel 2.64 44.7 G=--------
10.4 12.2
28.8 48.6
Limestone dust - 2.82 9.0 -+-+-+-
Asphalt cement 1.02 6.3 1.00 2.80
2.60 2.65
G =2.26
(theoritical sp.gr. of asphalt mixture)
Solution: W=VD
I ,
..
V=%ofvoids
w=(1)(0.038)
(2.26)(1000)
V= (G-d) x100 W =85.BB kg
I m2
G
G= _.___ 100
_ __
(3 .469
~I
$!!
p p p p
g p;ji1em
-·+-ll+-d+_8
G, G9 Gd G1 During a
working day of 8 hr, a particular·
hot plant
produces enough asphalt
G:: 100
concrete to
lay 11500 m2 of wearing coul'Se
40 + 44.7 + ~ + 6.3 75 mm thick,
compacted. Mix proportions,
2.64 2.64 2.82 1.02 by weight,
sp.gr. are as follows:
G=2.41
Materials
Specific Percent
v- (2.41 - 2.37)
Gravity by Weight
- 2.41 x 100 Asphalt
c~ment 1.02 . 6
Liinestrone
dust 2.75 8
V=1.66% (percent of voids)
Sand
2.66 . 41
Crushed
stone. 2.77 45
IM a l*M**'ilfMt:'idl§FQ
The capacity of the mixer, counting all Solution:
ingredients Is 90 kN per batch. Determine 100
the number of batches that must be run to G= p
p
produce 11500 m2 of surfacing. ~+ -•
+-•
Gd
G, G,
Solution: 100
G= 100 G = 17 73
10
p p p p - +- +-
- •+ -d + -• + - c 2.80 2.60
1.02
G, Gd G, Ge G = 2.28
G= 6 8 41 45
100
d=~
-+-+-+-
B·C
1.02 2.75 2.66 2.77 d = 110
G=2.47 114. 60
W=VxD d =2.04 (bulk
sp.gr.)
w=11500 (0.075)(2.47)(9.81) =
V (G • d) x
100
W =20898.98 kN (required wt. of surfacing) G
. ed 20898.98 v = (2.28.
2.04) x 100
No. of batches requi11 = 2.28
90
No. of batches required =232.21 batches V = 10.53%
(percentage of voids in the
laboratory molded specimen)
11.470 Problem \
\ 1.~71
Problem \
The following data of a particular asphalt
concrete mixture. Compute the percentage The
following are the · ingredients to be
of voids in the laboratory molded used in
preparation of a trial mixture.
specimen.
Materials
Percentage Specific
Materials Specific Percent
of total mix gravity
Gravity by Weight
by weight
Limestone dust 2.80 17.0 Coarse
aggregate 47 .4 2.716(bulk sp.gr.)
Sand 2.60 73.0 Fine
aggregate 47.3 2.689(bulk sp.gr.)
Asphalt cement 1.02 10 Asphalt
cement 5.3 1.03
A cylindrical specimen of the mixture was Max.

specific gravity of paving
molded in the laboratory and weighted In mixture
=2.535
air and water as follows. Bulk
specific gravity of compacted
Weight of dry specimen in air= 110 grams
=
mixture
2.442
Weight of saturated surface • dry specimen
in air= 114 grams Compute
the bulk specific gravity of total
Weight of saturated specimen In aggregate.
-
water = 60 grams
•
1
_· -
::: :: :
-----
. ~iGH~_A:'_ ENGINEERING
I -
1
H::: -
soJUllOn: ( 1.473
Problem
BUik sp.gr.of td~ aggregate (G.,,)
P1 +P2 A
tabulati9n shown are materials and its
G.., :: p p
properties which are used In a compacted
+ 2.
_!.
paving
mixture:
d1 d2
Materials
'
47.3+47.4
Sp.gr. Bulk. . %of
Ip.gr. weight
G..,:: ~ + 47.4 Coarse
aggregate 2.69 48.2
2.689 2.716 Fine
aggregate 2.72 46.0
Asphalt
cement 1.2 7.8
G = 2.702
lb
Compute
the asphalt absorption of the
aggregate
expressed as percentage by
[1.472 Problem l weight of
aggregate. Max. sp.gr. of paving
mixture
Gmm = 2.54.
From the given data shown in the table for
a mix design for asphalt concrete. Solution:
p =100
(G. -G.,)Gb
Materials Bulk Sp.gr. %of bl
GII> G•
Sp.gr. weight
Asphalt cement 1.03 5.3 G.
=effective sp.gr. of aggregate
Fine aggregates 2.689 47.3 G., =bulk
sp.gr. of aggregate
Coarse aggregate 2.716 47.4
Gb =
sp.gr. of asphalt
Max. specific gravity of paving mixture pbl
=absorbed asphalt
Gmm=2.535
p -P
Bulk specific gravity of compacted mixture G = mm b
• .....!!!!!..
p
_p_
Gmb=2.442 .
b
Gmm Gb
Compute the effective ·specific gravity of
aggregate. , 100-
7.8
G =
=2.906
• 100
7.8
Solution:
---
2.54 1.02
G = pmm.pb G = p1
+P2
• p p
-...!!!!!... • _ b II> ~
p2
-
+-
Gmm Gb
G1 G2
P11111 =total loose mixture
G = 46.2
+ 46.0 = 2.705
G11111 =max. sp.gr. of paving mixture II> 46.2
46
-+-
G., =sp.gr. of asphalt 2.69
2.72
Pb =asphalt (percent8tJ6 by total wt. of mixture)
=100 (2.906- 2.705) (1.02)
p..
,2.705 (2.906)
G. = 1:·5.3 =2.761
5.3 P.. =2.61
2.535 - 1.03
IR=•· :: : :.
I 1.474_ Problem
.,
Effective asphalt content :
p p
Compute the effective asphalt content of a p
=P- ~
paving mixture which are as follows:
bl b 100
p
•
=47.3 + 47.4
Material• Bulk Sp.gr. %of
Ip.gr. Wllght p
=94.7
Asphalt cement 1.03 5.3
•
Fine aggregates 2.689 47.3
=5 3- 0.81(94.7)
Coarse aggregates 2.716 47.4 pbl
. 100
Max. sp.gr. of paving mixture Gmm 2.535 = P111

=4.53 (effective asphalt content)
Solution:
G
lb
= P,+P2
P,
- +-
p2
~f_1._4_7_s___P~ro_b_l_e_m_______ J
G1 G2
The
following ingredients are used in the
G =
47.3 + 47.4
preparation of an asphalt concrete paving
lb 47.3 47.4
mixture.
- - +- -
2.689 2.716
Materials Percentage of Total Specific
Glb =2. 702 (bulk sp.gr. of aggregate)
'Mix by Weight Gravity
Asphalt
cement 7.0 1.030
Mineral
filler 7.0 3.100
Fine
aggregate 30.0 2.690(bulk Ip.gr.)
p -P Coarse
aggregate 56 2.611(bulk 1p.gr.)
G= rrrn b
• p p
___!!!!!_ - _ b
Max.
specific gravity of the paving mixture
Grrrn Gb
Gmm=2.478
100 - 5.3 Bulk
specific gravity of the compacted
G• = 100 5.3 paving
mixture sample Gmb =2.384
2.535 1.03
Compute
the percentage of voids in the
G. = 2.761 (effedivesp.gr.of aggregate)
compacted mineral aggregates.
Solution:
Asphalt absorption of the aggregate :
G
= P, +P2 +P3
(G -G )G
p
be
= 100 •
G,.., G .
lb b ' sb
P, p 2 p3
91
+-
92
+-
93
p =100 (2.761 - 2.702) (1.03)
56+30+7
be 2.761 (2.702) G.,
= 56 30 7
- - +- -+-
Pbe =0.81 % by wt. of aggregate
2.611 2.690 3.10
G., =2.668
.
.!a.
;. · ·
aa
L
a;; a--
( 1.477
Problem ]
Fine
aggregates, coarse aggregates,
mineral
filler and asphalt cement are use
p ::30+56 for an
asphalt concrete paving mixture. If
' the
maximum specific gravity of the paving
p :: 86
' 2.384 (86) mixture
Gmm = 2.478 and the bulk specific
VMA:: 100 - 2.668 gravity
of the compacted paving mixture
sample
Gm11 = 2.384, compute the
VMA :: 23.154% of voids i1 the minerti aggregates
percentage of air voids In the compacted
mixture.
Solution:
~.476 Problem
V = 100
(G"'" -G,.)
compute the percentage of voids filled with A
G
asphalt if the maximum sp.gr. of paving
"'"
v =100
(2.478 - 2.384)
mixture Gmm = 2.535. Bulk sp.gr. of
A
2.478
compacted mix Ginb = 2.442. Percentage
weight of asphalt cement Is 5.3 while that VA =3.79%
(percentage of cir voids in the
of fine aggregates and coarse·aggregates
compacted mixture)
are 47.3 and 47.4 respectively. The bulk of
sp.gr. of aggregates Gsb = 2.703 and the
effective -.specific gravity of aggregate
G.. =2.761. ' (-1.478
Problem
Solution: The
proportions by weight and specific
. (G gravities
of each of the constituents of a
Air voids (VA)= G-Gnil ) 100
particular sheet asphalt paving mixture are
"'" as
follows:
v =(2.535- 2.442) 100
A 2.535 Materials
Specific Percent by
VA =3.67 (air voids)
Gravity Weight
Asphalt
cement 1.04 10.0
Percentage of voids in the mineral aggregate : Limestone
dust 2.82 16.5
Sand
2.66 73.5
VMA= 100- GnilP•
G.., A
cylindrical specimen of the mixture was
VMA =100 _ ~.442(47.3 +47.4) molded In
the laboratory and weighted In
air and
In water with the following results.
2.703
VMA= 14.44
Weight
of dry specimen in
Percentage of voids filled wfth asphalt : air
=111.95 grains
Weight of
saturated, surface-dry specimen
VFA= 100{VMA-V,)
In air=
112.09 grams
VMA Weight of
saturated specimen In
VFA = 100(14.44 - 3.6) =74.58 water =
61.20
14.44
___
---.........
I
l•I·*·* ;::: : : : :
Compute the bulk specific gravity of the
Bulk specific gravity
: Gs
compacted specimen. Mo
GB= vwB
Solution:
v8 =total volume of
aggregates including
Bulk sp.gr. =~ vol. of
absOfbed water
8-C
A =weight of dry specimen in air 1206
A =111.95 grcms GB =461.40(1)
B =weight of saurated,surface - dry specimen in air GB =2.614
B =112.09 grams
C=weight of saturated specimen in wrJ.er
~ C =61.20 grams
A
d=-
8-C The dry mass of a
sample of aggregates is
1978.6 grams. The
mass in a saturated
d =· 111.95 surface dry condition
Is ~005.4 grams. The
112.09 - 61.20 volume of aggregates
excluding the
d = 2.20 (bulk sp.gr. of compacted specimen) volume of absorbed
water is 732.6 .cml.
Compute the apparent
specific gravity.
I 1.479 Problem ) Solution:

Apparent sp.gr. : GA
W= VxD
The dry mass of a sample of aggregates is
1978.6 =7~2.6(1)(GA)
1206 grams. The mass is a saturated dry
condition is 1226.8 grams. The volume of GA= 2.70
the aggregates, excluding· the volume of
absorbed water is 440.6 cm3• Calculate the
bulk specific gravity of the sample of
aggregates. I 1.481
Problem J
Solution: The dry mass of a
sample of aggregates is
Wt. of water =1226.8 - 1206 1240 grams. The mass
in a saturated dry
condition is 1268.4
grams. The volume of
Wt. of water= 20.8 kg the aggregates
excluding the volume of
Vol. of water absorbed water is
446.2 cm3. Calculate the
Vol. of absorbed water = . f .... percentage
absorption.
Density o Wa1er
20.8
Vol. of absorbed water = 1 · Solution:
Mass of absorbed
water =1268.4 - 1240
3
Vol. of absorbed water =20.8 cm Mass of absorbed
water = 28.4 grams
Bulk volume =20.8 + 440.6
. 28.4 100
3
Percentage of
absorption =1240 x
Bulk volume= 461.40 cm
Percentage of
absorption= 2.29%
.-
1 A82
• the thickness of pavement, sub-base and base for a wheel load of 12000
lb., with the
p,slg~ data:
tollowin~8 y subgrade CBR 4 =
Base material CBR • 80
p1astlc c w for subgrade CBR = 15
. sand)' bOrTO
IJlion:
so~ the table shown:
usmg
- 0
3 4 5 6
CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIOJC.8.R.)
78911 5 2t 3t
• 51 6t 71 •
-
Step No. I
StepNo. 2
~ JJC >-...... '9--·

~
J---J
--· ·-· .....
·- -~ -----· --------- -
L.1
~--
StrpNo. 3 - n
- E~
~
___...-:::;;
5
~ ~~ ~
~
~,.,
~
- ~
-~
--~~
_ ....... ~ ..,,,,,....
... ..
~~ ~
--
.... ...........
·- v /';7
s ..1fflY
• i< V"
t
.Mr. ~
. :~ v
I./
~ ~
.JI'
. /.' / '
"""'
e
!i
v
/
~y
'l.lllC ~
~ ""/
~
15 v l/\'.li
/ vv
v· V/
!16-
/ /
C~J .R lmrt!forP.R.. . Soll 1't i -
I -1 ,A-7
J -4 A·l
20 I / / A s
A2
~
vHIPIY A-6
.. .- =-- ..
A-3
..
plMtk da3
-noo.:tY~ ~-;::--_:...-
~ 25
s-1,,..,
:)Ill)' aa~ -
Gniwl wida dilJ poorly pDd ~~-
u
Vallle •11;-oopdMion
r.cm
deM
_.
CIWMd...._A . .
~poor Poor
F* b:dad
I
I I
DFSIGN OF PAVEMENT AND THICKNF.SS BY CALIFORNIA METHOD
For subgrade CB{? =4, drawn a vertical line

Tlricw ss "quifYd
of tt1£'h material
until if will intersect the curve line (12000 lb.)
and from this intersection draw a horizontal
line and read on the leftside which is 19.4 in.
say 20 in.
For suit-base CBR = 15, draw a vertical line
until if intersects the curve line (12000 lb.) and
from this intersection draw a horizontal line
and read on the leftside 9.09 say 9 inches.
Therefore the thickness of the pavement is
3 Inches thickness of base material is
For the base material CBR 80 draw a =
6 Inches and the sub-base material is
vertical line until it intersects the ~rve line
11 Inches.
h12 lb.) and from this intersection draw a
'!00
onzonta/ line and read on the left side 3.3 in.
say 3 inches.
: -J¥H1fiti31Ml§l3iil'liiQ
f 1.483 Problem
Design the thickness of a rigid pavement (concrete) having a modulus of rupture

of concrete
:;:.ual to 700 psi. The modulus of subgrade reaction baaed on plate load
teat.is 200 pal. The
eel l~ad is 75000 lb. Use a factor of safety equal to 2.
Solution:
20
.5
t
..:
~
~Suut-t-t--t--1---Jf--~l-l,~!-}~~L-.4-...i.:.4..:~-L
From the table at left, locate 350

psi and draw a
Refer to table horizontal line until it intersects
the curve K =200
Using factor of safety =2 (modulus of ~ubgrade reaction).
From this point df'EW'
Modulus of rupture = 700 psi a vertical line until it intersects
the load line of 75000
Stress= ~ lb. At this point of intersection
draw a horzontal line
and read on the right side which
the required thickness
2
Stress =350 psi ,.of the pavement, 14.75 in. say 15
in.
=-- =-q
Widening Required for a
Pavement Width on Curves
Extra widening required:
1
W . nL
V
s 2R +
9.sJR
where:
W=extra widening required
solution: n = number of lanes
L =standard wheel base of
vehicle (6.1 m)
V =design speed (kph)
1.1 -
R =radius of horizontal curve
t.O -- -
0.9 - - - - - -·-------
I
I
: I
I
I
I
l 1.485 Problem
0 8 -- -- -- ~- -- - --i------ ~ -- -:-
• I I Determine the extra widening
required for a
I I
I I
pavement width of 7 m. (2
lanes, at 3.5
0.7 100 200 300 400 500 m/lane) on a horizontal curve
of radius 250
Modulus ofsubgrade reaction K· m, If the longest wheel base
of the vehicle
expected on the road Is 6.1
m. Design
.speed Is 70 kph., -
Solution:
nl2 V
W=-+-=
2R 9.sJR
From the diagram : w=2(6.1) 2
+ 70
C=1.0 2(250) 9.s"2&J
W =0.610 (0.305 m. on inner
Cl1d outside
Using afactor of safety of 2 : of the curve)
S= 700
2
s=350psi Length of Transition Curves
S iral and Cubic Parabola
s: 1.9'lNC
3
d2 L =0.0702V
• CR
350: 1.92(18000)(1)
d2 c = allowable rate of change
of centrifugal
acceleration in mlsec3
d=9.94 /nches
R =radius of the circular
curve
v =design speed in mis
Ls = length of transition
curve
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
,
11amu.t§&Eit4·cmg.rma•
, . Rate of Increase of ~
Centri etal Acceleration · [ 1 .~88 Problem ]
L~.4aa Problem A sharp horizontal curve has a

limiting
gredient of 6.7'/o. lfJhe radius
of the curve
is
The design speed for a spiral curve Is 100 50 meters, compute the
compensated
kph. The length ,of spiral ls 70 m. If the gredient after allowing for the
curve
radius of the central curve is 400 m, resistance.
determine the rate of increase of
centripetal acceleration in m/sec3. Solution:
76
Solution: Grade compensation = R
L =0.0702V
3
76
' RC Grade compensation = 50 =1.52%
3
70 = 0.0702(100) Limiting gredient =6.7%
400C Compensated gredient =6.7 - 1.52
=5.18%
C =2.51 ml sec"
Sidewalk Flow Evaluation·· ~ Crash Cushion . _
l 1.487 Problem Crash cushion are used to

decelerate
errant vehicles to a stop,
greatly reducing the
A newly constructed building at the l.T. severity of the head-on impact
with a fixed
Park is expected to add 1200 pedestrians object by spreading the energy of
impact over
to a 6 m. sidewalk during the peak 15 time and space. A variety of
crash cushions
minute period. The sidewalk has already a includes rows of barrels,
entrapment nets and
flow of 1800 pedestrians during the peak arrays of containers filled with
sand or water.
season. Because of parking meters, light
standards and other obstructions, subtract
0.8 m. from the actual sidewalk width to \ 1.489~ Problem
obtain the effective width. Compute the
new pedestrian volume per width of
A crash cushion is to be placed
along the
sidewalk per minute. elevated SCTE~ to safely
decelerate a 2000
kg ~ar traveling at 90 kph.
Laboratory
Solution:
studies have indicated that a
dynamic force
Total pedestrians = 1800 + 1200 =3000
of 50 kN i~ required to crush
one barrel
Pedestrian volume : 1 from ~ original diameter of 0.6
m. to
=5.2 m. width of sidewalk
for a 6 - 0.8 approximately 0.20 m. Determine
the
3000 num~r of barrels used as crush
cushion
p= =38.46 that wall stop the car.
15(5.2) .
5oladon: consumption of each barrel: tM 15'= ~
;cenergY LA
OY'18"' 60 - 0.20)(50)
fd == (O. Nm=kilo-joules LA =29.86m
fd == 20 k . of a car moving at 90 kph :
J(l16liC energy 3
tM 15' = ·5
y
90 =25 rrJs
v.... . -3.6 y =13.06m
KE::-m
1 v2 x =LA -y
2
x =29.86 - 13.06
KE :: ~(2()0())(25)2 x =16.BOm.
2
KE =625000 Joules
KN=625Kj ,~tress Rating of Jllla
No.of barrels required : Pavements - -
· N=~ =31.25 say 32 barrels 11.491 Problem
20
A pavement rating method uses 6
dlstreu
types to establish the DR (distress
rating).
No.
Weighing
flctort
[1.4SO Problem
Cor atlon
Alligator
6
2
crackln 4 points
1
Compute the minimum length in meters of Ravelin 2 ints
0.75
guardrail required to shield a hazard Longitudinal
located 8 m. from the edge of a road~y 4 points
1
crackin
which has two-way operation. The Ruttin 3 ints
1
guardrail is to be located 3.5 m. beyond the Patchin 3 lnts
1.5
pavement edge. The encroachment angle is
15'.
Determine the distress rating for
the
Solution: pavement (DR). .
Solution:
DR= 100 - ~]d • W}
DR= 100-((6)(2) + (4)(1) + 2(0.75) +
4(1)
+ 3(1) + 3(1 .5)]
DR= 100-29
DR= 71
<
£Jg~ of ro<uJ
I
l1i1l1•i1iii9!•. •: •. !1111~!!1!!!!!!! -:: :
• Priority Numbers of • { ~ .494
Probl~m _ G
Pavement Section Under

..____ Re air ·• _ __. .'
400 cars
parked between 7:00 a.mk. ~nd S
p.m. at
the parking lot of Ayala, Ma ati.
10%
parked for 2 hours .
L1.492 Problem ] 30'lo
parked for 4 hours
60%
parked for 1Ohours
A pavement section has been observed to If 10% of
parking bays are vacant
t the day and assuming an

exhibit cracks for approximately 20'/o of Its throughou
86 d t rmlne th
length. About 15% of the section has efficiency
factor of O. , e e e
previously been patched. The ADT number of
parking bays In the parking lot
(average daily traffic) Is 3400 and the cost of Ayala,
Makati.
per km Is P6800. The priority ranking Is 8
for major structural problem only. What
Solution:
priority ranking would this section Space-
hours of demand:
received?
D
=0.10(400)(2) + 0.30(400)(4) + 0.60(400)(10)
Solution: o
=2960 space-hours
priority r3-lking for Total
space~hours (assuming 10% vacancy)
Priority number =cost / km + major structural
ADT problem only
o
=2960 + 2960(0.10)
D =
3256
6800
Priority number = +8 3256 =
1.0(N)(0.86)
3400
Priority number =10 N =379
spaces
Therefore, this section will receive a priority of 10.
( 1
-:,~95 Problem - , s -· ) .
. Parking Ate.a~.~ ~n~ Sp~.~~ ~1
Around
600 cars parked between 9:00 a.m.
••Ak Ho.ur~'·oemand.'~~\..'l.~:r to
7:00 p.m. in a parking area of Manila
Hotel.
I 1.493 Problem
8% parked for 2 hours
30'/o parked for 4 hours
62'/o parked for 10 hours

A ·parking are~ of Solaire Casino had 3QO ·
12%
of parking bays are vacant throughout
cars parked between 8 a.m. and 6 p.m.
the
day and the demand is expected to
increase by 5% per year over five years.

28o/o parked for 4 hours
Assuming an efficiency factor of 80%,

determine . the number of parking bays

Determine the space-hours of demand.
required to accommodate the cars.

Solutiot;1:
Solution:
Space-hours of demand:
Spa~hours of demand:
D = 0.12(300)(2) + 0.28(300)(4) + 0.60(300)(10)
D
=0.08(600)(2) + 0.30(600)(4) + 0.6(600)(10)
D = 2208 space-hours D
=4416 space-hours
-t#§ii§iii#i§d";•l!I!•;•, 11!
I!!!
- •
. • ::~~1!!!1!~:11:~:":.:.-~luf;•111l1
spge6·hours if 12% are vacant:
D:: 4416 + 4416(0.12)
= 946 space-hours
0 4
space-hours of demand in 5 years:
D:: (1 .05)s (4946) B
0 1 -38
0
=6313 space-hours
I
Additional space-hours =6313 - 4946
I
I Di
Additional space-hours =1367
I 38
No. ofparking bays required:
o.aoN (1 O) =1367
N=111 spaces
speed Limits of Vehicles at

. - Intersections ·-
[1.496 Problem ]
By ratio and
proportion :
Osmena Blvd. and P. Del Rosario St. ,
intersect perpendicularly. The minor road
traffic (P. Del Rosario St.) is controlled by a
02 = 38
yiel~ sign. Speed limit of Osmena Blvd. is
01 01 -10
72 kph. Both roads are 2-lane roads. A
building is located 38 m. from the
O = 108.25(38)
2
centerline of the outside lane of Osmena 108.25-10
Blvd.,·and 10 m. from the centerline of the 02 =41.87 m.
nearest lane of P. Del ·Rosario St.
Determine the speed limit on P. Del Rosario
v2
St. to avoid collision. Assume friction 0 =V + 2-
2 2 2g f
factor =0.35 and perception and reaction
time of the driver to be 2.5 sec.
22
41.87 =v2 (2.5) +
v
Solution:
2(9.81)(0.35)
v2 v + 11.17V 287.52 =o
2
-
D =Vt+-L 2 2
1 1 2g(f)
v =10.42 mis
2
72
V1 =l6 =20mts v2 =10.42(3.6)
01 =20(2.5) + (20)2 V2 =31.52 kph (speed
limit of P. Del Rosario St.)
I 2(9.81)(0.35)
; D, =108.25 m.
r 10_~ • • • • • • • •-•-•-• • HIGHWAY- ENGINEERING---:
- - - - -- - -
C) 't,,,,. = minimum yellow

interval at an
I Traffic Signal Timing at' intersection.
Isolated Intersections W+L
V
1'
... =t+
v
+-
2a
t =perception reaction
time in sec.
v= speed limit in mis
=
L length of vehicle in
meters
----- --- - =
a constant rate of
braking deceleration
in mls2
w=width of intersection
in meters
~l~_._4_9_7___P_ro_b_l_e_m________ J
The width of an intersection
of two
perpendicular roads is 12 m.
Maximum
L
allowable speed on the
approach road ts 48
kph. Average length of the
vehicle is 6 m.
long. If the constant rate of
braking
deceleration is 3.4 m/s2,
perception.
A) Xe =the distance within which a vehicle reaction time = 2.5 sec.,
traveling at the speed limit V during the
11
yellow interval 'l'min" sec4 cannot stop <D Compute the minimum yellow
interval
before encroaching on the intersection (caution signal) in sec.
Vehicles within this distance at the starl (2) Determine the distance of
a vehicle
of the yellow interval will pave to go from the intersection
where it has to
through the intersection. stop_ to avoid collision
when the
caution signal is on.
 Determine the distance of
the vehicle
from the intersection
allowed to go
where: through the intersection
during the
V = speed limit in mis yellow interval.
Tmin = minimum yellow interval at an
intersection in sec. Solution:
W =width of intersection in meters
=
L length of vehicle in meters
B) . Xo = distance frem the intersection ----

where vehicles has to stop to avoid
collision. 6m
vz
6m ·
X =Vt+-
w =12m
o 2a
1-H~~~'::'WAY ENG_H\IEERING
l~
. --
CD Min. yellow interval at the intersection Marlal Luisa

Subdivision contains 300
W+L V
'tri\. = t +v+ 2a
households with an
average 6 persons and
3 cars for each
household. Determine the
average number of
trips per day In that
v = ~ =13.33m/s subdivision.
3.6
a =3.4 m/sec 2 (constant braking deceleration) Solution:
t =2.5 sec. (perception - reaction time) T =0.80 + 1.2P + 2.'2A
12 + 6 13.33 T = 0.80 + 1.2(6) +
2.2(3}
1
tri\. = + 13.33 + 2(3.4)
T = 14.60
trips/household/day
t .
im.
=4,31 sec. No. of trips in the
entire subdivision:
N = 14.6(300)
® Distance of vehicle from the intersection N = 4380 trips/day
where it has to stop to avoid collision
when the caution signal is on
v2
XO =Vt+-
XO
=
2a
13 33
13.33(2.5) + ( · )
2(3.4)
2
r ~
eduction of
Transit.,
Passengers
Due t o .
Increase in
Fares
x
§±£2£2
X0 =59.46 m. from the intersection Problem
@ Distance of the vehicle from the The current ridership

is ·2000/day at a fare
intersection allowed to go through the of P6, if the fare Is
Increased to PS due to
intersection during the yellow interval increase in the prices
of gasoline and
Xe =V 'tmin - (W + L) diesel, compute the
new ridership If for
each 1'/o increase In
fares, there will be 1/3
Xe= 13.33(4.31) -(12 + 6) of 1o/o reduction In
ridership.
Xe= 39.45m.
Solution:
-El&ticity of
Demand :.
Estimate of Trips Per Day E(V) = · percentage
change in volume
percentage
chnage in service level
~[1_.4_9_8___P_ro_b_le_m_&J______ __.I · 1 llV/V
----
!lx=8-6=2
3 llx Ix
A multiple regression analysis shows the 1 x llV
following relationship for the number of
----
3 v llx
trips per household. . 1 6 ll v
T =O.ao·+ 1.2P + 2.2A
-=-·-
3 · 2000 2
where: fl v= 2(2000) =222.22
say 222
T=no. of trips per household per day 18
P=no. of persons per household New ridership =?000 -
222
A =no. of cars per household New ridership =1778
passengers
: ::: :
-.
.......- Carpool Lanes .....,__ Solution:
f 1.soo Problem
- zz
The capacity of an existing highway Is 1500

vehlhr with average vehicle occupancy of
J
!
l-----acJ~:------
1
L-
- - -- - - .......
1.2 people. A carpool lane has been I
~II
Introduced to lessen the traffic during peak
hours. The carpool lane Is restricted to
carry 3 or more passengers. If the carpool
lane carries 800 vehicles/hour, determine
__,
the equivalent numbers of vehicle per hour 1
-f
h, Exit Ramp
without carpool lane. Assume the growth I
~. tV2=56 kph
rate Is 4% in the 6 months of operation
without a carpool lane.
'/ I
Solution:
No. of passenger/vehicle using the carpool
,-n'ct~
t V1=105 kph
lane: I
N1 =800(3) =2400 v 2 _y2
No. ofpassenger/vehicle without carpool lane: s= 1 2
N2= 1500(1.2)(1.04) 2g(f + G)
N2 =1872 passengers/veh
=
Diff. in passenger/vehicle 2400 - 1872 v =105
1
Diff. in passenger/vehicle = 528 passengers 3.6
528 V1 = 29.17 mis
Diff. in vehicles.lhr = =440 vehicles I hr
1.2
v =56-
2 3.6
f · Velocity of Cars at Exit f V2 = 15.56 mis
Ramps from Expressway ..
I 1.so1 Problem
A motorist is driving at a speed of 105 kph a
f =-
along the NLEX. He intends to leave the g
expressway using an exit ramp going to
San Fernando, Pampanga with a maximum f = 3.4
•peed of 56 kph. At what point on the 9.81
expressway should the motorist steps on
the brakes in order to reduce his speed to f =0.35
the maximu"! allowed by the exit ramp just
before entenng the ramp if the rate of s= 2
(29.17) -
(15.56) 2
deceleration Is 3.4 mlsec2. The section of 2(9.81)(0.35
+ 0.03)
the expressway has a downward grade of
3%. S =81.65m
.-.·~ concrete Mixture -~ . @ Required weight of dry sand
Weight of concrete =wt. of
cement and water
~.502 CE Board May 2014] + wt. of dry
rodded aggregate
+ weight of sand
The basic data for proportioning trial 23.6(1) =4.61+5.10 + w.
mtxture for normal weight concrete with an W,= 13.B9kN
average 28 day compressive strength of 24
MPa are as follows: (J.so3 CE Board May 19_8
9 ]
Slump= 75 mm to 100 mm <D Which of the following gives the
water-cement ratio =0.62 number of bagi of cement
required for
Quantity of water (wet mixing)= 180 kglm3 a 25 cu.m. of concrete of
1:2.5:5 mix.
Volume of dry-rodded coarse with the following data
given.
aggregates = 0.37 m3
Unit weight of concrete =23.~ kNJm3 Materials Specific Gravity
Density
Unit weight of coarse aggregate =13.7 kN/m3 Cement 3.10 1506
kglm3
For 1 cu.m. of concrete
Sand 2.65 1680
kglm3
(f) What is the combined weight of cement Gravel 2.50 1525
kglm3
and water in kN?
~ What Is the weight of dry-rodded coarse Assume: 1 bag per 0.028 cu.m. of
aggregate in kN? concrete. Use 26 liters of water per
bag of
·(I) Find the required weight of dry sand in cement.
kN. ~ Which of the following gives
the
quintlty of sand, required for
a 25
Solution: cu.m. of concrete of 1:2.5:5
mix. with
<D .Combined weight of cement and water the following data given.
weig. ht ow
f ater= 180(9.81) (I) Which of the following gives
the
1000 quantity of gravel.
Weight of water =1.7658 kN
Solution:
Water cement ratio =0.62 <D Number of bags of cement
required:
Weight of water =0.
62 Cement: 1525(0.028)(5) =0.0136
cu.m.
Weight of cement 2.50(1000)
1.7658 .
. ht of cement = -
Weig - Sald: 1680(0.028)(2.5) =0.0444
cu.m.
0.62 2.65(1000)
Weight of cement =2.848 kN
.
Gravel: 1525(0.028)(5) =0.0854
cu.m.
Combined wt. of cement Clld water 2.50(1000)
=1.7658 + 2.848 Wat.er. 26 liters =0.026
cu.m.
= 4.61/cN
·1
Total vol. of concrete/bag
=0.1694 cu.m. rr
® Weight of dry-rodded coarse aggregate
W=VD No. of bags of cement needed =
25 f
w=0.37(13.7)
0.1694
W= 5.10kN No. of bags of cement needed =
147.58 bags 'I
..
'
1;
'
fj
:
<2> Quantity of sand required:
25
Number of bags cement=
0.1447
Vol. of sand=147.58(2.5)(0.028)
Vol. of sand =10.33 cu.m Number of bags cement =
112.17 bags
@ Quantity of gravel: ® Volume of sand required:
Vol. of gravel= 147.58(5)(0.28) Sand= 172.77 (2) (.0283)
Vol. of gravel = 20.66 cu.m. Sand =9.78 cu.m.
@ Volume of stone required:
Stone =172.77 (4) (.0283)
[ ~-5~4 _ CE Boa~d ~ov._ 19~1! Stone =19.56 cu.m.
© Which of the following givet the @ Volume of water required:
number of bags of cement required for Water= 172.77(26)
a 25 cu.m. of concrete of 1:2:4 mix with Water =4492.021iters
the following data.
Water =4.492cu.m.
Cement: Sp. gr.=3.10
Density = 1506 kglm'
Sand: Sp.gr.=2.65
Density=1680 kg/ml I 1.sos CE Board Aug.
197!']
Stone: Sp.gr.=2.50
Density=1525'kglm3 © Which of the following
gives the
number of bags of cement
required for
Use 26 lite" of water per bag of 10 cu. m. of concrete of
1:2:3 mixed ifs
cement. gallons of water per bag of
cement are
used.
~ Which of the following gives the
volume of sand required. One bag of cement (1
cu. ft.)
~ Which of the following gives the =94 lb., Sp.gr.=
3.10
volume of stone required. One cu. ft. of sand
weights
® Which of the following gives the = 105 lb., sp.
gr.= 2.65
volume of water requir~. One cu.ft. of gravel
weighs
= 100 lb., Sp.gr.:
2.70
Solution:
<D Number of bags of cement: ~ Which of the following
gives the
Materials - Volume volume in cu. m. of
sand .
Q) Wh~ch of the following
gives the
Cement =1506(.0283) _ volume in cu. m. of
gravel .
3.10(1000) -: 0.01.37 cu.m.
Sand= 1680(.283)(2) _ _ Solution:
. 5(
26 1 000) - 0.036 cu.m. CD Number of bags of
cement required:
Stone= 1525(.0283)(4) _
c - 94 (1)
ement - 3.10 (62.4)
= 0.086 cu. ft.
2.50(1000) - 0.069 cu.m.
Sand - 105 (2)
Water= = 0.026 cu.m. - 2.65 (62.4)
= 1.270 cu.ft.
Total volume =0.1447 cu.m. Gravel - 100 (3)
- 2.70 (62.4)
= 1.781 cu.ft.
5
water = -7.48 = 0.668 cu.ft. ® Requirement in kg of gravel per
cu.m.:
Weight of gravel = 360 (3.25)
Total volume =4.205 cu.ft. Weight of gravel= 1170 kg
Volume of concrete = 10 cu. m. ® Water-cement ratio of the
concrete mix:
Volume of concrete= 352.88 cu.ft. Volume of water
352.88 137
Bags of cement = 4.205
=1000
sags of cement = 83.92 bags =0.137 cu.m. = 137 liters
® Volume in cu. m. of sand: water cement ratio
sand = 83.92(2) 137
=T = 14.1 llters/bag of
cement
Sand= 167.84 cu.ft.
Sand = 4. 76 cu.m.
@ Volume in cu. m. of gravel:

Gravel =83.92(3) .
r1.507 CE Board May 1989
Gravel= 251 .76 cu.ft. The following are the given data
required
Gravel =7.13 cu.m. for a 25 cu.m. of concrete of
1:2.5:5 mix.
Materials Specific Gravity
Density
1506 kg/m3
[1.so&, CE Board ~ay 1995 Cement 3.10
Sand 2.65
1680 kglm3
A 1.0 cu.m. design mix was proportioned at Gravel 2.50
152~ kglm3
1:2.25:3.25. Water content was specified at
137 kg. per cu.m. maximum, and cement <D Which of the folloWing gives the
content is 9 bags per cu.m. (40 kg. per bag number of bags of cement
required.
of cement). The specific gravity of cement ~ Which of the· following gives the
Is 3.15 and that of the fine sand is 2.65 and volume of sand needed for the
mixture.
coarse aggregates Is 2.68. ~ Which of the following gives the
volume of gravel needed for the
<D Which of the following gives the mixture.
requirement in kg. of fine sand per ® Which of the following gives the
cu.m. volume of water needed for the
mixture
~ Which of the following gives the in liters.
requirement In kg of gravel per cu.m.
~ Which of the following gives the water· Assume: 1 bag per 0.028 cu.m. of
cement ratio of the concrete mix ? concrete. Use 26 liters of water
per bag of
cement. ·
Solution:
© Requirement in kg. of fine sand per cu.m.: Solution:
Weight of eement = 9 (40) CD Number of bags of cement n~ed:
Weight of eement =360 kg/cu.m 1506 (0.028) (5)
Cement: 3.10 (1 OOO) = 0.0136
cu.m.
Ratio of mixture = 1:2.25:3.25
Weight of fine sand = 2.25 (360) 1680 (.028)(2.5) -
0 0444
Sand: 2.65 (1 OOO) - .
cu.m.
Weight of fine sand = 810 kglcu.m
a
IFMHW'FF?lf'i?i'""'
Gravel: 1525 (.028) (5} = 0 0854 cu.m.
2.50 (1 000) .
((? :
ii2~02~
Water: 26 liters = 0.026 cu.m. 6m
CD Which of the following
gives the Cost Of
Total vol. of concrete/bag= 0.1694 cu.m. cement.
~ Which of the following
gives the Cost Of
25
sand. . .
No. of bags of cement needed = 0.1694 ~ Which of the followmg
gives the cost Of
gravel.
No. of bags of cement needed
=147.58 bags . Solution:
<D cost of cement. .
® Volume of sand needed for the mixture. Vol. of concrete
required =4 (6) (0.2)
Vol. of concrete
required =4.8 cu.m.
Vol. of sand= 147.58(2.5)(0.028)
Vol. of sand =10.33 cu.m Cement =4.8 (9)
.
=43.2 say 44 bags @
110 =P4fo
@ Volume of gravel needed for the mixture.
Vol. of gravel= 147.58(5)(0.28) ® Cost of sand. ·
Sand =4.8 (0.5) =2.4 cu.m
@500
Vol. of gravel= 20.66 cu.m.
Sand = P1200
© Volume of water needed for the mixture in @ Cost of gravel.
liters. Gravel =4.8(1.0) =4.8
cu.m @450
Vol. of water= 26 {147.58) Gravel = P2160
Vol. 'of water = 3837.08 liters
f 1.509 Problem
_ J
A one cu.m. design mix was
proportioned
at 1:2.5:5. Water content
was specified at a
A proposed concrete pavement has max. of 140 per bag of
cement and cement
dimensions of 4 m. wide and 6 m. long by content is 8.5 bags per
cu.m. (40 kg per
200 mm in thickness. Unit cost for the 40 bag of cement). Specific
gravity of .cement,
kg/bag of cement is P110.00. Unit cost of sand and gravel is 3.16,
2.61 and 2.8
sand and gravel are P500 and P450 per respectively.
cu.m. respectively. Use the table of
concrete proportions per cu.m. of concrete. CD Which of the following
gives the weight
Use class A mixture of this type of of moist sand if it is
found to have 5%
pavement. free water.
CONCRETE PROPORTIONS ~ Which of the following
gives the
amount of water to be
added in kg if the
Clal1 Mixture Cement Sand Gravel
40kg 50kg cu.m cu.m
sand is found to have
5°1. free water.
~ Which of the following
gives the
AA 1:1.5:3 12 9.5 0.50 1.0
~ 1:2:4 9.0 7.0 0.50 1.0 amount of water to be
added in kg if the
B 1:2.5:5 7.5 6.0 0.50 1.0 coarse aggregate is to
have 2'
c 1:3:6 6.0 5.0 0.50 1.0 absorption.
=:: :••:=.~.--.::.:.=--:.:
.:11»tt1IB1111l11
Solution:
<D No. of bags of cement
required:
Cement · 94(1)
· 3.10(62.4)
0.49 .a..1
n-
Sand 110(2)
2.65(62.4)
= 1.33 ft3
Gravel 100(4)
2.60(62.4)
= 2.47 ft3
® Amount of water to be added if sand has 7
S% tree water:
Water
m
.= 0.94 tt3
excess water =892.5 - 850 =42.5 kg Vol. ot concrete/bag
Amount of water to be added =140 - 42.5
= 5.23 ft3
Amount of ~ater to be added = 97.5 kg
Volume of concrete
=25(3.28)3
. Volume of concrete
=882.19 ft3
@ Am<>unt of water to be ad_ ded if coarse
8
aggregate is to have 2% absorption: No. of bags needed=
~~2~9
Weight of coarse aggregate =340(50)
No. of bags needed=
169 bags
Weight of coarse aggregate = 1700 kg
Water absorbed= 0.02(1700) = 34 kg
Amount of water to be added = 140 + 34 ® Oamp loose voiume of
sand:
Amount of water to be added= 174 kg Dry volume= 169(2) =
338 ft3
Damp loose volume =
338(1.20)
:z::
Damp loose volume
=405.6 ft3
(. 1.510 Problem
•
405 6
Damp loose volume =
·
(3.28)3
It is required to produce 25 cu.m. of
concrete mix of 1:2:4 using 7 gallons of Damp loose volume
=11.49 m3
water per bag of cement with the following
data.
@ Damp loose volume
of gravel:
Materials Specific Gravity Density Dry volume= 169(4)
Cement 3.10 94pcf
Sand 2.65 · 110 pcf Dry volume = 676
tt3
Gravel 2.60 100 pcf Damp loose volume=
676(1.06)
Damp loose volume=
716.56 tt3
<D Which of the following gives the
number of bags of cement required.
716.56
Damp loose volume
= (3.28)3
~ Which of the following gives the damp
loose volume of sand needed in cu.m. if Damp loose volume
= 20.31 m3
~ the.bulking factor of sand is 120.
Which of the following gives the damp
~ose volume of gravel needed in cu.m.
the bulking factor of gravel is 1.06.
,.,,, : ; --IfH*fit'll'H!Sliiil'S'*'l
[ 1.511 Problem J ® Weight of gravel
needed:
Wt. of gravel = 156(3)
( 100)(1.02)
Wt of gravel= 47736
lb.
A concrete mixture has a proportion of
1:2:3. The water requirement per bag of - 47736(9.81}
cement is 6.5 gallons. The volume of - 2.2
concrete under construction is 20 cu.m. =212859 N
Materials Specific Gravity Density =212.86 kN
Cement 3.14 94pcf
Sand 2.65 110 pcf @ Weight of water to be
added at the mixer:
Gravel 2.60 100 pcf Amount of mixing
water that is contained
in the aggregates
CD Which of the following gives the weight
of sand needed in kN if it contains 5% =156(2)(110)
(0.05) + 156(3)(100)(0.02)
of moisture. =2652 lb.
~ Which of the following gives the weight
156{6.5)(62.41
of gravel needed In kN If it contains 2% Total weight of
water= 7.48
of moisture.
~ Which of the following gives the weight
=
Total weight of water
8459 lb.
of the water to be added to the mixer in Amount of water to be
added to the mixer
kN.
~ 8459 . 2652
Solution: =25894 N
<D Weight of sand needed: =2S.89kN
94{1}
Cement : 3.14(62.4) • = 0.48 ft 3
Sand
11Qi2}
2.65(62.4)
1QQ{3}
= 1.33 fl3 Problem
a t
··
•'
J
Gravel
2.60(62.4) = 1.85 ft3 A concrete is to contain
6.5 bags of cement
per cu. yard and is to
have a water cement
6.5
Water ·· - = 0.87 tt 3 ratio of 6 galloni per
bag. The dry volume
7.48
of sa.nd in the mix is to
be one half that of
Vol. of concrete/bag = gravel.
4.53 fl3
Materials Specific
Gravity Density
20(3.28)3
No. of bags needed = . Cement 3.14
94pcf
4 53
Sand 2.65
108 pcf
No. of bags needed = 1~6 bags Gravel 2.65
102 pcf
Weight of sand = 156(2)(110)(1.05)
Weight of sand = 36036 lb <D Which of the following
gives the
proportion of the mix
based on dry
3
= ~~] 6
(9.81) aggregates.
(2) Which of the following
gives the weight
= 160688 N of the sand.
= 160.69 kN ~ Which of the following
gives the weight
of gravel.
..
:·: ii . :¢:
::: :
solution: .. ~ Weight of sand
portion of the mix. = 6.42(2.65)
(62.4)
© ~~u.yd =27 cu.tt. = 1062 /b.
94 = 0.48 ft3
cement : .. 3.14 (62.4) @ Weight of gravel
6
= 0.80 ft3 =12.26 (2.65)
(62.4)
water f.4a =2027 lb
=--
1.28 ft3
,Absolute vol. of cement paste in a cu.yd of

3
I_1.513 Problem
J
concrete =6.5 (1.28) = 8.32 ft
,Absolute vol. of mixed sand and gravel Given the following data for a
concrete mix
=27 - 8.32 = 18.68 ft3 of 1:2:4. Use 6.5 gallons of
water per bag
of cement One bag of cement 1
cu.ft. =
108 3 Volume of concrete • 40 cu.m.
Vol. of sand= 2.65(62.4) = 0.65 ft
102 Materials Specffic
Gravity Density
Vol. of gravel = 2.65(62.4) = 0.62 ft3 Cement 3.11
50%
Sand 2.60
48%
Gravel 2.76
53%
Since 1 cu.ft. of sand is to be mixed with
2 cu.ft. of gravel. <D Which of the ·following
gives the weight
Absolute vol. of gravel = 0.62(2)
of cement In kg.
Absolute vol. of gravel = 1.24 ft3 ~ Which of the following gives
the weight
Vol. of sand and gravel= 0.65 + 1.24 of sand in kg.
Vol. of sand and gravel = 1.89 ft3 ~ Which of the following gives
the weight
0.65 (18.68) of gravel In kg.
Absolute vol. of sand = 1.89
Absolute vol. of sand= 6.42 ft3 Solution:
Absolute vol. of gravel = 18.68 - 6.42 © Weight of cement:
Absolute vol. of gravel = 12.26 ft3 Cement 1 (0.50)
= 0.50 tt3
Sand 2(0.52)
= 1.04 tt3.
Required dry vol. of aggregate per cu.yd of
Gravel 4(0.47)
= 1.88 tt3
concrete:
6.5
- 6.42 - 9 88 ft3 Water
= 0.87 tt3
Sand - 0.65 - . 7.48
Total vol./bag
Gravel ~ ~:: =19.77 ft3
- 4.29 tt3
Dry vol. of sand per bag of cement No. of bags of cement

needed
9.88 - 40(3.28)3 - 329
b
= s.s = 1.52 cu.ft. - 4.29 -
ags
Dry vol. of gravel per bag of cement
19.n Wt. of cement = 0.50(3.11)
(62.4)(329)
=M = 3.04tt.
Wt. of cement= 31924 lb.
Required proportion is 1 : 1.52 : 3.04 Wt. of cement= 14,511 kg
® Weight of sand
= 1.04 (2.6) (62.4) (329)
[ 1,515
P~blem & , :::J
= 55,512 lb on a paving job for
the skyway project In
= 25,233 kg Tagulg, Rizal, it
is required to detenn1nt
the length of
pavement that can be laid In 8
@ Weight of gravel hr-day, If we allow
1 ~ min per batch. The
=1.88 (2.76) (62.4) (329) thickness of the
pavement is 8 Inches Ind
=106524 lb the width is 26 ft.
Water-cement ratio is 5
=48,420kg gallons/bag of
cement. Use 1:2:4 mixture.
Materials
Specific Gravity Unit Weight
f 1.s1~ 2
* Probl~m - a
.J Cement
3.10 94 pct
Sand
2.65 110 pct
On a paving job the following materials
are to be used in the proportions 1:2:3 by
Gravel
2.60 ·100 pcf
weight with a water-cement ratio of 6
gallons of water per bag of cement.
Determine the quantities of materials Solution:
Materials Volume (cu.ft.)

required per mile of pavement using 8-in
uniform thickness and 24 ft width. 94(1)
=0.49
Cement: 3.10(62.4)
Materials Specific Gravity Unit Weight 110{2)
Sand:
= 1.33
Cement 3.14 94 pcf 2.65(62.4)
Sand 2.65 110 pcf 100{4}
Gravel 2.60 100 pcf Gravel: 2.60(62.4)
= 2.47
5
Solution: Water:
= 0.67
7.48
Materials . Volume (cu.ff.)
. 94(1)
Cement: 3.14(62.4) =0.48 Total
volume = 4.96 tt3
110(2)
Sand: 2.65(62.4) = 1.33
.
8(60)
100(3) No. of batches = 1.
5
Gravel: 2.60(62.4) =1.85
No. of batches = 320
batches
6
Water: 7.48
- =0.80
Total vol. of
concrete for 320 batches
Total volume = 4.46
=320(4.96)
Vol. of concrete needed:
=1587.2ft
8
5280 W(24) =84480 cu.ft. 1587.2 =L (
12
)
(26}
84480 L =91.57 ft/day
No. of bags needed = 4.46
No. of bags needed= 20308 bags
Sand= 20308 (2) = 40616 cu.ft
Gravel = 20308 (3) = 60924 cu.ft
::;
: 11411
(f!i&
£
Problem ]
A concrete mixture of 1:2:3 is to be'used in'

[1.517 Problem
1
concrete pavement the sand has a loose . Types of Joints in cement
concrete
8 pavements
weight of 115 pcf and a moisture content of
i2'/o based on surface dry-weight. How I. Expansion join
many cubic yards of sand will be needed II. Contracting joint
per mile of pavement, using 8 inches Ill. Warping joint
uniform thickness and 24 ft wide. Use 6.5
· gallons per bag of cement. a) I and II only
b) I and Ill only
Materials Specific Gravity Unit Weight c) II and Ill only
Cement 3.10 94pcf Q'> d) All' of the above
. Sand 2.65 115 pcf
Gravel 2.60 110 pcf
[ 1.518 Problem
Solution: The layer of the pavement
which finally
carries the load from the
road is _ .
Materials Volume (cu.ft.)
94{1} a) sub-base
Cement: 3.10(62.4) =0.49 b) wearing surface
115(2} c) base course
Sand: 2.65(62.4) = 1.39 Q' d) sub-grade
110{4}
Gravel: 2.60(62.4) = 2.03
6.5 I. 1.s19 Problem
Water: 7.48 =0.87
The component of the road
structure which
Total volume/bag = 4.78 tt3 receives the traffic load
and transfer it to
the subgrade.
a) sub-base
Total vol. of concrete needed = 5280 W(23) b) wearing surface
Q' c) base
Total vol. of concrete needed= 84480 cu.ft d) formation
84480
No. of bags needed=
4.78
- 2¥£
No. of bags needed = 17.674 bags l1.s20 Problem

Vol. of sand needed = 17674(2}(1.12) Soil stabilized roads with
cement/lime
Vol. of sand needed= 39589.76 cu.ft. cannot be used as:
39589.76 a) sub-base
Vol. of sand needed,-
27 ~ b) wearing surface
Vol. of sand needed =1466.29.cu.yards c) base course
· d) sub-grade
IB•* , 2: :
::: ::::
[ 1.521 Problem -- --- ~
J ( 1 .525
Problem
B~umen stabilization is suitable when the A layer consisting

of properly designed
soil is made up of: mix od course
aggregate fine aggregate, a
filler and a
bituminous binder Is called:
Q'> •) sandy soils
b) clayey soils a)
bitumen carpet
c) silty soils b)
penetration macadam
d) peaty soils ~ c)
asphaltlc concrete
d)
bitumen macadam
j 1.s22 Problem j
A prime coat over a road surface consists 11.s~~
Problem
of a - . . A mixture of
bitumen, fine aggregate and
q:- a) thin film of low viscosity filler in suitable
proportion heated to about
bituminous cutback 2oo·c in special
cookers and laid is called:
b) application of bitumen over which
stone chippings are spread a)
surface dressing
c) thin application of bitumen blinded ~ b)
mastic asphalt
by sprinkling sand c)
asphaltic concrete
d) grant of bitumen over which key d)
bitumen carpet
stones are laid
f 1.527
Problem
f 1.523 ~robl!!m
The
layered ,structure placed over a soil
Qn~ or more layers of crushed ag.gregate, sub-grade for
forming a road is called:
which are bonded by bituminous materials
and a seal coat laid on top is called: a) sub-
base
a) tar carpet b) sub-
grade
b) penetration macadam c) base
c) bituminous macadam ~ d)
pavement
~ d) surface dressing
( 1.s2a Pr
oblem
f 1.524 Problem
A pavement which
has negligible flexural
A 20 mm thick premix bitumen layer over strength is called:
which is laid a seal coat is called:
a) surface dressing a) . rigid
b) penetration macadam ~ b)
flexible
~ c) bitumen carpet c)
macadam
d) bitumen macadam d) all
of the above
: ,.,,
~9 Problem r-1.533 Problem
~ Of _ -- \
er of natural 1011 over which the A road made of coarse
aggregate
·Th8
pavem
!nt
18
of a toad ls laid ls called: mechanically intertocked ~Y
rolling and
bonded together with
screening dust ls
cailed
« a) sub-grade
b) sub-base a) rigid
c) base B' b) water bound
macadam
d) wearing coarse c) flexible
d) None of the
above
Problem \ L1.534
Problem• 1 \
The layer in a road pavement which An application of hot
bitumen material
provides resistance to wear and tear due to given to the old surface
to provide
traffic is called: adhesion to the old and
new road surface
ls called
a) sub~rade
b) sub-base a) seal coat
c) base b) prime coat
~ d) wearing coarse ~ c) tacl<
coat
d) surface
dressing
,$ &
[1.531 Probic:-m \ \ 1'.53~

Problem \
The part of the road structure which Is A layer of stone
chippings coat laid over a
immediately above the sub-grade and hot to make the
surface water-proof ls
composed of stone boulders or sup•rior called
·
soil is called:
a) seal
coat
a) sub-grade Q'" b) prime
coat
lllf b) sub-base c) tack
coat
c) base d)
surface dressing
d) wearing coarse
L1.536
Problem . I
[ 1.S32 Problem 11 The application of
one or two layers of
bituminous material
over a prepared base
each layer covered
with an application of
The top surface of a road structure is
cover material and
rolled ls called _ •
termed as:
a) ~eal
coat
a) sub-grade b) prime
coat
b) sub-base c) .tack
coat
Q> c) base ~ d) surface
dressing
d) wearing coarse
1+.j : :: : :::: : :: :
.J
I
[ 1.537 Problem
[1.54,
- t c $ - -- A
A very thin surface applied over a

~itumlnous pavement, to make It
impervious is called _ .
a) transverse joint
~a) seal coat
b) longitudinal joint
b) prime coat
c) expansion joint
c) tack coat
construction joint
d" cl)
d) surface dressing
I
Problem ]
1;.:•;.=.54_2___P_r_o_b_1~_!"_
L...[
- -........_,. ..._::
a - -
The time for mixing of ingredients for a A type

of rigid pavement, Which has no
concrete cement road should be done for
temperature steel or dowels for the IQad
transfer. This type of pavement Is "led

at least
- .
· mainly
on low-volume highways or When
cement
stabilized soils are used as sub
a) 2.5 min. ~ c) 1.Smin.
base
material.
b) 3 min. d) 2 min.
~a)
Plain concrete pavement
b) Simply reinforced concrete

I_1.•Sl9 Problem 1
pavement
c) Continuously reinforced concrete

· The number of days final curing for a
pavements
concrete cefnent pavement Is done for_.
d) Flexible concrete pavement .
-
a) 21 days ~ c) . 14days
b) 12 days d) · 18 days
L~ -~43
Problem
l 1.s~~ Problem J
A type
of rigid pavement having dowels for
the
transfer of traffic loads across joints
with
these joints spaced at larger distances
Joints · provided In concrete cement than
with plain pavements ranging from 10
pavements at right angles to the centre line m. to 30
m. Temperature steel is used
of the pavement Is called_ .
throughout the slab.
'
~a) transverse joint
a) Plain concrete pavement
b) longitudinal joint Q" b)
Simply reinfotced concttlt
c) expansion joint
pavement
d) construction joint
c) Continuously reipforced concrete
pavements
d) Flexible concrete pavement

. . ----.
•:sy
Problem
- - -- -
Refers to the structural adequacy

or the
pavement section.
~ •) pavement denectlon
b) pavement distress
c) pavementroughness
d) skid resistance
Plain concrete pavement

~~ Simply reinforced concrete
( ~ .548 ' Problem
J
~vement
Continuously reinforced
« c)
concrete pavements
Describes the effectiveness of a
pavement
to prevent or reduce skid related
crashes.
d) Flexible concret~ pavement
a) crack resistance
b) . patching resistance
c)· raveling resistance
~ cl) skid res/stance
~.54s Problem
· The measurement of the extent to which a

road surface deviates from the plane is
called:
The following are the type of
stresses that
a) . pavement deflection are developed in rigid pavements.
I
b) pavement distress
~ ~) pavement roughness
a) Stress induced by
traffic loads
b) Stress due to
temperature changes
d) skid resistance
c) Stress induced by
bending
~ cl) All of the above
[ 1.546 Problem '
i •
Problem
J
Refers to the condition of a pavement in
terms of its general'appearance. No Passing Zone Is defined as:
a) any section of
the road is not
a) pavement deflection passable
~ b) pavement distress b) any section of
the road is closed
c) pavement roughness temporarily for
traffic
d) skid resistance ~ c) any section of
the road with a
passing sight
distance of 460 m.
or less
d) All of the above
)
_]
Capacity for two-lane highways ranges
from:
a) 1000 to 1500 passenger car

equivalents per hour Given:
b) 1500 to 2000 passenger car
equivalents per hour
=
Approach width of road
9.15 m.
Distance from the parked
car to the stop
ff" c) 2000 to 2800 passenger car line= 10.7 m.
equivalents per hour =
Green time (K) 26 sec.
d) 2800 to 3000 passenger car Compute the approach
roadway width due
equivalents per hour to the effect of the
parked vehicle.
0.9(Z· 7.6)
Losa of width= 1.68 •
K
s- ~ - J Solution:
.
0.9(9.15 - 7.6) - 1 57
Factors affecting capacity and service Loss of width =1.68 -
- · m
volumes on freeways and multilane
26
highways. Effective approach
roadway width= 9.15-1.57
Effective approach
roadway width = 7.58 m
a) Roadway factor
b) Traffic factor
c) Control factor
f
Problem
" d) All of the above
The time intervlf
between the arrival of a
vehicle wishing to cross
an uninterrupted
stream of vehicles on an
intersecting path
I1·.553 Problem ] and the arrival of the
next vehicle in that
stream is known as:
Vehicles attempting to make a left tum and
~ a) lag
c) headway
caught within the intersection at the end of
the signal phase are expected to discharge b) ·gap
d) time delay
at headways of _ sec. and delay the
cross traffic accordingly.
...
a) 1.5 sec.
. ( 1.556 Problem
']
.c) 3.0 sec.
Q> b) 2.5 Ste. d) 2.0 sec. The separation between
the corresponding
points on two successive
vehicles minus
the separation occupied
by a vehicle is
known as:
a) lag
c) headway
~ b) gap
d) time delay
- :
Problem ]
The geometrical shape
of School Crossing
signs.
a) Octagon
c) Circle
Q'" b)
Pentagon d) Triangle
z=
11.562
Problem
-
-
. )
The geometric shape
of No Passing Zone
warning signs.
solution:
L a)
Pentagon
G_,=h,. ~ b)
Trapezoid
c) Octagon
~ =4• 62
· =3.5 seconds Q'" d) Pennant
with longer dimension
12.5
horizontal
[1.558 _ Probl~m L1.563

__Pr~bie~
The geometrical shape of warning signs The geometric shape
of recreational use
used In traffic control. guide signs.
a) Rectangle c) Trapezoid
a) Circle
B" c) Trapezoid
b) Pentagon ~ d) Diamond b)
Pentagon d) Octagon-
( 1.559 Problem 1
-I
The geometrical shape of regulatory signs The geometric shape
of Stop sign.
used In traffic control. a) Circle
c) Trapezoid
b)
Pentagon Q'" d) Octagon
Q> a) Rectangle c) Trapezoid
b) Pentagon d) Diamond
l_1.565
Problem
[ 1.560 Problem The geometric shape
of Yield sign.
The geometric shape of guide signs used B" aJ

Equilateral triangle with ont
In traffic control. point
down
b)
Trapezoid
lti'" a) Rectangle c) Trapezoid c)
Rectangle
b) Pentagon d) Triangle d) Circle
( 1 ~!_66 Problem J [ 1 •569 probl!m -
·'"" :::J
crack• approximately at right
angles to tilt
The geometric shape used for Railroad ent centerline. These may
be caU&ecl
Crossing Advance warning sign and for ~:v:~nkage or differential
thermal •tre..
Civil Defense Evacuation Route Marker. of the asphalt concrete or maybe
reflective
cracks.
Q> a) Circle
b) Triangle a) Alligator
cracking
c) Trapezoid b) Block cracking
d) Pentagon ~ c) Transverse
cracking
d) Longitudinal
cracking
f 1.5!J7 Problem ]
A series of interconnected or interlaced
L[1~•.::,57~
_
_..;,P_r.._ob_l_e_m_'"_ _ _ _
o:...
· .
J
cracks caused by fatigue failure of the
cracks approximately parallel to
the
asphalt concrete surface under repeated
traffic loading. pavem•nt centerline. These are
caused by
poorly constructed construction
joints and
shrinkage of asphalt concrete
surface.
~a) Alligator cracking . .
b) Block cracking Alligator
cracking
a)
c) Transverse cracking Block cracking
b)
d) Longitudinal cracking
c) Transverse
cracking
Q" d) Longitudinal
cracking
I ~ .568__ Problem a,,
Cracks forming large interconnected l 1.57~ Problem

? -
•I
polygons, usually with sharp corners or
angle. These cracks are generally caused Wearing way of the pavement
surface
by hardening and shrinkage of the asphalt caused by dislodging of
aggregated
and or reflection cracking from underlying particles and binder. This Is
usually a
layers such as cement-treated base. result of insufficient asphalt
binder In the
mix or stripping of asphalt from
particles of
a) Alligator cracking aggregate.
~ b) Block cracking
c) Transverse cracking a) Joint or crack
spalling
. d) Longitudinal cracking b) Flushing
c) Bleeding
~ d) Raveling
-~ ~ . ~ :_
·-
l
~ ~P~r=ob~l=•~m________\ ( 1.575
Problem \
~- Locallzed
upward buckling and shattering
. disintegration of the surface of the slabs
at transve~e }olnts or cracks.
progrettlv:he wheel paths caused by They can occur
when transverse joints are
b8tW88" f asollne or oil from vehicles. fllled with
Incompressible solid materials.
dripping o g
'
a) Spalling B' •) Blowups
c) Spalling
b) Flushing b}
Raveling d) Faulting
c) Bleeding
~ d) Drip tracl< raveling
\ 1_._57_&__'
_P_ro_b_l_e_m_ _ _ ____,\ .
The
breakdown or disintegration of slab
edges at
joints or cracks, usually resulting
[ 1 .573 Problem \ in the loss
of sound concrete and the
progressive
widening of joint or c~ck.
The exuding of bitumen onto the pavement
surface, causing a reduction in skid a)
Joint abrasion
resistance. It Is generally · caused by b}
Joint raveling
excetsive amounts of asphalt in the mix or
low air voids content. It occurs when Q'" c)
Joint spalling
asphalt fills the voids in the. mix during hot d)
Joint flushing
weather and then exudes out onto the
surface of the pavement.
a) Spalling
\1.S77
Problem
b) Raveling
Abnormal surface wear, usuilly resulting
~ c) Bleeding or flushing from
poor quality surface mortar or coarse
d) Abrasion '
aggregate. ·
.. Q" •)
Surface attrition
b) Surface polish
I1.574 ' Problem - \
c)
d)
Surface spalling
Surface raveling
Elevation differences between adjacent
slabs at transverse joints. It is usually the
result of pumping and is a major source of
Portland concrete pavement failure.
Loss
of the original texture due to the
a} Spalling
traffic action.
Q" b) Faulting
a) Surface attrition
c} Bleedin9
I
d) Raveling ff'
b) Surface polish
c) Surface spalling
;
d) Surface raveling
3
. -
Ek
17 q
=~ =- :: I
1
•
: :
11
:
I
Solution:
Sb ~ - --
]
<D Vol. of tr~ffic across the bridge
V = 3400-10C
Metro Cebu has a population of 18 M
v= 3400-10(40 + 0.4V)
people with an average vehicle ownership
V= 3400-400-4V
of 2 cars per person. Each car will
consume 15 km per liter. If It Is driven
5V= 3000
30,000 km per year, how much tax increase
·v=600 vehicles/hr
per liter to raise 800 M for highway
maintenance per year? ®
Vol. of traffic if the toll fee of 30 centavas
, was added in order to cross the bridge

Solution:
C =40 + 0.4V + 30
No. of vehicles= 18,000,000(2) = 36,000,000
C =70 + 0.4V
No. of km driven per year = 36,000,000(20,000)
V= 3400-10C
72x109
I
v= 3400-10(70 + 0.4V)
No. of llters consumed per year = - -
15
V=3400- 700-4V
No. of liters consumed per year = 4800 x·106 liters
5V= 2700
Let x = tax increase
V=540 vehicles/hr
4800 x 106 x =800,000,000
@
Amount of toll fee to yield highest revenue
x=P0.11
for case a"
11
C =40 + 0.4V + T
V =3400 - 10(40 + 0.4V + T)

I 1.!!ao _ Problem
V =3000- 4 V - 10T
~ t rt&"'--"" tr '
The San Juanico Bridge connecting

5V =3000 - 10T
between Samar and Leyte was constructed
with a total cost (excluding toll fees) to
V =3<XXl - 10T
travel across the bridge, which is
5
expressed as a cost function:
C =(40 + 0.4V) where C is In cents per
Revenue generated :
vehicle and V is vehicle per hour.
R=VT
Demand function is 3400-10C.
R =(3000 -10T)T
5
<D Evaluate the volume of traffic (in
R
= 3000T -10T
2
vehicles/hour) across the bridge.
~ If a 30 centavo toll was added to the
5
original cost functio(I, what is the new
dR Jooo-20T
volume of traffic (veh/hr) crossing the
dt= 5 =O
bridge? .
(J) Evaluate the amount of toll fee to yield
T
=3000 =150 centavos
the highest revenue for the first
20
condition.
T
=Pf.SO
@ Total revenue with
the new toll fee
~problem \ R=VC
~ traffic passing thru the new
=
=
R 7000(350)
P2,'50,000 per day
The volume of Bridge connecting

feman 8000
Marcelo and Lapu-Lapu City is
£!
Mandaue C~ y when the toll fee is P3 per \ 1.582

Problem \
vehicles r.rth: toll fee increases by 50
vehicle. the volume of traffic wm The speed of, the car
taklng the Kennon
centavos. by 1000 vehicles/day. Road to Bagulo Clty ls
60 kph. A wamlng
decrease ·
slgn ls placed 100 m.
from the hazard
© Determine the toll charge in order to ahead due to landsllde.
The reading
maximize the revenue. distance of the driver
is 20 m. while in
~ Determine the traffic volume per day after motion and the
perception reaction time Is
the toll fee increases. 5 sec. If the skid
resistance of the level
~ Determine the total revenue with the new road is 0.40,
determine the legibility
toll fee. distance of the
warning sign from the
driver.
Solution:
© Toll charge in order to maximize the revenue Solution:
V= _ 1000(x)
8000
50
New toll fee charge : C =300 + x
(centavos) .
"'C11'11Utl
sign,
R=VC / --
-~
aooo. 1 ~ }300 +x)

.'
R= (
20 m
Reaction Braking
=
R (8000 - 20x)(300 + x) x
Distance Distance
legibility
distance 100
dR =(8000 - 20x)(1) + (300 + x)(- 20) =0
dx
8000 - 20x =20(300 + x)
, Reaction distcllce
=Vt
8000 - 20x =6000 + 20x
40x=2000 60000
V= - - =16.67
x =50 centavos 3600
Reaction
distance= 16.67(5) =83.35 m
x + 300 =350 centavos =P3.50 (total charge
to max. revenue)
v2
Braking
distalce = (f + G)
I
29
@ Traffic volume per day after the toll fee
increase .
. - (16.67)2 =35.41
Braking
distance - 2(9.81)(0.4 +0)
v=8000- 1000(50)
50 20 +
83.35+35.41=x+100
V =7000 vehicles I day x= 38.76m
--.
••·*
t
:
_1 .583 0
. Problem
: : '.--
]
Solution:
.
x = increase in toll
fee in cen
tavos
aoox
A driver of a car moving at 50 kph observes V=5120· SQ
a warning sign ahead of him. After moving
32 m., he started to read the sign then the V: 5120 -16X
1
distance traveled while reading the sign
until he finished reading the sign Is 20 m. Toll fee= X + 200
At the moment he finished reading the Total revenue:
sign, it was observed that side mounted
sign has a lateral offset of 1.80 m. from the R = (5120 • 16x)(x +
200)
path of the driver and the limit of
comfortable vision of the sign Is 10· for ~ = (5120. 16x)(1) +
(x + 200)(-16) =a
side mounted sign. Compute the legibility dx
distance of the warning sign from the point 5120-16x = 16(x +
200)
where the driver observes the sign.
32x =5120-16(200)
Solution:
x=60 centavos
[ ! .5_8 5 Problem
J
A local tourist will
pay P300 for each hour
L =legibility distan~ save when marking a
trip from Manila to
Baguio which is 280 km
from Manila.
L=x+20+12
tCll 10° =1.B Cost of

Travel Time of travel
By air: P6000
2 hrs.
. x
By train: P4500
4 hrs.
x = 10.21 m
By car: P3000
7 hrs.
L= l0.21 +20+32
Which mode will make
this trip economical
L= 62.21m.
and how much will it
cost him?
Solution:
f ~ .~84 Problem J By air: Total cost =
6000 + 2(300) = P6600
By trai~: Total cost=
4500 + 4(300) =P5700
The current demand (flow of traffic) of the By car: Total cost=
3000 + 7(300) = P5100
Old Mactan Bridge is 5120 vehicles per day
when the toll fee is P2 per vehicle. The
demand will decrease by 800 vehicles per By car is economical
with a cost of P5100
day for each 50 centavos increase In toll. only.
Determine the amount of toll increase in
order to maximize the revenue.
TRANSPORTATION and
TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
• Toll Booth
• Curve Highway
..,_.. J # ,.L #;;eJO .., ~ ,..,...,..... • O .'II
4
• Train
- -- --· - -
Trasnportation &Tra~ic E~~inee!ing

@. '"" - - ~ Li ·~
[2.1 CE Board May 2016 ] [2.4 Pro~lem

~
It is defined as the number of vehicles per The max. number of
passenger cara that
unit distance occupying a section of can pass a given point on a
lane
roadway at a given instant time and is roadway during one hour under
the mo:
usually measured In vehicles per mile or nearly jdeal roadway and
traffic condition.
per km. which can possibly be
attained.
~a) Density c)
a) · Traffic volume
Flow
b) b) . Traffic capacity
Capacity d) Volume c) Traffic density
~ d) Basic capacity
Problem
The number of vehicles moving in a

specified direction on a given lane or
[ 2.5 Problem
Tf\e max. number of passenger

cars that
J
roadway that pass a given point during can pass a given point on a
lane or
specified unit time and is usually roadway during one hour under
prevailing
expressed as vehicles per hour or vehicles roadway and traffic
conditions.
per day.
~a) Possible capacity
~a) Traffic volume
b) Practical capacity
b) Traffic capacity
c) Basic capacity
c) Traffle density
d) Theoretical maximum
capacity
d) Basic capacity
I 2.3 Problem
f 2.& Problem
J
The max. number of vehicles that
can pass
The ability of a roadway to accommodate a given point on a lane or
roadway during
traffic volume. It is expressed as the one hour ~thout traffic density
being so
maximum number of vehicle in a lane or a great as to cause unreasonable
delay,
road that can pass a given point in unit. hazard, . or 1 restrictions to the
driver's
time, usually an hour, that is vehicles per freedom to maneuver under the
prevailing
hour per lane or roadway. roadway and traffic conditions.
~a) Practical capacity
a) Traffic volume
b) Possible capacity
Q' b) Traffic capacity
c) Traffic capacity
c) Traffic density d)
d) Basic capacity Theoretical capacity
et±
l
Problem 2& J
~ r.i;,obl•lll
~ - . 1 -- -
sslng of twO or more traffic streams The speed

distribution of vehlcaes at 1
Th• cro In the same general direction point on the
roadway and tt is the average
uav•u:gslgnlflcant path of highway without of instantaneous
speeds of observed
alon91d of traffic signals. vehicles at the
spot
~·· .
a)instantaneous speed
a) crossover
b) cross moving b)average
speed
c) space mean
speed
~ c} weaving
d) Permanence "'d) time-mean
speed
(j.a Problem l
Problem
\ _2.12
The instantaneous speed of a vehicle at a
specified section or location. The average
speed maintained by a vehicle
over a
particular stretched of road, while
a) average speed the vehicle is
in motion. This is obtained by
b) running speed dividing the
distance covered by the time
c) travel speed during which
the vehicle is in motion.
~ d) ' sj,ot spffd
a)
spot speed
t ::SS E Q" b)
running speed
(2.9 Problem \ c)
d)
travel speed
space-mean speed
The average of the spot speeds of all
vehicles passing a given point in the
highway.
~a) average speed
b) running speed
The time
interval between the passage of
c) travel speed
successive
vehicles moving in the same
d) spot speed
lane and
measured from head to head as
they pass a
point on the road.
\ 2.10 ==p;.;biem \
"-----~--- Q" a)
Time headway
b)
Time of travel at a spot speed
The average speed of vehicles in a certain c)
Time of travel at a time mean
road length at any time.
speed
d)
Time of travel at a space-mean
a) instantaneous speed
speed
b) average speed
11.S' c) space mean speed
d) spot speed
:
. [2.14 = Problem
with
full control of access
The distance between successive vehicles An expressway
·
moving in the same lane measured from
head to head at any Instance. a) Freeway
~ b)
Expressway
q:- a) space-headway
b) merging c) Parkway
c) clear spacing between vehicles d) Highway
d) space between vehicles
Problem 1
The distance ahead that must be clear to
An arterial highway for
non-commercial
permit safe passing is called:
traffic with full or
partial control of access
Q> a) passing sight distance and usually located
within a park.
b) sight distance
c) non-passing distance a) Freeway
d) braking distance b)
Expressway
~ c) Parkway
d) Highway
( 2.16 Problem
The ratio between parallel forces divided
by the normal forces is known as:
a) skid resistance 12.20
Problem:
b) coefficient of friction
c) coefficient of adhesion and Minimum sight distance
required for a
hysteresis driver to stop a
vehicle after seeing an
Q> d) All of the above object in the vehicle's
path without hitting
that object. This
distance is the sum of the
distance traveled
during perception-
( 2.17 Probl~R?:z=c I reaction time and the
distance traveled
during braking.
Divided arterial highway for through traffic
with full or partial control of access and a) sight
distance
generally with grade separations at major ~) braking
distance
Intersections. c) passing
sight distance
a) Freeway Q> d) stopping
sight distance
W b) Expressway
c) Parkway
d) Highway
....
~ problem \ \. 2.24 Pro~lem
].
i ht distance required on a two· The location of super
elevation
Minimum ~y highway that will permit a development onto circular
curves has been ,
lane, twO- complete a passing maneuver continuous concern
to des\gnen
driv~t~ollidlng with an opposing vehicle throughout the wortd. Th\
s concern ls due
with ...uh ut cutting off the passed vehicle. to the fact that design
super elevation ls
and wnuO not available for the
curve radius at the
a) overtaking sight distance P.C. This results in the
vehicle
··experiencing 2 to 3 sec.
where lateral
b) non-passing sight distance acceleration tends to
force the driver to
~ cJ ·passing sight distance adopt a natural spiral
cu.rve during entry
d) stopping sight distance and exit. This problem
can be prevented
by:
a)
Widen the curve
to give drivers this
!Ai g;:
· extra width as
well as to give
[2.22 Problem \ additional width
for swift path of
large vehicles.
The length of super elevation development ~ b) Prov!de ·,
proportion of super
from zero cross slope to full design super elevation run
off. This proportion
elevation In a circular curve alignment.. tends to
minimize the adverle
effects of
lateral acceleration and
~a) Superelevation run off improves the
safefy of the
b) Tangent run off transition
from tangent to
circularcurve.
c) Transition curve
c) Provide traffic
lights at the point of
d) Tangent distance transition
from tangent to circular
curve.
d) Provide pavement
markings at the
point of
transition from tangent to
[_2_,.2_3___P_r_o_b_le_m________Q\ circular
curve.
The length of super elevation development

from the normal cross slope to the zero [ 2.25 ==
Probie; CE
cross slope point on the tangent.

The longitudinal
profile along the
a) Transition curve centerline of the
road. It is made up of a
Q" b) series of grades and
vertical curves.
Tangent run out
c) Super elevation run off a)
Cross-section of a portion of the
d) Tangent distance
roads on vertical curves
b)
Elevations of point on the curve
c}
Tangent offsets
B" cl)
Vertical alignment
.~ .. ---- -- - - ....
v2
• Minimum Radius of . . R=-
g(e+ij
Curvature for Horizontal
....._Curves~
v•(:J'
R= -~--'-
g(e+ij
v2
R = (3.6)2 g(e +
ij
v2
R = 127(f + e)
1, Min. radius of curvature:

v2
R=---
127 (e + ij
R =min. radius of
curvature
e = super elevation in mlm
f = coeff. of side
friction or skid
resistance
v =design speed in kph
WV 2 /gR
De ree of curvature :
V =design speed in kph 2
e = super elevation 1145.916

D=---
f = side friction R
R =min. radius of curvature in m. D= degree o; curvature in
degrees
R = radius of curvature in
meters
wv2
tan (0 +ex)= -
gR
w
v2
y2 Impact factor = -
tan (0 +ex) = - gr
gR
tan 0 +tan ex V =design speed of
car in kph
tan (flt+ ex) = 1- tan 0 tan ex g =9.81 m/sec2
r =radius of curvature
in meters
tan 0 =e (superelevation)
tan ex= f (sidefriction) 4' Ideal an le of embankment:
tai (0 +ex)= -
e+f v2
tane=-
1- ef gr
1 • &f =almost equal to zero g =9.81 m/s2
V" :e+f 6 =angle of embankment
-=-
gR V = vel. of a car in mis
r =radius of curve in m.
-
••
v2
tan(0 +a)= -
gr
:: angle of banking
0 \W
tan a= u t
V=max. speed in mis

, :: radius of curve
wv2
g:: 9.81 m/sec2
gr
~.2& CE Board Nciv~ 1998 J

A highway curve has a super elevation of
r. Find the radius of the curve so that For small angles Sin 0
=tan 0
there will be no lateral pressure between
the tires and the roadway at a speed of.40 . 0 0.15
Sin = -
mph? \.W 1.5
Solution: - 0.15
tan 0 - -
V=40mph 1.5
40(5280) tane = wv2
v= 3600(3.28) grW
. V=17.89 m/sec. v2
v2 tane= -
gr
ta10=-
gr
0.15 v2
,~
ta'! r =(17.89) 2
- - -9.81(420)
1.5
--
9.81r
r=265.71 m. V=20.30m/s
wvi
gr v=20.30(3600)
1000
V= 13.10kph
[ 2.27 CE Board Nov. 2001 ']
A railway curve having a radius of 420 m. "

has a distance between their rails of 1.5 m.
and the outer rail is 15 cm. higher than the f 2.2a CE Board
May H15 )
Inner rail. Find the max. speed that a train
COUid move along this curve so that there Compute the impact factor
for a horizontal
Will be no lateral pressure on the wheels curve radius of 400 m If
the design speed
Ind the rails. Is 120 kph.
f__ l 3 S -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENG_______RING
----- - - ------::::::::=- - - ----==
----
Solution:
Wv2
tane= -grW
v2
Impact factor= - v2
gr
tane= -
gr
v=· 120000 (13.33)
2
3600
tan"= 9.81(121.95)
V =33.33 rrVS
Impact factor= (33.33)2

"= 8.45·
9.81(400)
Impact factor = 0.283 ~[2_~_3_o___P_r_o_b_le_m__~----
==
The rated speed of a highway
curve of 100
m. radius is 65 kph. If the
cc>efflcient of
I 2.29 Problem friction between the tires
and the road is
0.60, what is the maximum
speed at which
~ highway curve having a radius of 400 ft. a car can round the curve
without
is banked so that there will be no lateral skidding?
pressure on· the car's wheel at a speed of
48 kph. What is the angle of elevation of Solution:
the embankment?
Solution:
v =65(1000)
3600
V =81 .06 m's.
v2
tan9=-
400 gr
r=-
3.281
=
R 121.95 m.
tan 9 = (18.06)2
9.81(100)
V=48kph 0=18.4.
48000 tan 0 =0.60
V=--
3600 0=31"
V= 13.33 m's
~----- pORTATION & ~-~AFFIC ENGINEERIN~
I -r~~~~------------
,--
-- -- --------- - - ----- -- -
- :: 1 11
v2 R=---
titl (" + a) :: Qr 127(e + f)
v2 R= (50)2
~49.4.:: Qr 127(0.08 + 0.16)
R =82.02
- 9 81(100) tal 49,4•
v2 - .
V:: 33.83 rrVS
33.83 (3600)
I2.32 , Problem
-I
v== WOO
When allgnlng a highway In a
built up area,
v:: 121.79 lcph It was necessary to provide a
horizontal
circular curve of radius 325
m. If the design
speed Is 65 kph, determine
the super.
elevation rate.
super-Elevation o f .
Solution:
• Horizontal Curves
Super-elevation to fully
counter-act centrifugal
force use only 75% of the
design speed.
~1
[2.31 Problem
e =(0.75 V)2
127 R
A delivery truck of Johnson a~d Sons Inc.
585 thru the expressway exit ramps at a e = [0.75(65))2
::ign velocity of 50 kph ~onnects with a 127(325)
local road In a T-intersect1on . .A separate
lane is provided on the local road to allow e =0.058 .
ramp traffic to tum right without stopping
at an acceleration of 1.57 rn/s2• The turning
2£i££
roadway has stabilized shoulders on both

. sides and provide for a one lane one-way
12.33 Problem
operation with no provisions for a passing Compute the ruling minimum
radius of
stalled vehicle. Super elevation on the horizontal curve for a
design speed of 80
turning roadway Is 0.08. Determine the kph. f = 0.15, e =0.067.
minimum radius of curvature for .the ramp
In meters. Solution:
2
R = (V + 16) For ruling
min.increase the
Solution: (f +e)(127) design speed
by 16 kph.
a
f =-. f =0.15
g
e =0.067 (standard values)
f =1.57
9.81 ~ (80+16)2
R - 0.217(127)
f =0.16
R = 334.40 m.
Problem J [ 2 •3 ! .
Problem. ::J
A pavement 12 m. is to
be super-elevated
The radius of a horizontal curve Is 100 to allow safe
negotiation of a 2°30' clrcuia
meters. If the design speed Is 50 kph and curve· at a design
speed of 60 kph, Wh~
the design coefficient of lateral friction is will be the theoretical
difference In
0.15, calculate the · equilibrium super· elevation between
opposite edget of the
elevation If the pressure on the Inner and pavement?
outer wheels should be equal.
Solution:
Solution:
D =2"30'
If the coefficient of friction is neglected or
assumed to be zero, the required super- R= 1145.916 =458.37 m
elevation required to counteract the centrifugal 2"30'
v2 v2
force will be equal to R=- the super- R=-
127e 127e.
elevation e provided will cause the pressure . 37 =(60)2
on the inner and outer wheels will be equal. 458
· 127e
v2
R=- e =0.06184
127e Diff. in elevation=
12(0.06184)
100 = (50)2 Diff. in elevation =0.
742 m.
·121e
e =0.197
f ~.37 .
Problem . ,,
J
12.35 Problem -I A ramp from NLEX going
to Angeles City
connects with a local
road forming a f.
Determine the radius.of a horizontal curve intersection. The design
speed on the
for a design speed of 50 kph as specified expressway is 48 kph. An
additional lane Is
by the specifications in lateral friction and provided on the local
road to allow vehicles
super-elevation. on the ramp to turn
right onto' the local
road without stopping.
The turning road
Solution: has a mountable curb
which will provide
f = 0.15 inclination 8 with the horizontal for a one-lane, one-way
operation with
should not exceed 4•. provision for passing a
stalled vehicle. tt
the curve has a super-
elevation of 0.08 and
tan"= e
a frictional factor of
0.16, compute the
e =0.06993 minimum radius of the
turning road.
v2
R=--- Solution:
127(f + e)
v2
R= (50)2 R= - - -
127(e + ij
127(0.15 + 0.06993)
2
R =89.5fm R= (4S) =
75.59m
127(0.08 + 0.16)
,• .
1
1111
. al max. capac1 y m
The oret1cper hour ,.. ·-:.--•-. ...
A· ve hi cl es
- ~
clt<ir spacing
-:--g diJta:Ct = SD
- stoppm
soft
,.,_.,
s _
hNMl~'Gyl
m:31.ia•.me1.1aw
yz
1000 v SD=Vt + -
C=-- 2gf
S
where: Braking
Distance:
C = capacity of .traffic lane in
vehicles/hour
peed of traffic in kph >;
s
V=s
=average center to center spacmg of
~F=JN
vehicle N
D=Braking Distance
Braking distance
w Using Work-Energy
Equation from <D to ®:
© Positive Work -
Negative Work
=Change in K.E.
C=
fr)()() v
D=Brakiug Distance
where : V in kph
cin vehicles I hr
·- ··-
ii:~ D?~
Vf'O
s
sin meters
S=SD+L 0-FD= 1W
(v22 .v2)
SD= safe stopping distance 2g
v2
SD= Vt+_ (in meters) .f ND= W
(O·V 2 )
2gf 2g ·
where: . w
V= in mis -f WD=- 2g
vz
· f =coeff. of friction
t = reaction time
D=~
(braking distance)
. ,
S.O. = reaction distance (lag .dJStance,1 2gf
+ braking distance
Reaction distance = Vt
whereVisinmls
vz
vz
Braking distance= gf Stopping
dislE11Ce : SD= Vt + 2gf
2
a
142 -TRANSPORTATION
--
& TRAFFIC ~NG~~-E~~l-~G
.
i
- - - -- ---
E. Stopping Distan:;,.;. (in _terms

.JI of acceleration) ' ~c"
I, 2.40 !roble,m _
::J
The time linked with the two
stages
perception and lntellectlon
based on a
particular traffic situation
like fear or anger
which has a vital influence on
the final
D message or decision sent by
the brain to
the muscle !• called:
a) Perception
c) Volition
v =V2
2
1
2
-2aD ~ b) Emotion
d) lntellection
O=V12 -2aD
D=-'
v2 I2_.41u Problem
~
J
2a The time of taking a decision
to produce
SD=V,t+ D action to a particular traffic
situation Is
called:
1
v2
SD=Vt+-
1 a) Perception time
2a Emotion time
b)
~ c) Volition time
12.38 Problem d) lntellection time
Time required for transmission of the

sensations received (through eyes, ears 12.42 Problem
·]
and body) to the brain and the spinal chord The total time required for
perception,
by the nervous system, to a particular intellection, e~otion and
volition that is
traffic situation. / from the instant the object
·comes In the
line of sight of the driver to
the instant he
~a) Perception time arrives a decision, say to.
slow down or
b) Emotion overtake, under normal
circumstances is
c) Volition called:
d) lntellection
a) Perception-volition time
b) · Perception-emotion
time
c) Perception-reaction time
f 2.39 Problem I& d) Reaction time
After perception occurs, the formation of

new thoughts and ideas, recalling old Probl em
- a-
?a
memories of similar occasions to a
particular traffic situation. Distance traveled by the
vehicle during the
total reaction time.
a) Perception a) braking distance
b) Emotion
c) Volition I& b) lag distance
~ d) c) reaction distance
lntellection
d) stopping distance
problem
2
V2 =v12 - 2a 82
,µ 0 =(22.36)2 • 2(10)$2
traveled by the vehicle after the
011tanct~ n of the brakes until It will stop. 82 =25m.
appliCI 0
s =44.72+ 25
~ •) brak~ng distance
S=69.72m.
b) lag distance
) reaction distance x =80- 69.72
~) stopping distance x=10.28m.
§s ~E Board May 2015 J

. 1_2.47 CE Board
Nov. 1998 J
Th• driver of a car travelling at a certain
peed suddenly sees an obstruction ahead A driver traveling at 50 mph
sees a wall at a
5
d traveled a distance of 58.3 m. during certain distance ahead. The
driver applies
~. perception time of 1.3 sec. Determine the brakes Immediately
(perception time is
th• car's speed of approach in kph. . 3 seconds) and begins
slowing the vehicle
at 6 m/sec2 (decelerating).
If the distance
Solution: from the stopping point to
the wall is 12 m.,
s=Vt how far was the car from the
wall upon
58.3 = V(1.3) perception?
v=44.846 mis
Solution:
V= 161.4kph
[2.46 CE Board Nov~ 1998
A driver traveling at 50 mph Is 80 m. from a

wall ahead. If the driver applies the brakes
8raUJQIY Car nops '""
Immediately (perception time is 2 seconds)
applud
and begins slowing the vehicle at 10

m/secz (decelerating), find the dJstance
v, =50(5280)3600(3.28)
from the stopping point to the wall. V =22.36 mis
1
Solution:
81 =V1 t
81 =22.36(3)
81 =67.08m.
v =v
2
2
2
1 - 2aS2
s, (0)2 =(22.36)2 • 2(6) 82
s x
80m 82 =41.66 m.
V=50mph ~ance from wall upon
percerAion :
81 =Vt
V= 50(5280)
8, =22.36(2) s =67.08+41.66+12
3600 (3.28) S =120.74m.
81 =44.72m.
V=22.36 m/sec.
___ TRAFFIC ENGINEERl~G
144-TRANSPO_RTA~ION &--=_ ~----
--.
---
12.48 Problem J Solution:
v,
Determine the safe stopping sight distance
for a car moving at a speed of 60 kph for:
two-way traffic In a single lane roa ·
Perception plus action time Is 2.5 sec. and
the frictional resistance Is 0.60.
Solution: w
2
Walg
S =V t + (V ) ~
' 2gf ~JN

N
·v1 = 60000
3600
=16.67 m's
v2 -V2
~ . + (16.67)2 = 65.28 m s= 1 2
s - 16.67(2.5) 2(9.81)(0.60) 2g(f - G)
f =!
I2.49 _ Problem g
Calculate the stopping sight distance on a f =. 3.41

highway at an ascending gredie~t of 2o/o for 9.81
a design speed of 90 kph with . a. total f =0.35
reaction time of 2.5 sec. and a coeff1c1ent of
friction of 0.42. v = 104
1
3.6
Solution:
v2 v, =28.29 mis
S=Vt+ - - -
2g(f + G)
90000
V= - - =25m/s
3600
V2 =:
v2= 15.56 mis
s - 25(2 5) + 25 2
( ) = 138 90 m s = (28.29) 2
(15.56)
-
- . 2(9.81)(0.42 + 0.02) • 2(9.81)(0.35 - 0.03)

S = 88.91 m
I 2.so Problem
A motorist traveling at 104 kph on an
expressway intends to leave the
expressway using an exit ramp with a
L2.s1 Problem
]
maximum speed of 56 kph. At what point Two cars are approaching
each other from
on the expressway should the motorist the opposite directions
at a speed of 120
step on her brakes in order to reduce her kph and 90 kph
respectively. Assuming a
speed to the maximum allowable on the reaction time of 2.0
seconds and a
ramp just before entering the ramp, if this coefficient of friction
of 0.60 with a brake
section of the expressway has a efficiency of 50,,,
Compute the minimum
downgrade of 3%? Acceleration Is sight distance required
to avoid a head on
3.4 rn.112• collision of the two
cars.
:; llM
...;/I "'11 rollid< V=90kph
•
S1 =Vt
s, =22.22(0.5)
Fof f/16120 kph car : S1 =11.11m
t=o.50(0.6) v2
t= o.30 s =-
22gf
v= ~ =33.33 s= (22.22)2
3.6
v2 2
2(9.81)(0.4)
S, :: Vt + 2g(f + G) 82=62.91
2
(33.33) S1 +S2 +x=76
2
.s, :: 33. ( ) + 2(9.81)(0.3)
33
11.11+62.91=76
s :: 255.39 m.
1 x= 1.98m
For the 90 kph car :
V= ~ =25m/s 12.53
&:::±JV
'
3.6 j
Problem
(25)2
52 =25(2) + 2(9.81)(0.3) A car was traveling at a
speed of 80 kph.
The driver saw a roadblock 80
m. ahead
s =156.18 m.
2 a'1d stopped on the brake
causing the car
Si,Jht distalce to avoid head on collision to decelerate unHormly at 10
mlsec2.
=156.18 + 255.39 Assuming perception-reaction
·time Is 2
sec, determine the distance
from the
=411.57 m. roadblock to the point where
the car will
stop In meters.
[2.s2 Problem Solution:

A car moving at 80 kph on a level road
suddenly sees an obstruction 76 m. ahead.
If the perception time is 0.5 sec. and the
coefficient of friction between the tires and
the pavement is 0.4, how far from the
obstruction will it stop?
80000
V =- =22.22m/s
Solution: 1 3600
S1 =Vt
1
s, = 22.22(2)
,__
--. -- - - -- - ----1
s1 JC
s, =44.44m
S = 76 m
~6 - .TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEER!Nc;
--------------~--
LL2_._s_s___P_r_o_bl_e_m_·__--~::J
V22 =V12 -2aS2
2
0 =(22.22) - 2(10) 52
A motorist
traveling at 80 kph down a
S2 =24.69m grade of 5% on a
highway observes a
S1 +S2 +x=80 crash ahead of him
involving an overturned
truck that is
completely blocking the roact.
44.44 +24.69 +x =80 If the motorist was
able to stop his vehicle
1om from the
overturned truck, what was
x =10.81 m
his distance from
the truck when he first
observed the crash?
Assume perception
reaction time is 2.5
sec. and the vehicle
r2.s4 Problem J
decelerates at 3.44
m/sec2?
A test vehicle moving at 40 kph was Solution:

stopped by applying the brakes and the
length of the skid mark was 12.2 m. If the
average skid resistance of the level
pavement is 0.70, determine the brake
IOm
efficiency of the test vehicle.

s
Solution: 80000
V1 = =22.22 mis
3600
s1 =22.22(2.s)
s1 =55.55m
j Wa =fN
g
.. a
Wa =fW
40000 g
V=-
. 3600 , a
f= -
V=11.11 m's g
v2 f= ·
3 44
=0.35
S=- 9.81
2gf
v2
12.2 = (11.11)2 s 2
=--
2g(f - G)
2(9.81)f
f =0.516
s
2
= (22.22)2
2(9.81)(0.35 -
0.05)
Efficiency = 0.516 (100) s2=83.88m
0.70
S=S1 +S2 +10
Efficiency= 73.7%
s =55.55+83.88+10
S =149.43m
....
--·Jdf'l'•JS1~11 iMiiftiP''§lli;il§PI
1
Jill
~
~
problem I [2.57 Problem
I
' 8 rtver'• perceptlon-raactlon time A vehicle travel a distance of
40 m. before
,. test of c~nducted on a special testing colliding With another parked
vehicles, the
·I• t>eln~ h
wet pavement and a driving weight of which Is 75 percent
of the former.
uack wit 50 kph. When the driver.is sober, After collision, If both
vehicles skid
5peed of n be made just in time to avoid through 14 m. before stopping,
compute
a stop c~e object that Is visible 40 m. the Initial speed of the
moving vehicle.
hitting ~tter a few drinks of San Miguel Assume friction coefficient of
0.62.
ahead· der exactly the same condition, the
belr, u;111 to stop In time and strikes the Solution:
drtver 8t 8 speed of 30 kph. Detennlne the VJ~
V2~
obj~ perception-reaction time after he
:·(l~nklng. Assume coefficient of friction
is o.60.
91·~
:!"f:d!j
,
v
Solution:
~
•w·Oi&if'fi
S =40m
50000 After collision :

V=-
' 3600 - IW + w )ts
,... b 2
=CN. 2g+ wb) (V2 - v2)
4 3
v, =13.89 mis
O-V32
-fS = - -
v = 30000 2 2g
2 3600
V32 =2gfS2
V2 =8.33mls
v: = 1(9.81)(0.62)(14)
o= v,2-v22 V3 =13.05 mis
2g f Momentum before impact
0 = (13.89)2 - (8.33) 2 =momentum after
ifl1)ad
2(9.81)( 0.60) w.v2 = CN. + Wb) v3
D=10.49 m. g g
Wb =0.75W1
40=Vt+D
1
w. v2 - rN. +
o.1sw.) v
40 =13.89t + 10.49 g
-
g
t= 2.12 sec. v2=1.7SV3

v2 =1.75 (13.05)
v2 =22.84 m's
·111:1, 2
Before collision v2
S=---
-W f S
I 1
=W,
2g
(V2 - V2 )
2 1
2g(f - G)
2 14 = (11.11)2
-0.62 (40) =v: -v, 2(9.81)(f - 0.05)
2g .
f =0.50
- 0.62 (40) =(22.84)2 - v,2
2(9.81) 8
V2 = - =2.22m/s
3.6
(22.84)2 - v, = - 486.576
2
v2 -V2
v =31.75 mis
1
S= , 2
2g(f- G)
v =31.75(3600)
1
1000 v2 -(2.22)2
40 = 1
v1 =11t31 kph 2(9.81)(0.50 - 0.05)
v, =18.92 mis
v1 = 18.92(3.6)
f 2.sa Problem
v =.68.12 lcph
1
A Pajero lntercooler skidded into an
intersection of Magsaysay Avenue and
Quirino Avenue and struck a bystander and
continued until It hit one of the column
. support of the skyway. Based on the
( 2.59 Problem
J
damage to the front of the car, the police Two cars are approaching each
other from
report estimated that the car was doing 8 the opposite directions at a
speed of 120
kph at the moment of impact on the column kph and 90 kph respectively.
Assuming a
support. The length of the skid marks was reaction time of 2.0 seconds
and a
recorded to be 40 m. The road has a coefficient pf friction of
0.60 with a brake
downhill grade of • 5%. A test car skidded efficiency of 50%. Compute the
minimum
14 m. on the same section of the road when sight distance required to
avoid a head on
the brake Is applied from a speed of·40 kph collision of the two cars.
to the halt. Determine the probable speed
of the car Involved in the accident when the Solution:
brakes were applied In kph. will
flnt co/lid~
Solution:
f =0.50(0.6)
f =0.30
For120 kph :
40
V =- = 11.11 mis 120
3.6 V= - =33.33m/s
3.6
v2
S=V, + 2g(f + G) V= ~ =22.22mls
(33.33) 2
s, :: 33.33(2) + 2(9.81)(0.3) S-9 = v2
2g(f +G)
s ::255.39
I s -9= (22.22)2
fd90kph: 2(9.81){0.5 +G)
90
v,:: 3.6 S- 9 = 25.16
(0.5+ G)
v :: 25 m's
1 vz
(25)2 S=--
52 :: 25(2) + 2(9.81)(0.3) 2g(f- G)
S2 =156.18 m. s= (22.22)2
.
2(9.81)(0.5- G) •
Sight distance to avoid collision
=156.18 + 255.39 s= 25.16
(0.5- G)
=411.57 m.
25.16 = 25.16
(0.5 - G) (0.5 + G)
[2.&o Problem 'I SoMng for G=0.044 = 4.4%
s= 25.16
The driver of a vehicle traveling at 80 kph 0.5-0.044
up a grade requires 9 m. less to stop after
he applies the brakes than the driver S =55.18m.
travelling at the same initial speed down
the same grade. If the coefficient of friction
;
between the tires and pavement is 0.50,

what is the percent grade and what is the
12.&1 Problem
J
braking distance down the grade. Two cars in opposite
directions are moving
towards each other at a
speed of 90 kp~.
Solution: The total perception and
reaction time is
2.5 sec. with a coefficient
of friction of 0.60.
If the brake efficiency is
80%, compute the
minimum·required
sight ,distance to aVbid
collision of the two
approaching cars.
Solution:
v2
S=Vt+ -
2gf
-
90000
V = - =25m's
3600
f =0.60(0.80)
f=0.48
s: 25(2.5) + (25)
2 ~t2~·=6~3__
_~P~r_o_b_le_m_______ :J
2(9.81)(0.48) In a certain
accident Investigation, the
S=128.87 m traffic enforcer
tries to measure the fengtti
of the skid marks on
the roadway and
Sight distance to avoid collision at two recorded It to be
36.20 m. Assuming the
coefficient of
friction between the roadway
approaching cars : and tires Is 0.16 and
the road Is fla~ What
Min. sight distance= 2(128.87) was the velocity of
the car at the time the
brakes were applied?
Min. sight distalce =257.74 m
Solution:
~l2~_·6=2~____Pr_o_bl_e_m_________J
Compute th6 Intermediate sight distance
.. ~
D~.
v,
Vi
gJ·Dilr--
, ~-t
I for a freeway with a design speed of 80 kph
if the perception time Is assumed to be 2.5
seconds with a skid resistance of 0.70. s=
v2-V2
1 2
Assume brake efficiency to be 60%. 2g(f + G)

v2 -(0)2
Solution: 36.20 =--" 1
----
2(9.81)(0.16 +
0) '
V, =10.66 mis
v, =10.66(3.6)
lag Dist~nce Braking Distance
v, =38.38 lcph
S=Vt13.6+V1 l-Vol/2g(3.6)lif+G)
Problem 1
80
V=-
3.6 · A driver traveling at
70 kph sees a stalled
V =22.22m/s car 30 m. ahead. If the
driver applies the
v2 brake~ immediately
(perception • reaction
S=Vt+- time is zero) and begins
slowing the
2g(f) vehicle . at 8 m/sec2.
(emergency
22 22 2 deceleration) how far
from the stalled car
s =22.22(2.5) + ' · ) will the car stops to
avoid hitting the
2(9.81)(Q.42) stalled vehicle?
S = 115.47m
Solution:
Intermediate sight distance= 2(115.47)
lntBnnediate sight distance =230.94 m
.. .. .__,. ...
·-~
v2 ::V, +at Problem
J
0 -~-~
- 36()0
A vehicle traveling at 40
kph was stopped
within 1·8 sec. after the
1ppllcation of
t =2.43 sec. brakes. Determine the
average 1kkf
resistance.
1 at2
5::V1 t· 2
Solution:
8(243)2 w
1<1JXJ (2 43) • ~·-'--
5:: 3600 . 2
V=O
5:: 23.63 m.
~the car ~top from the stalled vehicle
=30-23.63
=6.37 m.
, V2 =V1 ±at
[2.&5_ Problem
I J O=
40
:°) -a (1.8)
a= 6.17 m/sec2
In a braking test, a vehicle traveling at a
speed of 30 kph was stopped by applying
brakes fully arid the, skid marks were 5.7 m
in length. Determine the average skid
resistance of the level pavement surface.
F=ma
w
fW=-a
a
g
.i
f= -
g
·solution:
f= 6.17
~
v V=O
9.81
f= 0.63
,,.~ I~
1>=5.7:
~,
30 A vehicle was ·stopped in
1.4 sec. by fully
V=- jamming the brakes and the
skid mark
3.6
measured 7 m. Determine the
average skid
V=8.33m/s resistance on the level
pavement surface.
S= v2 Solution:
2g(f + G)
V1
~
5.7= (8.33)2
2(9:81)(f)
f:: 0.62 :··ii---.-
I
Ii i
V2 =V1 -at Alter Collision :
O=V1 -at
- (W, +Wb) f S = (W, +Wb)
(V2 - ~2 )
vI =at g 2 2g
4 3
v22 =v12 ± 2aS ·

O- V3
2
-fS = __
0 =(at) 2 ± 2aS 2
2g
2
a +t2 =2aS
28 V32 =2g. fS2
a=-
t2 V32 =2(9.81)(0.6)(10)
F=ma
V3 =10.85m.s
tN=wa
g Momentum before impact
=momentum after impact
a
f= - W, V2 =(W,
+Wb) V
g
g .
g 3
f = 25
t2 g 4000V2
=(4000+2000) V
27 g
g 3
f= () = 0.728
(1.4)2 (9.81)
v = 10.85(6000)
2
4000
I 2·!5~ Problem v2 = 16.275 mis

Before collision :
A cargo truck having a weight of 4000 lb.
skids through a distance of 46 m. before · W
(V 2 - V2 )
colliding with a parked Toyota land cruiser -W f S =
a 2 ,
• 1
2g
having a weight of 2000 lb. After collision
both vehicles skid through a distance
- v2 - v12
equal to 1O m. before stopping. If the - fS - - -
coefficient of friction between tires and
1 2g
pavement is 0.6, compute the initial speed
of the cargo truck. - o.60(46) = (16.275)2- v12
2(9.81)
Solution:
v~ (16.275)2 - v12
=-541.s12
~ · ~ -~ S1=46m
V1 =28.~0 mis
v = 28.40(3600)
1
1000
VJ~ V4=0~
r---~
b Collision I ~';J_llision v, =102.23 kph
~'~· .. ''2fm
i--- sz=10m,--_...,.jl
-~ pORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING -
153 J
IR.ANS =----------------- -
---
~ PrOblem .. ]
[2.10 Problem
~~ truck of weight 6000 lb. hits a
JI
A cargo Benz having a weight of 1600 lb. A van having a weight of 8000
lb. hits a
Mercedesh the vehicles skid together parked Toyota car of weight 2000
lb. and
and bOt distance of 5 m. before coming both vehicles skid together
through a
through ~ompute the Initial speed of the distance of 6 m. before coming
to stop.
to stop. k if It does not apply brakes Compute the velocity of Impact
If the van
cargo truccolllsion. Ass. coeff. of applies brakes and skids through
a
before distance of 4 m. before
collision. Assume
friction =0.60.
coefficient of friction Is 0.50.
Solution:
Solution:
After coalition :
=O_.,
"AJ+W)fS=
- \"1 2
-f S2 =
2
v24 -V23
29
(W1 + W2) (V2 V2)
2g .-3
-f'lRVelocity of Impact
v~
Impact L
VAN
6 m--
~
~~r~"'.,..--D·=•
O-V32
-0.60(5)= ~ After collision :
V3 =1.67 mis (vel. of impact) -FS2 =CN, 29+ W2)

1 (V2 -
V2)
• 3
Momentum before impact
. =momentum after impact
w, +w2· = (W, +W2) v3
g g.
6000V = ..:.__
(6000 + 1600)V3
___ _
v2 -V2
__2
-t s2 = •2g 3
g g
=
6000V2 7600V3 O-V32
- 0.50 (6) = 29
7600(7.67)
v2 = oooo V3 =•7.67 mis (velocity at
impact)
v2 =9.72 mis 7.67 (3000)
9.72 (3600) v3 = 1000
v2 = 1000
v =27.61 lcph
3
v2 = 34.99 #cph
Solution:
12.71_ Problem -- J
S=j
Compute the minimum required sight
-
distance to avoid a collision for two-way
traffic with single lane with a car
Single Lane
approaching from the opposite directions If V=80kph
both cars are moving at a speed of 80 kph.
Total perception and reaction time Is 2.5
sec. Coefficient of friction Is 0.40 and brake
efficiency Is 50%.
Solution: V= 80
ts 1· S-=j 3.6
V =22.22m/s
v2
S=Vt+---
Single lane 2g(f + G)
v=80 kph v=80 kph
' ~ ~ s = 22.22(2) +
(22.22)2
*~2;o@&::;
2(9.81)(0.5 + 0.02)
S =92.83m.
Safe stopping sight
distance
80 = 2(92.83)
V= =22.22 mis
3.6 = 185.67m
. v2
S=Vt+ - - -
2g(f + G)
22 22 2
s =22.22(2.5) + ( · )
2(9.81)(0.4 +0)(0.5) f 2.73
Problem
S = 181.37 m.
Sight distance to avoid collision Vehicles often travel
city streets adjacent
to parking lanes at 56
kph or faster. At his
= 2(181.37) speed and setting
detection . through
=362.74m response-initiation time
for an alert driver
at 2 sec. and f = 0.50,
how far must the
driver be away from a
suddenly opened car
[ 2.12 Problem door to avoid striking
it?
Compute the required safe stopping sight Solution:

distance for a two way traffic In a single
lane to avoid collision with a car Passin~ Car
approaching from the opposite direction if .FfF==:,y.-.-. V 1=56
kph
::::A:•~
both cars are moving at a speed of 80 kph. 'l-
__.ir......,,._.~: ::r'
Brakes are applie
Total perception • reaction time of the
driver is 2 sec. Coefficient of friction
between the tires and the pavement ls 0.50.
i--- -s- --
Slope of roadway is +2%.
I -rF0~~P
~ 9_cTATION & T~AJ:""s=-1c_--_-E:-f\J-~~N':=ERl~G ·••• •
lS~j
-------~-
' ''
~ :: 15.56 rrJs [ 2.75 Problem

'
v== 3.6 2
v Compute the headlight sight
distance for a
S::: Vt+ ig(f + G) freeway with a design speed
of 75 kph.
(15.56)2 Assume time of perception to
be 3 sec. and
s::: 15.56(2) + 2(9.81)(0.5 + 0) •kid resistance to be 0.60.
Use 80% brake
efficiency. ·
5 == ss,som. Solution:
v v
~ Yr--- - t --·n -- --
l
[!.T4 Problem . ... . j t-------JP.!.--
~~~....B
W V2.0
One vehicle Is following another on a two.
lane twO highway at night according to the
safe driving rule of thumb of one car length
spacing for each 16 kph of speed. If both
75
vehicles are traveling at 80 kph and the V=- =20.83m/s
lead car crashes at that speed into the rear 3.6
of an unlighted parked truck, at what speed v2
S=Vt+-
will the following vehicle hit the wreckage? 2g(f)
· Assume a car.length is 6 m., reaction .time
· Is o.s sec·. and a coefficient of friction Is s =20.83(3) +
(20.83)2
0.65. 2(9.81)
(0.48)
S =108.56m.
Problem
A truck driver Is traveling

at 50 kph behind
another car and decides to
overtake the car
and accelerate. If the rate
of acceleration
dV
Is given as -=1.2·0.015V
where ·v- Is In
dt
mis and •r Is In sec. Find
the rate of
S=Vt.~ (V, )2 - (V2 )2 acceleration after 8 seconds
and the time
taken to attain a speed of
100 kph.
2g(f +G)
80 Solutlon:
V=3.6 =22.22 mis
rN '
. -= 1.2-0.015V
30 =.22.22(0.5) + (22.22)2 - 012)2 dt
2(9.81)(0.65 + 0) rN
---=dt
V2 =15.90 mis 1.2-0.015V
v2=15.9(3.6) =57.24 kph dV
J1.2-0.015V -Jett
l 156
-
-TRANSPORTATION
-- - ----- -- ~--
& TRAFFIC
-
~~_?IN_~==~INc;
---
u =1.2- 0.015V • Tractive Force,

Rolling ~
du =-0.01 SdV Resistance, Aerodynamic
._sistan~e and
Grade ·
.· ··. R_e
f -0.015dV =f- 0.015dt . -- ·
Resistance · · -· _
1.2-0.015V
ln(1.2- 0.015V) =-0.015t +c
when t =o V=50 kph =13.89 mlsec
~J2_._77_____P_ro_b_l_em
_________ J
In [1.2-0.015(13.89)) =-0.015(0) +c A 2000 lb. car is traveling
on a pave
surface along Osmefta Blvd.
The
c =In 0.99165 horsepower required to
overcome a rolling
In (1.2- 0.015V) =-0.015t +In (0.99165) resistance Is 50 hp. If the
speed of the car
is 60· mph, determine the
coefficient of the
In ( 1.2- 0.015V) =-0.015t rolling resistance.
0.99165
Solution:
1.2- 0.015V =e.0.0151
fVN
0.99165 hp=_
, -
550
1.2-0.015V =0.99165e"°·001sc
0.015V =1.2- 0.99165e-O.Ol5I V = 60(5280) =88 fps
3600
V=80-66.11e-0·0151 f (2000)(88)
50=~
' ---
when t =8 sec. 550
V=80- 66.11e-0. 01
5(8) ~ = 0.156 (coefflcient of
resistance)
V=80 - 66.11e"°·12
v =80- 66.11(2.71828)-0.l2
J 2.78 _Problem
V=21.37 mis
a= 1.2- 0.015V A 2000 lb. car (INNOVA) has
an available
tractive force of 255 lb.
the car is traveling
a =1.2 - 0.015(21.37)
along an inclined.pave
surface at a certain
a =0.879 mI sec1 (acceleration) grade. The speed of the car
is 70 mph.
What is the maximum grade
that this car
when V =100 kph
could ascend and still
maintain the 70 mph
V=80- 66.11e"°·0151 speed If the aerodynamic
resistance is 86
lb. and the rolling
resistance is 34 lb.
27.78 =80- 66.11e.o.0' 51
52.22: 66.11e-ODl5I Solu(ion:
Tractive force =aerodynamic
resistance
0.7899 =e·0'°151 + rolling
resistance
In (0.7899) =- 0.015t In e 255 = 86 + 34 + 2000G
- 0.2359 =-0.015t G =0.0675
t = 15.72 sec. G =6.75%
• -n~A_r-s_sPORTATION & TRA~F~~-E~~;~E~R-ING - - 157--1
1. ----- - ~
--- -
~:___P_r_o_b_le_m________~J
2
450 =80.7(2.5) +
(80.7)
old Mttsublshl Pajero having a weight of
~ lb. Is driven on a level paved
2(32.2>[(~~). G]
rface. It is known that at max. speed, 50
su 11 expended to overcome rolling 248.25 = 101.13
0.348 +G
:istance. H the coefficient of rolling
resistance ls 0.019, determine the cars 0.348 +G=0.407
maximum speed In mph. G=0.0594
so1ut1on: G= 5.94%
f 'IN
hp=~
0.019(10800)V
t2.81
Problem J
50 = 550
An engineering student at
Siiiiman
v=134 University is driving on
a level roadway
and sees a construction
sign 600 feet
134(3600) ahead in the middle of
the roadway. The ·
.v = 5280 student strikes the sign
at a speed of 35
mph. IF the student was
traveling at 55
v=91.37 mph mph when the sign was
first spotted, what
was the
student's associated
perception/reaction time?
Assume that the
Problem I deceleration ta 11.2
ft/s2.
Solution:
Adriver of the service car of Solair Casino
Hotel Is traveling at 55 mph on a wet road. v, = 55(5280) =80.67 fps
An object Is spotted on the road 450 ft. 3600
ahead and the driver Is able to come to a v2 = 35(5280) =51.33 fps
' stop just before hitting the objecl 3600
Assuming standard perception/reaction Distance traveled from 55
to 35 mph :
time of 2.5 sec. and practical stopping
distance, determine the grade of the road if v2. v2
s= 1 2
the car has a deceleration of 11.2 fps2• 2a
Solution:
s =(80.67)2 -(51.33)2
2(11.2)
v2
D=Vt+ 1
s =172.90 ft.
, 2g(~ +G) D =600 - 172.90
I
D =427.10 ft.
v =55(5280) I
01 =V,t
I 36QO
v, =80.7fps 427.10 =80.67t
t= 5.29sec.
158 ·- .TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC
ENG~NEERIN;l
Solution:
( 2.a2 Problem y
An Isuzu tnick Is traveling at 120 kph and

has a braking efficiency of 80"9. The brakei
are applied to miss an object that Is 50 m. 2
S= 1.04V
from the point of brake application, and the
coefficient of road adhesion Is 0.85. 2g[nµ +fr J
Coefficient of rolling resistance Is 0.0168. µ =coeff. of adhesion = 0.80
Neglecting the mass factor ac.counting for
moments of inertia during breaking and fr = coeff. of rolling
friction= 0.018
aerodynamic resistance, determine how 96 .
fast the car will be going when It strikes the V= - = 26.67 mis
object If the surface is level. 3.6
2
60 = 1.04(26.67)
Solution:
2(9.81)[nµ + 0.018
J
nµ + 0.018 =0.628
50m
n =0.80 (efficiency) n(0.80) + 0.018 =.0.628

µ =0.85 (coeff. of adhesion) n =0.763
fr =coeff. of. rolling resistance n = 76.3%
120
V1 = =35.56 mis
3.6
Problem
s= v12 -v: f 2.84_ ,
~,
J
2g[nµ +fr ± G J A cargo truck of San Miguel
Brewery is to
50
= (35.56)
2
- v; be driven down a 4% grade at
120 kph. The
2(9.81)[ 0.80(0.85) + 0.0168 + 0J coefficient of road adhesion
Is 0.95 and it Is
known that the braking
efficiency Is 80%
v2 =24.1mis when the truck is empty and
decreases by
v2 =24.1(3.6) =86.77 kph two percent point for every
45 kg of cargo
added. Ignoring aerodynamic
resistance
and mass factor accounting
for moment of
inertia during braking,
determine the
f 2.13 Problem min_imum theoretical stopping
distance can
A level test track in Sydney, Australia has a be achieved from the point he
applied the
coefficient of road adhesion of 0.80 and a brake if it carries a cargo
of 360 kg.
car being tested has a coefficient of rolling Coefficient of rolling
resistance is 0.0137.
friction 0.018 for all speeds. The vehicle is
tested unloaded and achieves the Solution:·
theoretical .mi~imum stop in 60 m. (from
brake application). The initial speed was
96 kph. Ignoring aerodynamic resistance,
what is the unloaded braking efficiency?
Assume a mass factor of 1.04 accounting
for momentl of inertia during braking.
. -- __..__..:.,___ c.
-i ii
60 = (33.33)2 -
v:
2(9·81)[0.54
+0.015- 0.03]
618.03 =(33.33)2-v2
2
V2 =22.20 mis
s =· v2 v2
2 • 3
2g[nµ, +f, ·- GJ
_ (22.2)2 -
v2
30 -
3
2(9.81)[0.54
+0.015- 0.03]
s:: 91.3'm 309.02 =(22.22)2 - v:

V3 =13.59 mis
V3 =13.59(3.6)
~.85 Problem
V3 =48.93 kph
The service car of Resorts World Corp. is
traveling at 120 kph down a -3% grade of
poor. ~ pavement with a coefficient of
adhesion of 0.60. The car's braking
efficiency is 90%. The brakes were applied
\2.as Problem
..'.
90 m. before impacting the object. The car ··
had an antilock braking system but the
An SUV is traveling 120
kph on a road wtth
a ·3% grade. There is a
stalled car on the
2
system failed 60 m. after the brakes has
been applied (wheels locked). What speed
was the car traveling at just before It
strikes the object? Ignore air resistance.
Coefficient of rolling resistance is 0.015.
road 300 m. ahead of the
driv~. The
driver's vehicle has a
braking efficiency of
90% and it has antilock
brakes. The road ls
in good condition and
ls initially dry but It
becomes wet 48 m.
before the stalled car
,
(and stays wet until
the car ls reached).
Solution: What is the minimum
distance from the
stalled car at which
the driver could apply
the brakes and still
stops before hitting It?
Ignore air
resistance. Coefficient of road
adhesion Is 1.0 when
dry and 0.90 when
120 wet. Coefficient of
rolling resistance is
v =--3333m/
1 3.6 - . s 0.013.
Find first the velocity when the car started to skid. Solution:
S= - v,2 -v:
2g[ nµ +f, - G J
nµ =0.90(0.06) =0.54 s,
160 -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC_ENGINEERll'.J
- ~- ~-- -- - -
S = V22 -V32 Tcial stopping
distance of both cars are the
v2
v2 SC!Jne.
2
2g(nµ +t -G J Vt +
=Vt 2 + --=,...._.-
48 = v:-0 ' 2g [ n,µ +
f, J 2g [ n2µ ~
2(9.81)[0.90(0.9) + 0.013 -0.03 J 26.67(2.5) +

(26.67)2
2(9.81)[n,(0.80) + 0.013 J
v =27.33 m's
2
= 26.67(2) +
(26.67)2
s = v,2 -v:
2(9.81)[ 0.75(0.80) +D:013J
1
2g(nµ + t -G J 36
25
120
66.68 + ·
=112.48
V= =33.33 m's 0.80 n, +
0.013
t 3.6
__36_.2_5_ =45.80
s= 2
(33.33) - (27.33)
2
0.80 n, + 0.013
2(9.81)[ 0.90(1) +0.013- 0.03 J 0.80 n, + 0.013 =0.79
S =21 m. 0.80 n, =9.n1
Distance from the stalled car that the driver n, =0.971
could apply the brakes and stop before hitting Breaking efficiency
of BMW is 97.1%.
it =21 + 48 = 69 m.
'2.87 Problem f 2.aa Prob

lem
Two cars, a BMW and a Mercedes Benz, are A brand new HINO truck
traveling at 120
traveling on level terrain at 60 mph on a kph has a braking
efficiency of 75%. The
road with a coefficient of adhesion ,of 0.80. coefficient of road
adhesion Is 0.70 and
The driver of the BMW has a 2.5 sec. that of rolling
resistance of 0.014. Ignoring
perception/reaction time and the driver of aerodynamic
resistance, determine the
the Mercedes Benz has a 2.0 sec. theoretical stopping
distance on a level
perception/reaction time. Both cars are grade.
traveling side by side and the drivers were
able to stop their respective cars in the Solution:
same distance after seeing a roadway v = 128
obs~cle (perceptlo~ and reaction plus . 3.6
vehicle stopping distance). If the braking
efficiency . of Mercedes Benz is ·O.75, V= 35.56 mis
determine the braking efficiency of the v2
BMW. Coefficient of rolling resistance for S= ------
both cars Is 0.013. 2g[nµ +~ J
Solution: s= (35.56)
2
96 2(9.81)
[ 0.75(0.7) + 0.014 J
V= i6 =26.67 m's
S =119.57 m
>Ml
J
The maximum sustained 15 min. rite
of
flow, expressed In passenger cars
per hour
problem per lane, which can be accommodated
by 1
uniform freeway segment under
prevalllng
traffic and roadway conditions In
one
Th• batlc traffic maneuvers: direction.
Diverging q- a) Capacity
I. MergIng
11. crossIng b) Traffle flow
111. c) Density
rv. weaving
d) Design hourly volume
rE a) /, II and Ill only
b) 1, Ill and IV only
c) I, II and IV only
d) All of the above I 2.13 Problem
J
The maximum number of passenger
cars
'•
that can pass a given point on a
lane or
[2.90 Problem roadway during one hour under the
most
nearly Ideal roadway and traffic
conditions
When a vehicle moves obliquely across the which can possibly be attained.
path of another vehicle moving in the same
direction, at relatively small angle of a) Traffic flow
crossing, the action is termed as: b) Traffic volume
c) Traffic density
a) Cr0ssing
~ d) Road capacity
b) Overtaking
~ c) Weaving
d) Merging
w
12.94 Problem
.
"[2.91 ' Problem The difference between the time the
front
of a vehicle arrives at a point on
the
The number of vehicle occupying a unit highway and the time the front of
the next
length of lane roadway at a given instant, vehicle arrives at the same point
usually expressed as vehicle per km.
a) Regression time
• a) Traffic capacity B' b) Tim• hudwly
b) Traffic volume c) Time leg
q:- c} Traffic density d) Gap
t
I
d) Theoretical max. capacity
I.
1..
I..
-=-
RI l\Jcs ,
---------
- -.
L.2.95 Problem j 2.99

Problem ::J
The distance between the front of a vehicle The process by which a
vehicle in on lrattic
and the front of the following vehicle. stream joins another
traffic stream movin
In the same direction such
as a rarng
a) Lag vehicle joining a freeway
stream. P
b) Gap
a) Weaving
Q> c) Merging
~ c) Space headway
b) Diverging
d) Converging
d) Spacing of vehicles
I2.9& Problem f 2.100 Problem

The arithmetic mean of the speeds of The process by which a
vehicle In a traffic
vehicles passing a point on a highway stream leaves that traffic
stream, such as a
during an interval of time. vehicle leaving the
outside lane of an
a) Space mean speed expressway.
b) Average speed a) Weaving
c) Merging
~ c) Time mean speed ~ b) Diverging
d) Converging
d) Instantaneous speed
I. 2.9r Problem I2.101 Problem
J
The harmonic mean of the speed of The process by which a vehicle
first
vehicles passing a point on a highway merges into a stream of
traffic obliquely
during an Interval of time. It is obtained by crosses that stream, then
merges into a
dividing the total distance traveled by two second stream moving in the
same
or more vehicles on a section of a h~ghway direction.
by the total time required by these vehicles
to travel that distance. ~ a) Weaving
c) Merging
b) Diverging
d) Converging
Q> a) Space mean speed
b) Average speed
c) Time mean speed f 2.102 Problem
' d) Instantaneous speed
The headway in a major stream,
which is
I2.9a Problem evaluated by a vehicle driver
In a minor
stream who wishes to merge
into the major
The maximum speed that can be attained stream.
on a highway as the flow tends to zero.
a) Lag
•
a) Space mean speed ~ b) Gap
b) Time mean speed
c) Space headway
c) Instantaneous speed
d) Mean headway
~ d) Mean free speed
i Space mean speed
~.10'
between the time a vehicle µ
•
=rs
nt
fhe dlfferencelnto 8 main traffic stream
I
t11at .,,erges tnt on the highway In the area where:

rea'hes 8 : the time a vehicle In the main rs =.sum of distances
covered by the
of rne1118 8 het the same point cars in i·
sec.
strtafll reac
Mean time 4
Variance of
the space
a) space headway distribution of
speeds A,
b) Time gap
c)
(12
~ dJ Tim• lag µI =µI
+ -·
•
where:
<Js2 = variance ·of
the space distribution of
Mean Speed - the arithmetic speed
8
Tim esn of speeds of all vehicles passing a <Js =standard
deviation
~int during a·specified interval of time µ1 =time mean speed
IJ• =space mean speed
1
Time mean speed
4- Standard deviation of
the space
distribution of speeds
where: <Js =standard
deviation
Ui =observed sped of i th vehicle
n =no. of vehicles observed
1.11 =time mean speed
Time Mean Speed, Space

Space Mean Speed - the arithmetic Mean Speed, and Variance
mean of speed of vehicles occupying a of the Space Distribution of
relatively long section of street or highway ----..". _, S eeds
at a given instant. It is the average of
vehicle speeds weighted according to how
long they remain on the section of the
road.
Three cars travel over a 60 m.
section of
2
Space mean speed highway at constant speeds of
19, 20 and
25 mis.
CD Compute the time mean speed

for this
where: condition.
d =length of roadway section ~ Compute the space mean speed
for
n=no. of vehicles observed this condition. .
t -- 0 bserved time for the Ith vehicle to ~ Compute the variance of the
space
travel a distance 1 d• distribution of speeds.
Solution:
Solution: (J2
<D Time mean speed µt =µ• +µ,-
µ =-
rµ, (J2
t n
22=20+-
20
µ =19 + 20 +25 =21.33 mIs
t 3 (J2
2 = 20
® Space mean speed (J = 6.32
· nd
µ, =rt,
t =! Space Mean Speed Versus
1 uI
__......Time ·. - . . . . ..
60
60 60
~), = 19 + 20 + 25·
rt,=8.56 sec. 12.10~ Problem
? .
µ =a(60) =21.03 ml s The following data were taken on

five
• 8.56 vehicles traveling a 1.5 km
portion of the
NLEX.
@ Variance of the space distribution of
speeds Vehicles
Time(minute)
02 1
1.2
µI =µI + -·
µ
. . 02
2
3
1.0
1.4
21.33 =21.03 + - · - 4
1.3
21.03 5
1.1
02
- · =0.30
21.03 Determine the space mean speed
in kph.
0
2
I
=631 •
Solution:
Distance
µ =--
s Ave. time
Time Mean Speed, Space .
Mean Speed, and Standard Average time =1.2 + 1.0 + 1.4 +
1.3 + 1.1
I Deviation of the Space ·.~ 5
·· Distribution of Speeds -~~:.. Average time = 1.2 minutes
I ~.105 Problem
I µs :: ~:~ (60)
What is the standard deviation if the space µ1 = 75kph
mean speed of a certain car is 20 mis and
Its time mean speed is 22 mis.
•
ace Mean Speed Versus

5p.....- Distance ~ Vehlcln
,,,.. ..
-
1
~ 07 Problem J 2
3
4
m the following data of a freeway
frorvelllance, there are 5 vehicles under
'~servatlon and the following distances Solution:
:re the distance each vehicle had travel"'
when observed every 2 sec.
Space meM speed : where n=4
~Vehicles Distance (S) m.

- 1 24.4
- 2 25.8
r lµ, = __!__
--
~
3 24.7
+ __!__ + __!__
+-1-
43.40 43.50 44.60
45.20
4 26.9
- 22.9
-
5
r lµ, =0.0911
compute the space mean speed in kph.
4
Solution:
µ, =0.0911
µ, -
_rs
nt µ, =43.90 kph
24.4 + 25.8 + 24.7 + 26.9 + 22.9

µ, = 5(2)
µ, =12.47 mis
12.47(3600) For the 5 vehicles observed at
a certain
µ, = 1000 segment of the South Super
Highway
passes through point A and
recorded the
µ, = 44.89 kph following time of travel for
each vehlcle
and its corresponding spot
speed. .
Compute the space mean speed
of each
vehicle.
Space Mean Speed Versus
- - - Spot Speed ........ Vehicle Time of
passing Spot speed
(sec.)
tkDh)
~-108
!D
Problem . 1 1.70
62.6
2 6.20
72.4
3 8.60
75.6
There are four vehicles passiRg .through
68.4
4 12.02
the portion of the South Super Hlgway In a
65.3
5 15.00
certain period of time. Compute the space
mean speed in kph.
'
Time mean speed :
Solution:
3.733
µ,=5
µ1 =0.7466 km'min
µ, =0.07466(60)
µ1 =44.Bkph

. . - Time Headway -
1_2.111 Problem --·
There are 9 vehicles observed In a

300 m
section of McArthur highway. If
the average
time headway is 4 sec., compute
the space
mean speed of the vehicles in kph.
Time Mean Speed Versus
~Time~' '
Solution: .
Density of traffic K =~ =30

vehicles/km
I2.11 ~- • ~roblem 0.30
3600 .
The following travel times were observed Traffic flow q =- =900
vehicles per hour
4
for 5 vehicles traveling a·one km segment
q=KµI
of the NLEX. It Is required to determine the
time mean speed of these vehicles. 900 =30µ s
Time(minute)
µ5 =30kph
Vehicles
1 1.19
2 1.22
3 1.36 f!_im~ Mean Speed Versus
4 1.48 \N.' S ot S eed and Time •
5 1.51
Solution:
I2.112 Problem.
s:
]
µI =---
n
rt Four vehicles passing through the
SLEX
has the following·observation.
r(!J =
t,
_1_ + _1_ + _1_ + _1_ + 1
1.19 1.22 1.36 1.48 1.51
Vehicle Time of passing
(sec.)
Spot speed
(kph)
rUJ =1133
1
2
3
1.5 sec.
6.0 sec.
8.0 sec.
55.40
56.80
53.60
4 12.0 sec.
48.90
so1ut1on:
ru,
µ, ::~
55,40 + 56.80 + 53.60 + 48.90
JJ,:: - 4
µ, :: 53.68 lcph
space
space Mean Speed Versus
41.08
.....,, Free Flow Speed -
48.51
50.64
[z.113 Problem a
46.82
144.14
The Southern Luzon Expressway was
designed to carry a free-flow speed of 50 Solution:
kph and a capacity of 4000 vehicles per Time 111ea1 speed :
hour. At a certain point near the
intersection of a road leading to Laguna
·µ =
I
ru,n
ther:e were 3600 vehicles counted, what is
the space mean speed of these vehicles? µ =41.08 +48.51 +50.64 +46.82
+44.14
I
5
\
Solution: µI : 46.23 kph
Jam density : Space mean speed :
K. =4qc;ap n
. ' µ, II,= L(~)
K =4(4000)
I 50 r(.!.)=-1-
µ,
_1_41.08
+
48.51
+ ~•
50.64
_1_ _1_
46.82
+
44.14
K1 =320veMm
Kl 2
- u • K u+q=O L ( ~,)= o.1os12
IJ, I
320 5
50 u 2
• 320u + 3600 =o µ, =0.10872 =45·99 kph
2 . Standard deviooan a :
IJ • 50µ + 562.5 =0 (J2
µ =32.91 kph µI =µI +-
II
' ,..,
(J2
46.23 =45.99 + -
45.99
(J =3.32
~.! 16
:::i
th~ft
P_!!>!Jl•lll.
_
The data below shows the resutt
Of
of traffic at a certain part of a
highway~
observing the arrival times for
fo
vehicles at two sections A and B
that a~;
150 m. apart. The total
observation time at
section A Is 15 sec.
Two sets of students are collecting traffic
data at the two sections A and B 200 m. Section A
Vehicles
Sectione-
apart along a highway. Observation at A
1 T
T+7.58sec~
shows that 5 vehicles pass that section at
2 T + 3 sec. T
+ 9.18 sec:-
Intervals of 8.18 sec., 9.09 sec., 10.23 sec.,
11.68 sec. and 13.64 sec. respectively. If 3 T + 6 sec. T
+ 12.36 sec.-
the speeds of the vehicles were 80, 72, 64, 4 T + 12sec. T
+ 21.74 sec-:-
56 and 48.kph, compute the following:
-
CD Determine the time mean ~peed
In kph,
CD Density of traffic in vehicles per km ~ Determine the space mean speed
in
~ Time mean speed in kph kph.
Q> Space mean speed in kph ~ Determine the flow at section A
in
vehicles per hour.
Solution:
<D Density of traffic Solution:
<D Time mean speed
5
K= - Speeds of vehicles :
0.200
K = 25 vehicles I km
u= Dist .
Time
150
® Time mean speed U1 = =19.79 mis
7.58
µ = rµi 150
I n U2 = . _3 =24.27 mis
9 18
80 + 72 + 64 +56 + 48
µ, = 5 150
U3 = . _ =23.58 mis
µ, = 64/cph 12 36 6
150
U4 = = 15.4 mis
® ~pace mean speed 21.74 -12
nd Time mean speed :
µ, =rt
U·= -
ru
µ = 5(200) ' n
• 8.18+9.09+10.23+11.68+13.64 u = 19.79 + 24.27+23.58+15.4
JJ, = 18.93 mis I 4
- 18.93(3600) u, ·=20.76 mis
µ, - 1000
u =20.76(3600) =14.14kph
µ. =68.16kph I 1{)()()
- -
-- - - ~ -
........
5pace mean speed <Z> Space mean

9Peed
~ nL JJ =~
lJ, :: ft I r J.II,
+(918. 3) +(12.36. 6) + (21.74 -12)
!t:: 7.58 .
!t =26.86 sec.
space,,_, speed :
_~ =22.34 mis
µ, - 2686 @ Density
µ, :: 22.34(3.6) K= _i
µ, =so.a kph ... µ,
J t=3+4+3+5
® FloW at section A in vehicles per hour
t= 15 sec.
n
q:: ~ (vehiclelhoor)
t q-- -(3600)
5
n 15
q:: 4(3600) =960 veh I hr q=1200 veh/hr
15
K= 1200
38.7
~.117 Problem K= 31vth/ km
Traffic data collected a two sections A and

Bof a highway, which Is 450 m apart. Five
vehicles pass section A at intervals of 3, 4,
3 and 5 sec. respectively. The vehicles ~pa~e Mean Speed
and J
speeds are 50, 45, 40, 35 and 30 kph Distance
Observed ""'
respectively. It takes each vehicle 20
seconds after the first vehicle passes
through the section.
t. 2.118
Problem
© Determine the time mean speed. From the following

data of a freeway
~ Determine the space mean speed. surveillance, there
are 5 vehicles counted
(J) Determine the density. for a length of 300
m, and the following
positions are
observed on the two
Solution: photographs taken 2
seconds apart, the
Q) Time mean speed distance "S"
that'tlch vehicle travel.
µ
I
=~u, <D Compute the
density of flow In
n vehicles/km.
µI = 50+45+40+35+30 ~ Compute the space
mean speed In kph.
.5 ~ Compute the flow
of traffic In
vehicles/hour.
l'H·* :
Position Position Solution:
Vehicles S (m)
1 2
V +V +V +V
1 268.3 m 292.7 m 24.4 µ =time mean
speed= ~ •v_
,
n ~
2 215.4 m 234.2 m 18.8
44 + 42 + 51
+ 49 + 46
3 175.0 m 199.7 m 24.7 µ, = 5
4 143.2m 170.1 m 26.9
5 95.20 m 118.1 m 22.9 µ1 =46.4mph
Solution:
<D Density o_f ftow in vehicles/km
K=-
5 LfL2=·~1_2_0_____~-
~o_b_l7em~---..-......
::::
0.300
The speeds for
vehicles A, B, C, D and E
K=16.67 vehicles I km
were 50, 54, 56, 58
and 60 kph re•Ptctivety,
Assuming all vehicles
were traveling at
® Space mean speed
constant speed for a
distance of 1.5 krn,
µ =rs determine the
space .mean speed.
• nt
Solution:
24..4 + 18.8 + 24.7 + 26.9 + 22.9
µ, =
µ1 =11.n mis
5(2)
µ, =
n
v,1 + Vi1 + i
3 + **
_ 11.n(3600) '
5
µ, - 1000 µ, = 1 1
1 1 1
- + - + - + -
+-
50 54 56 58 60
µ, = 43.37 kph
µ, =55.38 kph
® Flow of traffic
q =Kµ,
q = 16.67(43.37)
q = 723 vehiclesthr
f 2.121
Problem
& • ]
From the following table of
traffic flow In a
'
~/ 2.119 . ~roblem
certain point along a point
of a 3-lane
roadway of the proposed
extension of the
(NLEX) North Luzon
Expressway).
Compute the time mean
speed.
The speed of 5 vehicles were measured
(with radar) at the midpoint of a 0.5 km Lane
section of the Bataan Provincial 1
Expressway (BPEX). The speeds for
2
vehicles 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 were 44, 42, 51, 49
and 46 kph respectively. Assuming all
3
vef1fcles were traveling at constant speed
over the section, calculate the time-mean Solution:
speed.
µ =30(1.0) + 45(1.5) +
60(2) =48.33kph
I 1+1.5 +
2
- NSPORTATION& TRAFFIC _E________
- ____le--,,
1'~,A ----------- --------------- _ NGINEERING -
, 17 e _
--- --- ----- --- - - --
- -- - ------
,-::·
~. Problem. .: J Cars S
Covered
1
32
racing cars are traveling on a 2.5 mile
30
f o!~al track at Rizal Memorial Stadium. 3
31
trl four cars are traveling at constant 4
fh~1 of195 mph, 190mph,155 mph and
30
1 mph respectively. Assume you are an
180bserver standing at a point on the track
Solution:
~or 8 period of 30 min. and are recording 195 + 184 + 190 + 180
µ• = - - -
th• instantaneous speed.of each vehicle as 4 ---
It crosses your point as shown on the
µ, =187.25 mph
table.

Distance each Vehicle
that
Travels for a Time "t"
Apart
compute the time mean speed for this

1
2_~_1
.....1
__24_s::..._P_r_o_b_1e_m_ _ ::££
___I .
vehicle in mph.
From the following data
taken from 4
vehicles observed from
photographs taken
Solution: 2 seconds apart, compute
the space mean
195(39) + 190(38) + 185(37) + 180(36) speed of the vehicles.
µ, = 39 + 38 + 37 + 36
Vehicles
Distance (m)
µ, =187.67 mph 1
36.2
2
34.6
3
35.8
4
37.0 '
£
[2.123 Problem
- - Solution:
Space mean speed :
Four racing cars are traveling on a 3-mile
oval track in Melbourne, Australia. The 4 µ =rs
cars are traveling at constant speeds of • nt
195 mph, 184 mph, 190 mph and 150 mph 36.2 +
34.6 + 35.8 + 37
respectively. The observer standing at a
point on the track for a period of 30 min.
µ, =
4(2) . .
and are recording the instantaneous speed µ =17.95 mis
•
of each - vehicle as it crosses the '
observation point. Compute the space - 17.95(3600)
mean speed from these cars for this time µ, - 1000
period:
µ, = 64.62 kph
lit.I::
~E ~oard May 2 000 . 1
- &
The rate of flow at a point in the highway i•

1200 vehicles/hour. Find the space mean
speed ff the density of traffic is 25 vehicle•
per mile.
Solution:
Space·mean speed:
Solution:
q =Kµs <D Density of
flow in vehicles/km
1200 =25µ,
µs='8mph K= ~
=30vehlcla/km
0.200
® Flow of
traffic in vehicles/hr
I~!f2s - Probl~m a
j q =%=0.25
vehicle/sec.
Q=0.25(3600)
Since it is not possible to measure density
directJy at a point, a measure called Iane q=
, 900
vehicle/hr.
occupancy has been developed for freeway
surveillance. If six vehicles are distributed @ Space mean
speed
along a highway 300 m. long have lengths q= Kµs
of 5.48 m, 6 m, 13.7 m, 4.6 m, 5.4 m and 6.7 900 = 30 µs
m. respectively, compute the density of
µs =30kph
traffic In vehicles/kms.
Solution:
~;.~'¢~H:'
Volume of Traffic .__
R = Lvehicle lengths
1
Length of r:oacfway sections
R = 5.48+6+13.7+4.6 + 5.4 + 6.7

l 2 .128
Problem
' z - - · ]
1 300 The spacing of the

cars moving along the
sa me lane of an
expressway is 40 m. center
R, =0.1396 to center. If the
average velocity of the car
is 80 kph,
determine the volume of traffic.
Average length of vehicle
= 5.48 +6 + 13.7 +4.6 +5.4 +6.7 Solution:
6
1
No. of vehicles
per km = OOO =25 (density)
=6.98m. f
AO
Ve locity =
vehicles I hr = h
=0.00698km
vehicles I km kp
Jensity of traffic= 0.1396 Volume of traffic
=vehicles/km
0.00698
vol. of
traffic
>ensity ~f traffic =20 vehicles I km 80=
25
Vol.of traffic
=2000 vehicles I hr
iii
~,
Problem
Assume you are observing

traffic In a
[i!ie CE Board May 20~2]
•Ingle lane of McArthur
Highway at a
Specific location. You
measure the average
headway and average spacing
of the
compute the rate of flow In vehicles per vehlclea as 3.2 sec. and 50
m. respectively.
hour If the space mean speed Is 30 mph Determine the traffic flow.
and the density Is 14 vehicles per km. \
Solution:
solution: Traffle flow :
µ, =space mean speed 1
q= -(3600)
30(5280) 3.2 .
µ, =3.281(1000) q =1125
µ, =48.28 kph
q=Kµ,
q =14(48.28)
[ ~-132 P~oblem
q =675.92 vehicles I hr (rate of flow) If the density of traffic In
Aurora Blvd. Is 30
km/hr and the average
headway Is 4 sec.,
compute the space mean
speed. Spacing
between vehicles Is 4.8 m.
apart to avoid
~.130
2
Problem
J bumping of cars.
Solution:
Twelve vehicles are observed In a 400 m.
section of the extension of SCTEX. K=30
Average time of headway is 4 sec. 1hr. =3600 sec.
Determine the space meartspeed.
1
q = - (3600) '
Solution: 4
q=900
Density K = E. = 30 vehicles/km
0.4
q=KµI
=
Traffic flow= ..!(3600) 900 vehicles/hr 900 =30 µ,
4 .
...
Space mean speed : µ
• =301cph
900
µ=30
µ =301cph
f -~ - -
1- 174__ ~-~~~S~O-~T_AT~?N ~-T~~FFIC_~N?INEE~ING
® Peak hour factor

·-.-... Peak Hour Factor . ---~-·
Vol. during
peak hour
PHF=---
__..:~~~---
Peak hour factor = the ratio of total 60

(Vof. during peak 15 nln.
hourly volume to the maximum rate of
- x
15
within peak hour)
flow within the hour.
1557
PHF =
=0.945
I. ~-133 . Problem
I 1
-· -J 60
(412)
15
Compute the peak hour factor if the hourly
volume of traffic is 1800 vehicles/hour and @ Design hourly volume
of the approach
the highest 15 min. volume is 750. Peak-hour
Vol.
DHV=-----
Solution: Peak-hour
factor
60 1557
Note : No.of 15 min in 1hour = =4 DHV = =
1648
15 0.945
PHF = Hour1y volume
60
15
(highest vol.)
1800
j 2.135 Problem
J
PHF = 60 =0.60 From the tabulated table
shows the.
(750) following traffic counts
made during a
15 study period of one hour.
Time Period
No.of Rate of flow
J ·2.134 . Problem .
Vehicles (vehicles/hr)
7:00- 7:15
1000 4000
The table shows a 15 minute volume 7:15- 7:30
1100 4400
counts during the peak hour on an 7:3Q-7:45
1000 4000
approach of an intersection. 7:45-8:00
900 3600
Time Volume of Traffic Compute the design hourly
volume (DHV).
6:00 • 6:15 PM 375
6:15 • 6:30 PM 380 Solution:
6:30 • 6:45 PM 412 Peak hour vol. =4000 +
4400 + 4000 + 3600
6:45 • 7:00 PM 390
Peak hour vol. = 16000
vehicles/hr
© Determine the peak hour volume.
~ Determine the peak hour factor. Peark hour factor :
 Determine the design hourly volume . 16000
(DHV) of the approach. PHF =
=0.91
60 (4400)
Solution: 15
<D Peak hour volume Design hourly volume :
Vol.= 375 + 380 + 412 + 390 16000
Vol.= 1557 DHV = = 17.
583
0.91 ,
_ . . ..
......... ~~ ~ .... ..
, , ,
I · -~ · Time
Headway __...."""°
~6 problem J
te cars are moving at an average Compute the minimum time
hlldwly for
prtva of 60 kph along an Expressway. The cars moving It an average of
60 kph. Th•
•~ave .maintained an equal spacing of average length of tht car II
4.5 m. RllCtlon
cars111 center to center. Calculate the time 11 0.7 sec.
'
:pactty of the single lane I~ vehicles/hour.
S'f)lutlon:
solution: Minimum time headwtlf
capacitY of single lane :
Spacing of vehicles :
1000V
c=-
s S=Vt+L
10oo(60) 60
c= 16 V=-
3.6
c =3750 vehicles I hour V =16.67 rrVS
s =16.67(0.7) + 4.5
[2.137 Problem 1 s =16.17 {BV8f8g6 center to
eerier spacing d C81S)
Capacity of ttJe road :
A car has an average speed of 50 kph and
a length of 4.2 m. The car Is moving along a
C= 1000V
single lane roadway. If the driver's reaction
time is 0.8 sec., compute the capacity of
s
the single lane in vehicles/hour. c =1000(60)
16.17
Solution:
Capacity of single lane : C =3711 vehicles/hour
S=Vt +L Time headway :
50 3600 .
V= - = 13.89m/s C=-
3.6 t
s =13.89(0.8) +4.2 3600
3711= -
S =15.31 m. (averagecentertocenter spacing) t
t =1.03072 sec. (min. time
h98dway)
C= 1000V
s
c =1000(50)
15.31
C = 3266 vehicles I hour
:
j 2.139 Problem
~
"-----------~
The mean flow speed at a portion Of
highway Is 62.8 mph and a jam dens11.~
1. Jam densit 110 vehicle/mile. '''Of
<D Co~pute the density when the flaw

i.
K =4qClp maximum.
J µ, ~ Compute the maximum capactty
1
where: vehicle/hour. n
~ Compute the speed of maximum fle>w.
Ki =jam density (vehicle/hour)
Qcap =max. capacity Solution:
µ1 = ~flow speed <D Density.when the flow is maximum
µI =µ - !i
K. (K)
f
J
2. Space mean speed q= K µs
µ =µ _!:itK)
µ,KJ
' ' K. ,,
I
(
q =K µ, - K;
where: =K(62.8) - 62.8K2

µs =space mean speed q 110
µ, = free flow speed dq =62.8 - 2(62.8) K =0
. Ki =jam density dK 110
K= density K =55 vehicle I mile
@ Max. capacity
3. Average volume of flow 62
8 2
= K(62.8) - ·
K
ql!lll 110
6
8
q = 55(62.8) - 2'. (55)2
mlb 110
where: qmax = 1727 vehicles I hour
q = average volume of flow in
vehicles/hour @ Speed of max. flow (space mean
speed)
µm =speed max. flow . µ
µs =µ - -K.' (K)
K= density f
Ki =jam density
I
.
62 8
µ . = 62.8 - · (55)
s 110
µ, = 31.4mph
.
_ [ u2]
q- K1 u - "LI,"
~,o
• tant. there were 2400 vehlcln
, gl~"' in• specific point along the
011
8
~ ted 8\he TPLEX. The highway was 3344=24+-~]
p0rt10" of t have a capacity of 3000
ctef1g11ed ~hour with a free flow speed of 13.93 =60u ·ti
~~1clet P' pute th• max. value of the jam
ao kf>h· c;;
dtfllltY fff C
could possibly occur during
.
60
836=60u =u2
hf'~tr8 . u2 - 60u +836 =0
u=38kph
soJUllO":
4Q
K :: .--
1 µf
1~"2
2
1
K, --~
4(3000) =200 vehicleS I km --- Problem
--------~--_J .
60
----
A section of the Cebu-Balamban
Trancentral Highway has a free-flow
speed
~~----,
~,o~
-b
~.~
.m---~~---~~, of 95 km/hr and a density of 175
vehicles
per km. If the space mean speed Is
30 kph,
A portion of the extension of SLEX Is

determine the jam density In
vehicles per
km. .
•
kflOWl'I to have a free-flow speed of 60 kph
and a capacity of 3600 vehicles per hour. If . Solution:
In a given hour 3344 vehicles were where:
countered at a specified point along this
u=space
mean speed
highway, compute the space mean speed
u,
=hebvspeed
of these 3344 vehicles. . K=densly
i1 vehicles I km
KI =jem
dBnsly ii vehicle$ I Ian
Solution:
=95 K= 175
u=30
use:q=K;.[u- ~:J
·Uf
u=u, (1- ~)
'Miere Ki =jam density
1
~~)
u=space mean speed
u, =free now speed
30 =95 ( 1-
q=flow of traffic
Jam density : 175
0.316 =1-
K = 4q
Kl
j µf . 0.684 =175
Kl
K = 4(3600) =240
I 60 Kl =256
178 -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFl~-~NGINE~RINc;
- - - - - -- - ------- --- ---- - -----
Space Mean Speed Versus ~f2~·-1_

4_~___
P_ro_b_l_e m
_____ _ 0
_ __ :J
~ Jam Densit ". ....-
Given from an
observation along EDSA
during rush hour.
I, ~~143 Problem Mean free speed •
64 kph
Jam density= 120
veh/km
The jam density on the approach of thtt
traffic flow on a single lane o~ Juan Luna ()) Determine the
maximum flow of traffic.
Street is 120 vehicles per km, with a ~ Determine the velocity
at which tht
density on the approach of 40 vehicle per flow of traffic is
maximum.
hour. If the space mean speed is 40 kph, ~ Determine the density
at which the flow
determine the mean free speed in kph. of traffic is
maximum.
Solution: Solution:
CD Max. flow of traffic
µ, =µ, - ~: (K) . K, µ,
I
q"* =4
40 =µ - ~ (40) - 120(64)
f 120 q"* - 4
40 =µ - µ, q119 =1920 veh
I hour
t 3
120 =-3µ, - µ, ® Velocity at which the
flow of traffic is
maximum
µ, =60kph
V= % µt
v= %(64) = 32 kph
f 2.144 Problem @ Density at which
the flow of traffic is
maximum
A vehicle is approaching a signalized K =%Oam density)
intersection at a speed of 35 kph. The
K =%(120) = 60
vehlhour
density of traffic is 50 vehicles/hour. The
red phase of the traffic signal is 20 sec. If
the jam density is 110 vehicles/km,
determine the speed of stopping shock f 2.146
Problem
wave.
The following data shows
that the traffic
Solution:
flow on a single-lane
approach to a
µ =- µ,(K) signalized intersection.
w K
l Jam density
on the
approach= 130 vehicle/km
- 35(50)
µw -- 110 Density on the approach
=45 vehicle/km
Space mean speed 40 kph
=
µw = ·15.9kph
Determine the mean free
speed.
IJtion· Solution:
s~ 40 kph (space·m_ean ~)
µs: 130 \lehicle/km (jam ~ensity) . K, =110 YeMm uam densly)
t<i- 5 ehicle/km (density on the approach)
t<==4 " µ, =64 kph (mean free speed)
-11 • .& (K)
JJ. - ,.., K, - K,µ,
q --
"* 4
40:: µ, • *° (4S) q,_ =
110(64).
4
=1760 vehnlour
µ, :: 61.2 kph (mean free speed)
Upstream flow= 0.80(1760)
Upstream flow= 1G veh I hour
J
ObServation of the traffic flow approaching [ 2.~49 Problem ,
8 signalized · intersection Indicates the
t
following data: Acar moves along Florida SR-COO

at a max.
Mean free speed = 60 kph speed of 64 mph. If the maximum
flow ls
Jam density= 140 vehicle/km , 1849 vehicles per hour,
determine the
Density of the approach K = 45 kph density at which the flow is
maximum In
vehicles per hour.
Determine the velocity of the stopping·
-ve in m/sec. Solution:
K, µ,
Solution: q=-
4
Velocity of stopping wave :
µ, K 1849 = K,(S4)
µ·=t< j
4
K1 =115.56 vehicles/mile
= 5o(4S) =19.29 kph
µ_ 140 Density ct which the flow is
maximum
19.29 . = 115.56
µ =-=5.36m/s
• 3.6 2
=57.78 l/8h I hr
Problem 8
Due to the closure of certain lanes of a

L2.150 Problem
highway (under repair), the capacity' Is '
A section of the extension of
the Davao-
reduced to 60% of Its normal capacity. If General Santos route has a free
flow speed
the jam density of the highway Is 110 of 50 kph and a capacity of 3200
vehicles
veh/km and the mean free speed is 64 kph, per hour. Compute the density at
maximum
determine the upstream flow If It Is only flow.
80% of Its capacity. ·
Solution: y- 45 =m(x - 30)
K
l
= 4qCIP
µ,
y- 45 =- J1 (x - 30)
K = 4(3200) =256 vehide/km x
l 50 y+ 3 =55
1 Free flow speed =55 ~
Density of max. ~ = (256)
2
Density of max. flow= 128vehicleI1cm
~'~-·--1.....
s~_...........P.....r......
ob_l......
• ......
m__.....___ :J
1~.151 Problem - -- ? ~
The space mean speed of the cars
movln
along the North Diversion Highway
ls ~
Two platoons of cars are timed over a
kph. The average spacing of the
cars ls
distance of 0.5 km. Their flows are
recorded. The first group ls timed at 40
6.5 m. Determine the jam density
In
vehicles per km if the highway
has a
seconds, with the flow at 1350 vehicles per
capacity of 3420 vehicles/hr.
.
hour. The second group takes 45 seconds
with a flow of 1800 vehfoles per hour.
Determine the free flow speed. Solution:
1
Jam density = OOO = 154
Solution: 6.5
Group1 :
Average speed = o.5(3600) =45 kph
40
Density 1350 =.30 vehicles/km
=-
45 A section of the (TPLEX) Tarlac _
Group2: Pangasinan • La Union Expressway
has the
following flow density
relationship:
Average speed= O.S{3600) =40 kph =
q 50K-1.56K2
45
where q = flow in vehicles per
hour
1800
Density = ~ =45 vehicles/km K =density in vehicles per
km
Comput~ the space mean speed In
kph if
x =density
the density of flow is 14 vehicles
per km.
y=speed
Solution:
m= Y1 -Y2
x, -x2 q = 50K -1 .56K2
II
q =50(14) - 1.56(14)2
m= 45 - 40.
30 -45 q = 394.24
-5 . q =K µs
m=-
15 394.24 = 14µ 5
1 µs = 28.16 kph
m=- -
3
[2::1s!= P..o.;m:
-I
~-~5~ . Given the following data' as
observed by a
· ineer observing a traffic at
art the en~on along the (NLEX) North DPWH engineer at a specified
point along
you Ifie 1ocat · If you measure the the (SLEX) South Luzon
Expressway.
~:::: Ex:=;!~d average spacing of Jam density • 240 vehicles/km
~,rage h les as 3.2 sec. and 50 m. Free flow speed • 55 kph
~551ng vehlCompute the flow of traffic, If No. of vehicles counted In a given
respecttvel~ecmean speed of 40 kph. hour= 2100 vehicles.
It has a spa
Compute the space mean speed In kph.
so1ut1on:
Solution:
1
q:: ---
3.2 (::) u' -K1 u+q=O
q:: 0.31 25 vehicles/~.
240 2
q:: 0.3125(3600) u - 240u + 2100 =0
55
q:: 1125
u2 - 55u + 481.25 =0
u ='4.08.lcph
.
Given the following data as observed along Problem
the extension of (SCTEX) Sublc·Clark·
Tarlac Expressway: Four racing cars competing on a 2 km
tri·
oval track at Rizal Memorial Stadium.
The
Free flow speed =55 kph
four cars are traveling at constant
speeds
Traffic capacity =3300 vehicles/hour and the corresponding laps covered as
Density= 40 vehicles/km shown in the table.
Compute the jam density in ve~lcles per Cars S
km. .A
39
B
38
Solution: c
37
D
36
K. = 4q
I IJ, Compute the time-mean speed for these
vehicles In kph.
K. = 4(3300)
I 55 Solution:
KI =240 Time mean speed :
195(39) + 1'90(38) + 185(37) +
180(36)
IJ, = 39 + 38 + 37 + 36
µ, =187.67 /rph
J ~---~
The free mean speed on a roadway along A section of the TPLEX (Tartac
Quirino Avenue ls found to be 80 kph. Pangaslnan • La Union
~xpresaway) h •
Under stopped conditions the average the following flow density
relationship: "
spacing between vehicles ls 6.9 m. q =50K-1.56K2
Determine the capacity flow In vehicles per
hour. where q -= flow In
vehicles/hr
=
K density n
vehicles/km
Solution: Compute the space mean speed
In kPh K
K =1000 the density of flow ls 14
vehicles/km.
I 6.9
K1 = 145 vehicles/km ljam density) Solution:
q = 50K-1 .56K2
145= 4q
80 q =50(14)- 1.56(14)2
q = 394.24
q =2900
q=Kµs
394.24 = 14 µ,
µ, = 28.16 kph
I2.159 Problem
In a given hour 2100 vehicles were counted

at a specified point along the (SLEX) South
I2~161 Problem
_]
Luzon Expressway. If the jam density is
240 vehicles per mile, determine the space You are the engineer observing
a' traffic at
mean speed at these vehicles in mph. a specific 'location of (NLEX)
North Luzon
Assume a free flow speed of 55 mph. Expres•way. If you measure the
average
K headway and average spacing of
passing
Hint: - 1 u2 ·K u+q=O vehicles as 3.2 seconds and 50
m.
. ,.,
II • J
respectively, compute the flow
of traffic if it
has a space mean speed of 40
kph.
Solution:
Solution:
K1 .
- u2 -K u+q =O 1
µ, I q=-
3.2.
240 q =0.3125 vehicles/sec
u2 - 240u + 2100 =O
55
q = 0.3125(3600)
u - 55u + 481.25 =O
2
q = 1125 veh I hr.

u =44.0Bmph
prob••'"'.::.-~--
ei
~,! - - 1
~ of traffic Is 44 mph The capacity of NLEX (North
Luzon
GB ""'" of 240 veh/mlle. If the Expressway) Is 3200 vehicles
per hour and
1
111, ·~·"' den• ~55 mph, find the density has a free flow of 50 kph. At
9:00 AM, 2000
,,,d • .,, ,peed g the Roxas Blvd. vehicles were counted and
observed to
fr" flO e1rnile a1on pass by at a specified point
of the
~·hicl
111 exprelsway. Compute the jam
dtnslty In
ohd'on: vehicles/km.
:.~. [1- ~] Solution:

K =4~
44 .ss[1-~] l J.I
K = 4(3200)
•
K J 50
o.s::: 1·240
K1 =256 wh/cles I km
K .
-- :::0.20
240 •
XL
L~-fss
E
K::: '8 veh I mile
Problem
§ #: problem • =-1 Studies have shown that the

traffic flow on
a single lane approach to a
signalized
intersection on US 87 and 1-
40 In Texas
ect1on along McArthur Highway Is
5 .Expressway has a jam density
of 130
A to have a flow of 1796 veh/hr and a veh/mile on the approach.
Detennlne the
~~ow of 50 mph. If the density is 44 mean free speed if the
density on the
veh/miles, compute the jam density in approach is 45 veh/mlle and
the space
vehicles/mile. mean speed Is 40 mph.
Solution: Solution:
q=~, [ K- ~] µ =µ · -
• f K.
µ,K
J
=
17$ !Xl [ 44 - ~)' ]
( K=45 KJ
=130
2
40 =µ • µ,(45)
35.92 =44- (44) I 130
K1
5200 =130 µ, - 45 µ,
1936
t<=s.oa 85 µ, =5200
I
K.I =2«J µ, =61.2mph

184 -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ~-NGINEE_Rll\Jc
1
-~- - ------ ---
5. Time mean speed:
HIGHWAY SAFETY AND L.d
ACCIDENT ANALYSIS u :__L
t
I n
1.
a Accident rates for 100 million
vehicle miles of travel (HMVM)
- for a segment of a highway:
d =length of a segment
of the road
t; =time of obsetvation
n = no. of vehicles
R= A(100,000,000)
ADT x N x 365 x L 6. Rate of flow:
R = the accident rate for 100 million q= Kus
vehicle miles
A = the number of accidents during q =rate of flow in
vehicles/hour
period of analysis K= density in
vehicles/hour/mile
AD T=average daily trafflc us = space mean speed
N =time period in years
L =length of segment in miles 7. Peak Hour Factor:
'I
,
2. . Accident rates per million
=
P.H.F. Volume of traffic
in vehicles /hour
highest
vol.every 5min.x12
~ntering _vehicles (MEV) for an
mtersectron: ·-
8. Spacing of vehicles:
R= A(1,000,000)
ADTxNx365 No.of vehicles per km
R = theaccident rate for one million =Vol. of traffic

in vehicles I hour
entering vehicles ave. speed of
car in km I hr
ADT =the average daily trafflC entering Average density= no. of
vehicles per km
the intersedion from al/ legs
N=time period in years Spacing of vehicles= _ 1
_ooo
__
ave.density
3. Severit ratio
=
Note : 1km 1000 m.
= fatal +injury accidents

fatal +injury + property damage 9~f_Cap_acity ~~-~f/.a .single
lane in
' , · vehicles er
hour: . ..~.. - ....
S=Vt+L
4 . .. Space . mean speed of . a
• vehicle: ............ - : ...~~.4; S =a~e. center to -
center spacing of cars
m meters
nd V = ave. speed of cars
in meters
u =-
• rti t = reaction time in
seconds
=
L Length of one car in
meters
Lt; =sum of all time obsetvations
C= 1000(V)
n =no. of vehicles
d =length of a segment of the road
s
l!s =space me~n speed C = Capacity of a single
lane in
vehicles/hour
14. Density of traffic:
K= R,
AW. /e#Vh d l/8hlcles
. headway in sec.
==time K =~ d trBlnc ii l/8hicles I km
Ht itY in sec.
c== ~apse R = sum of vehicle lengths
1<XXJ<VJ ' length of road way section
c==~
..ane velocity in kph
v-ave•~':J 15. Variance about the space
- tUar.ing between cars
s:: s,,.,.·- , - means s eed: "" ·•
5:Vf+L . CJz
action time tn sec.
t =re of one car m · meters u +u
I '
= -'
U
L=/ength '
a;. = variance about the space
mean
speed
Ut =time meas speed
rul
u=- u8 =space mean speed
, n
Ut =time mean speed
16. 5 min. peak hour factor:
r,u; =sum of all spot speeds (kph)
P.H.F. =peak hour factor
n:: no. of vehicles ·
P.H.F.=sum of flow nte in one
hour
max. peak flow nte x12
12. Space mean s eed:
n
u=-
' 1 Average Daily Traffi~
uf
r- Accident Rates
r _!_ = sum of the reciprocal of spot

u1
I2.166 Problem
, speeds
: The average of 24-hour traffic counts
n =no. of vehicles collected every day In the year.
These
u8 =space mean speed counts are used to estimate highway
user
revenues, compute accident rates, and
13. Density of traffic: establish traffic volume trends. .
K=!!_ ff" a) Average annual dally .

traffic
us (AADTJ
K=density of traffic in vehicles/km b) Average daily traffic (ADT)
c) Peak hour volume (PHV)
q =flow of traffic in vehicles/hr
d) Vehicle miles of travel
(VMT)
Us =space mean speed in kph
-~---
FIC ENGINEERll\J
[ 186 ~ TRAN_~PORTATIO~ _&
_ TR~F _ ___ ____ <:>
Accident Rates Versus "

I2.167 Problem J • Avera e Dail Traffic t
The average of 24-hour traffic counts
collected over a number of days greater u Accidents
for 100 million
than one but less than a year. These ~ vehicle miles of travel
for a
counts are used for planning of highway • se ment of a hi hwa
-
activities, measuring current traffic
A(100,000,000)
demand and evaluating existing traffic
R =(ADT)
(N)(365)(L)
flow.
where:
a) Average annual daily traffic (AADT)
R = the accident
rate for 100 million
B' b) Average dally traffic (ADT) vehicle miles
c) Peak hour volume (PHV) A = the number of
accidents during the
d) Vehicle miles of travel (VMT) period of
analysis
ADT = average daily
traffic
N =time period in
years
] 2.168 Problem L = length of
segment in miles
A measure of travel usage along a section
of road. It is the. product of the volume
(ADT) and the length of roadway In miles to
2·. ·. Accident~~
rate~ per
entering iJ!l·
vehicles ,.A
million
for~ an
which the volume is applicable. This : . ,,' intersection
•.\):..,...,.:. '· ,.~ ~
measure is used mainly as a base for

allocating resources for maintenance and R =
A(1,000,000)
improvement of highways and to establish
(ADT)(N)(365)
highway system usage trends. where:
a) Density of traffic R = the accident
rate for 100 million
b) Traffic volume vehicle miles
.
c) Traffic capacity ADT =average daily
traffic entering the
• intersection
from all legs
W cl) Vehicle miles of travel (VMT)
N =time period in
years
2.169 Problem
f
The maximum number of vehicles that

I2.110 ~E Board
No~. _20_15 J
pass a point on a highway during a period The number of accidents
for 6 years
of 60 consecutive minutes. This volume is recorded in a certain
section of a highway
used for functional classification of is 5892. If the average
daily traffic Is 476,
highways, geometric design standards determine the accident
rate per million
selection, capacity analysis, development entering vehicles.
of operational programs, and development
of parking regulations. Solution:
a) Traffic volume R = A(1,000,000)
b) Traffic capacity ADT(N)(365)
Q> c) Peak hour volume (PHV) R = 5892(1,000,000) _
d) Density of traffic 5652
476(6)(365) -
"fRANSPORTATION &TR,l\~~~ENGINEE~ING -
187
I. --= · - -- - -- - ----- - -
-- - ---- --
~71 CE Board Nov. 2~18] Solution:
e number of accidents for 5 years R = A(100,000,000)

Th orded In a certain section of a highway (ADT)(NX365)(L)
rec5432. If the average dally traffic Is 476, R = 28( 100,000,000)
=170.47
!:-ermine the accident rate per mllllon
7500( 1X365X6)
entering vehicles.
Appropriae value of crash
rale = 170.47(4)
so1ut1on:
25
A(1,000,000) Appropriae value of crash
rate =21.3
R = ADT(N)(365)
- 5432(1,000,000) =5211
R - 476(5)(365)
· Left tum crashH (per year
over the past 4
years) were 10, 20, 18, 34.
Cause of crashes: High
speeds, no left tum
[2.172 CE Board Nov. ~998 ] phase
Data on a traffic accident recorded on a Average dally traffic (ADT)
past
certain inters~tlon for the past 5 years has 4 years = 8600
an accident rate of 4160 per million Average dally traffic (ADT)
after·
Implementation s 9800
enterihg vehicles (ARMV). H the average
dally traffic entering the Intersection is 504, If the crash reduction
factor CR • 0.54,
compute the expected
reduction in crashes
find the total number of accidents during
if the countermeasures are
Implemented.
the 5 year period.
Solution:
Solution:
A(1,000,0oo)
16 + 20 + 18 + 34
Average crashes per year=
R =ADT (N)(365)
4
Average crashes per 'je8I =
22
A(1,000,000)
4160 = 504(5)(365)
22(0.54)(9800)
Crash prevented per ye'6
=--'-----"-'-----
8600
A= 3826 (number of accidents)
Crash prevented per year
=13.5 $g'f 14 crashes
rii£2:173 Problem 12.~75 Problem

From the gi~en data of traffic counts for a A 20-mlle section along Route
60 with
certain portion of SCTEX are tabulated as partially controlled acces~
with •".' average
shown: . daily traffic (ADT) of
60,000.
Length of segment = 6 miles Before: (Partial)
Average daily traffic (ADT) = 7500 Total crashes= 15
(accident rate)
Number of crashes per year = 28 After upgrading: (Full)
·
Number of fatal crashes per year= 4 Total crashes= 10
(accident rate)
Determine the appropriate value of the Find the. yearly reduction In
crashes by
crash rates per year. · upgrading to full access
control.
' =1::1
Solution:
Before:
It 11 observed that 50
traffic era.he.
- A(100,(XX),000) occurred on a 20·mile
long l8CtJon Of
R- (ADT)(N)(a65XL) Route 120 In one year.
If the average dal~
traffic on the section
was 5500 Vthlclei
15 = A(100,000,000)
determine the rate of
fatal crashes Ptr 1~
60000(1X365X20) million vehicles-miles
if 6% of the tWo
A=65.70 td~ crashes crashes Involved
fatalities.
Affr' upgradiJg :
Solution:
A(100,000,000) A( 100,000,000)
R= (ADT)(N)(365XL) R= (ADn(L)(365)
A(100,000,000)
- 50(100,000,000)
=124.53
I
10
• =60CXX)(1X365)(20) R- 5500(20)(365)
A =43.8 trM crashes Rate of fatal crashes
=124.53(0.06)
No.of crashes recorded =65.70 •43.8 Rate of fatal crashes
=7.42 crashes
No. of crashes recorded =21.9say 22 crashes
f 2.1.7 6 Problem
/ 2.11~ . Problem
J
The average annual daily
traffic (AADT) of
:.
15,000 vehicles per day

occurs at a
Local residents in Tartac attempting to
highway segment 0.2 miles
long. In a three. .
pass a heavy traffic highway has an
year period, there have
been 6 crashes
accident rate of 8 for 1-,000,000 vehicles
miles of travel. If the length of the road ls resulting in death and or
Injuries and 12
12 miles with an average daily traffic of involving property damage
only. The
480, determine the estimated yearty average crash for similar
types of roadway
reduction in total crashes if the crash is 380 per 100 million
vehicle-miles for a 3-
reduction factor Is 0.28. year period, of which 120
involved death
and 255 caused property
damage only.
Solution: Compute the traffic base
and the average
3-year crash rate for this
type of facility.
R=A(1,000,000)
ADT(L)(365) Solution:
8 =A(1,000,000) Traffic base (TB)= (AADT)

(L)(N)(365)
480(12X365)
100,000,000
A= 16.8 Traffic~ (TB)= 15000(0.2)
(3)(365)
100,000,000
Estimated reduction in crashes= 0.28(16.8) Traffic base (TB) =0.03285
veh I mile
Estimated reduction in crashes =5crashes I yr AverWJe 3-year crash rate=
3(120) +255
Average 3-year er~ rate= 615
crashes
- --
-----~---
TRA~FIC
- -------- - -
- - - - --------
1
- - 5 -pORTATION &
-f~~~ ------ -----
ENGINEERING -
-
--------- - il:fl
-
r-::4'7g,___P:.-r_o_b_le_m_ _ _ _---..11
-~ J
~
Dally
Expansion Factor for I rural primary
road- DEF
rate for fatalities per 100 million
DEF
Th• ie-mlle has been slowly decreasing
veh1 't,oth
automobiles and light trucks
9.515
for ps sport utility vehicles and
7.012
(Pin~~ns). for the years 2007 to 2012, the
1.1'X1
rn tlon y c • 0.08x + 1.16 can be used to
6.582
fu~~ate the rate of fatalities per million
7.012
ethicle miles for light trucks during this
5.724
vertod and the function y =• 0.03x + 1.01
6.510
P' be used to estimate the rate of
ca~lltles per 100 million vehicle-miles for Monthly
Expansion Factor for month of
Jan. (MEF)
=1.756
:utomoblles during this period. For both
tunctlons, x Is the number of years since
Compute the
annual average dally traffic
2007 ease on this.data, estimate the year (AADT).
In which .the fatality rate for light trucks
equaled the fatality rate of automobiles.
Solution:
24 -
hour volume for Monday corrected for (HEF) : ·
Solution:
y =. o.08x + 1.16
v=400(29)+ 530(22.05)+ 650(18.80)+ 700(17.10)+ 650(18.52)
~ o.oax +.1.16 = - 0.03x + 1.01
5
o.05x =0.15 v
=19903
x=3
Correction for (DEF) Monday :
Year in which fatality rates are equal Total
7-day volume= 19903(7.012)
=2007 + 3 Total
7-day volume =139560
=2010
139560
Average 24-hour volume =
7
[2.110 Problem
Average 24-hour volume = 19937
Correction for MEF :

A traffic engineer of MMDA observes the
AADT =19937(1.756)
traffic on Monday morning of January on a
1
rural primary road. The tabulated results
AAfJT =35009
were as follows:
I C&! Qb2§S!t
Hourly [2.111
Problem
Volume Expansion
Time of
of Factor
observation The
maximum allowable rate of crashes at
Traffic CHEF)
intersections is 9 per million entering
7:00-8:00 AM 400 29
vehicles. At an Intersection of 2 roadways,
8:00-9:00 AM 530 . 22.05
average daily traffic (ADT) values are
9:00.10:00 AM 650 18.80
10,000 and 8,265. Determine the maximum
10:00.11:00 AM 700 17.70
number of crashes per year before
11:00-12:00 noon 650 18.52
corrective action is needed.
190 ~TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC EN~-1~-~-ERINc; ',
-- ----- - - -- - - -- ------- ---
-- I
Solution:
ADT = 10000 +8265
~t2~·~1~8~3__P_r_!_b_le_m______s~-:::'.J
ADT= 18265 Data on a
traffic accident recorded for the
R = A(1,000,000) past 5 years on
a certain stretch of a tWo.
lane highway Is
tabulated as follows.
ADT(N)(365)
Year
Property Injury Fatal
g = A(1,000,000)
Damage
18265(1)(365) 2010
110 ·42 4
2011
210 54 2
A=60 crashes
60
2012
182 5
2013
240 74 7
2014
175 94 6
[ 2.182 Problem ] Total:
917 324 24
The accident rates for 100 million vehicle Compute the

severity ratio.
miles of travel caused by people
attempting to pass a heavily traffic 2 lane
rural highway Is 6.0. The length of the road Solution:
Is 10 miles with an average daily traffic . .
fatal + injury
ADT of 36000. Determine the estimated Severity ratio =
- - - - - - ' - - - ' - - - -
fatal + injury + property damacJe

yearly reduction In total crashes If the ·
crash reduction factor is 0.25. . ti
24 + 324
Severity ra o =-
- - -
24 + 324 + 917
Solution:
Severity ratio
=0.275 (
R =A(100,000,000)
ADT(L)(365)
=·
S.O A(100,000,000)
36000(10)(365)
A =7.89 SWf 8 crashes per year
I~.184'
Problem
Estimated reduction in crashes A 20 mile section

of the· Cavlte Coastal
= 0.25(8) Road had the
following reported accidents
including
property damage only accidents
=2 crashes I year (PDO). It is
required to compute the
accident rates
for injury accidents for a
period of 5 years
from 1980.
Year Fatal
Injury Property Ave. Diiiy
~~ Severit Ratio ......... Accident
Accident Damage Traffic
(PDO)
Severity ratio =· fatal injury 1980 3
40 I 110 12000
fatal injury + property damage 1981 1
52 215 12500
1982 5
60 170 16000
1983 8
74 250 13500
1984 7
96 160 14000
Solution:
Total number of accidents =taa +
injury + PDO
~on: acclde"ts =3 + 1+ s+ a+ 1
ottatal Nurmer of fatal accidents =4 + 2
+ 6 + 8 + 5 + 1o
NO· ~ts=24
ottatal Number of fatal accidents =35
NO· . accidents
of inJurY Number of Injury accidents
NO· 52 + 60 + 74 + 96 + 24
::40+ =46 + 52 + 70 + 65 + 82 + 98
:: 346 Number of injury accidents =413
. accidents includes fatal accidents Number of property damage (PDO)
A:: ;njUfY
A:: 346 =120 + 200 + 190 +
140 + 180
Avertt.J8ADT Number of property damage= 1070
12()00 + 12500 + 13000 + 13500 + 14000 A =·35 +413 + 1070
::~ 5
A =1518 (tasl number of
accidents)
:: 13000 AverageAOT
A( 10(li{)00,000)
10000+10500+11000+11500+12000+12500
R:: ADT(N)(365)(L) = 6
346 (100,000.000) AverageADT= 11250
R= 13000 (5) (365)(20)
R = A(100,000,000) .
R=7192 accident rates for injury accidents ADT(N)(365)(L)
R =1518(100,000,000)
[f.1as Problem
11250(6)(365)(15)
R = 41.0 accident rates of all
accidents
A 15-mile section of the Kalayaan Road had
the following reported accidents for a
period of 6 years from 1992. .It Is required tCritical Crash Rate Per •
to compute. the accident rates of all Million Vehicle Miles or Per
accidents.
Million Enterin Vehicles
Year Fatal Injury
Accident Accident
Property
Damage
Ave.Dally
Traffic CR=AVR+ O.S +TF
~AVR
(PDO) TB
TB
1992 4 46 120 10000 where:
1993 2 52 200 10500 . CR = critical crash rate per 100
million
1994 6 70 190 11000 entering vehicles
1995 8 65 140 11500 =
AVR average crash rate for the
facility type
1996 5 82 240 12000 =
TF test factor, standard
deviat~n at a given
1997 10 98 180 12500 confidence level
TB = traffic base per 100
million entering
vehicles
--
:ll:llL--a·•-•
••· ·-~
- -- - --
12.18!_ Proble!"_ . ._ . . _ J
2==·~18:;..;r~-__ P_ro_b_l_•m---~
1...:[
Given: Given:
Length of segment highway =0.3 miles ADT before
improvement =6624 (•~•r.
Average annual daily traffic over a 3-
year period) Ire
(AADT) =1600 vehicles/day ADT after
Improvement =9200
Test factor =1.96 for 95% confidence level CR
reduction factor= 30%
For a 4-year period: Average crash rate per Number of
crashes occurring
million entering vehicles. year= 10,
12, 14 (over the 3-year be~
Property damage =250 Improvement
period)
Fatal Injury (death)= 120 Determine
the expected reduction 1n
.
Calculate the critical crash rate. number of
crashes occurring after u,.
implementation of the countermeasure.

Solution:
,
AVR =4(120) +250 Solution:
AVR =730 equivalent crasheslnillion entering vehicies
10+12+14
Ave. number
of crashes/year =
TB =N(AADT)(L)(365)
3
100,000,000 Ave. number
of crashes/year= 12
TB = 4(16000)(0.3)(365)
Crashes
prevented
100,000,000
TB =0.07008 vehicle/mile per- 100 million vehicle/mile _
N(CR)(ADT after improvement)
TB= 1.96
(ADT before improvement)
Critical crash rcte : -
12(0.3)(9200)
6624
CR=AVR+ O.S +TFJAVR
TB TB
=Scrashes
CR =730+ 0.5 + 1.96
0.07008 v~
01ii008
CR = 937 crashes
Overall Crash
Reduction
ft
Crash Reduction Factor to .Factor for

Multiple,
.-
Determine the Reduction in • .Mutually
Exclusive ·. .·
· · · · ·'. Crashes • • • • Improvements at a
Single
~!/,.~~~, ·
···'f~~· sr·te if - .
-
~A~~~~~ .. .··~·,·1;_ f···
-.· · -.
Crashes prevented= N(CR)(ADT "!8' improvement) CR= CR1 +(1 - CR1)

CR2
(ADT before improvement)
. + (1- CR1)
(1- CR2) CR3 + ....
where:
N = expected number of crashes if where:
countermeasure is not implemented CR = overall crash
reduction factor
and if the traffic volume is the same
CR = crash reduction factor for a specific CR1 , CR2, CRJ
=crash reduction faclor for a
countermeasure specific
countermeasure
ADT =average daily traffic
-- - ---
~ Problem____
~------------...-....J · Traffi c 1nt
~ nsit
Ingle location along NLEX, three

1
# 'rmeasuret with crash reduction
c;ount• of CR1 • 38%, CRJ • 26%,
f,ctot' 22% are prdposed. Determine the
Cfb • crash reduction factor.
11
"'era
solUflOn: ' '• Expected
number of units in
CR= cR1+(1-CR1)CR2 +(1-CR1)(1-CR2)CR3 the s
stem
CR= o.38+(1-0.38)(0.26)+(1--0.38)(1--0.26)(0.22)
E(n) =...l-
CR: o.642
...l-µ
where:
E(n) =
expected number d unls in the
system
A=arrivll rate
µ
=sefVice rste
A queue is formed when arrivals wait
tor 8 service or an opportunity such as
the arrival of an accepted gap in a 3
main traffic stream, the collection of •• Expected
number of units
waiting
to be served '• ·
tolls at a tollbooth or of parking fees at
a parking garage.
E(m) = A.'
µ(µ-A.)
oversaturated queues = are those
which the arrival rate is greater than the
service rate. -i •
Average waiting time in the
=
Saturated queues are those in which
queue
the arrival rate is less than the service
rate.
E(w)=-A.-
µ(µ-A.)
--
Under-Saturated Infinite
'.J •
Total delay (average waiting
~?ti. Queues ............ , time
of an arrival, including
queue and service)

Under-saturated infinite queues when both
arrivals and serviee times are exponentially
1
E(v) = -
distributed and there is one channel.
µ-A.
"
Averac e length of queue
..........
pl
cr=-
~ ~
t~--
f"p
J
I!!
1-P
Q • O.-
U..• Probability
of "n" units in th
1:41 Probability of more than ·""''N • s stem
"!'.,,......,....,_
e
vehicles in the s stem
1-P ] N
. P(N)= (~f
=
.
P(n) [ 1.pN•1 P
A.
where: where : P=-
µ
A. =traffic intensity
µ
3,i_ lk: Expected
number of units in
N=no. of units in the system 1'#- the s stem
k • ) --· · · ,
En =(_!!__)
[1-(N + 1)PN +NPN•t]
2, Probability of spending time ~ ~ 1• p
1• pN•I
• "t" in the s stem ..:-..·:·r i""···-·· .:ii;x>~'.
1
P(t) =1-e1l lµJAI
~ Probability of waiting time :•t"

A or less in the queue · · ·~,l1~~·:)!..~.>.t,,
( 2 .. 189
Problem
P(w) =1- A. e11-).1µ>A1
µ
An off-ramp traffic
must stop at a single
tollbooth at the
entrance of the Highway 78.
The arrival rate at the
tollbooth is BG
4~ Percentage ..i·. of ·' time ·.:\· the vehicles per hour. If
the service rate is 86
• . operator of a toll booth will be vehicles per hour,
determine the number of
be free · · · ~·~·!f,\~tt : i\-J)iii. vehicles waiting to be
served.
A. Solution:
P=1-- ').}
µ N=---
µ{µ -A.)
N= (80)2
86(86 - 80)
N = 12.4say13 vehicles
~ ] --
Problem
Its arrive at the entrance booth of Vehlcln arrive at a stop
sign at the comer
1
\leh; Hotel In Las Vegas to see the boxing of P. Del Rosarl,o St. and
Osmefta Blvd. at
..Gtch of Manny Pacqulao at the rate of 4 an average rate of 250
vehicles per hour.
""htcles per minute. It took the attendant Average waiting time at the
stop sign 11 12
ve seconds to process the parking tickets. sec. per vehicle. If both
arrivals and
~ermine the rate In which the vehicles departure are exponentially
distributed,
move after getting their tickets In what Is the average length
of queue.
vehicles/min.
Solution:
solution: A.= 250 (srrivti nte)
E(v} =~ =0.5 min. µ =(1)(3600)
12
1 µ =300 vehiclesJhr.
E(v}= -
µ-A.
P = A. (traffic intensity)
1 µ
o.s =-
µ-4 250
P= - =0.833
0.5µ-2= 1 308
Average length of queue :
0.5µ =3
p2
µ=6
"\
a =- (ave. length of
queue)
1-P
2
a = (0.833) 4.15 say 5
vehicles
=
[2.191 Problem 1-0.833
Vehicles arrived at the entrance of San

Juanico Bridge in Tacloban at a rate of 180 ( 2~193 . Problem
vehicles per hour. Vehicles must stop at
the tollgate where vehicles will have to·pay On a given day, 425
vehicles per hour
a toll fee upon entering the bridge. It would arrive at a toll booth
located at the end of
take 15 sec. per vehicle for the attendant to · an off·ramp of the South
Super Highway. If
Issue a trip ticket. Compute the traffic the vehicles can be
serviced by only a
intensity at the bridge. single channel at the
service rat•
of 625
vehicles per hour,
determine the average
Solution: number of vehlcl'9 In the
system.
Arrival rate :
Solution:
1
A= : =3 veh/min. N~. of •vehicles in the
system = ~
µ-A.
60
Average dep. rateµ= = 4 veh/min.
425
15 No. of vehicles in the
system =
625-425
Traffic intensity= ~ =0.75 No. of vehicles in the
system= 2.125 say 3
4
_El\JGINEE~
------ -
•a: TRAl'JSPORTATION & _TRAFFIC_

- - ---- -- . . .
Problem
--- lf\J~.
I~.194 ~ Pr~~lem J Passenger cars

arrive at the •~op •lgn 11111
The number of vehicles that can enter the average rate of 280
per hour. Averag.
on-ramp of Subic.Clark Expre11way Is waiting time at the
top sign Is 12 lee. W
controlled by a metering system. If the both arrival•
and departure are
vehicles can enter the expressway at a rate exponentially
distributed, what WOUid bt
of 500 vehicles per hour, and the rate of the average delay per
vehicle In minutes
arrival of the vehicles at the on-ramp Is 400 Assume bOth arrival
and departure ~
vehicles per hour during the peak hour. are exponentially
distributed.
Determine the expected number of units
waiting to be served In the system.
Solution:
'A.= 280
Solution: - (1)3600
'A.2 µ- 12
E(m)=--
µ(µ - 'A.) µ=300
E(m) = (400)2 Average delay per
vehicle in seconds or
500(500 - 400) waiting time :
E(m) =3.2 say 4 'A.
w=
µ(µ - 'A.)
280
w=----
300(300 - 280)
1.2 .195 Problem
w =0.04667 hrs.
Off·ramp traffic must stop at a single w =0.04667(60)
tollbooth. The arrival rate at the tollbooth is
45 vehicles per hour. If the service rate is w = 2.8 minutes
60 vehicles per hour, determine the .number
of vehicles waiting excluding the vehicles
being served.
Problem
· -s
d
Solution:
'A.2 The average queue
length at the
N=-- intersection of the
two roads with a stop
µ(µ - 'A.)
sign is 4 veflicles.
If the arrival rate of
N= (45)2 vehicles at the stop
sign is 300 vehicles
60(60-45) per hour, determine
the service rate of the
road in vehicles per
hour. Assume both
N =2.25 vehicle$ arrival and
departure rates are
exponentially
distributed.
-
IN
sol&Jflon: Problem
-I
---
o- 1-P
p2
p2
The arrival of vehicles at 1
toll gilt of
Marcelo Femand Bridge
connecting
Mandaue City and Lapu·Lapu
City II 40
4---
... 1-P vehicle per hour. Average
service me II
1.2 min. par vehicle.
p2 ::4-4P
: ' p2 ... 4P·4=0 <D Determine the length of
queue
excluding the vehicle being
served.
P :: o.S28 (traffic intensity) ~ Determine the probability
that no more
A. than 5 cars (Including
vehicles being
p::: -- served) are waiting.
µ ~ DetermlQe the average
waiting time In
300 the queue In minutes.
o.s28= µ
Solution:
µ =362 vehicles I hottr (service rcie) CD Length of queue
A.= 40 vehicleltir
(arrival nie)
µ~
60
=50 vehicleltir
(service nie)
~.198 Problem 1.2
A.2
Length of queue= -µ(µ---
>..)
cars have a long queue on a stop sign. If
the total time delay of queuing is one
2
minute, compute the· traffic density if the Length of queue=

(40)
50(50 -40)
service rate of the road is only 360 vehicles
per hour. Assume both arrival and Length of queue =3.2
vehlcles
departure rates are exponentially
distributed. ® Probability that no more
than 5 cars are
waiting
Solution:
Teta/ time of delay :
P=(~f
t= __!_ 40
1
µ - A. p = ( )5+ =o.262
probabiljy tha more
=
t =1mnute 0.01667 hrs.
. 50 thM 5
cars 819 waiting
1 p =(1 - 0.262)
0.01667 = A. P =0.738 probability
tha_no more thM
360 -
5cars are
waiting
360-A.=60
A. =300 vehicles/hr. @ Average waiting time
in the queue
40
Traffle density : t- A. =
=0.08 hrs.
- IJ(µ -A.) 50(50 -
40)
A. 300 .
P= - = - = 0.833 vehicles I km t= 4.8 min.
µ 360
Ii=•
Problem
a &Q$
) .
~-------.::J
,_[2_._2_0_J___
P_ro_b_l_•......
2
In a toll booth at the end of an off-ramp of An off-ramp toll booth 11

Installed i
the TPLEX. 400 vehicles/hr arrive and the vehicles coming from the
SLEX. The arnv:
service rate of the toll booth Is 600 rate Is 50 veh/hr. and the
service rate It
vehicles/hr. 60 veh/hr.
CD Determine the percentage of time that CD Determine the number of

vehicltt
the operator of the toll booth will be waiting to be served
excluding the
free. vehicles being served.
~ Determine the expected number of ~ . Determine the length of
ramp required
vehicles in the system. to accommodate all
exiting vehicltt
~ Determine the waiting time for the 80% of the time. Assume
average
vehicles that wall vehicle length is 6 m.
and space
between waiting vehicles
is 1.5 m.
Solution: ~ Determine the average
waiting time In
<D Percentage of time that the operator of the the queue In minutes.
toll booth will be free
Solution:
P(o) = 1- A. CD Number of v~hicles
waiting to be served
µ
excluding the vehicles
being served
A.= 400 vehicieslhr (arrival rcte) A.2
µ =600 vehicies/hr (service rate) E(m) =µ(µ _A.)
400
A. = =0.667 traffic intensity A. = 50 vehicles/hr
µ 600
µ =60 vehicles/hr
P(o) = 1 - 0.667 2
P(o) =0.333 E(m)= (50)
=4.17vehlcles
60(60-50)
P(o) =33.3"of thetime
® length of1amp
® Expected number of vehicles in the
system
P(n)= (~f
E(n)=
E(n) =
~
µ-A.
400 . =2 vehicles
600-400
(1-0.80)= ( :
0.8333N+1 =0.20
r
® Waiting time for the vehicles that wait
N + 1=8.82
N = 7.82 say 8 vehicles
E(v) = _!_
µ-A. Ramp lerigth =8(6) + (8-1)
(1.5)
1 Ramp length =58.5 m
E(v) = _400 =0.005 hrs.
600
E(v) = 18 sec.
-- -
 Probability that there are no

more than 5
cars at the gate including the
vehtcle
r
being served
P(n>N)= ( ~
P(n >N)= ( : r =0.178
ProbabiNty that less than 5

vehicles 1' the gtte :
~.0~2::-__P_ro_b_l_e_m__________~J p = 1-0.178
P=0.822
The arrival times of vehicle at the entrance
of 8 baseball stadium has a mean value of @ Waiting time of a vehicle
vehJhr. If It takes 1.5 min. for the E(w) = A
30
issuance of parking tickets to be bought µ(µ-A.)
tor occupants of each car. 30
E(w) = =0.075
hrs.
<D oetennlne the expected length of 40(40 -30)
queue, not including the vehicle being E(w) =.f.S min.
served.
~ What Is the probability that there are no
( 2.2~3 == Problem
more than 5 cars at the gate including
the vehicle being served? ·
~ What will be the average waiting time of
a vehicle in the queue In minutes? 400 vehicles per hour arrive at a
single toll
booth located at the end of an
off-ramp on
Solution: the TPLEX. If the vehicles can be
serviced
© Expected length of queue, not including at the rate of 600 vehicles per
hour,
the vehicle being served determine the percentage of time
the
p2 operator of the single toll booth
will be
Q=- free.
1-P
A. =30 veMlour Solution:
A. =400 vehlhour
60
µ=- =40 veh/hour µ =600 veh/hour
1.5
For the operator to be free,the
number of ·
A.
P=- vehicles in the system must be
zero.
µ
A.
30 P=1 - -
P= - =0.75 µ
40
P(o) =1- A
Q =(0.75)2
µ
1-0.75 400 .
P(o) =1- 600 = 0.333
=
Q 2.25 vehicles
@
Expected number of vehicles on the ra
during the peak hour mp
-[ P ][ 1- (N + 1)P" + N~
E(n) - 1 - p 1- pH°'
/ 2~2,04 Problem - -- I
E(n)
= [~][1·(10+1)(0.8).., + 10(0.8)''i
-~ W?a - - 5
The toll booth on the on-ramp of SCTEX

1- 0.8 1- (0.8) 1 ~ ·"iJ-'-...]
controls the number of vehicle• that can
enter on the ramp at any one time. It allows E(n)
=r~Jr 1- 1.81 + 0.859]
only a maximum of 10 vehicles to be on the
1- 0.8 1- 0.0859
ramp at any one tJme. If the vehicles can
enter the SCTEX at a rate of 750 vehicles/hr E(n)
=2.97 say 3
and the rate of arrival of vehicles at the on·
ramp Is 600 veh/hr,
(J)Determine the probability of 6 cars

being on the ramp.
._f
2_'._2_o_s_ __!'_~o_b__.•......
! .....m____...,;. _J
.L. . _
~ Determine the percent of time that the The maximum

number of vehicles that can
ramp is full. enter the on-
ramp of SCTEX is controlled
(t Determine the expected number of by the
metering system which allows 8
vehicles· on the ramp during the peak vehicles to
be on the ramp at any oen time
hour. due to heavy
traffic In the expressway. The
rate of
arrival of the vehicles at the on.
Solution: ramp is 420
vehicles/hr and ther ate that
CD Probability of 6 cars being on the ramp · the vehicles
can enter the expressway Is
A. 525
vehicles/hr.
P=-
µ
<D Determine
the probability of 4 caq
A. =600 veh/hr. being on
the ramp. ·
µ =7fiJ veh/hr. ~ Determine the
percent of time that the ·
ramp is
full.
600
P =- =0.80 N = 10 vehicles <1> Determine
the expected number of
7fJ(J vehicles on
the ram~ during peak hour.
1
P(n) = [ - p ] P" Solution:
1- pN+1
Q)
Probability of 4 cars being on the ramp
1 08
1
P(6) =[ - · 11 ] (0.8) 6 =0.057 P(n) = [
- p ] P"
1- (0.8)
1- pN+1
I
® Percent of time that the ramp is full p = A =

420 =O.BO N=8vehicles
1 µ 525
n =4 vehicles
P(n) = [ - p ] P"
1- pN+1
P( 4) - [
1- 0.8 ] ( •
-
1- (0.8)'8 + 1) 0.8)
P(10) =[1-1(0.8)
- 0. 8 ] ( 10 _
0.8) - 0.023
10+1
P(4) = (
o:a}o.4096) =0.094f
-
---- - -
Average wafting
ttme
p
w=--
2µ(1-
P)
w =BVerBge ws#ing
time
@ Average total
delay tlrM
(queue time plu•
•.rvk•
time)
2-P
t=--
p(8) :: 0.03876 2µ(1-
P)
Tf16 ramP is only 3.88 percent of the time.
B. When both arrival and
service
® expected number of vehicles on the ramp

I rates are assumed to
be
ex onentiall
distributed '~
during peak hour
N:: 8 <D Average queue
length
-[!:-](
E(n) -
1
_p 1 _pN•1
1
1 - (N + 1)PN + NpN+ ]
0=-
P'
,.
1-P
- ~ [ 1- (9)(0.80) + 8(0.80)
8 8
]
® Waiting time
E(n) - 0.20 1-(0.80)8
A.
E(n) :: 2.6 say 3 vehlcles ·
w=--
µ(µ-A.)
@ Total delay time
t=-1-
Stochastic ueue µ-A.
A. When rate of arrivals follows a
Poisson distribution and the .. . (Stochastic Queue) .._
I
. ' rate of service can be assumed
i to be exponential! distributed Both rates of arrival and
_ - - . departures are ~l•
·
• •
<D Average queue length ex onentiall distributed

2P-P2
Q= 2(1-P) ~ Problem
where : A stop sign is Installed In
one of the roact.
Intersection. Rate of
arrival at a stop sign Is
P = A. (traffic intensity) 300 vehicles/hr and the
average waiting
µ
time at the stop sign Is 10
sec. per vehicle.
A. =arrival rate in veh I hr If both arrivals are
•xponentlally
µ =service rate in veh I hr distributed, determine the
average queue
length.
--~
NGINEERING
--- - -- - ---- - - --- - ---- - -
-- ------- -
Solution:
Solution:
A. =600 veh/hr. µ
=4 (averagedepatture rite)
3600
µ =- =360 veh/hr. P
=~ =0.75 (intensity)
10
4
Average queue length : A.=
3 (average arrival rite)
A. 300
p
P= - = - =0.833
w=---
µ 360
2µ(1 - P)
a = ~ = (0.833)
2
= 4.16 ve111c1es
0.75
1- p 1-0.833
w=----
2(4)(1- 0.75)
.
w=0.375 min I vehicle
f .2.~07 Problem
.
Vehicles arrive at a stop sign at the comer
of 0. Jakosalem and P.Del Rosario Streets
at the rate of 200 veh/hr. The waiting time
f 2.209
Problem
J
for each vehicle at the stop sign is 12 sec. NLEX
has an on-ramp consisting of a
If both arrivals and departures are single
lane directly to a toll booth at the
exponentially distributed, what is the end of
the ramp. If the rate of arrival at the
average delay per vehicle in seconds.
expressway follows a Poisson distribution
with an
arrival rate of 50 veh/hr and a
Solution: service
rate of 60 veh/hr which is assumed
Average delay per vehicle : to be
exponentially distributed, determine
A. =200 veh/hr. the
number of vehicles waiting to be
served
at the booth, that is the number of
3600
vehicles in queue not including the vehicle
µ= = 300 veh/hr.
12 being
served.
A.
w=--
Solution:
µ(µ -A.)
p2
200 Q=-
w=---- 1- p
300(300 - 200)
w =0.00667 hrs A.
P=-
w=24sec.
µ
50
P=-
I2.208 · Problem _ 60
p
=0.833
Consider the entrance to the Ocean Park
where there is a single gate at which all
=2(0.833) - (0.833) 2
vehicles must stop. If the arrival rate of the 0
vehicle is 3 vehicles per minute and the
2(1- 0.833)
average departure rate is 4 vehicles per a= 2.94
say 3 ve1r1c1es
minute, determine the average waiting time
\
in the queue in minutes per vehicle.
- -- - - · ---------- - --- ·--- .. . ..... ,...,

~ ~ ...
~------
--
"Service Rates of Ramps ,

Connectin Freewa s •
(A) On Romp
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ c:::::c:::t
c===:a
BF-....ICIJ Freeway
~~·· · · ~~-1~1~ 1~.IM;-1

I I
(8) Off Ramp
£ rpressway
Solution:
p BF~IIC[)
w=2µ(1-P)
A. =40 vehlhr.
60
L 0 =lengh of Deceleration Rare
-
~
v.
µ=-
1
µ =60 veh/hr. f (2.~11- CE Board May 2016
. A.
P=- A ramp meter operates during the morning
µ
peak period. ~amp meter cycles vary with
P= 40 time as shown In the table below. The
60 metering scheme allows one vehicle per
cycle to pass the signal. The table below
P=0.667
gives the number of vehicles demanding
p service on the ramp during particular time
w=-- intervals, the cumulative demand for the
2µ(1- P)
ramp for the morning peak, and the ramp
0.667 meter cycle for each Interval. What are the
w=---- service rates for meter cycle 12, 10 and 6?
2(60)(1- 0.667)
w=0.01669
Meter
15mln. CunUllM
Time period
w= 1mlnute volume volume
,..
,....,
Cycle
6:30-6:45 AM 75 75
6
6:45-7:10 AM 100 175
10
7:00-7:15 AM - 125 300
12
.7:15-7:30 AM 110 410
12
7:30-7:45 AM 80 490
10
7:45-8:00 AM 65 550
6
- ----- - - .
,-2o4-T~ANSPORTATION & TRAFF~'?

EN_GINEERl!'..JG--1
----- - -- - - - - - ---
- ....
Solution:
Service rate = time interval
f 2.213 Problem
J
meter cycle Vehlcln arrive at the
entrance of the new
extension of NLEX. There Is
a single
Service rate= 15(60) tollgate at which all
vehlcln must atop
12 where a toll attendant
distribute a trip
ticket. The toll opens at
6:00 AM at which
Service rate =75 vehicles time vehicles begin to
arrive at the rate Of a
vehicles per minute. After
20 minutes, the
Service rate= 15(60) arrival flow rate declines
to 2 vehicles per
10 minute and it contlnun at
that level for the
Service rate =90 vehicles remainder of the day. If the
time required to
distribute the trip ticket
Is 15 seconds,
Service rate =15(60) determine the total number
of vehicles that
6 have arrived and departed
until no more
queue exist.
Service rate =150 vehkles
Solution:
Let t =time after 6:00 AM so
that there will be
no more queue
exists
f 2.212 Problem
Arrival 20 min. after= 8(20)
A ramp meter operates dur:ing the morning Arrival 20 min. after= 160
vehicles
peak-period from 6:00 to 12:00 AM. The Arrival after 20 min. = 2(t
- 20)
following data gives the number of vehicles
demanding service on the ramp of SLEX 60
160 + 2(t- 20) = t
during the time between 6:00 to 6:40 AM. 15
Determine the service rate for the meter,
which allows one vehicle per cycle to pass 160 + 2t - 40 =4t
the signal between 6:20 to 6:40 AM. 2t = 120
t = 60 min.
20mln. Meter
Time
Volume Cycle Total number of vehicles
which arrived and
6:00 - 6:20 AM 80 10 departed at 7:00 AM
6:20 - 6:40 AM 120 12 =8(20) + 2(60 -
20)
= 240 vehicles
Solution:
Service rate= 20(60)
12 f 2.~14 Problem
]
Service rate = 100 vehicles
Scheduled maintenance will
close two of
the. four westbound lanes of
a freeway
dunng one weekday for the
period from
9:oo A.M. to 4:00 P.M. The
demand on the
two lanes are as follows:
@ Max. queue length in meters if
one car is
assumed to be 5 m. long
No. of vehicles per lane =

1580 =395
4
Total length of queue= 395(5)
=1975 m.
tlmated capacity of the 4 lanes with

If the es pen Is 2960 vehicles/hour.
[,2.215 Problem
I
21anes o ·
A traffic accident occurred along
the North
© compute the time wh~n queue occurs. Diversion road at 6:00 AM. The
flow rate
~ compute the max. queue (no. of on the expressway at this time of
day was
46 vehicles per min. The normal
freeway
vehicles)
Compute the max. queue length In capacity Is 65 vehicles per minute
but it
~ meters If one car Is assumed to be 5 m. was reduced to 24 vehicles per
min. due to
the traffic accident. The traffic
was cleared
long. by the MMDA after 20 minutes.
••
<D Determine the max. length of
the queue
Solution: before the blockage was
removed?
© Time when queue occurs ~ Determine the time that the
vehicles
Cummulative Cummulative
waited for the long queue
before the
blockage was cleared.
-
4'
~
Time
10:00
11:00
Demand
4000
7500
·capacity
2960
5920
~ What time was the queue cleared?
Solution:
© Max. length of the queue before
the
-'
, a
12:00 10000 8880 blockage was removed
1:00 12000 11840
r-r-----r
.·:
2:00 14000 14800
:":
3:00
4:00
16000
18000
17760
20720
/I
:' ./
!! ,,
:
.
:
.
Time Demand-Capacity j
Nonnai. flow JJ
10:00 4000 - 2960 = 1040 .r ;

't"';"6.S
:' max. q
iu11t' l
11:00 7500 - 5920 =- _;.,- it'n&tlt
l
. 12:00 10000- 8880 = 1120 /.
~
;
~
1:00 12000 - 11840 = 160 Jz
2:00 14000 - 14800 =- 800
J1=440
3:00 16000 - 17760 =-1760
4:00 18000 - 20720 = - 2720
,, x - 20
Max. queue occurs at 11:00 A.M.
& TRAFFIC ENGINEERING ;
- -- -
- - --------
Y1=24 (20) Solution:

h1=60(30)
Y1 =480 vehicles
h1=1800
Y2 =46 (20)
h2 = 80(30)
Y2 : 920 vehicles
h2 =2400
hi
Max. queue =920 - 480
L = h2- h1
Max. queue = 4'0 vehicles
L = 2400-1800
® Time that the vehicles waited for the long L = 600 cars
30min.
queue before the blockage was cleared. Total length of queue=

600(4.5)
I
Total length of queue =

2700 m
t = 440
, 46
t, =9.56 min.
Time the vehicles waled for the queue
( 2.217 Problem
J
A toll plaza at the entrance
to the NLEX
=20-9.56 consists of 3 booths each of
which can
=10.44mln. handle an average of one
vehicle every 6
sec. The peak traffic of a
toll booth is
recorded as follows from
7:00 AM to
@ Time the queue was cleared
8:00 AM.
y3 = 46 x
10 min. Cumulative
Y4 = 65 (x - 20) Time Period
Volume Volume
=
y3 Y4 + 440 7:00- 7:10
200 200
46 x =65 (x - 20) + 440 7:10- 7:20
400 600
> 7;20- 7:30
500 1100
19x-1300+440=0
7:30-7:40
250· 1350
x = 45.26 min. 7:40-7:50
200 1550
Time the traffic was cleared= 6:45.26 AM 7:50-8:00
150 1700
© Determine the service rate
of one toll
booth every 10 min.
f 2.216 Problem ~ Determine the maximum
queue.
 Determine the longest
delay to an
The Northern Luzon Expressway (NLEX) is individual vehicle in
min.
designed to have a roadway capacity of ® Determine the total delay
in vehicle-
120 vehicles per minute. But due to min.
resurfacing of the portion of the
expressway, the road capacity was Solution:
reduced to 60 vehicles per minute. The CD Service rate of one toll
booth every 10
traffic arrivals are 80 vehicles per minute. min.
The traffic then resumes after 30 min.
Compute the maximum length of the queue Service rate= 10(60)
if the average length of one car is 4.5 m: 6
Service rate = 100 veh
per 10 min.
li·tl
i.-
zOOo
1900 ·-
.
1800 ·-
1700 ·-
t100
.
'1600
1550
1500
~-
1550
/I- /
f-
300
J Omin.-··
1400
1350 1350 /
/ ) 1400 .
15C
1300 /
j/
~ ax. dela ~
1200
"' . /
/i2s<J , 3()(
1100 ~
'\
'
uoo
I
'
1000 Mj rix.
. J I
1100
~
que~
.
I
,)00
30C
I ;·
900
800
700
f' I 800
600
II
600 300
500 JI 100
400 II 500
300 II 300
-
.
200
200
100
/ ,
/ ' .
--
7:00 7:10 7:20 7:30 7:40

7:50 8:00
I 208_ - TRAN~PORTATION & TRA~FIC -ENGl_NEER1Nc;
--- - - - - -
- -
® Maximum queue
Solution: .
O' = 1100- (200 + 300 + 300) CD Time
the queue on the ramp begins anci
ends
a = 300 vehicles

® Longest delay to an individual vehicle in
6
min. ·
Service rate = 100 from 6:30 - 6:40
Longest delay = 10 min.
10
© Total delay in vehicle-min
Service rate= 60 from 6:40 • 6:50
Area of diagram = total delay

TotaJ delay= 100(10) + (100 + 300) (10)
12
2 2
Service rate 50 from 6:50 • 7:00

+ (300 +250) (10) + (250 + 150) (10)
1
2 2
Service rate= 0(~)
10
+ 150 (10)
Service rate= 60 from?:OO • 7:10
2
=
Total delay 8000 veh - min.
Service rate= 100 from 7:10 - 7:20
. 10(60)
f 2.218 Problem J
Service rate = _....;_-'-
6
Morning peak period starts from 6:30 AM
Service rate= 100 from 1:20- 7:30
up to 7:30 AM in an off-ramp meter of
TPLEX which allows one vehicle per cycle Queue
starts from 6:40 and ends up to
to pass the signal. The tabulated data
7:30AM. .
shows the number of vehicles demanding
service on the ramp during a particular ® Max. number
of vehicles In the ramp
time interval. queue
Max.
number of vehicles in the queue
Meter ·
Time Period
10mln. Cumulative
Cycle
= 270-190
Volume Volume .
(sec)
=
80 vehicles
6:30-6:40 80 80 6
6:40-6:50 90 170 10
@ Total delay
due to queuing on the ramp
6:50- 7:00' 100 270 12
7:00- 7:10 60 330 10 Total
delay = 30(10) + (30 + 80) (10)
7:10- 7:20 70 400 6
2 2
7:20- 7:30 50 450 6
+ (80 + 80) (10) + (80 + 50) (10)
2 2
<D Determine the time the queue on the
50
ramp begins and ends.
+ (10)
~ Determine the max. number of vehicles
2
in the ramp queue. Total
delay = 2400 veh-min.
~ Determine the total delay due to
.
queuing on the ramp in veh-hour.
=
Total
delay 40 veh ·hr.
------
42o t- 1 1 1 - - t --+-- L /J
400 400 /
._
100
380 - ~ 50~
36() 7 11--i.
l I ~1
350
~-
i--L
340 +---r---r--~--_u J
320 3~ 7 /r-t--t----
L
300 ./ 80 I 100
280 I 11-+~--L
260
J!ax no . of'" iclts 270, I(
I j
in t lie ramp q' e ue 11~,
, -=----f-4-._..1_
~ 1 '~~50
w ~~~
240 +---t--~
~--1 • /)
220 I /,_tt60
~-+---l.
200 + -- - + - - - -+.--6
I
/ )J.,l-v~
190=<----1-L
180 . + -- - - + -- --4-4,
170.4, / 50
160-+--- - 7-7
140 I; 140
120-+--- -t--I/ 60
100 -+--~-4--4r---t---t-+---~----4-~---1
80
8of . I
60 J "'- queue Otarts here
40 I
·1
20 T-1~-4----+---~--~~---+-~-+
6:30 6:40 6:50 7:00 7:10 7:15

7:30
--- -- -
210 - TRANSPORTATION
- -- - -- - - -- --- - &---TRAF~IC
-- ---- _~NG!
~EERtN '-.
-- cs '
2.219 g
Problem
rt
J
The metering scheme of a ramp meter Installed along the Pampanga-Sublc Expressway
111
one vehicle to pass the signal. The cumulative demand for the ramp for the morning
Ptak ~
ramp meter cycle for each Interval are shown In the table.
and
Meter
10 min. Curnulattve Cycle
Time~
Volume Volume
IMC)
6:30-6:45 75 75 6 © Determine the
max. queue.
6:45- 7:00 100 175 10 ~ Determine
the maximum delay to
7:00- 7:15 125 300 12 vehicle.
any
7:15- 7:30 110 410 12 ~ Determine
the total delay.
7:30-7:45 80 490 10
7:45-8:00 65 555 6
Solution: 600
575
-1
550
525
500
475
450
425
400
375
350
90
325
300
6:30 6:45 7:00 7:15 7:30 7:45

8:00
Time Period 15
min. Cumulltlv•
Volume Volume
8:00-8:15
800 800
8:15-8:30
1000 1800
8:30-8:45
1200 3000
8:45-9:00
800 3800
9:00-9:15
700 4500
9:15-9:30
1000 5500
Solution:
® Maximum delay to any vehicle= 15.5 min.
© Time the queue
clears= 9:15 Alf
Total delay
® 10(15) (10 + 60) @ Max. number
of vehicles in the
Total delaY = 2
+
2
(15)
queue= 1200
(60 + 95) (15) (95 + 85)
+ 2 + 2 (15) @ Longest delay
by any
suffered
vehicle = 15 min.
+ ~(15)
2
® Total delay
Total delay= 3750 veh-min. Area of diagram :
Total delay = 62.5 veh • hr.
Total delay =
500(15) + (500+1200) (15)
2 2
Q
1
....;;;.,_ _ _ __J1 .
_:2::.2::.:,2_o_ _P_r_o_bl_e_m +
(1200 +
1000)
1000
(15) + -(15)
2
The capacity of the S~TEX is 8000 vehicles Total delay= 40500
veh-min.
per hour in each direction under normal
Total delay =675
veh ~hr.
conditions. On a certain holiday, an
accident occurs at 8:00 AM at a portion
near Tarlac. After the accident, the capacity ·
Nde :
..
of the expressway in this direction is
reduced to 2000 vehicles/hour. At 8:45 AM, Service rcte from
8 : 00 to 8 : 45
the vehicles involved in the accident ls
removed from the traffic lanes, which 2000
=
(15)
increases capacity past the point to 4000 60
vehicles per hour and at 9:00 AM Is
removed completely, which restores
=500
veh/15 min.
capacity of 8000 vehicles per hour. Service rtie from
8 : 45 to 9 : 00
CD Determine the time the queue clears. =21000

(15) ' .
~ Determine the max. number of vehicles . 60
\
in the queue. =1000

veh/15 min.
~ Determine the longest delay suffered
by any vehicle.
® Determine the total delay.
-
6000
5600 -
.
5200
5~
4800
4500.,.
4400
/i ""' 1ue11e clears
here
4000 38,
V/
3600 IOOO /
I
3200
3~ r. v
2800
2800
,
Max. qu ~UL_
/
/
11111/
2400
2000
l ofl$t!Sf
18)
J (
7__
lOOC
5007=;~
UCIU)'
'
1800
1600 500
1200
-/
800 w ]JW
500
l~ que11e tarts here

400
8:00
v 8:15 8:30 8:45 9:00
9: 15 9:30
l 2.22~ -· Problem
A toll booth in the Marcelo Fernan Bridge can handle on the average of one vehicle
every 6sec.
Moming peak period traffic volumes starts from 7:00 AM to 8:30 AM due to some
workers In the
free zone in Mactan Island. Before 7:00 AM, two booths are open. At 7:30 AM, a
third booth was
opened until 8:30 AM.
<D Determine the time at which the

15 min. Cumulative
.Time
Period
number of vehicles in queue is 150.
Volume Volume
(2) Determine the max. queue and the time 7:00 - 7:15
200 200 -
it occurs. 7:15- 7:30
400 600 ~
~ Determine the total delay in vehicle· 7:30- 7:45

500 1100 -
hour. 7:45-8:00
550 1650 ~
8:00-8:15
400 2050 -
8:15-8:30
250 2300 -
so1ut1on:
<D nme ~t whic~ the number of vehicles in @
Total delay In vehicle-hour
queue 1s 150 1s at 7:45 AM.
Total delay = 100(15) + (100+150)
2 2 (15)
1
® Number of vehicles in the queue
+ (150 + 250)(1 (250 +200)

5efVice rate per booth =15(60)
2 5) + 2 (15)
6
+ 200(15)
5efVice rate per booth= 150 veh/15 min.
2
5efVice rate for 2 booths= 300 veh/15 min.
Total delay;: 10500 Yeh-min.
5efVice rate for 3 booths= 450 veh/15 min.
Total delay =175 veh. hr.

Max. queue =250 vehklts at 8 : oo AM
2300
2300
~)1-
2200
2100
20
2000
1900
200-
f_ I
•
1800
7
j
1.--
1850
1700,
1650
I, I I
~
4~ (3 booths open)
1600
1500
M• x . ,!'u e _jJ j
1400
Tl/
1300
I J 1400
1200 • II
1100
1100 7/
45< (3 booths 'open)
I
)()()()
I
I/
900
I 9qi
-
800
71
700
II 45C (3 booths
open)
600
600 7/
500
100-J./
/j 500
400
300
II 300 (2 booths ~pen)
200 I'
200
100
/
1L
.
7.00 7:15 7:30 7:45 8:0Q
8:15 8:30
[ 214 -TRANSPORTATION &
-- -~- -- - - - - -
~- ------~----
TRAFFIC
_~_NGl_N~ERING
___ _
i1
- -~
/ 2.222 Problem I
The toll booth In the toll bridge of San Juanico Strait In Tacloban City
controls the flow of traffec
thru the bridge. The toll plaza consists of two booths, each of which can handle
one vehicle
ev_ery 6 sec.
The volume of traffic and its corresponding times during morning peak period Is
tabulated 11
shown.
15 min. Cumulative
Time Period Volume
Volume <D Determine the number of
vehicles fn
7:00- 7:15 200 200 queue at 7:45 AM.
7:15- 7:30 250 450 <2> Determine the max.
number of vehicles
7:30- 7:45 350 800 In the queue.
7:45-8:00 400 1200 ~ Determine the total delay
in vehicle.
8:00-8:15 250 1450 minute.
8:15-8:30 200 1650
Solution:
I I I
I I I
17()() I I I
1650
'""n I
~.J
1600 '
1500
1.d '\() //
d 300
1450
1400
i / /
JUUj / /114:\0
1300
/J I
200
1200
r/ / ". 1()()
JOO 150 ! /
/
1000 -h
f-1050
i
//
900
100
800 800 I/
501-/JI/ 14;\()
700
600 f 300
500
450
,/
400 /
300 /
-
/
200
/ r
JOO
v
7 :00 7.15 7.30 7:45
8:00 8:15 8:30
ber of vehicles in queue at 7:45 AM
BEii
um - 15(60) Determine
the time when the queue 11
serviC8 rate per booth - 6 maximum.
CZ Determine
the max. length of queue.
serviC8 rcie per booth= 150 veh/15 min. <I Determine
the total delay due to
queuing
In the ramp In vehicl•mlnute.
serviC8 rate of 2 booths=300 veh 115 min.
Solution:
Max. number of vehicles in the <D Time the
queue is maximum
~ queue =150
Service
rate for 6 sec. cycle= 10(60) (2)
.
6
® Total delay in vehicle-minute
Service
rate for 6 sec. cycle= 200 veh/10 min.
50(150) (50 + 150) (15)
Total delay= 2 + 2
Service
rate for 12 sec. cycle= 10(60) (2)
+ (150 + 100) (15) + 100(15)
12
2 2 Service
rate for 12 sec. cycle= 100 veh/10 min.
Total detay =4500 veh ·min.
Service
rate for 10 sec cycle= 10{60) (2)
. 10
- Service
rae for 10sec.cycle=120 veh/10 rrin.
~.223
H- - - - ]
Problem Queue is
maximum ct 5: 40 PM.
During Christmas vacation, ramp .meters

@ Max.
length of queue = 190
long the expressway are open dunng the
~ening peak period from 5:00 PM to 6:00
PM. The metering syslem of the SCTEX
@ Total
delay due to queuing in the ramp
allows vehicles per cycle to pass the signal
10 that (for instance) a 6 sec. cycle Total
delay = 20(10) + (20 +50) (10)
corresponds to a service rate of one
2 2
vehicle every 3 sec. or 1200 vehicles per
+
(50 + 190) (10) + (190 + 30) (10)
hour. The cumulative volume and meter
cycles in each 10 min. period is recorded
2 2
as follows: +
30(10)
Time 10mln. Cumulative Meter

rotal
delay = 2900 veh. min.
Period Volume Volume Cycle/MC
5:00-5:10 150 150 6

5:10-5:20 120 270 12
5:20-5:30 150 420 10
5:30-5:40 140 560 10
5:40-5:50 160 720 6
5:501:00 170 . 890 6
JMB
1000~~-i-~~-+-~--+~~-r-~~-r-~-1
950
900
s5o I
sooL--~_J_~~+--~-t-~~+-~-r--J.r-1 /200
750
'
700
65o.!---1----_JL-..---f----t-7
600 200
550
500·-i---.!---------+--dL~~:;::===!===-----t
450+----1------l----+7
120 '
400-i----~---+--L--/
350
300
250
200+----l---~~__!-.l.---l.---1----+----l-
l 50~__;:..:::..=.(T------.--'---+----'----'----+
loo~~,__,_ __:.____ ~
i ---'-----'---~
50 -+-.,_-.---~----..---..,..---r--___.:_
5:00 5:10 5:20 5:30 5:40 5:50

6:00
( 2.224 Problem
A newty constructed expressway (TPLEX)
15-min.
· Cumulative
has a capacity of 8000 vehicles per hour Time PeriOd
(2000 veh/min.) in each direction under Volume
Volume
normal conditions. On a particular day 10:00 -10:15 1200
1200
(Sunday) an accident occurs somewhere in 10:15-10:30 1400
2600
Pangasinan at 10:00 AM. After the accident, 10:30 -10:45 1500
4100
the capacity of the freeway in this direction 10:45-11:00 800
4900
is reduced to 4000 vehicles per hour (1000 11:00-11:15 1100
6000
vehicles every 15 min.) until the cars 11:15-11:30 1500
7500
involved in the accident is removed at
11:00 AM.
.,.
terrnine the time the queue clears. ® Max. number of
vehicles in the queue = 900
d' D•t ......1ne the max. number of vehicles
Al oe ,,,.. ® .Longest delay
suffered by any vehicle
Ill the queue.
~ermine the longest delay suffered Longest delay=
from 10:45to11:00 AM
I bY anY ~ehicle.
~ oeterrntne the total delay. © Total delay
Total delay=
400(15) + (400 +900) (15)
solution:
2 2
Time the queue clears
1
© 4000(15)
+ (900 +700) (15) + 700(15)
sefViCe rate = 60
2 2
Total delay
=30000 veh-min.
sefViCe rate =1000 veh/15 min. from 1O:15 to 11 :OO AM
Total delay
=500 veh ·hr.
sefViCe rate= 2000 veh/15 min. from 11:00to11 :15 AM
Time the queue clears is 11: 15 AM. (see figure)
8000
7600
7~
7200
6800
I
6400
I
6000
. 5600
5200 t--t~-+~--4--_JLJ//
2000
49()(JV I
/~--1-
+---..!-
4800
-r---t----l---.L:;1rv;L
4400 .:1HV1 I/ I J
400() r/~
I A~~~~.1---
i~-~
3600 r - - . "'-='"=e ue::+-1-_-J7

M.::.+--'a:. ~/ /
/r---t---+~!__
1m1 _
_j_
3200 1---t-_j_h,_
' +~----t-1--i---1
2800
+--+--W7 / 3200
I
260<J 7 / 100)
2400 t---+-400-1-f-.-1vr-- t--+-+-----1f---L
//1'"4"Mr-t--+-~--j_
2000 +-----l-- - '/ /-
160()r-..-~t#7/ ~t-¥1M~~-t---~-+--~J
1200 1~12~/oo]f/
--t-L-t---l---!---1
soo I
400 1.
vr----+--+-~1---+---L-J
lO:OO 10:15 10:30 :
1045 :
1100 11 :
15 11 :30
218 -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC EN~-~~-~-~R~-~~
-- -~
Solution:
f 2.225 _ Problem
J
Arrival = (1.2 +
0.3t)dt
Vehicles arrive in a freeway on-ramp meter
at a constant rate of 6 vehicles per minute
0.3t 2 •
Arrival = 1.2t + - -
starting .at 6:.00 AM. Service begins at 6:00 2
=
AM such that µ(t) 2 + 0.5t where µ(t) Is in Arrival = 1.2t + 0.15t 2
vehicles/minute and t In minutes after 6:00
AM. What is the maximum queue length (in Departure= 12(t- 10)
vehicles)? ·
Time to clear the queue
(arrival =departure)
Solution: 1.2t+0.15t 2 =12(t-10)

J
Arrive = 6 dt = 6t 0.15t 2 - 10.Bt + 120 =0
f
Departure= u(t) dt = (2 + O.St)dt t 2 - 72t + 800 0 =
=
t 13.72 min.
Departure= 2t + 0.25t 2
Queue = rate of arrival - departure rate
Q(t) = 6t- (2t + 0.25t 2 )
J 2.227
Problem
J
Q(t) = 4t - 0.25t 2 There are 10 vehicles in
queue when an
attendant opens the toll
both of a parking
Max. queue length: space of MGM Hotel and
casino to see the
dQ concert of Elvis Presly.
More vehicles
- =4-0.St=O arrive at the toll booth at
a rate if 4 vehicle
dt per minute. The attendant
opens the booth
t= 8 and the service rate was
given as a
=
function µ(t) 1.1 + 0.3t
where µ(t) is in
Arrivals = 6(8) = 48 vehlmin. and t in minutes.
After how many
minutes will the queue be
clear?
Departure= 2t- 0.25t 2
Departure= 2(8) + 0.25(8) 2 = 32 Solution:
· Max. queue =48 - 32 = 16 cars

J
Arrival rate= A.t + 10
Arrival rate = 4t + 1O
Departure rate=
J(1.1 + 0.3t ) dt
f. 2.226 Problem
Departure rate= 1.1t + 0.15t
2
Vehicles begin to arrive at a parking lot in To clear the queue , arrival
rate =departure rate
SM Seaside at 6:00 AM with an arrival rate
=
per minute of µ.(t) 1.2 + 0.3t where tis in 4t+ 10= 1.1t+0.15t2
minutes. At &: 1OAM, the parking lot opens t
2
- 19.33t - 66.67 = 0
and processes vehicles at a rate of 12 per •
minute. After how many minutes will the =
t 3min.
queue be clear?
540
60 =9 veh/min for 20 min.
180 .
00 =3 veh/min fort > 20
min.
60
Departure rates: =
15
=4
veh/min for a11 ·r
9( 20) + 3 (t - 20) =4t
so1ution: 180 +3t- 60 =4t

AfriVal rate =JA. (t )dt t =120 min. =2 hr. after
8:00 AM
,ArriVal rate = J(4.3-0.22t )dt Time the queue will

dissipate =10 : 00 AM
2
ArriVal rate= 4.3t -0.11t
0eparture rate = 2dtJ
Departure rate =2t
In order that there will be no queue Vehicles begin to arrive at a
toll booth at
7:50 AM written arrival rate
of
Arrival =departure 1(t) =4.1 + 0.001t with t in
min. and 1(t) In
4.3t- 011t 2 = 2t vehicles/min. The toll booth
opens at 9:00
AM and process vehicles at a
rate of 12
2.3t -0.111 2 =0 veh/min throughout the day
when will the
queue dissipate?
t =20.91 min.
Solution:
= s µ(t) =3.3 + 2.4t
.lr"i:229 e:: Proble.;; From 7:50 to 8:00 AM, t = 10
min.
Vehicles arrive at entrance to the parking 10 =3.3 + 2.4t

lot of ·SM Seaside Mall. There is single gate t =2.792 min.
at which all vehicles must stop where a
park attendant distributes parking tickets. · Time at which service
becomes constant a
~he parking opens at 8:00 AM at which 10veh I min :
time vehicles begin to arrive at 360
vehicles per hour. After 20 minutes the t = 10 + 2.792
anival flow rate declines to 180 vehicles
t = 12.792 min.
per hour and It continues at that level for
the .remainder of the day. If .the time
.1 required to distribute the parking tickets is
15 sec., at what time will the queue· that
began to form at 8:00 AM will dissipate.
RANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEE~IN
--- ~ - ---- --
when Q(t) =0
L2.231 Problem
5.2t- 0.10t 2 - 20 =0
Vehicles begin to arrive at a toll booth at =
t 2 - 52t + 200 0
8:50 AM with an arrival rate of t =4.183 min. (time the
20th vehicle wrives)
1(t) • 4.1 + 0.001t with t In min. and A(t) in
vehicles/min. The toll booth opens at 9:00 µ =60 =3 veh/min.
30
AM and procns vehicle at a rate of 12
veh/min throughout the day. When will the Arrival =f µ dt
queue dissipate? Arrival= 3t
Solution: Q(t) =3t- 20

Q(t) =0
J
Arrival= A.(t)dt
Jt-20=0
I
Arrival= (4.1 + o.01t)dt
t =6.667 (time the 20th
vehicle departs)
2
Arrival= 4.1\ + 0.005t Wait= 6.667 - 4.183
Departure= 12(t - 10) wan. = 2.484 min.
9:00 - 8:00 = 10 min. after arrival
Arrival =departure (so that queue will dissipate
or so that there will be no queue)
4.1t + 0.005t2 =12(t. 10) f 2.233 Problem
t =15.3' min.'
Vehicles begin to arrive
at a remote parking
lot after the start of a
major sporting event
They are arriving at a
deterministic but
I 2.232 Problem j
=
time-varying .rate of
A(t) 3.3 - 0.1fwhere
A.(t) is in veh/mln. and
t In min. The parking
Vehicles arrive at a toll booth according to lot att~ndant processes
vehicles (assigns
the function A.(t) = 5.2 - 0.20t where A.(t) is spaces and collect fees)
at a deterministic
in vehicles per minute and t is in minutes. rate at a single station.
A queue exceeding
The toll booth operator process one four vehicles will back
up onto a congested
vehicle every 20 seconds. Determine the street, and is to be
avoided. How many
time that the 20th vehicle to arrive waits vehicles per min. must
the attendant
from its arrival to Its departure. process to ensure that
the queue does not
exceed four vehicles?
Solution:
A.(t) =5.2 • 0.20t Solution:
J
Arrivals= A.(t)dt f
Arrival rate= A.(t)dt
J
Arrivals= (5.2 - 0.20t)dt Arrival rate= f (3.3 -
0.1t)dt
Arrivals = 5.2t - 0.10\'2 Arrival rate= 3.3t -
0.05t 2
Q( t) =Arrivals - Departure f
Departure rate = µdt
Q(t) =5.2t - o.10t 2
• 20 Departure rate = µt
Sto · ·
P~•ng Sight Distance for
Honzontal Road Surface
3.3-µ
t::: D.1o
Q(t) ::: 3.3t. 0.05t2 - µt
V1 =velocity in
meters/sec.
(
4::: 3.3 0.10
~J-o.os(3.3-µJ2.
0.10 µ
(3.0.10
3-µJ t =perception-reaction
time
f = coeff1eient of
friction between tires and
pavements
soMn9 forµ =2.41 veh I min. G =average grade of
roadway
[ 2.234 Problem
- SIGHT DISTANCE FOR o.etermlne the minimum stopping

sight
HORIZONTAL SURFACE distance on a - 3.5% grade for
a design
speed of 110 kph. Coefficient
of friction
between tires and pavement Is
0.28.
Sight distance =is the length of roadway Driver's reaction time
(Including perception
ahead visible to the driver. time) is 2.5 sec.
passing sight distance = the sight Solution:

distance long enough to enable a vehicle
to overtake and pass another vehicle on a V=30.56 m/1 V..:30.56 mis
~
two-lane · highway without
interference .............,-.,,..
J,o_ .
e
from opposing traffic.

j
.
Stopping sight distance =the minfmum · 76.40
194.29 j
distance required to stop a vehicle S •
SIOp!>iaa sight distance
traveling near the design speed before it
reaches a stationary object in the vehicle 110
path. This stationary object may be V =3.6 =30. 56 mis
another vehicle or some other object Stopping sight distance :
within the roadway.
Minimum stopping sight distance
S=Vt'+ v2
2g(f + G)
=is equal to the distance traveled from
the same time the object is sighted to the (30.56)2
instant the brakes are applied plus the s =30.56(2·5) + 2(9.81)(0.28 -
0.035)
distance ll¥/Uired for stopping the vehicle s =76.40+194.29
after the brake~ are applied.
S= 270.69m.
[ 222 1
-TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
- ------ ---- -
---~------- ------ - --
Braking Distance to Avoid

~L2_._2_3_&____ ____~&--~J
P_ro_b_le_m
. _ . . Collision - ·
A
vehicle traveling at a speed of 80 kPh
I 2.235 Problem which
accelerates 3.41 m112, The
perception reaction time for the driver la

2.5
sec. If the maximum grade of the 'oad
In an Intersection collision one of the Is -
4%, compute the minimum sight
vehicles leave 48.78 m. of skid marks. A
distance.
skid mark analysis Indicates that the
vehicle was traveling 80 kph at the onset of
braking. Assuming the median-brake ·
Solution:
·reaction time of 0.66 sec., estimate the
distance from the point of impact to the
vehicle position when the driver initially
reacted. Deceleration rate of the vehicle is
1.5 m/s2•
I
Reaam~.
s,
Solution:
JO ---I_, _
V1 V..22.22 m/a S1 =
Vt
80
V= -
=22.22 mis
S1 St=4l1.78 m
3.6
s s, =
22.2~(2.5)
S1 =
55.56 m. (lag distance)
80
V = - =22.22m/s v2
3.6
s2 =2g(f
-
--
± G)
V22 =V12 -2a S2
a
(22.22) 2 = v12 - 2(1.5)(48.78) f =-
g
V1 =25.30 mis
81 =V1t f =3·41
=0.35
9.81
s, = 25.30(0.66) s =
(22.22}
2(9.81)(0.35 - 0.04)
81 =16.70 m.
82 =
81 .18 m. (braking distance)
Distance from the point of impact to the vehicle
.
position when the driver initially reacted : Minimum
sight distance :
S=S1 +S2 S=S1 +S2
s = 16.70 + 48.78 s = 55.56 +

81.18
S =65.48m. S = 136.14m.
- .... .. . -
- .. .. . . . . 49 _____ ,_.,..... .....-~
llftCAL PARABOLIC Solution:
v£ CURVES s2 =Jz.!_
9, -g2
rii ..iJl,,l,hiiilll4• 48 = - 0.04 L
ll'&'il ·--
~---,-,0-b-le-m-------~~-1
- 0.04. 0.00
L =120m
~h of 8 summit vertical curve 11

Th• IengTangent grades for the vertical
200 ;·are +3% and -2%. Compute the L2.240 Problem
curY of the summit curve.
radlUI · On a railroad, a + 0.8%
grade meets a -0.4%
grade at sta. 2 + 700 and
at elevation 30 m.
so1ut1on: 200 .
L -
R=~ - 0.03 -(· 0.02)
= ""'° m. The maximum allowable
change In grade
per station Is 0.2%.
Determine the length of
the curve.
Solution:
Problem ' r =91 -92
[z.238 a- - · -
n
A ertlcal summit curve has tangent grades 0.2 =0.8 +0.4
ofv+5% and .3,s•1•. The horizontal distance n
from the p.C. to the highest point of the
n=6
curve Is 113.64 m. Determine the length of
the curve. L =6(20)
)
L= 120m
Solution:
· 91L
s=~- :z
1 91-92 12.241 Problem
0.05 L
113 64
· =0.05 - 0.038 A vertical parabolic curve
has a length of
L=200m 280 m. H has an Initial
and final grades of
+3% and -4%. The elevation
of the P.C. Is
30 m. and Is at station
10+120.
j 2.239 Problem .I CD Find the value of
K(length of curve for
every 1• of change In
slope). ·
A vertical summit curve has its highest ~ Find the stationing of
the highest point
point of the curve at a distance of 48 m. of the curve.
·
from the P.T. The back tangent has a grade <Z Find the elevation of
the highest point
of +6% and a forward tangent grade of -4%. of the curve.
If the stationing of the P.T. is 10 + 100,
determine the length of vertical su~mtt
curve In meters. ·
-.
- -- - - - - ---- ---------- --
- l\Jc;
Solution: Check :
<D Value of K
L
K= ~ H =B(g, • 92)
280(3 +4)
A= 91-92 H = 8(100)
A=3- (-4)
H =2.45
A=7
y - 2.45
280 (120) 2 (140)2
K= T = 40m. -
y =1.8
® Stationing of the highest point of the curve Elev. A= 30 + 0.03(120) - 1.8
S= Kg1 Elev. A= 31.8 m
s =40(3)
S =120 m
Check : j 2.242 Problem
. J
S ~ ~ = 0.03(280) = 120 m
g1- 92 0.03 + 0.04 A +5.2% grade is followed by a
·2'h grade
of a vertical summit parabolic
curve at
Stationing of highest point station 2 + 230 with an elevation
of 194.60
=(10 + 120) + (120) m. The parabolic curve is 450 m.
long.
=10+240 <D Compute the length of curve
per 1"
change in grade.
@ Elevation of the highest point <2> Compute the elevation· of the
highest
Using slope diagram method: point of curve.
 Compute the stationing of
point c
whose elevation is 185.35.
Solution:
P.T. © Length of curve per 1• change in
grade
A =92 -91
A = 5.2 - (- 2) .
i 20 - - 160 A=7.2
450
h =area of shaded section K = .!:. = = 62.5 m
A 7.2
h = 120(0.03)
2 ® Elevation of the highest point
of curve
h =1.8 m S =Kg1
Elev. A =30 + 1.8 s = 62.5(5.2)
S = 325 m. (location of
highest point of
Elev. A= 31.8 m curve from P.C.)
[ 2.243 Problem
A •Ymmetrlcal vertical summit

curve hat
tangents of +6% and -4%. If the
1t1tlonlng
and elevation of the P.T. Is 10
+ 020 and
142.83 m. respectively, ~ompute
the
elevation and stationing of the
hlghnt
point of the curve. Length of
curve II
120m.
sing sJope diagram method : Solution:

U
h =area of shaded section
1
0.02(125)
h,:: 2
h :: 1.25 m
1
EleV. A= 194.60- 22~0.02) ~ 1.25

EleV. A= 191.35 m.
@ Stationing of point C whose elevation is .

185.35 Using slope diagram method:
.4 El. 19JJ5 1tt
By rEiio and proportion :

0.06 0.04
- -
120-x
- -x
x =48m
. 0.052(325)
h2 = 2 h =area of shaded portion
h2 =8.45m. of the sq,ed diagran
y 1 =191 .35-18~.35 h =0.04(48)

y1 =6m 2
h =0.96
Using square property of parabola.
8.45 - 6
=
Elev. of highest point of curve
142.63 + 0.96
(325)2 - X2 Elev. of highest point of
curve= 143.59 m
x =273.86 Stationing of highest point of
curve
Stationing of A= (2+230)+100 =(10 + 020). 48
Stationing of A = 2 + 330
=(9+972)
Stationing of C = (2 + 330) - (273.86)
Stationing of C = 2 + 056.14 m
-- E GINEERIN
226 . . . T~~~SPORTATIO_~ & TRAFFI~ N _________ -~--~
By rtiio and proportion

:
f 2.244 Problem )
0.03 - 0.02
A vertical summit parabolic curve has
s.- 250·S1
tangent grades of +2.8% ~nd ·1.6%. If the s =150 m. from P.C.
1
length of the curve is 110.46 m, compute Elev. P.C. =190.50-
125(0.03)
the radius of the vertical curve.
Elev. P.C. =186.75 m
Solution: h =wea of shaded area
diag.
L=KA h = 150(0.03) =2.25
A= 2.8-(-1 .6) 2
A=4.4 Elev. of highest point
of curve= 186.75 + 2.25
110.46 =K(4.4) Elev. of highest point
of curve= 189 m.
K =25.10
R =100 K
R = 100(25.10)
R =2510m.
f 2.246 Problem
J
A vertical summit curve
connects a +6%
grade to a -3% grade at
the P.I. at station
150 + 00 whose elevation
is 48 m. A
crossroad is located at
station 150 + 70.
( 2.245 Problem I Elevation of the
centerline of the crossroad
is 37.50 m.
A back tangent grade of a crest vertical
curve is +3% intersects a minus 2% grade CD Compute the length of
the vertical
at station 4 + 350.and at elevation of 190.50 curve needed to make
the highest
m. If the length of curve is 250 m, point on the vertical
curve come out
determine the elevation of the highest point exactly over the
centerline of the
of the curve. Use slope diagram method. crossroad at station
150 + 70.
® Co~pute the clearance
between the
Solution:
4+350
profile grade on the
vertical curve and
the centerline of the
crossroad.
Cl> If the design speed is
120 kph, .
determine the minimum
length of the
curve required
considering appearance
h
criteria.
.T.
150+00
+0.03
I
i-- - -- -- - _ _ _ ___, -0m
n.
s 250-S
U2
70 (U2)-70
S2
h =crea of shaded section
SoJllll"n:
th of the
vertical curve
leOQ SO+OO
h - 0.03(140)
(!) El I., 4g m 11,6 i.,., l'<"nl of 1•11n·r
- 2 - =2.1m
Elev. of P.T. =48- 210(0.03) =41.70 m
Elev. of A: 41.70 + 2.1: 43. m

(
l'.T.
80
Cleaance betiwJerr Alllld CIO&ioad :
c =43.80 -37.50
U2 70 (U 2)-70
C=6.3m
Si
® Length of curve based on appearance

-0.03
criteria if V =120 kph

(U2)+70 (U2)-70
V>60kphandA>2%
where: A =6 - (-3) =9
By rtiio and propottion :
Use lmin. =2V
o.oo _ o.o3
Lnn. =2(100) =240 m.
r=+ 7o - ~ -70
i +70 =( ~ - ~:~)
70)(
~ +70 =( ~ -70}21
[2.247 Problem
.~ +70 =L - 140
2
A grade of ·5% la followed by a grade of
L+ 14o =2L - 280
+1 %, the grades lntersecttng at the vertex
L= 420m.
(Sta. 10 + 060). The change of grade is
restr1cted to 0.4% In 20 m. Compute the

® Clearance between the profile grade on
length of the vertical parabolic sag curve In
meters. ·
the vertical curve and the centerline of the
crossroad
Solution:
r =92- ~t
,h
0.4 =1+5
- c
n
n =15
L =15(20) =300 m
280
140
_2~~ •aTRANSPORTATl_ON & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
- - - - --------- - - ----
-- ----
Solution:
L2.2•a _ CE Board
- -
May
- -
2015
- -
A -6% grade and a +2'/1 Intersect at

STA 12 + 200 whose elevation Is at 14.375
m. The two grades are to be connected by
a parabolic curve, 160 m long. Find the
elevation of the first quarter point on the
curve.
Solution:
H =~ (91 -92 )
1
---r------- H= ~ (- 0.06-0.02)
!' H =-1.6 m. (sag curve)
2 2
i(40) (80)
-Y, - - -
1.6
y1 =0.40.
L Elev. of P.C. = 25.632 + 80(0.06)
=30.432
B
H = (92 -91)
Elev. of first quarter point:
160
H = B (0.02 + 0.06) Elev. =30.432 - 40(0.6) + 0.40
Elev. =28.432 m.
H= 1.6
_Y_=~
(40)2
2
(80)2
- (40) (1.6)
j 2.2so
SE!
Problem
: J
y - (80)2 A descending grade of 4.2'k
intersects an
aseending grade of 3% at Sta. 12 +
325 at
y =0.40 elevation 14.2 m. These two grades
are to
be connected by a 260 m. vertical
parabolic
Elev. A= 14.375 + 40( 0.06) .+ 0.40 curve. Ar einforced concrete
culvert pipe
with overall diameter of 105 cm. Is
to be
Elev. A= 17.175 m.
constructed with its top 30 cm.
below the
subgrade. What will be the Invert
elevation
of the culvert?
I2.249 Problem
130
130
A -6% grade and a +2% grade intersect at

P.T.
STA 12 + 200 whose elevation is at
.,,,,, ...~
)(:;
25.632 m. The two grades are to be
,,.,O,Jtii t.f
' 1.05 m
connected by a parabolic curve 160 m
long. Find the elevation of the first
quarter
point on the curve.
[2.!51 Problem
- m --
P.T.
A 300 m. vertical
parabolic 119 curve ire
,.c. connected by tangent
grades of -5% and
+1% which lntersect1
at ltltJon 10 + 050
and elevation 374.50
m.
<D Compute the length

of curve per 1•
change In grade.
260-S ~ Compute the dlltance
from th• P.C. to
the lowest point of
the curve.
~ Compute the
elevation of tht lowest
point of the curve.
o.042
Solution:
© Length of curve per
1•
change in grade
K=~
A
i nl'UI d~>'OliOll
A=92• 9,
A= 1·(·5)
By rtikJ t*1CI proportion : A=6
--
0.042 - 0.03
260-S S
0.072S = 260(0.03)
K=~
K=50m.
s=108.33
® Distance from P.C.
to' the lowest point of
h=area of shaded section the curve
0.03(108.33) 81 =K g1
h=-~-
2 81 =·50(5)
h~ .625 81 = 250 m. from
the P. C.
Elev. P.T. =14.2 + 0.03(130}
1s1>
Elev. P.T. =18.10
Elev. of A= 18.10 - 1.625
Elev. of A =16.475 m.
Elevation of invert of culvert= 16.475 - 0.3 - 1.05
Elevation of invert of culvert= 15;12 m
s,..2so m
300 -S 1 =SOm
~.
230 --TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFI~ ENGINEE~NG
--- - ---- - -
- ~
Using slope
diagram method.
Check : Using slope diagram
180-S S
0.05 0.01 - - -
- -
0.025 0.01
S1 300-S1
1.8 - 0.01 s
=0.025 s
15 -0.06 s1
S1 =250 m. from P.C. 0.0355=1.8
Check : S =51 .43 m.
S = 91 L Check using
formula:
1
91 -92 . gL
s= 2
S
1
= -0.05(300) =250 m. from P.C. 92 -91
- 0.05 - 0.01
0.01(180)
@ Elevation of the lowest point of curve: s = 0.01- (-
0.025)
using slope diagram S = 51 .43 m. ok
Elev. of PT= 374.50+150(0.01)
Elev. of PT = 376 m.
x=90-51 .43
Area of shaded diagram =h
x=38.57 m.
h = 0.01(50) =0.25
2 Stationing of
lowest point =(100 +00) +(38.57)
Elev. of A =376 - 0.25 Stationing of
lowest point =100 + 38.57
Elev. of A= 375.75 m
f 2.252 CE Board Nov. 2016 f 2.253

Problem
A -2.5% grade is connected to a +1.0% A vertical curve

joins a -1.2% grade to a
grade by means of a 180 m. vertical curve. +0.8% grade. The
P.I. of the vertical curve
The P.I. station is 100 + 00 and the P.I. is at is at station 75 +
00 and elevation 50.90 m.
elevation 100 m. above sea level. What is above sea level. The
centerline of the
the stationing of the lowest point on the roadway must clear a
pipe located at
ve~ical c~rve? station 75 + 40 by
0.80 m. The elevation of
the top of the pipe
is 51.10 m. above sea
Solution: level. What is the
minimum length of the
90 90
x s · vertical curve that
can be used?
P.C.
Solution:
U2
U2
P.C.
s
H =~g (g 2 -g)
,
H= ~ [0.01-(-0.005)]
H =0.00188L .
Elev. A= 150 + 70(0.01)
(1)2 - (~ -40}2 Elev. A =150.70 m.
ti- o.68
L2 -40L+1600 Elev. B=150.40 + 0.75
L2 = 4
4{Q.0025L) 0.68 Elev. B =151.15 m ·
. L· _ L2 - 160L + 6400 y =151.15-150.70 m
o.m - 4(0.68) y=0.45m
~ =L2 - 160L + 6400 y =Ji_

0.01 (~ - 70)2 (~ )2
2
272L =L - 160L + 6400
0.45 =0.00188L(4)
L2 -432L + 6400 =0
(~ - 70)2 L2
L=416.64 say 417 m.
0.45 0.00752
=--
(~ - 10)2 L
j 2.254 Problem
l ( l2 -'?0)2 = 0.45L
0.00752
A vertical curve joins a -0.5% grade to a
+1.0% grade. The P.1. of the vertical curve ( 12 - 70)2 =59.84L
is at station 200 + 00 and elevation 150 m. L2
above sea level. The centerline of the - - 70L +4900 =59.84L
roadway must clear a pipe located at 4
station 250 + 70 by 0.75 m. The elevation of 2
L - 280L + 19600 = 239.36L
the top of the pipe is 150.40 m. above the 2
sea level. What is the minimum length of L - 519.36L +19600 = 0
vertical curve that can be used?
L =478.39m.
I 232
- - - -
-TRANSPORTATION &
- - -- - --
~ -
TRAF~IC ENGl~-~-~RING ---- - -
f 2.255 Problem ·
l
0.02(3,6) .,
-0.072 m
.,-- 3.6 m 0 .75 m 10.822 111

The length of a sag vertical curve is 420 m.
with tangent grades of -2% and +4%
3 .6m
Topofpi{H
El. c 6 1.978 m
~O ·
intersecting at a point whose stationing is
at 160 + 00 and elevation of 60 m. above
Elevation at point A = 64.20 - 1.4

sea level. A pipe Is to be located at the
lowest point of the vertlc;al· curv~. The
Elevation at point A =62.80 m.
roadway at this point consists of two 3.6 m.
Elevation of the top of the pipe
lanes with a normal crown slope of 2%. If
=62.80 - 0.822
the lowest point on the surface of the
roadway must clear the pipe by 0.75 m,
= 61.978 m
what is the maximum elevation of the top
of the pipe?
Solution:
......................... -.- - - r
f 2.256 Problem
J
% I o.o2(3.6J 1
A vertical sag curve has tangent grades of •
•········ ··· ··········· ····· ...... ...... ...... . L:().072 m I
- -·I-- - - .,
10 .822 m
3.6 m 3.6 m 0 .75 m
1.5% and +3.5%. If the length of curve per
1% change In grade Is 32.13 m, find the
maximum speed allowed to pass through
this curve in kph.

L=420m
Solution:
K =32.13
A = - 1.5 - (3.5)
A =-5 (sag)
L=AK
L 5(32.13)
-0.02
Usinx slot>e diC1gram
L = 160.65
AV 2
L=-
S
1
=9 L 1
395
9, -92
160.65 =5v2
s = - 0.02(420)
395
1
- 0.02 - 0.04
S1 =140 m.
v=112.66 kph
Elev. of P.C. =60 + 210(0.02)
Elev. of P.C. =64.20 m.
1
h= ~·02) =1.4 m
SoMng for L1:
~ _ (91-92) L2
L1 - L1 + L2 ,,
rtie81 highway curve is at times
~ :: to include a particular elevation at a 2HL1 + 2HL2 =L1 L2 (Q1 - gi)
d65i9.n station where the grades of the forward L1(L2 (Q1 - 92)- 2H) =2HL2
¢t31n kward tangents have already been
and ~:~ed. It is therefore. necessary to use a
estab with unequal tangents or a compound
curve which is usually called "unsymmetrical"
c0rJ0 ymmetrical parabolic curve where one
<i ~~la extends from the P.C. to a point App~ying the squared property of
parabola, in
~ ti below the vertex and a second solving for the vertical offsets
of the parabola..
direG~18 which extends from this point to the
~~In order to make the entire curve smooth
·dcontinuous, the two parabolas are so
:Ostructed so that they will have a common
tangent at the point where they joined, that is
at apoint directly below the vertex.
Let us consider the figure shown below:
L2 .
Y1 H
(X1)2 =(l1)2
Y2 H
(x2)2 = (L2)2
Location of the highest or lowest

point of the
L1 = length of the parabolic curve on the left curve.
side of the vertex.
L2 =length of the parabolic curve on the right L1 g1
a) From the P.C. when-- < H
2
side of th~ vertex.
91 =slope of backw~rd tangent
92 =slope of forward tangent
Considering triangles AVD and ABC.

2H _ (91 - 92) L2
L1 - l1 + L2
H=(91 - gi) l2
2(l1 + l2)
1
h1=4 H
1
h2=4 H
234-TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING ·
Let g3, be the slope of the common S1 =location of the highest

or lowest point
tangent of the parabolic curve. of the curve from the P.C.
v Likewise, the location of

the lowest or
highest point. of the curve
could be
computed from the P.T. of
the curve, this
F L1 g1 .
• -g3L/2 holds true when 2 1s
gre~ter than H.
l'C~~~~~~~~--<T
'
A Considering the figure
shown, let us
L, assume that the highest or
lowest point of
Considering the symmetrical parabola the curve is found on the
right side of the
AVF, the location of the highest point of parabola.
the sag js obtained from the relation.
g1 L1 L1 91
81 b) From the P.T. when 2 >H
CD =g1 - g3
Substitutintg these values and solving for
g3, we have:
L1
® H = 2 (91 - 93)
2H =L1 91- L1 93
93 L1=L1 91 - 2H
L191- 2H
93= L1 .
2H
@ 93=91-~
From equation CD substitute equation @ .

91 L1
s---
1- 91 - 93
Considering the right side of
the parabola,
VFCD.
91 L1
S1=------ v
91 - (91 - f~) l
L/ 2Cz,·Kz)
!
iH
91 L1
F
81 =91 L1 - 91L1 + 2H
L1
..
I;
·ng (Org3'·n equation ® · [2.257 _ Problem

5ofV12H =L2 93 - L2 92
An unsymmetrical
parabollc curve hn a
2H + L292 forward tangent of • 8%
and 1 back tangent
® g3=- L2 of +5%. The len9tf1 of
curve on the left aide
of the curve 11 40 m.
long while that of the
· right aide Is 60 m.
long. The P.C. 11 at
station 6 +780 and
has an elevation of
110 m. An outcrop Is
found at station 6 +
800 has an.elevation of
108.40 m. Compute
the elevation of the
highest point of the
curve.
'
S2:.:: 2H + L2Q2 _9
Solution:
L2
2
I:
!
92 (L2)2
jllrf1)/J2
S2 =2H + L2 92 - (L2)292
I
I
_92 L2 from the P:r.
S2- 2H
I
l r.T.
· !:1!1, > H, the highest or lowest point 2H L2 (g, - g2)

2
When
of the curve .is located on the right side of the
I:;- = L1 + L2
curve. L, L2 (g1- g2)
H = 2 (L1 + L2)
L1 91 > H 40 (60) (0.05 - (-
0.08))
© When 2 H= 2(40+ 60)
H= 1.56
92L22 h P..,.)
-2H
Use: S2- - (fromt e .1. HighLst
point
L191
® When2<H
r.T.
91 L12 p C)
Use: 81 = 2H" (from the . .
L1 g1 _ 40 (0.05)
=1.0 < H
2 - 2
g1 L12
f"I
s1 =2i/ from P.C.
0.05 (40)2
S1 = 2 (1.56)
s1 =25.64 m.
It¥
H Y2 ~· S
iral Curves ---.
(40) 2 = (25.64)2
- 1.56 (25.64)2
Y2- (40)2
Y2= 0.64
Elev. of E =110 + 0.05 (25.64) - 0.64
Elev. of E =110.6'2 m.
f 2.2sa Problem
a
A • 3% grade meets a +5% grade near an

underpass. In order to maintain the
minimum clearance allowed under the
bridge and at the same time introduce a
vertical transition curve in the grade line, it
is necessary to use a curve that lies 200 m.
on one side of the vertex of the straight
grade and 100 m. on the other. The station
of the beginning of the curve (200 m. side) \
I
is 10 + 000 and its elevation is 228 m.
\ I
\ I
\ I
Determine .the stationing of the lowest

R;\ ,'~
\ I
point of the curve.

\
\ '
Solution:
L1 g1 _ 200 (0.03) _
2 - 4 - 3 m. >·2·67
The lowest point of curve is on the right side.
~~-200 1 001~~-
Lowest pomt
Elements of a spiral curve:

g2Li
S2=2JI
s2 . . 0.05 (100)2 1. s.c. =
spiral to curve
2 (2.67)
- 2. C.S. = curve to
spiral
S2 =93.63 m. 3. S.T. = spiral to
tangent
Sta. oflowest point of curve= (10 + 300) - 93.63 4. Ts = tangent
distance -
Sta. of ~owest point curve = 10.+ 206.37 5. Tc = tangent
distance for the curve
-- - -· -
~ ~
:::
6.
7, le
- curve
r.s. == tangent to spiral 4. Offset distance from
the tangent at
a. Re ::: radius of simple curve any point In the spiral
9. De = degree of simple curve
3
X =X L
1o. T = long tangent c
LJ
11 L. .
c
. s.T. =. short tangent
12. E = external distance of the spiral 5. Deflection angle at any
point on the
13. s
spiral
curve
long chord of spiral transition . s
14. L.C. = 1=-
15. Xe = offset from tangent at S.C. 3
distance along the tangent from
16. Ye = 6.
the T.S. to S.C. Distance along tangent
at any point in
the spiral .
17. x = offset from tangent at any point Ls
on the spiral
y =L- 40 R2 L2
18. y = distance along tangent at any
c c
. point on the spiral
19. Sc = spiral angle at S.C. 7. Distance along tangent
at S.C. from
T.S.
20. = deflection angle at any 'point on
the spiral, it is proportional to
L3
the square of its distance. y=L---L-
c c 40 R2
21. ~ = length of spiral
c
22. L = length of spiral from T.S. to any 8. Tangent distance for

spiral
.point along the spiral
T• =~2 + (Rc + ~)
4 tal
!2
SUMMARY Of FORMULAS .ii:
' - FOR SPIRAL CURVE ,...- 9. External distance
1. Spiral angle at any point on the spiral 4 )

sec !2 -Rc
E• = (R c + Xe
s= 2R\(1~) 10. Angle of intersection
of central simple
curve
le = 1-2Sc
()
2. Spiral angle at S.C.
S : _ c_ c
D L
11. Length of throw
c 40
x
s
c
=~(180)
2R 7t
p=~
4
c
RI=• :·
12. Super-elevation where K velocity of = LJ
car In kph t
x=SRL c
2
0.0079 K
e=---
R
j!<1ooi]'
13. Super-elevation considering 75% of K x - 6(300)
(100)
to counteract the super-elevation
3
0.004K2
(75)
e=--
R x =6(300)
(100)
14. Desirable length of spiral x =2.34

3
L =0.036K
c R
15. Deflection angles vary as the squares
of the length from the T.S.
I2.260
CE Boaf'.d ,Nov. 20!!]
A spiral
easement curve has a length Of
ic L2 120 m with a
central curve having a radius
- c
of 300 m.
Determine the offset distance
from the
tangent to the third-quarter PGint
16. Degree of curve varies directly with
of the
spiral. '
the length from the T.S.
D L
- --
DC LC Solution:
••••• Xe
( 2 .259 C E Board Nov. 2015
_:o.-----··_··....:....,_ s.c.
A spiral easement .curve has a length of
100 m. with a central curve having a radius
of 300 m. Determine the offset distance
T.S . =langrnt to spiral
S .C .=.rpira/ to cun -r
from the tangent to the third-quarter point
L ,=length Qfspiral
of the spiral.
Solution: L3
x= - -
.......... . 6R cLc
•••••• X e
······... s.c. x = (90)3

6(300)
(120)
T.S.
x = 3.375m
T.S . =1ange111 10 spiral
S .C . =spiral 10 cun·r
L ,=length of spiral
An 80-rn •plral connects 1 1.
- . -
180-m l'ldlu1 clrc
-'lfW'l' with •
Velocity I k ular curve. The
maximum
n Ph that 1
through the curve car
COUid Pll•
nearest to: Without
•kidding ii
so1ut1on:
1145.916 (degr88 of sknple curve) Solution:
o::~
L = o.03av1
1145.916
o::~
• Rc
o:: 3.819° 80 = 0.036v3
180
oegree of spiral when L= 43 Le v =73.68 lcph
I 3
L:: 4(100)
L=75m [ 2.284 Problem

]
01 =E.
L LC A spl~I 80 m. long connects
a tangent with
· a 6.5 circular curve.
Determine the
D1 - -3.819 deflection angle at the
first quarter point.
75 . . 100
Solution:
D,=2.86.
[2.2&2 CE Board Nov. 2015 J
The degree of curve of the central curve of T.S.
s.c. J
a spiral easement curve is equal to 6°. If the
r.s .•.,,_,,,.,""
max. design velocity of the car passing
S .C.•<pitoJ1a""'·•
L,•
lmg1•o{,,il'ul
j •
d•fl«""" ""•" at le10
thru the spiral curve is 75 kph, determine S •
1piral 11111/<at L•ZO
the required length of spiral.
Solution: L2
I
S=-rad.
R = 1145.916 = 1145.916 = 2 RCLC
c D 6 190.99
R= 1145.916
l =0.036V 3 .
6.5
c Rc
R =176.29
l = 0.036(75)3 = 79 52·
c 190.99 . .L 80
whenL;..:.£. =-= 20
4 4
240 -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
--- --- --- - -
s= (20)2
f. 2.266 Problem
2(176.29)(80)
S =0.01418 rat.
Compute the deflection angle at the end
point of the spiral if the.length of spiral it

s =0.01418(180)
80 m. with a degree of curve of the central
7t
curve of a spiral easement curve Is 6.s·.
s =0.8125°
Solution:
. s
1=-
3
. .0.8125
1=--
s.c.
3
i =0.21·
T.S. T.S ,•lnn1en1 10 Jpirnl
S .C. •Jpiral 10 e11n•e
~ •lkfl«tltJtt nn1le ol S.C. •
,), •Jpirol 0111/e at S.C.
( 2.265 . Problem
Re = 1145.916 = 176.29 m
6.5
The length of the spiraJ curve is 82 m. and
L 180
S =c- • -
the radius of the central curve of the spiral
c 2 Rc 7t
curve is 260 m. Compute the length of
.· throw.
s = 80 • 180 =13·
c 2(176.29) 7t
Solution:
i =_ c =-
s 13
= 4.33
c 3 3
2£S±E LE
f 2.267 Problem
I
. '
i
The spiral easement curve has a length of
\ R\ j jR / Spiml
spiral equal to 80 m and the radius of the
1 . l/ CUT\'~
l...i!llJ:fh
Lrng1h
af1hrow
'\
\ \ l/ /
I
u/1hrUH'
central curve of the spiral curve is
192.84 m. Compute the deflection angle at

\ \ 1 / //
,,l_ j '/
the end point of the spiral.
'W
Solution:
L2
P=-c-
24 Rc
2
p = (82)
s.c.
24(260)
T.S. T.S . •10n1m1 w sp/roJ

P =1.0Bm
S.C .~s,,.ra/ to....,,.,
l ,•t/,.fltttlon .,,.,1.01 s.c.
S ,•spira/ onr/t at S .C.

L 180
Solution:
s,:: _:s.... · -
2 R 1t
c
<D Min. value of
centrifugal acceleration·
(80) • (180) C=_§Q_
.
s, :: 2(192.84) 1t 75+ v
C- 80
5c == 11.ss· - 75 + 80
5
• - c
c=0.516 ml-3
Ic - -
3
® Length of spiral
curve:
.I -- ~ =396°
• L _ 0.0215 V3
c 3
c- CR
L =0.0215 (80~
c 0.516 (260)
(j.268 Problem 1 Le= 82.0Sm.
A spiral easement curve has a length of 80
mand the radius of the central curve is 200 @ Length of throw:
m. Determine the max. velocity that a car Xe
could pass thru the spiral curve. P=4
L2
Solution:
Xc= 6 ~c
o.036 V3
LC= R x =(82.05)2
c
c 6 (260)
3
= 0.036 V Xe= 4.32
80
200
v=16.3kph P -- 4.32
4
P= 1.0Bm.
f 2.269 Problem
J·2.270 Problem
The design speed of a car passing thru an
easement curve is equal to 80 kph. The The tangents of a spiral
curve forms an
radius of the central curve of the spiral angle of intersection of 2s·
at station 2 +
curve is equal to 260 m. long. 058. Design speed Is 80
km/hr. For a radius
of central curve of 300 m.
and a length of
<D Compute the value of the rate of spiral of 52.10 m..
centrifugal acceleration In m/sec for
this speed. Find the stationing at the
point where
(f)
~ Compute the length of the spiral curve the spiral starts.
based on the centrifugal acceleration. ~ Find the stationing of the
start of
~ Compute for the length of throw. central curve. .
~ Find the length of central
curve.
242 - 1
TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
I
-- - --- - ---- - - - - - ---- - --- - - -----
---~
Solution: Length of central curve:

<D Stationing at the point where the spiral TT
starts. s =RCIC 180
s =300(15.05") 1~
S =78.Bm.
I 2.211 _ Problem
J
A simple curve having a degree of
curve
equal to 6° is connected by two
tangents
having an azimuth of 240· and 280'
respectively. It Is required to
replace this
curve by introducing a transition
curve 80
m. long at each end of a new central
curve
which is to be shifted at its
midpoint away
2
L L I from the intersection of the
tangents.
T' =..£..
2
+ (R + _c
c
_
24 R
) tan -
2
c
2
<D Determine the radius of the new
central
T = 52.10 + (300 + (52.1.0) ] 25 curve if the center of the old
curve is
' 2 24(300) tan 2 retained.
T, =92.64m. (2) Determine the distance which the
new
curve is shifted away from the
intersection of the tangents.
Stationing @T.S. =(2 + 058) - 92.64
Cl> Compute the length of throw.
Stationing @ T.S. = 1 + 965.36
® Stationing of the start of central curve. Solution:
Sta. @S.C. =Sta. @ T.S. + Le <D Radius of central curve:
Sta. @ S.C. = (1 + 965.36) + 52.10
Sta. @ S.C. =2 + 017.46
® Length of central curve.
s =~ x 180
c 2 RC TT
s- 52.10 180
c - 2(300) x 1l
Sc =4.975"
lc=l-2Sc
le= 25-2(4.975)
le= 15.05"
L2
P -~
- 24Rc
R, -R, =p A simple curve having a radius of
200 m.
1145.916 hn a central angle of 50·30·. It
la required
R, = O to be replaced by another curve
by
1145.916 connecting spiral (transition
curve) at Its
R1= 6 ends by maintaining the radius of
the old
curve and its center but the
tangents are
R : 190.99m. moved outwards to allow
transition. Part
' 8())2 of the original curve Is
retained. The new
R - (
190.00 - c - 24 RC. Intersection of the tangents Is
moved
outward by 2 meters from Its
original
4583.76 RC - 24 R~ =6400 position along the line
connecting the
Intersection of tangents and the
center of
R2c - 190.99 RC+ 266.67 =0 the curve.
190.99 ± 188.18 © Determine the length of the

transition
RC= 2 curve (spiral) at each end of
the central
curve.
Rc =189.59m. ~ Compute the spiral angle.-
<Z Compute the central angle of
the
central curve from the S.C. to
C.S.
o·stance
1 which the new curve is shifted Solution:
® away"'i.0 m the intersection of the tangents.
<D Length of the transition
curve:
h =R1 - Re
h =190.00-189.59
h = 1•40 m. (amount the new curve is
shifted away from the intersection
of the tangents)
@ Length of throw:
- (L )2
p = 24cR p =2 Sin 64'45'
c
p = 1.81 m.
(80)2
p = 24 (189.59) (L )2
P= 24C
R
P =1.41 m. c
Lc2 = p (24).Re
Lc2 =1.81 (24)(200)
Le =92.95 m. (length of spiraQ
.- _,.. - -..-- .. -
I 244-TRANSPORTATION &
·- - - - --
TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
- -----
-- --~ -- - - - - -
® Spiral angle. Solution:

3
= LC1ao· 0.036V
5 L=
c 2Rc TT R
3
s = 92.95 (180") 250 = 0.036(140)
c 2 (200) TT R
sc = 13°19' R = 395.14 m
v2
R=
@ Central angle: 127(e + ~
le=l-2Sc 140 2
395.14 = ' )
le= 50"30' -2(13"19') 127(e +
0.20)
le= 23"52' (central angle of the new curve) e = 0.19
f 2.275
Problem
I2.273 Problem
A horizontal curve has
a radius of 400 m.
Given a horizontal curve with a 400 meter Compute the minimum
length of the spiral
radius have a design speed of 90 kph. necessary for a smooth
transition from
Compute the minimum length of transition tangent alignment to the
circular curve.
curve necessary for a smooth transition Assume that the maximum
super-elevation
from tangent alignment to the circular rate should not exceed
0.08 and a max.
curve. side friction value of
0.12.
Solution: Solution:
L = 0.036V
3 v2
R=---
R 127(e +'f)
L = 0.036(90)
3
v2
400 400 =- - - --
127(0.08 + 0.12)
L =65.61m
v= 1~.80kph
Length of spiral :
L =0.036V
3
I2.274 Problem • R
A. 1·km long racetrack is to be designed

L =0.036(100.8)
3
I 400
With t~ms 250 m. length at each end.
Determine the super-elevation rate for a L, =92.17 m.
design speed of 140 kph and a side friction
factor of 0.20. ·
Ls= De (200)
L. =3.6(0.08)(200)
,.1e _
i· _..
. horizontal curve with a 410 m. L.-- 57·60 m. say 60 m (multiple of
20 m)
GW'" 8 estimate the len~h of spiral
radius, for a smooth transition from
,,ecet58~ignment to the circular curve If -
ta"gentigan speed is 90 kph. '6 2.27a~ . Problem
J
thedtS
A circular curve with a radius of -
tmA
5011Jffon: connected b 60
t
~ m. ts
Y m. spiral transition
curv•
o.o36V 3 • o tangents with a deflection angle
of 0 349
L,:::~ rad. If the stationing of the TS Is
105 ~ 40
L, :::
~
410
determine the stationing of the ST.
•
L :::6'nl
s
§11 · Problem
~~
\
Aiwo-lane highway of the Northern Luzon \,4~'(~er

\
\
! ,,'
Simplc;ClllVC / '
.s:...."·~
, R 350 ~c.... "'

Expressway has a width of 3.6 m. per lane s<t \
R=3.SO m'
'r-
1,,/ = m ~ ....
with a design speed of 100 kph. It has a \
400 m. radius of central curve. Determine

the length of spiral if the difference In Solution:
grade between the centerline and edge of 0 =0.349 radians
travelwaY is limited to 1/200. Assume
friction factor f =0.12. 0 =0.349(180)
7t
Solution: · 0 =20'
D=vM:tth of one lane
L, =lenQth of spiral Lc =R0
e =super-elevation rate LC =350(0.349)
Lc = 122.15 m.
De 1
- -- Stationing of S.T.
L, 200
L, =De(200) =(105+40)+60+122.15 + 60
=(105 +40) +(2 +42.15)
R= v2 . =(107 +82.15)
127(f + e)
400 = (100)2
121(0.12 +·e) I
e =0.08 (super elevation rate)
,_~46 -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFF~':-
ENGl~-~-~RING ~
---------------- ------
---- ~
~ Design Speed and Sight Distance

~·~-_.... • \
Design speed =the maximum safe speed that can be maintained over a specified
section of 8
highway when conditions are so favorable that the design features of the
highway governs.
Stopping sight distance =the distance required to see an object 150 mm high on
the roadway. It
is intended to allow drivers to stop safely after sighting an object on the
roadway large enough to
cause damage to the vehicle or lost of control.
·~ Passin Si ht Distance on a Level Road Surface · · ··

·11
Passing Sight Distance =the sight distance long enough to enable a vehicle to
overtake and
pass another vehicle on a two-lane highway without interference from opposing
traffic.
Total passing sight distance: S =dt + d2 + dJ + d4
· where:
dt =the distance traversed during perception and reaction time and during the
initial acceleration to the
point of encroachment on the Jeff lane.
d2 =distance traveled while the passing vehicle occupies left Jane
dJ =distance between the passing vehicle al the end of its maneuver and the
opposing vehicle
d4 =distance traversed by opposing vehicle for two-thirds of the time the passing
vehicle occupies the
left lane or sometimes taken as 213 d2 ·
Opposing
vehicle appears
when passing
vehicle
Passing vehicle reaches
point A.
"·
~~~~ -
~...,~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ---·a't'! o~ ...-.-
Second phase
d,
Passing sight distance

Distance betwee
the end of Its ma~ the
Pitting vehicle at
vehicle =84 rn. euver •nd the
opposing
Solution:
, ,219 ___:_::..:.:------_...
The driver of the ove
wer/mass ratio passenger car down to the SPBed ,rtaklng
Vehicle A stows
A high ~cceleratlon lane at 48 kph and
.,.ttrs an to traffic lane at 70 kph. Estimate for a short time
duri~g :~hmov;ng vehicle B
1
""'9es ~ length of the acceleration lane
chances for overtaking. IC he
assesses his
_.,,the
th' del acceleration rate Is 3.4 m/s2•
so/Ufl!!.n
..- ~=-------------
- -Tr;;;~ _. :--:-- - -~1-70 kph
~
_. _ - Accd uation Lti=--™ - -~ - - --
ca::m COD -
48kph ,.. s ........ IC1D
-- -- -- --
~ __!___
.jA
V=~ = 13.33 mis
,
i-7--r-- - - - -
,,
2134,
. ,. _'J- -" __J
1 3.6
V, =speed of the overtaking
vehicle A
v=~
3.6
=19.44m/s V2 =Speed of slow moving
vehicle B
2 96
v, =l6 =26.67 mis
v2
2
=V2
1
+ 2a S
88
(19.44)2 =(13.33)2 + 2(3.4)S V2 = l6 =24.44 mis
S=29.4'm. At the moment, the driver
decides to overtake
V, =V2 =24.44m/ s
Passing Sight D~~tance .f d1 =Vt, , +~at

2
2
(Overtaking Distance) in a
d, =24.44(2.5) + i(2.4)(2.5)2
·• Two-Lane Hi hwa • '
d1 =68.60m
[ 2.280 Problem d2 =v2 t2
d2 =26.67(10.4) =277.37 m.
Compute the passing sight distance that d3 =84m.
vehicle A could move while overtaking the
slow moving vehicle B before meeting the d4 =3 d23
on-coming vehicle C.
2-
Spee(f of car A=96 'kph
d
4
=-3 (277.37) =184.91
Perception-reaction time =2.5 sec. Passing sight distcn;e :
~verage acceleration =2.4 m/sec2 s =d, +d2+d3 +d4
Time the passing vehicle occupies the left
lane= 10.4 sec. S
=6S.60+277.37+84+184.91=614.88 m.
248 ·- TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
- -- ------
---- ----- -~,
l 2.2a1 Problem Sight

Distance for Vertical
. . .
. . -.•- Curves ••-...
Compute the minimum passing sight
A. ,
For crest (su!11mit) vertical
distance for the following data: f//f·
curves. ,....,,_ _ ,..,_
Speed of the passing car = 90 kph

, Speed of the overtaken vehicle = 80 kph
a) WhenS<L
nme of Initial maneuver ::;, 4 sec.
- Average acceleration = 2.4 kph/sec.
Time passing vehicle occupies the left
lane= 9 sec.
Distance between the passing vehicle at
the end of its maneuver and the opposing
vehicle =80 m.
AS 2
L= . 2
Solution:
Opp<JJing •·rhic/r llp~ors
1(XJ(J2h: + %:)
M'hrn ptusinf( 1·rhlclr
reachn roint A.
Fiw phase "--5

b)
When S > L
,-, ,r.
s-4...!~'
h11
1::=--~1r1
,,
Passing sight distan<'C
200(Jh:+
L=2S -.- "'-------'--
F,f
A
Min. passing sight distance=~ d2 + d3 + d4
c}
When h1 = 1.08 m. and h2 =0.60 m.
2
butd =-d
AS 2 ·
4 3 2
L =- whenS<L
658
Min. passing sight distance = ~ d2 + d3
658
L= 2S - when S >L
d3 =distance between passing vehicle at the
A
end of its maneuver and opposing vehicle
d2 =Vt d)
L =KA
d = 90(1000)(9) =225
K = length of vertical curve in meters
z 3600 m.
for 1% change in grade
A= g1- 92
Min. passing distance = i(225) + 80
3
Min. passing distance = 380 m. e)
R =100 K
R =radius of parabolic curve

from the
<D When S< L

AS 2
lgn standards used in the L=---
~ oes . s
Phllipp1ne
120+ 3.5S
Sight Distance Driver Eye Object

Height (m) Height (m) <ID When S > L
Type
car Stopping 1.08 0.60 L= 2S_ 120+3.5S
Sight Distan.c~ A
Truck Stopping · 2.33 0.60
Sight Distance
Maneuver Sight 1.08 0.60 ® Comfort Criterion:
Distance . AV2
Passing Sight 1.08 1.08 L = 395
Distance .
car Headlight A=g2-g1 in%
to Road 0.60 0 V=design speed kph
Surface Sight
Distance L =length of vertical
curve
Truck to Car
Tail Sight 2.33 0.60
Distance · @ Appearance Criterion:
a) When V > 60 kph but
A < 2%
® California standards length of vertical L=60m
curves "L"
a) When design speed V < 60 kph
UseL= 60m b) When V < 60 kph
L= 60m
b) When grade breaks A =g1 - g2 is less
than 2%
c) When A< 2%
UseL =60m
L=60m
c) When V > 60 kph and grade
break> 2% d) When v> 60 and A>
2%
UseL =2V .L =2V
d) When V > 60 kph but grade
break< 2%
Usel =60m
250 -.TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
--- --- ----
L2.2a2 Problem
&
I AssumeS<L
A 5% grade intersects a • 3.4% grade at AS2

L=------
station 1 + 990 of elevation 42.30 m.
Design a vertical summit parabolic curve
100([2h, + f2h:f
connecting the two tangent grades to A= 9, • 92
conform with the following safe stopping
sight distance specifications. A= 5- (- 3.4)
Design velocity =60 kph A=8.4
Height of driver's eye from the road
2
L= (8.4)
(83.32)
pavement = 1.37 m.
Height of an object over the pavement
=
ahead 100 mm.
100(J2(1.37) +
'1.--2(0-.1-0) r
Perception-reaction time =% sec. L=131.92 m. > 83.32 ok as
assumed
Coefficient of friction between . the road
pavement and the tires = 0.15.
® Elevation of highest point of
curve:
<D Determine the stopping sight distance.
~ Determine the length of curve.
~ Determine the elevation of highest
point on curve.
Solution: -~-~- n: -
P.T.
CD Stopping sight distance: U2=65.96

I1256·'-53.---i
i - - - - - L =IJl.92- -
- -
S
1
=9 1 L
91 -g2
S=Vl+ v2
(f +G) s = 0.05(131.92)
1
6000 0.05 + 0.034
V=3600 =16.67 mis S1=78.52 m.
s = 16.67(~) + (16.67}2 H=
L
B (g, -92)
4 2(9.81)(0.15 + 0.05}
S =83.32m. H = 131.92(0.05 + 0.034)
8
H = 1.39
@ Length of curve:
y 1.39
= - -2
(53.4)~ (65.96)
y =0.91
Elev. of highest point
= 42.30 -
12.56(0.034) - 0.91
= 40.963m.
CD Compute the max. •Pttd of the
car that
can pass thru this curve
~ Compute the length of the
vertical
curve In meters for every 1%
change In
probl~e::,:_m_ _ _ __ grade.
~.is3 rest) curve has tangent ~ Compute the equivalent radius
of the
vertical curve.
ftica I Surnrnlt (c
nd a •1·0% grade for a
A"' of +0.5~ a ovlde a stopping sight
grad'which wwll pr Height driver's eye Solution: .
(oad ce of 190 rn.t Is 1 07 m and the CD Max. speed of the car
difta: the pave~!:Ct ahe~d is 0.15 m.
0 Assume S > L
abO"ht of the .j m length of a crest
200(F, + F,f
hel9 ute the rnin1mu design speed of
cornP curve for a
1
"'rti"
100 kph. L =2 S· ------A--
A= 9, • 92
A =2.8 - (-1.6)
A=4.4% > 2%
200(v'l08 +
JQSr
A=g, - 92
L =2(130) - .
44
A=0.0.5- (-1) L=121.38m. ok8Sassumed
200 ( .Jiiii + JQ15f L=2V
L=2 (1~)- 1.5 121.38 = 2 v
L=110.5m ok .S>L
v=60.69 lrph
Check :
Check for Appearance Criterion :
Grate break =1.5% < 2% V > 60, and A> 2°k
Usel . =60m. L=2V

llS1
® .Length of the vertical curve

in meters for
every 1%change in grade
Sight Distance for Vertical
L=KA
. ..... Summit Curves - ·
121.38 = K(4.4)
[2.294 Problem I K = 27.59m
A vertical parabolic curve has a sight @ Equivalent radius of the

vertical curve
distance of 130 m. The curve has tangent
Qrades of +2.8% and ·1.6%. If the height of R = 100 K
the driver's eye from the pavement Is 1.08 R= 100(27.59)
"'· and the height of the object Is 0.50 m., R = 2759m.
. --- -- - -
-- - - - - - ----·:;,..._ !
Passing Sight Distance for Headlight Sight

Distance
Crest (Summit). (Stopping Sight
Distance)
• Vertical Curve 1
·• for Sag Vertical
Curve "
I2.285 Problem ) DPWH requirements:

Headl~ght height=
0.60 m
Compute the .length of vertical curve that
will provide passing sight distance for a
A one-degree upward
divergence of the light
design speed of 100 kph at the Intersection
beam is used in
computing the length of the
of+ 1.40 %grade with a - 0.60 % grade.
sag vertical curves.
Solution:
v2 <D When S < L
S=Vt+--
(f + G) AS2
L=---
6000 120+3.SS
V= =16.67 m's
3600
s = 16.67(~) + {16.67)2
4 2(9.81)(0.15 + 0.05) ~. When S>L
S =83.32m. 1
L= 2 S _[ 120 :3.5
S]
I 2.286 Problem
where:
L=length of sag
curve
Compute the minimum length of yertical S =the distance
between the vertical and
curve that will provide 190 m. stopping point where the
one degree upward
sight distance for a design speed of 11 O single of the
light beam intersects the
kph at the intersection of a + 3.5% grade surface of the
roadway or stopping
and a-2.70o/o gcade. sight distance
A= algebraic
difference in grades in(%)
Solution:
Using appearance criterion.
V>60kph ~ Comfort criterion
A>2%
AV 2
Usel=2V L= -
395
L=2 (110) where:
L=220m. L =length of s~g
curve
Use L=220m. A= algebraic
difference in grades in (%}
where V= 110 kph V =max. velocity of
vehicle passing thru
A =3.5 - (- 2.70) the sag curve in
kph
A= 6.2%
Note: For small total grade
change can be
sharp to cause discomfort
without violating ·
iJ.81 sight distance standards. AASHTO
inimum length of a sag suggest a comfort standards
which is
ter"'1ne th•~n 8 - o.7'1• grade and
~cal curv~e for a road with 110 kph AV2
equalto L=-
+ o.5 gra The vertical curve must 395
:,.ign sf>eed· headlight sight distance. where: A= g2-g1 %
pro~1de 220 m. V =design speed in kph
. n· Note: Appearance criterion

solflfiO .S<L
Assum8
AS
2 ® When V =110 kph> 60 kph
Grade break = 1.2% < 2%
L= 120+3.5s Use Lmin =60 m.
A= 92 -9,
@ When V < 60 kph
A=0.5-(- 0.7) Grade breaks < 2%
Use L.m=60m.
A= 1.2
2
1.2 (220) © When V =100 kph> 60 kph
L::: 120 + 3.5 (220) Grade brakes > 2%
Use L =2V
L=65.3m
Therefore, use L =60 m.
But S> L nci ol<
Try S>L
L=25- (
120 + 3.5
A
s) I2.288 Problem
. Compute the minimum length of

vertical
· 120 + 3.5( 220) sag curve that will provide 130 m.
stopping
L =2(220 ) - --~-'- sight distance for a design speed
of 80 kph
1.2
at the Intersection of a ·2.30% and
a +4.8%
L=-301.7 m grade.
Since L<0, no vertical curve is needed to
Solution:
provide stopping sight distance. Assume S<L
<D Comfort criterion A= 4.8- (- 2.30)
L=-
AV2 A=7.1
395 AS2
2 L=---
L= 1.2(110) 120+3.SS
395 L= 7.1(130)
2
L =36.76m. 120 + 3.5(130)

L =208.68 ok as assumed
-
254 . . . TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
. - -- -· ------
. --- -- ------ .
- ~~-
Check for~ criterion: Using comfort criterion

for sag curve.
V=80>60kph AV 2
L=-
Gr00e5 brakes 7.1 > 2% 395
Usel=2V ·L= 5 (1(X>r
L =2(80) 395
L= 160m. L =126.58 m.
Check for comfort criterion: Assume S < L
AV 2 AS 2
L=- L=---
395 120 + 3.5S
2
L = 7.1(80) L= ·5 (100)2
395
120 + 3.5 (100)
L=115.04 m
L =229.94 m. ok as assumed
Use L = 115.04 m.
Use L =126.58 m.
Stopping Sight Distance for

~SagCurves '~
~ Sig~t Distance for •
1
- Honzontal Curves
f 2.289 Problem
CD When S < L
Compute the minimum length of vertical
curve that will provide 190 m. stopping
sight distance for a design speed of 100
kph at the intersection of a - 2.6% grade
and a + 2.40o/o grade. ·
Solution: \
I
v= 100kph >60kph , , r-M' ,'

'
'
/ (\
\
\
,'R
,,
, ,
, ~
R ' ',
\\el ,'R
A= 92 -g,
. . . . ', l,' , ""'
I ,""
........, 1,,'
A =2.6 - (- 2.4)
A=S
S = sight distance
Using appearance criterion
l = length of curve
V>60kph
(AC)2 =M2 + (AD)2
A>2%
(AD)2 = R2 - (R - M)2
Therefore L =2 V
· (AD)2 = R2 - (R2 - 2 RM
+ M2)
L=2(100) =200m. (AD) 2 = 2 RM - M2
::•+
+i
(A0)2 =d2 + R2 - R2 + 2 RM - M2
(A0)2 =d2 + 2 RM - M2
(AC)2=(AD)2 + M2
·'
(AC)2=d2+ 2 RM • M2 + M2
52 (AC)2 =d2 + 2 RM
lf=iR (S-
(AC)2= T L)2 +2RM
M=clear distance from center of roadway
. to the obstruction
5 = sight distance along the center of Let AC =2
s
roadway -
R=radius of center - line curve
L =length of curve
~ 2
- {S - L) 2 RM
4 - 4 +
0 =degree of curve
R-M S2 =S2 - 2 SL + L2 + 8 RM
eos0=R 8 RM =2 SL.- L2
R-M =RCos0
M=R-RCos 0
M=R (1 - Cos 0) M-- L(2S
SR
• L}
® When S > L
A highway curve has a radius of 80 m and

a
length of 90 m. If the-required sight
distance is
6P m, how far off the center of the road
could
you allow the bushes to grow?
Solution:
L+ 2d =S
S-L
d
- -2-
52
(AC)2 =(AD)2 + M2 R=-
8m
(AD)2 =(A0)2 - (R - M)2 (60)2
=
(A0)2 (AE)2 + R2
80=-
Bm
(AD)2 =(AE)2 + R2 - (R - M)2 m =5.625 meters
25
6 -TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
·~ ·
-=========================---------------;;;;;;;
=--
[ 2.291 Problem 52
I M=-
BR
The clearance to an obstruction is 40 m. and 52
the desirable sight distance when rounding a 58
• =8(120)
horizontal curve is 600 m. Determine the
minimum radius of horizontal curve if the 5 =74.62 m < L
(Use smallest Sfor design
length of curve is 550 m. long.
speed
of cars utilizing the road)
Solution:
v2
5 =Vt + 2g( f + G)
74.62 =V(2.5) +
2(9.81)(0.35 + 0)
v + 11.17V- 512.42
=o
2
V =15.62 rrJs
M=L(25-L)
v=15.62(3.6)
BR v=56.25/cph
R=L(25-L) ,
BM
R =550(2(600)-SS()J
,, 8(40) .~~ Earthworks ~
R= 1117.19m.
Areas of Cross-
Section Notes
·i~- of an Earthworks
. _
fL2_._2_92_.~P-~_o_b_le_m~~~·--~J. 2.293
Problem
A building is located 5.8 m. from the ce~terline
of the inside lane of a curve section of Given the cross-
section notes of an
earthwc;>rks for the
proposed extension of
highway with 120 m. radius. The road is level.
NLEX.
Perception-reaction time is · 2.5 se?. and
coefficient of friction is 0.35. Determine the
STA.10+100
appropriate speed limit in kph considering the Left
Center Right
stopping sight distance.
4.5
6.45
0
Solution: +2.3
+1.5 +1.0
<D Compute the side

slope S of the
section.
(2) Compute the width
of road base.
 Compute the area of
the cross-section.
~n: of the section
[ 2.294 Proble111
side siope
.]
The follOWlng notes are for ""9ular Cf011.
leCtlon. Compute the c'°'l1actlona1 area.
Width
of 1:2. Of fOldway IS 12111. Vftth Side
slopes
~ +2.35=6.45
2 ------
C2.87 C3.33 CUo C2.83 C2.33 C1.17
11.34 8.00 4.00 0 5.00 9.34
B
-+ 5 =4.5 Solution:
~ 1.35=1.95
5=1.5
® Width of road base
~ +S=4.5
1.67
2
~ +1.5=4.5
2
\
8=6m.
A= (2.83; 2.33) (S) + (2.33; 1.67) (4.34)
@ Area of the cross-section 3.34(1.67) + (4 + 2.83) (4)

2 ,2
(8 +2.67) . 2.67(5.34)
+ 2 (3.34) - 2
A= 43.14m1
[ 2 •295 Problem
3(2.3) 1.5(6.45) + 1.5(4.5) + ~
A=2+ 2' 2 2
A= 13.16m2 The cross-1~on:2
. I area of a road with
9 square meters. The
width o!c!~:, •:rea is as follows:
cross-s
9.8 ! .
74
2.4 x 1.2
Determine the value of x.
~.~.z;~;----
258 . ,TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC
EN~INEERING
- -- - - - -
-
Solution:
f 2.297
Problem
Find the area of

the given cros1-sect1on If
the width of
roadway is 12 m.
Left Center Right
9.8 0 11.2
3.2 2.8 4.21

A =A1 + A2 + A3 + ~
42.9 =%(5)(2.4)+ Yz(x)(9.8)+ Yz(x)(7.4)+Yz(1.2) Solution:
x=+3.U
3.2
I.2.296 CE Board Nov. 2016
A particular station has the •following

earthwork cross-section. A= %(6)(3.2) + %(2.8)
(9.8) + %(2.8)(11.2)
9.0 4.5 +2.0 4.5 x
+ %(6)
(4.21)
y +4.0 +2.0 +1.0
If the width of the road base is 9 m. and the A= 51.63 m2
side slopes are 1V:1.5H, the quantity of x
and y is equal to:
Solution:
12.298 . CE Board Nov'.
2016 J
Given the following
cross-section notes for
a road grading work:
Slope I: 1..5
~-_,,......_ I -3.2
+ 1.2 + 1.2 + 2.8
I
2.0 ;
:r.o x,
O 3.5 x2
1-----..i---..i-----..J-!-~-----, The road bed is 9 m wide
and the side
4.5 4.5 4 .5 a 1
- - - slope for cut is 1:1 and
for fill is 1.5:1.
x
Determine the area of
cut of the section.
~= 1.5
1.0 1.0 Solution:
a= 1.5
x =4.5 +a
x=6 I
9.3-a
~·~
-
-
1:---- _
~=:;=t::=:::f:'::L.~
-i5--;_::
3.21 : I
3.S 1.0 2.8
y 1.0
---
4.5 1.5 '
I
3.8
4.8- -
4-:s·- "'---,-
4 .s= --_.J
-
y=3 Zt
=9.3 m
9.3 h, · 4
2
a =~12+3
i1. . .2 12 + 2~
=12
~2.54 m 6h, • 24
=12 + 2h,
a
9.3•a=6.76 m 4h, =36
.. !(1.96)(3.2) =3.136 m 2
h, =9 m.
At .. 2
12 2 8 h,. ht
2
:; !(2.54)(1.2) + 3.5(1.2) + · ; · (3.8)
A- 2 2hl + 12 +
2h, =12
1 9. hl
1
• -(2.8)(2.8)
2 2hl + 12 +
18 =6
A°' :: 9."'4 m' 54 • 6hl =2
hl + 30
8hl·= 24
~-9--P_r_o_b_le_m_____ ~J
§_ _ _ _
ht= 3 m.
,_ highway fill at stations 5 + 040 has a

uniform ground slope. It has a side slope
of 2: 1 and width of roadway Is 12 m. Find
the area of sta. 5 + 040.
STA. 5+ 040
.4 .5
-11 -6 -0 -·66 ?
? A =(3 + 9)
(36} §@} 18(91
1 2
• 2 - 2
A1=126m2
Solution:
STAS+ 040
I 2.300
Problem
i
i.
::::>
The cross
section notes of the ground
surf~ce at sta.
1. + 200 of a road survey,
12 shows that the
ground is ~loping at a 10%
. ~2 grade downward
to the right. The elevation
of the ground
along the center line of the
12 + 2hr
proposed road
at this station Is 150 m. and
~hr4 that of the
finished subgrade Is 152 m.
Width of
subgrade Is 7.00 m. with side
2h1.+12 + 2hr slopes of 1.5 :
1. Compute the distance of
the right slope
stake frOm the center of the
road.
.....
=-
Solution:
CD Rod reading for grade at
station 5 + 100
R =54.35 - 55.03
R =• 0.68 m. (fill)
® Rod reading =0. 78 m.

Elevation of ground= 55.03-
0.78
Elevation of ground =53.57 m.
hr· 2 10
3.5 + 1.5 hr = 1oo = 0.10
Amount of fill = 55.03 - 53.57
=1.46 m.
hr · 2=0.35+0.15hr ® True distance from the center

0.85 hr= 2.35 hr= 1.35 + 0.68 = 2.03 m
hr= 2.76 Dr= 6 + 5hr
Distance of right slope stake = 3.5 + 1.5 hr Dr= 6 + 5(2.03)
Dr = 7.105 m. which is less
than 10.05 m
Distance of right slope stake =3.5 + 1.5(2.76)
Distance of right slope stake = 7.64 m. Therefore, the point should
be moved
towards the center of the
roadway.
12.301 Problem 6m 6m
Elti·.=55.03
A roadway had a base of 12 m and side

slopes %:1. At station 5+100, the elevation
of the proposed grade is 55.03 m. and the
H.I. is 54.35 m.
10.0S
© What is the rod reading for grade at 10.05 =6 + 5hr

station 5+100? 10.05 =6 +0.50(hr)
~ If the rod held at the surface of the I 0.50 hr:: 4.05
ground reads 0.78 m, what is the
amount of cut or fill at his point?
hr= 8.10 m.
~ In setting a_slope stake a total distance
from the center of roadway is 10.05 m. El~vation at a point 10.05
m. away from
and the rod reading at this point is 1.33 the center of the roadway,
having a side
m. Should the point be moved towards slope of Yz:1 is equal to:
or away from the roadway? What is the Elevation =55.03 - 8.10
=46.93 m.
amount of cut or fill at this point?
But the elevation of point B
=54.35 - 1.35 = 53.00
m.
Therefore, the amount of cut
at this point
=53.00 - 46.93 =6.07
m.
(1) End•'-llethOd
,,02 problem J V- ~1 + A2) L

- 2 -
' rtng Battalion of the Phil. Army
fh• Engl': 8 road of the vicinity of
cOftltrUct The width of the road at the
,.,guindana~~I Is 20 m, with side slopes of
fOl1'1ation ~: and 1:2 for fill. The original
1:1 for c nsverse to the center of the road
ground tra of 1 5 If the depth of excavation
slope ··
has • enter of the section is 0.80 m,
at the c the eccentricity of the centroid of
computei
tht area n cut measured from the centerline
of the road.
solution:
(2) Prlsmoldal Formula
0.80 - 1
7-5
x=4m.
h, - .! L
Vp =6(A1 + 4 A.rt + AiJ
h1 + 14 5
h1 =3.5
A.rt =area of mid-section
AD= 1(14) = 7
00=7-4=3 (3) Volume with Prismoldal
Correction:
(Applicable only to three
level section~
e =3+ j-(10.5)
e =6.5 m. from the center
-------~
ENGINEERING"
-
-- -., I
---- -- -- -- -- - - - - - - - - -----
-----
V=Ve - Vcp
Ve = volume by end area
j ~303 CE Board
No.!• 20!!)
Vcp = prismoidal correction The areas In cut of two

irregular •ectioot
L 65 m. apart are 36 sq.m.
and 72 sq.111
Vcp = 12 (C1 - C2) (01 - 02) respectively. Base width
Is 10 m., 1~
slope of 3H: 2V. Using
prisoldal correction
formal, find the
corrected volume of cut In
(4) Volume with curvature correction cu.m. between the two
stations.
Soludon:
JO+JC
10
t
e1 = D1 (positive if the excess area is
~·--
J...,.-
0 -~
away from the center of curve)
e1 =t D1 (negative ifthe excess area
Vol. of end area :
is towards the center of curve)
v, = ( 36; 72 }65)
e2 = ~2 (positive if the excess area is
VE =3510 m3
away from the center of curve)
e2. = T . 1'f the excess area ts.
D2 (negatJVe A= ( 10 + 3~, + 10) (C,)
towards the center of curve)
(A1 + A2} L A=36
VE= 2
(20 + 3C1 )C 1 = 71
Ve = 2~ (As1 et·+ As2 e2} 3C 12 + 2oc1 - 11 = o
R-
- 1145.916
(curvature correction)
c:+6.67C - 24= 0
1
D
c, =2.591
Vol.= VE+ Ve
-- ~-~- ---~- - - - - - - - - - - --====
-p:i;Ns-PO~_TATl~_N &!R~FFI(: ENGINEERING_:__
. 2 -6 3-
----
10+3Ca+10)c Solution:
1-= ( - 2 2 CD Width of base:
(2X72) =(20 +3C2 )C2

.. .....
Z + 2(}C • 144 : 0
.. ....
3C2 2 ...
.......
.......
C! +6.67C2 • 48 =0
c2 :4.35
pnsmoidli c;orredion :
l
r--- - -D2=13.S- - - --
V =~ (C, - C2)(D, - 02)
FC 12
v =~ [(2.591 - 4.35)(17.n - 23.0S)]
FC 12
vFC =50.307
V-V
- E
-VFC
v=3510- 50.307
B
6.3 = 2.2S+
2
V=3459.69 mJ
B
1.2 = 2.as+ 2
0.9 = 0.6 s
~=·3=04~P_ro_b_l_em__~~~~-J-
~
S= 1.5
B
6.3 = 2.2(1 .5) + 2
From the given cross section of an B= 6m.
earthworks betWeen A (20 + 200) and B (20
+220) assuming both have same slope and ® Value of cut at station B:
width of base. 2.2(3) 6.3x 7.2(x) 2.8(3) _
STA.A 2 + 2 + 2 +2 - 16.82
-
. 6.60
+2.4
-+2.0
0 4.8
+1.2
6.75x = 9.32
x =1.38 m.
STA. B
7.2 @ Volume using Prismoidal
correction:
6.3
-
+2.2
0
?
-+2.80 2.4(3) 6.6(2) 4.8(2) 1.2(3)
A1 = 2 + 2 + 2 + 2
© Compute the width of the base. A1 =16.80 m2
~ Compute the value of cut at station B if (A1 + A2) L
It has an area of 16.82 m2• VE= 2
~ Compute the volume between A and B (16.80 + 16.82)(20)
with Prismoidal Correction. VE=
2
VE= 336.20
L
Vp =12 (C1. Ci) (01. DV
20
Vp =12(2·1.38)(11.40 -13.5)
Vp=·2.17
V= VE· Vp
v=336.20 • (2.17)
Side slope =1.5 : 1
Cut
V=338.37 cu.m.
u.o +37.54) (9.18}
L2.305 P.-oblem J A= 2
A= 218.21 sq.m.
In determining the position of the balance
line In the profile diagra.m, a horizontal CD Volume of cut:
grade line Is drawn such that the length of vc =218.21 (850)
the cut Is 850 m. and that ·of fill ls ·1200 m. Ve= 185,500 cu.m.
The profile area between the ground line
and the grade line in the cut Is 7800 sq.m.
while that of fill is 8500 sq.m. If the road .-i--- 8:- -1..
14.1
bed is 10 m. wide for cut and 8meters wide .,
for fill and if the side slope for cut is 1.5 : 1 .
while that for fill is 2 : 1. !7.08
Assume a level section with an average

value of cut and fill for each stretch.
<D Determine the volume of cut.

(Z Determine the volume of fill.
.
Side slope =2 : 1
Fill
~ If tpe shrinkage factor is 1.2, determine
· the volume borrow or waste.
- (8 + 36.32) (7.08}
A- 2 .
Solution:
Average depth of cut: A =156.89 sq.m.
® Volume of fill:
Vt= 156.89 (1200)
Vt= 1,8,000 cu.m.
C -- ~
850 @ Volume of borrow.
C=9.18 m. Vol. of borrow = 188000
(1.2) -185500
Averagedepth of fill: Vol. of borrow =40100 cu.m.
8500
f =1200
f =7.08
1
~p~r~o_b_le_rn
___________........ 91=3 (D1)
~,,06 -
fill stretch•• between stations 1
91=3 (36)
~ hlOh~d 5 + 140 with a uniform ground
5• OAO h•S 8 side slope of 2 : 1 and width 91 =- 12 (neg· towsrds the center of
curve)
11
~y1s12m.
Area Dz:=4;,---___,
126m2
206.75 m2
1
'"
~~,_,.....26_ 24
··--
·---··--···
...~
12
rn ute the curvature correction between
co ~ stations if the road Is on a 5 degree
:• , which tums to the right of the cross
11
.,ctiOn• In cu.m.
As2 = 206.75 - [ 6 (4.5)
2 + 7 (15)]
2
(2)
As2 =74.75 m2
1
e2 =3 02
1
. ~=3(45)
e2 = - 15 (neg. towards the center of

curve)
R =1145.916 ,
D
- 1145.916
solution: R- 5 = 229 rri.
V. L .
c = 2R (As1 e1 + As2 e2)
100 .
Ve= 2 (229) [(48)(-12) + 74.75 (-15))
Ve =· 370.58 m3
As1 =126 - [ 6 2
(J) + §.fill]
2 (2)
As1=48 m2 .
-
_ _ _ __ & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
-
- - - - - - -- -- -
-- - - - --- -- --~ --
-
Finished Grade of Roadway J 2.308

C! Board Nov. 201!]
( 2.307 CE Bo~rd May 2008 J From station A

with center h8'ght of 1.4 rn.
In fill, the
ground makes a uniform slope Of
5% to station B
Whose center height Is 2.8
The center height of the road at sta. 7 + 110 m. In cut.
Assuming both sections to bt
Is 2 m. fill while at sta. 7 + 160 it Is 1.2 m. level sections
having a width of roadway Of
cut From sta. 7 + 110 to the other station 14 m. and side
slope of 2:1 for both cut Ind
the ground makes a uniform slope of 4.8%. fill, compute
the cross-sectlonal area of cut
48 m. from sta.
A. Distance from sta. A to
<!> Compute the slope of the new road.
~ Find the distance In meters from
sta. B Is 60 m.
station 7 + 110 in which the fill is Solution:
extended.
Grvi.nd
~ Compute the stationing of the point
Fin1JJ.,d 5% \
where the fill ls extended.
Solution:
7+160
60-.r=40
'
14 '
I
d=l .96: I
3.92
14 3.92
CD Slope of the new road:
21 .84
0.8
SIope = = 0.016
50 By ratio and
proportion :
~ =60 - x
® Distance in which the fill is extended: 1.4 2.8
0.048x = 1.2 + 0.016(50 - x) 2.Bx =84 - 1.4x
0.064x =2 x=20m.
x =31.25
28 40
® Stationing of the point where the fill is d 2.8
extended: d =1.96
Sta.= (7 + 110) + (31 .25)
Sta. = 71 + 141.25 A_ (14 + 21.84)
- 2 (1.96)
A= 35.123 sq.m.
f-~ANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING -
267 .
I - ----= - -
---
""- ....
~9 Problem ] A= {14.60
+ 9) (1.40)
2
; station 0 + 040, with center height of =
A 16.52
sq.m. (fill)
f';o m. fill, the ground line makes a
1· lfOrm slope of 5% to station 0 + 100, A= (10 +
18.40) (2.8)
~ose center height Is 2.80 m. cut.
2
Afsume both sections to be level sections A= 39.76
sq.m. (cut)
with side slopes of 2 : 1 for fill and 1.5 : 1
@ Volumes of
cut and fill:
torcut. •
© Find the grade of the finished road
surface.
" Find the area at each station.
~ By end area method, find the amount of
cut and fill.
® eetween these two stations, Is it
bOrroW or waste?
Roadway for fill Is 9.00 m. and for cut It
is 10.00 m.
Solution:
<D Slope of roadway:
jinisht'd roadway
1.40
!O.OSx
.............. ........................................ j
1.40- 0.02
x = 0.05 x
- 1.20
0.07x=1 .40
Slope of roadway = 60
Slope of roadway= • 2% (downward) x= 20
60-x=40
® Area at each station:
:- -- 9.0-- --t--2.s'
L
Vol. of
fill= 2(A1 + A2)
:1.40
i
20
Vol. of
fill= 2 (16.52 + 0)
i . -- -14.F.ll-- -__,
Station 0 + 040 Vol. of
fill= 165.20 cu.m.
L
Vol. of
cut =2(A1 + Ai)
40
Vol. of
cut= 2 (39.76 ~ 0)
Station 0 +100 Vol. of

cut= 795.20 cu.m.
268 . . TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING '.
- - --- -· -
- - -=--
© Since the volume of cut is excessive than Limits of Free Haul

and ..
the volume of fill, it is then necessary to ' Economical Haul
__,
throw the excess volume of cut as waste
by an amount equal to
795.20 - 165.20 = 63.00 cu.m.
j 2.311 CE Board
May 201s]
The grading works of a

proposed National
road shows the following
data.
=
FHD 50 m.
=
LEH
450 m.
j 2.310 Problem =
Cost of haul P0.25 per
meter station
Compute the cost of borrow.
The ground makes a uniform slope of 5.2%
from STA 8 + 890 to Station B. At STA 8 + Solution:
890, the center height of the roadway is cc
4.13 m fill. At the other station, the center LEH= -L +FHD
height is 7.57 m cut. If the finish road has a c"
uniform grade of - 2.6%, what is the
stationing of B? 450 = Cb(20) + 50
0.25
Solution: Cb =PS.00
f 2.312 Problem
]
The cross-sectional area of
station 2 + 210
8 +890 is 40 m2 in fill and at
station 2 + 810 is 60
m2 in cut. The free haul
distance is 100 m.
The balancing point is at
station 2 + 510.
0.052L = 7.57 + (4.13 - 0.026L}
The ground surface is sloping
upward from
0.078L =7.57 + 4.13 station 2 + 210 to station 2
+ 510 and also
L = 150 uniformly upward from station
2 + 510 to
station 2 + 810. Determine
the stationing
H +H
Formula: L = cur Fu (along _fill) of the limits
of free haul.
Ggroooc1 - Gmed
L = 4.13 + 7.57 Solution:
0.052 - (-0.026)
L =150
Sta. of B =8 + 890·+ 150
2+210
Sta. of B =9 + 040
40
JOO
300
END AREA$ (Mh
CUT
"'I .
1+ooo
FILL
1 +os2
40
1 +.212
33
1+300 0
3.021
1+322
(Balancing PC>int)
3.845
1+502 40.18
1 +600 60
Assume the ground
.
uniformly from one e~::cthe to
be •loping
e
other end.
()) Determine the overhaul volu
~ Determine the volume of bo me.
~ Determine the volume of .,
•.
wa;:w·
Solution:
~ =_!_ (100 - x) 2
<D Overhaul volume:
15 10
f2x=100-x
13 .
0.8165X =100- X
x= 55.05
stationing of limits of free haul along the fill
=(2 + 510)- 55.05
= 2+454.95
Overhaul volume= (3·845 +
40.18)(180)
2
Overhaul volume = 3962.25
~.313 Problem
40
® Vofume of waste= ( ·18 +
60U98l
The grading works of the portion of the
2
proposed expansion, of the North
expressway shows the following notes. Volume of waste =4908.82
cu.m.
Free haul distance = 50 m. Limit of
economical haul 450 m.= (33 +40) 52
® Volume of borrow = 2
Limits of free haul distance is from
Volume of borrow =1898
cu.m.
sta. 1 + 272 to 1 + 322.
Limits of economical haul is from
sta. 1 + 052 and 1 + 502
i. -I
e '=6t{i.J6UIZl118
12.31_4 Problem J
From the mass diagram shown of an
earthworks, the following data were Solution:
computed as follows: <D Volume of waste:
Free haul distance =60 m.
Cost of borrow• P10/m3
Overhaul =PS.00 per meter station
Compute the cost of overhaul.
~:
'
'
+200, LEH=400m
78m
()+(JOO :
'
Solution: '
'
-80
Cost of overhaul :
·130
Overhaul vol. =2000(78 - 60) + 1000(80 - 60)
+ 19Q0(66- 60) + 2000(68- 60)
3 Volume of waste = 200 +
80
Overhaul vol. =78000 cni
Volume of waste = 280
m3
78000(5)
Cost of overhaul = = P19500
. . 20
® Volume of borrow:
Volume of borrow = 200
+ 130
I2.315 Problem Volume of borrow = 330
m3
The following are the data on a simple @ Overhaul volume:

summit mass diagram. Overhaul volume = 600 -
200
STA MASS ORDINATE (m3) Overhaul volume = 400
m3
0+000 • 80
o+soo • 130 © Length of overhaul:
Initial point of limit of freehaul 192,~ = '120(400) x
distance =+600 20
Initial limit of economic haul = +200 x= BOm.
Freehaul distance = 60 m.
Limit of economical distance = 400 m.
Cost of haul= P120 per cu.m per meter
station.
-
~ 6 Proble~
~~~----___..
J ® Length of overhaul:
le summit mass diagram from cbc
A sing 0 + 1oo to O+ 800 of a proposed
0
LEH= c;;- + FHD
statl " 1on of Santander Highway. Has the
exte~~ng technical data. 450 = 500 (20} + 50
fOllO'" ch
ordinate of the Initial limit of Ch= P25 per cu.m. /meter
station
:::omical distance =+600 m3
free haul distance =50 m.
Total cost of haul=
P105750.00
Limit of economical haul = 450 m.
cost of borrow =PSOO per cu.m. 105750 =25 {LJJ400}
Mass ordinate of station 0 + 100 =· 80 m3
L=211.50 m.
Mass ordinate of station 0 + 800 =· 130 m3
<D compute the overhaul volume in cu.m.

~ compute the length of ove~aul in
meters If the total cost of hauling is @ Totai cost of borrow:
P105,750.00 Vol. of borrow = 200 + 130
~ Compute the total cost of borrow.
Vo{ of borrow= 330 m3
Solution: Cost of borrow= 330 (500)

\
G) Overhaul volume: Cost of borrow= P165,000
F.H.D.-SOm
+200 - - - L--....;.L....;..
EH_=4_5_0_ _-\
·80
-130
Overhaul volume = 600 - 200

Overhaul volume =400 m3
Ports and Harbor
t!s: n
The basic criteria to be

considered in
developing a proposition as to
the roles of a
country's ports may b e
classified into the
following four groups:
Harbor
<D The national and regional
development
policies of the country
® The transpo'rtation
infrastructure of the
hinterland and its prospects
@ Existing port capacity and
potential for
development
© Cargo forecasts for each port
C()(L!tal
Lint ~
-- ") Busiest Ports in the World

~ (as of 2013) ._..,.
Wharf Harbor
" Rank Port
Country
P ort
/ Facilities 1 Shanghai
China
2 Singapore
Singapore
3 Shenzhen
China
4 Hong Kong
Hong Kong
B. Artificial Harbor 5
South
Busan
Korea
Ningbo-
6
China
Zhoushan
7 Qingdao
China
8 Guangzhou
China
United Arab
9 Dubai
Emirates
10 Tianjin
China
l-_
·-· • ' - w ..... - - --
Problem ~f3_A
_______P_r_~b_l_e_m~-----:J
Harbors can be broadly classified as:

Generally the width of the harbor entrance
should
be__ -
I. Natural harbors
II. Semi-natural harbors
a) 30m
Ill. Artificial harbors a-
b) between 0.7 - 1.0 times the
IV. Commercial harbors
length of the design ship
c) between 2 - 6 times the beam of

B'" a} I, II and Ill only
the design ship

d) 50m
d) All of the above
_f3_._2____P_ro_b_le_m
_________ J
I 3.s
Problem
J
The
maximum current velocity through the
A port is a harbor in which terminal harbor
entrance should not exceed
facilities are provided. The different types
of ports are as follows: a)
2.5 mis or 4 knots
I. Ocean port ~ b}
1.5 mis or 3 knots
II. Inland port c)
3 mis or 5 knots
Ill. Entry port
d)
1 mis or 1.5 knots
IV. Free port

c)
~ d}
II, Ill and IV only
All of the above
f 3.6
Problem
1
The
stopping distance of a ship will
depend on
factors such as ship speed the
·
displa~ement and shape of the hull, 'and
I 3.3 Problem horsepower
ratio. The stopping distance of
a loaded
ship _ _
The harbor entrance sh,ould, if possible, be

a)
100m
located on the_ of the harbor.
b)
150m
a) windward end c)
10 to 12 times the ship's length
b) outer end ~ d)
7 to 8 times the ship's length
~ c} leeside
d) innerend
-
poRTS AND HARBOR .

~------
:: : ::
: J#i]
~ Problem ( 3.10
Problem
~---:..;:..:.------
l
For harbor basins, the
width required to
more than one ship has to be permit a ship to swing
freely into a berth is
Wh'" modated along the berth, a _ for berths at 90'.
accom ce length of should be \
ctearan - h' a) 1.5 times

the length of the ship
provided between the adjacent s 1ps.
Q'> b) 2 times
the length of the ship
a) 20 m c) 8 times
the beam of the ship plus
b) 40 m 30m.
c) 60m d) 6 times
the beam of the ship plus
~ d) 0.1 times the length of the 180m.
largest ship
f 3.11
Problem
'
The safety distance
between two moored
@.& Problein · tankers or moored tanker
and a passing
ship, will depend upon the
overall layout of
For a single-berth pier, the clear water area the harbor, the number of
tugboats
between two piers should be _ to allow ~ssisting in the berthing
or anberthlng
for tugboat assistance. operation, the
environmental conditions
and the population of in
the area.
The safety distance between
a moored oil
~ a) 2 times the beam of the largest
tanker and a passing ship
shall be:
ship plus 30 m.
b) 2 times the beam of the largest a) from 30 -
50 m.
ship pfus 50 m. I& b) from 50-
150 m.
c) 200 m c) from 150 -
200 m.
d) 2 times the length of the ship plus d) from 50-
100 m .
30m.
Problem
\ 3.9 Problem The si~e of water area for

anchorages will
therefore primarily depend
on the number,
type and size of ships,
which require
For harbor basins, the Width required to·
protection and the type of
mooring system
permit a ship to swing freely into a berth Is
available.
_for berths at 45'.
The water depth at an
anchoring area
should preferably
not exceed
~ a) 1.5 times the length of the ship approximately __ due to the
length of
b) 2 times the length of the ship the anchor chain of the
ship. The bottom
c) · 8 times the beam of the ship plus condition must not be too
hard, otherwise
30m. the anchor will be dragged
along the
d) 6 times the beam of the ship plus bottom and not dig into the
sea bottom
180 m. - a) 30 - 50 m.
c) 25 - 50 m
itij> b) 50- 60 m.
d) 60 - 80 m.
Waves, Wind, and Tides · 13.17 Problem
- G
An Instrument use to
measure the intensity
f 3.13 Problem of wind.
Waves continue to grow after they reach a a) Buchanan's
scale
velocity equal to _ but at a decreasing b) Fiboracci scale
rate. Energy losses from friction, transfer B' c) Beuforts scale
of energy into currents and the d} Antwerp scale
development of white caps means the
wave will not grow until the wave speed
reaches the wind speed. The wind speed is
146 kph.
f 3.18 Problem
A wave generated in deep
water, When
J
a) 36.5 c) 32.6 reaching shoaling waters,
changes not
q' b) 48.67 d) 46.87 only in its height but also
in its length but
the period will _ .
B' a) remain constant

f 3.14 Problem b} increase
c) decrease
The ratio of the wave length to its height d) None of the
above
for ocean waves is between:
,,
q'
a)
b)
9and15
17 and 33
I 3.19 CE Board Nov.
2016 J
c} 12 and 18 An open water of navigable
depth is called:
d) 20and 34
a) Shoal
b) , Skewd
c) Significant depth
Problem J ~ d) Fairway
A very long standing wave on a large but

limited body of water generally occurring j 3.20 Problem
when a storm dies down after producing a
wind tide is called: Waves are formed by the
frictional drag of
wind across the water
surface. This is a
W a) Seiche c) Ebb process of transferring
energy from wind
b} Shoal d} Skewd to water. Water particles are
moved from
their position by the wind,
and then
i
returned to the original
position by gravity,
f 3.16 Problem which is a restoring force.
These waves are
called:
·
Waves generated by storms, which occur a) Deep water waves
outside area of observation. b) Significant waves
W a) Swells c) Skewd ~ c) Gravity waves
b) Shoal d) Ebb d) Equivalent depth
water waves
problem [ 3.25
Problem ..
'•211___..:-:-~--~-:-:---:--
re against a vertical wall due to
pretlU Waves of this type have
very long periods
~,. 1,caued: typically from 30 aec.
up to the tidal period
wave decay of 12 hr. 25 min. and
are mostly found In
a) Dynamic pressure enclosed or ••ml-
enclosed basins such as
b) Rankines active pressure arttflcial port basins
or bays.
c)
~ cl) Clapotfs . a) Swell
waves
,---:==:::::.---------~--~~~ q:. b) Selchlng

waves
rr;2i" Probl~m c) Breaking
waves
~ ge In the dissection of travel of the d) Wakes
Acha~ change In depth of water which
::butes wave · energy along the
seashore unevenly Is called:
( 3.26
Problem I
Waves created by
large, sudden Impacts,
~ •J wave retraction such as earthquakes,
volcanoes or
b) wave diffraction landslides that ends
up In the ocean.
c) wave reflection
d) wave frequency a) Storm
surge
b) Swell
waves
§3 Problem I ~ c)
d)
Tsunamis
Clapotis
waves generated by wind that are acting
on the sea surface bordering on the port
site. , 3.27
Problem I
.w aJ wind waves Waves in which the
ratio of water depth to
b) ocean waves the wave length is
greater than 0.5.
c) breaking waves a)
Intermediate water waves
d) depth water wave b)
Breaking waves
c)
Shallow-water waves
[3.24 Problem ~ d) Deep
water waves
Wind generated waves which are created In
the deep ocean at some distance from the
port site and the wind that created them
I 3.2a
Problem
may be too distant to be felt in the port or Waves in which the
ratio of water depth to
may have stopped blowing or changed, its the wave length is
less than 0.50 but
direction by the time the wave reach the greater than 0.40.
port.
Q=> a)
lntennedlate water waves
W a) Swell waves b)
Breaking waves
b) Seiching waves c)
Shallow-water waves
c) Breaking waves d) Deep
water waves
d) Wakes
I7 5 : : I: :; : : :I I: 'iH+
+t+111·Hr+W=ii
13.33
Problem
13.29 Problem
The
arithmetical mean value of the highest,
Waves In which the ratio of water depth to
the wave length Is equal to or less than one-third
of the waves for a stated interval.
0.40. a)
Average wave height
b)
Critical wave height
a) Intermediate water waves
b) Breaking waves ~ c)
Significant wave height
d)
Intermediate wave height
Q" c) Shallow-water wavu
d) Significant waves
( 3.3~
Problem
f 3.30 Problem
An abnormal
rise of the sea level that
· Waves which fall forward since the forward occurs when
a typhoon passes by. This
velocity of the creast particles exceeds the rise above
normal level on this open coast
velocity of propagation of the wave itself. is due to
atmospheric pressure reduction
In deep water, this normally occurs when as well as
due to wind stress.
the wave length L is less than 7 times the
a)
Hurricane
wave height (L < 7 H) and in shallow water
b)
Tsunamis
when the depth d is approximately equal to
1.25 H (where H is the wave height). ~ c)
Storm surge
d)
Tornado
a) Intermediate water waves
~ b) Breaking waves
c) Shallow-water waves j 3.35
Problem
d) Significant waves
Waves with
an extremely long period that
mainly
occur when there is a sudden large
, 3.31 Problem scale sea
floor movements associated
severe,
shallow focus earthquake.
The distance that the wind blows over the
sea in generating the waves is known as: a)
Significant waves
~ b)
Tsunamis
a) clapotis c) seiche
c)
Storm surge
b) wakes ~ d) fetch
d)
Deep water waves
j 3.32 Problem
13.36
Problem
The ratio of the wave height to its wave
length is called: The falling
tide is known as:
a) wave period ~ a)
Ebbtide
b) wave propagation b)
Flood tide
c) slope c)
Neap tide
Q" cl) steepness d)
All of the above
•
,_,1 , [ 3.41
Problem
tal extension of the generating
fh' hortz ~ ectlon of the wind ls called:
0 T
J
, 1n the r 1 he type of tide
Which
the time When the
Wiii OCcur at or near
Is When the sun
moon is new or full that
•" '9) trOUQh and the tide ge~=
afnd earth fall In line
b) shoal and sun are
addlti g orces of the moon
c) seiche
Ve.
~ d} fetch ~
,.------________________---,
~--~~~~~~~-
a)
b)
Spring tides
Lunar tides
c)
Diumal tides
~ Problem ] d)
Ebb tides
~----=---------'-
difference in height between the mean
jhe high water and the mean lower low
higher .
water is called. [3.42
Problem
]
d' a) Diurnal range
The PPA (Phil.
Ports Authority) requires that
b) Mean sea level water level that
guarantees about water depth
c) Mean range for safety of
the ships berthing· on a certain
d) Residual water level Ports and
harbor, below the mean lower low
water should be
equal to:
.
Problem
.
l a)
b)
0.15 mto 0.30 m
0.12 mto 0.40 m

The highest tides which occur at intervals Q> c)
0.15-0.40m
of half a lunar month is called: d)
0.12- 0.50 m
~ a) Spring tides
b) Semi-lunar tides
c) Semi-diurnal tides
d) Ebb tides I3.43
Problem
l
When the
lines connecting the earth with
Problem the sun and
the moon form a right angle,
[3.40 1 that is the
moon is in her quarters, then the
actions of
the moon and sun are
The datum line for design of port facllitles subtractive,
and the lowest tides of the
in accordance with charts, which is being month occur,
this is called:
used by the Phil. Ports Authority (PPA).
Q> a)
Neap tide
W a) MLLW c) RWL b)
Lunar tide
b) LWL d) HWL c)
Diurnal tide
d)
Ebb tide
[~.~- Problem J [ ~.47 Problem
:::::::
The difference In height
between high
Owing to retardation of the tidal wave In water and low water at a
tidal •tatJon ta
the ocean by frictional force, a• the earth called:
revolv11 dally around ltl axl• and a•.the
tide tend• to follow the direction of the a) diurnal range
moon, the hlgh11t tide for each location I• B' b) tidal rang•
not coincident with conjunction and c) mean range
oppoaltlon but occu11 at aome conatant d) extreme range
. time after new and full moon. This Interval
which may amount to a1 much a1 two and
ahalf days i• known as:
a) Diurnal tide
fl 3.48 Problem
When the dally high wate11
are usually at
J
b) Lunar tide
their least height and the
dally low waters
W c) Age of the tide their greatest height soon
after the moon Is
d) Semi-diurnal tide in quandrature. This tides
are called:
~a) Neap tides

t3.45 Problem b)
c)
Spring tides
Flood tjdes
d) Ebb tides
Generally, the average interval between
successive high tides, which is half the
time between successive passages of the
moon across agiven meridian is: . j 3.49 Problem
• '$'
· Waves formecfby moving ship

or boats are
J
a) 12 hrs. and 15 min.
b) 11 hrs. and 45 min. called:
c) 12 hrs.
~ a) wakes
~ d) 12'hrs. and 25 min.
b) swell
c) breaking waves
d) seiching
j 3.46 Problem .1
In many parts of the world, the high waters
reach their greatest height and the low j 3.50 . , Problem
]
waters at the least heigh~ soon after the Waves formed by earthquake
disturbances.
time of full and new moon. These tides are
called: a) Storm surge
b) Breaking waves
~ a) Spring tides ~ c) Tsunamis
b) Flood tides d) Wakes
c) Neap tides
d) Ebb tides
Twathe dtlstance that a
wind blows across the
er •called:
a) off-shore
b) shoat
c) on-shore
~ Problem 1 Q> d)
fetch
~2~--------~-------.-;i~
n:.-spread of e"ergy along a wave crest Is
caned: Problem
a) refraction
.]
b) reflection
c) shoaling
The time that a wind
blows across the
water is called:
~ d) diffraction
a) diffraction
b) refraction
@.53 Problem ] c)
Q=> cl)
period
duration
. The bending of waves as they slow down.
~a} refraction
b) reflection [3.58 Problem
c) shoaling
d) diffraction The average of the highest
one-third of the
waves are called:
I a)
b)
Average wave
height
Critical wave
height
wa~es under the in'fluence of the winds ~ c) Significant wave
height
'
that generated them are _called:
d) Intermediate wave
height
a) wakes c) swell .
" b) sea d) seiching
r3.s9 Problem
-.
j 3.55 Problem The highest tide which
occurs at Intervals
• of half a lunar month when
the sun, moon
Waves that have propagated beyond the and earth fall in line.
initial winds that generated them are
called:
~a) Spring tides
a) wakes ~ c) swell b) Neap tides
b) shoal d) seiche c) FIOod tides
d) Ebb tides
: ::: :: q ::
Problem 1-
- 0
]
""'[3_._&_~___ _P_ro_b_l_e_m_x_-~J
Prevailing
wtnd• which are season.1
The lowest tide of the month when the blowing in
one directJon over part Of th
lines connecting the earth wtth the sun and year and
in the opposite direction th•
the moon form a right triangle, that is when remainder
of the year. •
the moon is in its quarters are called:
B' a) NNptldes
"" •)
b)
Monsoon
Winds in inter-tropical zone

b) Spring tides c)
Windward side
c) Diurnal tides d)
Leeward side
d) Semi-diurnal tides
-
[3.6~
Problem
Problem
- - --
l
The·side of
a structure facing the direction
Tides that occur twice its lunar day is from which
the wind comes.
called:
a)
Forward side
a) Neap tides b)
Backward side
b) Ebb tides "" c)
Windward side
c) Diurnal tides d)
Leeward side
S' d) Semi-diurnal tides
L3.s2 Problem ) I 3.66

Problem • J
The opposite
side of a structure facing the ·
High crested waves caused by the rush of direction
from which the wind comes.
flood tide up a river or by meeting of tides
are called: a)
Forward side
b)
Backward side
'a) Stonn surge c)
Windward side
~ b) Tidal bores ~ d)
Leeward side
c) Swells
d) Shoal
, 3.67
Problem 1
Problem I
The .graphical representation of the
direct1on,.
frequency and intensity of winds
The circulation of masses of air more or . at a
particular location over a period of
less parallel to the earth's surface. time is known
as:
a) Monsoon a)
Tropical wind gauge
~ b) Wind b)
Wind intensity gauge
c) Wind pressure ~ cj
Windrose
d) Breeze I d)
Wind index
---- ----
~·i'-•·· !!!!!!11··-=••'••=•-.11111Mil'ii·-;;rm,i=r11l1
~ 8 problem
~~:_;_:.-----....__;,i
\ [3.7_
--
2 Problem
I-
le use to measure the Intensity and The highest tides In the
world where 1 rite
~:of winds. of 100 fl has been
recorded occur In
seautort's Scale
~ •)
b) Antwerp Scale "•)b) Bay of
Funday
Richter Scale Miami,
Florida
c)
Buchanan's Scale c) San
Francisco Bay
d)
d) Venice,
Italy
--------·-----------------~~
~,___P_r_o_bl_e_m __~~----\
\ 3.73 Problem
-
\
riodic rise and fall ·of the ocean
:~.~produced by the attraction of the · The average of the high
water over a 19.
moon and sun. year period Is known as:
a) Ebb c) Wake a) Mean

higher water
Q' cl) Tides b) Higher
high water
b) Wave
c) Highest
high ~ter
"d) Mean high
water
~T~O=--__P_ro_b_l_em
__________.\
Tidts which occurs only one high tide a \ 3.74

Problem
daY is called:
a) Neap tides
The average height of
the higher high
waters over a 19-year
period.
'
b) Spring tides
« c) Diurnal tides Q' a) Mean
higher high water
d) Semi-diurnal tides b) Higher
high water
c) Highest
high water
d) 'Mean
high water
[3.71 Problem
If one of the two daily tide is incomplete, \ 3.75'

Problem
that is It does not reach the height of the
previous tide, then the tides are referred to Average of the low
water over a 19-year
as: period is called:
. a) Lowest
low water
a) Neap tides
I
b) Lower
low water
1 B' b) Mixed diurnal tides
' c) Diurnal tides q:> c) Mean
low water
d) Semi-diurnal tides d) Mean
lower low water
:: a
- - - - - - - ·-
- T - - - - - - • • • -
13.76 Problem _I
( 3.~o Problem
The higher of the two high watel'I of any

The lowest height of water of spring tides.
diurnal tide day.
Q> •) Lowest low water

a) Mean higher high water
b) Lower low water
Q> b} Higher high water
c) Mean low water
c) Highest high water
d) Mean lower low water
d) Mean high water
f 3.81
Problem
f 3.7? Problem J
The height of the mean high water above

The lower of the two low waters of any
mean low water.
diurnal tide day.

a) Lowest low water
b) Higher high water
~ b) Lower low water ~
c) Mean range
c) Mean low water
d) Mean high water
d) Mean lower low water
( 3.78 Problem
f
3.82 Problem ]
The
mean of the height of mean high water
The average height of the lower low waters abov'
the mean low water is referred to as:
over a 19-year period.
W
a) Mean sea level
a) Lowest low water
b) Mean lower low water
b) Lower low water
c) Mean range
c) Mean low water
d) Mean high water
~ d) Mean lower low water .
{ 3.83
Problem I
3_._7_9___P_r_o_bl_e_m______~_J
_f
The
difference in height between the mean
The highest height of water of springtides. higher
high water and the mean lower low
water.
b) Higher high water
a) Mean sea level
~ c) Highest high water
b) Mean lower low water
d) Mean high water
c) Mean range
~ d)
Diurnal range
l ~-8~ __ 6
~!oblem
,,91- ce at certain locations are A maximum wave height and
wave pertod
.-r.urren f of the maximum wave height In
wave train.
utar uv- le or solitary type o wave
~ ,,..ted ''':sh of flood tide up-in the
~~~ bY th• meeting of tides as In the a) Deep water wave
"";-or bY :• wtaere the highest tide of b) Equivalent
depth water wave height
~y of fun ·~ed In th• world I• referred Q" c) Highest WWI
roo ft. it reeo d) Significant
wave
to ••:
Shallow water wave
a) oeeP water wave
b)
Solitary wave
l.3.88 2
Problem
c)
~ 'dJ Tidal bore Wav11 which occur In water
having a depth
less than one half of the
wave length and
the Influence of the bottom
changes the
~~__.....------~--=-==-=--=· form or orbital motion from
circular to
~ CE Board May 2016 elliptical or near-
elliptical.
ve at a point where the water depth Is B' a) Shallow water

wave
~ -' to Ya of the wavelength or greater to b) Deep water wave
aqua1nrAASed In terms of the parameters of c) Significant
wave
bt tXt"--
signlflC8nt wave. d) Highest wave
~ •)
Deep water wave
b) ·equivalent depth water wave height 13.89 Problem
c) Highest wave
d) Significant wave Waves break under
the following
1
conditions:
I. When the forward

velocity of the crest
~.~& Problem particles exceeds the
velocity of the
propagation of the wave
Itself
A hypothetical wave having a wave height II. When the wave height
exceeds (1n)
and period equal .respectively to average of the wave length In
deep water
values of the wave height and period of the Ill. When the wave reaches
shallow water
largest 113 of all waves in the train as where the depth is
equal to about one
counted in the order of greater wave and one quarter of Its
height
height.
a) Deep water wave a) I only
b) Equivalent depth water wave height b) II only
c} Highest w~ve c) Ill only
q::- dJ Significant wave ff' cl) All of the
above
13.90 Problem J L(3=·=9=4___P_r_o_b_le_m
_______
:J
The length between two consecutive crests The water level that guarantees
about 98%
of tJde is safe to ships seems
to be suitable
is called:
from the expression of the
technical
resolution of the International
Water Wave
a) wave period
Congress. Such water level,
which is
B> b) wavelength 0.15 m.... 0.4 m. below MLLW
should be
c) wave amplitude used for design of ports.
d) frequency
~a) Design Low Tide (DL

TJ
13.91 Problem b) Low Water Level
(LWL)
c) Residual Water Level
(RWL)
The height between the trough and the d) High Water Level
(HWL)
crest of a wave is called:
a) period
b). oscillation
Q' c)
d}
amplitude
frequency
f 3.95 Problem
J
Residual water level (RWL) for
gravity type
is expressed as:
l 3.92 . Problem
~a) 113 (HWL - LWL) + LWL
The wave form travels over the water b) 213 (HWL-LWL) + LWL
surface and the time for two consecutive c) 1/3 (HWL - LWL)
crests to pass a point is called:
d) 213 (HWL - LWL).
q- a) wave period
b) oscillation
c)
d)
amplitude
frequency f 3 ..96 Problem
12. J
Residual water level (RWL) for
sheet pile
13.93 Problem J type is expressed as:
The speed of the wave form wh~ch travels a) 1/3 (HWL - LWL) + LWL
over the water surface for a certain wave ruy b) 213 (HWL- LWL) + LWL
period.
c) 1/3 (HWL - LWL)
a) Steepness of wave d) 2/3 (HWL- LWL)
Q'> b) Velocity of wave propagation
c) Instantaneous velocity
d) Average velocity of wave
- .... _....__ ~-
- -- .... w -
·'llr'- """• - --- ..••••..._._.--.... _...
---- ------------
1
1
; 11!111• - -
J
_I
Large WIV" (long period) can
be
generated only when the
fetch (distance
over which the wind blows)
ll large. Wav11
continue to grow after they
reach a veloctty
of _ of the wind speed,
but It a
decreasing rate.
a) 213
c) %
B" b) 113
d) . %
•)
b) f 3.101 Problem
c)
d) The flow of energy along the
wave crest in
a direction at right angles
to the direction
of wave travel Is called:
a) reflection
.
Q'"
c)
d)
refraction
b) deflection
dlfhctlon
The etevation of the crest above the
·through of the wave.
Wave length
I 3.102 Problem
a)
b) Wave shoals A type of wave where the
depth Is less than
c) Wave period . 112 of wave .length but
greater than 1125 of
the wave length.
~ d) Wave height
~ a) Transitional
water wave
b) Shallow
water wave
c) High water
wave
[3.99 Problem d) Deep water
wave
The interva' of time for two wave ~rests to
pass the same position in space.
( 3.103 .Problem
a) 2 seconds A type of wave where the
depth is less than
b) 3 seconds 1/25 of wave length.
IF c) period
a)
Transitional water wave
d) frequency
.Qi" b) Shallow
water wave
c) High water
wave
d) Deep water
wave
f4:t:1:n::
f 3.104 Problem J I 3.108 n
Problem
From the Sine wave curve
shown, What do
:J
The highest point of the wave 11 called. you call the value of "L"?
L: - --
~ •) wave ctest
""1\¥ crrst
b) wave trough
c) wave height
d) wave length
a) Period of
wave
b) Frequency
of wave
t3.105 Problem F5
~
c)
d)
Wave
height
Wavelength
The lowest point of the wave.
~ b)
a) wave crest
wave trough
~_9_ _P_r_o....~_le_m_
3__._1 ......
L-f .
----..;.11]
c) wave height From the Sine wave curve ihown,
whflt 11
the value of h?
d) wave length
f 3.106 _ Problem
The distance between the highest point a) Length of

wave trough
and the lowest point of the wave. b) Still water
depth
~ c) Amplitude
a) wave crest d) Height of
wave trough
b) wave trough
q:- c) wave height
d) wave length f 3.11_
0
Problem
From the Sine wave curve shown,
what do
J
you call the region x?
f 3.107 Problem-
wan~ CTl'Sf
....
wai~crrst
The vertical distance of the wave crest and

the wave trough.
wave trough
a) wave crest
ocean bottom
I
b) wave trough
Q" c) wave height ~ a) Crest length
region
d) wave length b) Trough length
region
c) Transition
region
d) Period
Problem
What zone Is covered by the
distance • ?
l fi/I " '"'"' ,,.,.d
y"'
L12<ii_
I
~f'_bfilf' l
fXran boffom
oc~an bottom
I
a) Deep
water
b)
Shallow zone
q:- c)
Transition zone
a) crest length region d)
Shoaling zone
~ b) Trough length region
c)
d)
Transition region
Period
I 3.114
Problem
What zone Is covered by
the distance "z"?
Problem
from the wave behavior, indicate what

zone is covered by the distance x.
ocran boffom
r
a)
Deep water zone
~ b)
Shallow zone
c)
Transition zone
d)
Shoaling zone
oceat1 bottom 13.115

Problem - 5
·rhe average height of

the sea for all stages
of the tide obtained
from systematic
a) Deep water zone observations of sea
level at equal Intervals
b) Shallow zone over a long period of
time along a given
c) Transition zone coastline is called:
~ d) Shoaling zone ~a)

Mean sea level
b)
Mean low water
c)
Mean lower low water
d)
Mean ocean level
;;:: : :::::
. ;:
I3.11_6 Problem
!t
~[3•
•_1_19___P_r_o_bl_•_m______ ::J
The proeess of widening, enlarging, The flow of
seawater In the horizontal
cleaning, or deepening of channels In direction that
accompanies a tidal variation
harbors, rivers and canals to maintain the of sea level and 11
thus periodic.
Idea depth of berthing areas due to fast
siltation rate Is known as: ~ •)
Selch•
b)
Storm surge
a) Disiltation c)
Tsunami
b) Meandering d)
Tidal wave
~ c) Dtedglng
d) Excavation
f 3.~ 20
Problem
f3.117 Problem 3 J The time of rotation

of the earth With
respect to the moon
and the planets, Which
The periodic rise and fall of sea level 'in is approximately 24
hours and 50 minutes.
response to the gravitational attraction of
a)
Highest astronomical tide
the sun and moon as modified by the
b)
Lowest astronomical tide
earth's rotation.
~ c)
Astronomical tidal day
a) Rotational tide d) Ebb
tidal day
b) Storm surge
c) Gravitational tide
. ltr d) Astronomical tide
f 3.121
Problem ·
J
The chart datum for
harbor works is
f 3.118 Problem generally Jhe:
A phenomenon involving abnormal a)

lowest observed water level
oscillations of the water level with a period ltW b) Lowest
astronomical tide
of approximately a few minutes to a few c) Mean
tidal-high water level
tens of minutes. It occurs when small d) Mean
tidal-low water level
fluctuations of the water level are
generated by micro scale variations of the
atmospheric pressure by an air front or a
low pressure in the outer sea and . the j 3.122
Problem
components of those oscillations whose .
I
period is the same as a natural period of The rise of sea level
due to the greenhouse
the harbor are amplified through effect between years
2000 and 2050 is
resonance. assumed to be.about:
m:r a) Selche _lfW a) 0.25 m

to 0.30 m
b) Storm surge b) 0.12 m
to 0.20 m
c) Tsunami c) 0.06 m
to 0.2 m
d) Astronomical tide d) 0.16 m
to 0.25 m
r
problem
,.12:3~___:...:...----------~ Problem
nd fall of the water level due to
ri•• 1
1"' ~ th• atmospheric pressure ls The regular Ptrlod
surface of the le
rise and fall of the
cfl"'ge1mately equal to:
~pro.,.
shores fa ca11ec1~11,
observable along their
o9 cm rls• or fall of the water
~ •) ~vel for 1 m bar fall or rise In a) Wave
tmospherlc pressure
1 ~ b) Tide
b) o.30 cm rise or fall of the water c) Period of
wave
1evel for 1 m. bar fall or rise in d) Current
atmospheric pressure
c) o.25 cm rise or fall of the water
ievel for 1 m. bar fall or rise in
atmospheric pressure [ 3.127 Problem
d) 0.6 cm rise or fall of the water level
for 1 m. bar fall or rise in The average height of
all low waters It any
atmospheric pressure place over a
sufficiently extended period of
time Is called:
..:----
~4 · Problem . I b)
a) Spring range
Diurnal
range
c) Extreme
range
\Vjnd generated waves but are created in
~ d) Mean low
water
th• de&P ocean at some distance from the
rt site and the wind that created them
~y be too distance to be felt in the port
and may have changed its direction by the
time the waves reach the port.
I3.1 ia · Problem
a) Long waves The tidal current
setting Into the bays and
b) Wind waves estuaries along the
coast is called:
c) Sieching
a) Ebb current
~ d) swell
b) Lunitidal
current
~ c) Flood
current
~.125 Problem d) Slack water
current
waves, which have a very long period,

typically from 30 sec up to the tidal period ( 3.129
&! ''
Problem
of 12 hr and 24 min. and are mostly found
in enclosed or seml-e.nclosed basins such
as bays or port basins. The return current
toward the sea Is called:
a) Ocean waves a) Ebb CU"9nt

B' bJ Selching b) Lunitidal
current
c) Swell waves c) Flood
current
d) · Wind waves d) Slack water
current
t j:
J
The period during which the current is The maximum
depression of the falling ti~
negligible while it Is changing directions is Is called:
called _ . It is the period during which
the current is less than 1/10 of a knot or a) Trough
less than 0.169 fps.
~ b) Low water
a) Tum of the current c) Neap
b) Spring water d) Ebb
c) Diurnal time
~ d) Slack water
~[3_.~1~~-4--
~P_ro_b_l_e_m________ J
The straight-line
stretch of open water
[ 3.,:131 Problem available for wave g_
rowth without the
interruption of land
is called:
The average time interval, in solar hours
and minutes from a lunar transit to the next
Q'" a) Fetch
succeeding high water at a given place as
determined by an extended s~t of b) Wave
length
observations Is called: c) Neap
d) Ebb
Q'" a) High · water lunitidal interval of·
the place
b)
c)
d)
Upper meridian transit
Higher high water interval
Higher water slack
~(3_._1_3_s___P_ro_b_l•~m
____
= ___ ::J
The interval of time
between successive
crests of the water
waves passing a
stationary point of
reference is called:
.I 3.132 Problem
a)
Amplitu,de
The maximum height reached by each b) High-
water lunitidal interval
rising tide is called: ~ c) Wave
period
d) Lunitidal
period
a) Trough
b) Ebb
~ c) High water
d) Crest
\~
- I
\_3.13~
Problem. - ml
During
Typhoon Ondoy, due to strong
water waves occurs in winds, It
causes 1 wave length of a
Sh•l~ow- depth less than half of shallow-
water wave of 80 m. long. If the
havmg a wave
period (the Ume for two consecutive
water 1ength, d < L/2.
thB wave crests to
pass a given point) 11 7.2 sec.,
determine
the depth of water at that point
assuming
It to be unHorm.
length of shallow-water
wave
~· Yllves: Solution:
L =(
g~) tanh ( 2~)
(~) ttlih ( ~)
2
L=
80
=(9.8~:2)' ) h( 2:)
tai
where: 2
L =wave length of shallow-water waves tan
h( ;:) =0.98841
r =period in seconds
2
d =water depth (assumed to be uniform) 1tc1
=2.57235
g =acceleration of gravity (9.81 mls2)
80
d
=32.75 m. < 'U2
wave velocity (celerity) of

8· shallow-water waves: \
_~_.1_3_7___
P_ro_b_le_m_________l ~
2
v (fit)
= mh ( ~) During
the Typhoon Butchoy, the wave due
to the
strong winds produced a wave
length
at a point on the surface of the
water·
at a depth of 4 m. Determine the
where:
wave
length for a period of 3.88 seconds
V = wave velocity in mis (velocity of
for a
shallow water wave.
wa.ve propagation)
d =depth of water (m)
Solution:
L =wave length (m)
g =acceleration of gravity (9.81 mls2) L:
( 92T~) tanh ( 2~)
t =period in seconds L
=g(3.88)2 tan h (2n(4)) /
2n L
25 33
L
=23.50 tan h ( ·~ )
I
.1•. •
;
By
trial and error :
l
l L =
19.99 m. say 20 m.
I
•.,,•.
3_._1_~_a___ P__,_f>.....~_1!'_m_2
111..( _ _ ___ _ J
Characteristics of Deep
Water
Waves: d > L/ 2 i 1
The wave length of a shallow-water wave 11 ' Deep

w•t•r w•v•• are those
80 m. long and Its pertod of oscmatlon 11 which
occur In water having a depth
7.2 second1. ff It ha• a depth of water equal greater
than one-half of the wave
to 30 m, compute the velocity of the wave length, d
> L/2.
In m/1.
'A. wave
length -of deep- Wlter
Solution: l
waves: -,j
v=(:!) mh(2~)
L =( ~:)
d < ~ (shallow wtier wave)
L =1.56 T
2
2
where:
80 L =wave
length in meters
30<- =40
2 T= wave
period (time for wave to travel 8
distance l) .
V=9.81(7.2) ta1 h 2n(30) g
=acceleration ofgravity (9.81 mls2)
· 2n 80
V =11.fUmls ·e-:--wave
velocltY ofd eep Water
waves in
terms of wave length
L:
2nV2
L= .&....-
g
The length of wave in a deep water wave is
v =1.2495 JL.
114.8 m. The water will reach a shallow where:
water depth when the waves start to break. g
=acceleration ofgravity (9.81 f1Vs2)
Determine the depth of shallow water at
this condition. · C. In deep
water wave breaks
normally
will occur when the
1
Solution: wave
height exceeds one-
L= 7H seventh
of the wave · length.
114.8 =7H
When the
wave reaches the
shallow
water where the depth
H=16.4 m Is equal
to 1.25 of Its height,
d = 1.25H the waves
will usually break.
d =1.25(16.4)
L
d =20.Sm
H=-
7
d
=1.25 H
where:
H = height of
wave (amplitude)
L =wave length in
meters
d =depth of water
- - - -
..-.-
_.. loclty for deep water
/ .,r.ve ~: terms of period 11T" [ 3.141 Problem
J
~t
,,,.:
0· """'' '
. tr R SQ;
Deep water wav11 bre1k when the

fOfWlrd
V 2nV velocity of the crest Plrticlts

txcetd1 the
r=-
g velocity of Propagation of the wave
ltlttf.
Determine the amplitude of the water
V =1.56 T waves at this condition when the
depth of
water Is 64 m.
w11ere: ,,.,..m, (mis) Solution:
ave veiw111
I/ ="" riod in sec. d
r= wave pe L=o.5
64
~----------,----,,
problem _
l=0.5
,.1~0 - L= 128
-
1
~hoon Yolanda hits the country L=?H
1,oPica ses 8 storm surge In Tacloban
~ich cauwave period at a point having a 128 =?H
CilY· ~: 36 m. in the ocean Is 6.4 sec.
1
H=18.29 (amplitude)
dePth the height of the wave if It has a
compute
ness of 0.14.
I
•.
5tetP
. n·
soluttO ·gth of deep water waves: I3.1 ~2 . Problem
wavelen
gT2
L:: r,t" Tropical cyclone ."lntlng" will hit
the
- '
country with an estimated forecast
velocity
L:: 1.56 T2 of propagation of wave equal to 80
kph.
Determine the ap'proximate length
between
L~ 1.56(6.4)2
crest of the wave in meters. ,
L::63.90 m
Solution:
d~ ~ (ok} v=1.249../l.
2
80
» ~;90 =J1.95 (deep-water wave) V=-
36 3.6
V=22.22m/s
~ =steepnesS
L 22.22 ~...1.249../l.
H=63.90(0.14)
L =316.SOm.
H=8.95m
•• [ 3 •145 problem _
::::
13.143 Problem -- J In the Pacific Ocean, near
Surlgao City, tht
The velocity of propagation of wave during depth of water I• 0.43 km..
Whit ta the
the typhoon Ondoy 11 equal to 120 kph at a approximate value of the W1Ye
•Plld Of 1
certain pojnt In the Pacific Ocean. tsunami, which wtll cau1e a
wav)• ltngth
Determine the approximate depth of the (between the crnt of wave equal
to
ocean at that particular point. soom?
Solution:
120 Solution:
V =- =33.33m's L=800m
3.6
. v=1.249 .[L d =430m
33.33 =1.249 .[L v =1.249 .[L

L =712.11 nvn v=1.249 J800
d= ~
v=35.32 rriJs
2 v=35.32(3.6)
d =712.11 =356 m v=127.2kph
2
d=0.356km
· [ 3.146 Problem
J
Problem £
J A tsunami also called seismic
sea wave of
tidal wave is a catastrophic
ocean wave,
The path of the typhoon "Dindo" passes usually causid by a submarine
earthquake
thru Batanes Island at a certain location occurring· less than 50 km
beneath the sea
whose depth of water above the bottom of floor, with a magnitude greater
than 6.5 on
the sea equal to 150 m. Determine the the Richt~r scale. Under water
or coastal
approximate velocity of wave propagation landslide~ or volcanic eruptions
also may
in kph. cause a tsunami. The term tidal
wave is
more frequently used for such a
wave, but
Solution: it is a misnomer, for the wave
has no
L . connection with the tides. If
the depth of
d=- water at a certain point in the
ocean is
2
L 1200 m, determine the velocity
of the wave
150 = - propagation in kph.
2
L =300 Solution:
v=1.249 Jl. L
.d =-
v =1.249 J300 2
V=21.63 mis L
1200 =-
v =21.63(3.6) 2
V =n.BBlcph .. L = 2400m.
... - ~ - ,,.._
Solution:
d<~
2
4 < 20 =10
2
L=(~)~h(~)
2
20= 9.81T tanh (2n(4))
-.
~-----------., 27t 20
,.1, 1. Problem 20=1.56 T2(0.85013)

T =3.88 aec.
· typhoon "Yolanda" hits the
1
rroP"' with an estimated wind speed of
GO'ln~ This causes a storm surge In
140 · City with a period of 7.47 sec. In a
racl0b8~ing a depth of 9 m. Compute the [ 3.14_9 Problem
l>°!"t hif the wave if it has a steepness of
~elghHtl~t' L =1.561'2
o.1'- . . During the typhoon Neneng, the
length of
deep water wave Is 96 m. caused
by strong
soJUllon: winds near Batayan Island.
Compute the
L:: 1.56 T2 velocity of wave in kph.
L:: 1,56(7.47)2 Solution:

. . gT2
L::87.05 m L=- d =50
27t
L _ 96 _
~:: 0.14 L =1.56 T 2 - - - -
48
2 2
L 2
96=1.56 T L
.H:: 87.05(0.14) d C!: 2
(deep water wave)
T =7.84 sec.
H:: 12.19m.
T= 2n V
g
t
V= 1.56T
@.14~ Problem v=1.56(7.84)
During the Typhoon Katrina, the wave V= 12.24 mis
length which is caused by the strong winds v=12.24(3.6)
is equal to 20 m. long at a point where the
depth of water is 4 m. Determine the wave v =44.06kph
period in sec. for a shallow water wave.
·- ~ •
Cu a::y, 4JWC$!t
13.150_ Problem stsT? ZS st ?a rrs
J 27t( 58.67)2
L = 32.2
PAG-ASA issued a warning on the western
L =671.67 ft.
seaboard. The forecast predicts wav11
having a wave ~gth of 280 m. at a point
near the Scarborough Shoal In the W11t d= ~
Philippine Sea having a depth of 150 m.
Determine the wave pertod that causes this d =671.67
wave length. 2
d =335.84 ft.
Solution:
d =335.84
d~ L 6
2
280 d =55.97 fathoms
150> - =140
2
L= 21t v2
Nde: .
1fahom =6 ft.
g
V= 1.2495Jl.
v=1.2495 ./200 , 3.152_ Problema
V =20.91 mis
Tropical cyclone "lntlng"
hit the count...
T= 21t V with an estimated forecast
of wave ,~
g of 120 kph. The cyclone
causes a •lorrn
V= 1.56T surge with a frequency of
0.109 ~
=
20.91 1.56 T Compute the length between
the ·crest Of
the deep water wave.
,
=
T 13.40 sec.
Solution: '
gT2
I 3.151. Problem J L=-
21t
The '/eloclty of propagation of a deep water L =1.56 T 2
wave caused by Typhoon "Senyang" is f =frequency

equal to 40 mph at a certain point in the
ocean. Estimate the depth of still water T =! (period)
level at this point in fathoms. f
1
Solution: T=- =9.17sec.
0.109
2JtV 2 2
L=- L = 1.56 T
g
L =1.56(9.17)
2
v=40(5280)
3600 L = 131.18 m.
v =58.67fps
- - .
_,_,,H·Ht:i
~3 Proble~ J . Relation Between Max. ,
™ •
a.. Wave Height and
wav• tength of a ct.ep water wave ii Si nificant Wave Hei ht
::itY
flt' 1to 160 m. long. Compute the WIVt
that cau... this wave In kph. "
A hypothetical wave
having a
wave height and period equal
so#IJllOI': respectively to average values
of the
L:: 1.56 T2 wave height and period of the
largest
113 of all waves in the train
ss
160 m:: 1.56 T2
counted in the order of greater
wave
T:: 10.13 sec. height is called Significant
Wave
V:: 1.56 T Height.
v-., 1.56(10.13) Hmu = 1.87 H,

V:: 15.8 mis
v= s&•tkl'h where:
Hmu = max. wave height
Hs = significant wave height
~ Problem
wtnd velocity of 4.2 mis causes a deep 13.155 Problem
fht wave formation in a period of 6.67
~ompute the depth of water. Compute the maximum wave height
if It
has a significant wave height
of 3.4 m.
so1ut1on: high.
1
period =rrequency Solution:
1 Hmax =1.87 Hs
T:: -
f Hmax = 1.87(3.4)
1
6.67 =f Hmax = 6.36 m.' .
f =0.15 cyciesJsec.
v .t.~Arithmetic Mean of All ..&
f= -
L
4.2 :~· Wave Height and . . .
o.1s= T Significant Wave Height
L=28 m.
Hm = 0.6 H,
d=~ = (condition for deep- water wave)
28
2 2 where:
d=f4m. =
Hm arithmetical mean value of
all recorded
wave heights during a period
of
observation
=
Hs significant wave height
a-
Problem
What II the artthmetical mean valut of •II

Th• WIY• '1ength of I depth
Watt
during th• typhoon at the PC>rt
of Cr '
NCOrdtd WIYe height during I period of dt Oro 11 310 m. The depth of
ltJll '9~'
oblervltlon If I hn I 11tr'tiflclnt WIYt located o.90 m below the
centertin~r ~
height of 4.24 m. rotatJon of the wave. If the
•teepn" Of u._
wave 1s 0.16, determine the •Of
u._
Solutlon: diifance of the wave through
1r:•rt1ct1
t>ottom of th• ocean If Its
dePth Ill u,,
H... =0.6H, water Is 40 m. above the
bottolll :, •t111
Hm =0.6(4.24) ocean.
th,
H... =2.Um.
so1ut1on:
LsJ IOm
Saint-Venant and Flamant
~~....._ .:.-.-,. v Theor "·· ·' ..~-..
A water particle at the surface of

a deep-water wave oscillates about a
point whose height above the still
water ·ho" is given as: Depth waler wav1:5
-
H
Steepness =-
H/1 H
L
H/1
H
0.16 =31o
H=49.60m
Depch wlkr waves
H
f
y+0.90= 2
. 0 90 - 49.6()
y+. - 2
y =23.90m
where: h =40-23.90
ho = distance from the still water level to the h =16.10m.
center of rotation of waves
=
H height of wave or amplitude
=
d depth of still water
L : wave length
=
a distance from the still water depth to the
crest of wave
.I Solution:
-
d~ L (deep
wEter level)
2
so1ut1on:
H =2.4 m (anplitude)
-- Depth waler waves

H
2
=1.2m
d =46.2 - 1.2-0.3
H2 27td d =44.70m.
h ::~coth-L
o 4L L=2d
-(~(25)2 ) cot h ( 27t(80)) L = 2(44.70)
ho - 4(300) 300
L= 89.40m.
h0 :: 1.76
eev.of wave crest above the still water :
H
EleV.=80 +ho + 2 ~aracteristics of Long
.a
Waves: d < L/ 25
_...,.
EleV. =80+1.76 + 12.5
EleV. =94.26 m. Waves with a
relatively long wave
length compared . to the
water depth
d < 1125 are called long
waves.
\ 3.159 Problem Lengt~ of wave

for long waves
The amplitude of a deep-water wave is L =T

JQd
2.4 m. If the depth of water from the bottom
where:
up to the crest of the wave is 46.2 m., L =wave length in
meters
determine the horizontal distance between
:a crests of the wave. Assume the center
rotation of the wave Is 0.3 m. above the
T =wave period in sec.
g =acceleration of
gravity (9.81 mfs2)
atill water level. . d =depth of water
I .
ll·N'
B. Wave velocity for a long wave
v=/il
wherrJ:
v= waw velocly in mis
Solution:
g =accelenltion of gravity (9.81 mls1)
For a long WBV8 :
d =depth of willer
v=/il
H=~
_ -~18..;...._o~___P_ro__b_J•_m_
1o..t3.;;..;
0
_ . . . _ . . _......_ J
L 9
l
=9(18)
Compute the waye length caused by strong
L= 162m.
wfndl along the coast of Ormoc City for a
wave period of 17.56 sec. If the depth of d
=~ for long wave
waterla4 m.
162
d=
- =6.48m.
Solution:
25
L=T~
v=Jid
L =17.52J-9.8-1(-4)
v::: J......-9.8-1(6-.48-)
L = 110m. V
=7.97mls
d 4 1 v
=7.97(3.6) = 28.69 kph
t = 110 =0·03636 < 2s =0·04 <okJ
This is along wave.
/ 3.163
Problem
z $
/ 3.161 Problem 1·
Determine the period (in seconds) to cause
a wave
length of a long wave ·equal to
The wave length of a long wave at a depth 125m.
of 4.8 m. is 122 m. Determine the velocity
of the wave propagation in kph.
Solution:
Solution: L=T.
{gd
~ = 4.8 d
L 122 L =251
for long waves
d 1
L =o.03934 < -25 =o.04 fokJ d =125
=5 m. {depth of water)
.
25
V=~
v =.J....-9.8-1(-4.-8) L=T.{gd
V =6.86 mis 125 = T

J9.81(5) .
V =6.86(3.6) =24.7 kph T
=17.84 sec.
Problem ) st
A wave generated In deep-water, when

reaching shoaling water ch1nges not only
Its height but 1110 Its length. The wave
period however ·remains constant For 1
depth of 1.25 m, the shallow-water wave
length 11 20 m., determine the deep-water
WIVe length.
Solution:
LA =ta\ h 27td
Lo LA
20 =tan h 2n(1 .25)
L0 20
20
- =037368
Lo .
L0 = 53.52m.
{ 3.166 _ Problem
Relationship of Deep- 4'
water wave Length and ~.
the Shallow-Water Wave
The shallow-water wave length Is 24 m. and
the deep-water wave length Is 64.2 m
'
Determine the depth of the shallow water.
Length (Applicable only for
vert small waves, but valid for Solution:
any depth)
LA =tell h 2nd
Lo LA
L 27td
2- =tanh -
L0 LA 24 =tell h 21tCI
64.2 24
2nd
t11ere: tan h -
24
=0.37383
~ =deep-water wave length
LA= shallow·water wave length 2nd =0.39287
24
d=depth of water
d =1.Sm. . .
I
blows
The distance that a wind
h.
across the water is called Fetc
so1ut1on:
2
p=cv
2
where: p:: 0.00256(25)
H=amplitude of wave in feet p=1.6 psf
V=wind velocity in mph
::~(3.28)
2
F=length of fetch in miles
p 2.2(1000)
?] p:: 0.0768 kl'•
---.....
----~------
~b_l_em____~
ring
Compute the amplttude of the wave du 3_.1_a_s__P_r....
typhoon wit awind velocity of 50 kno
the length of the fetch is 500 miles.
ts, if
0
hypothetical wave height of
deeP-Wate,
A
wave corrected for the effects
Solution: bmarine topographic changes such
Of
Ncle :1knd =1nautical miles i hr. SU
1nautical miles =6080 n. retraction and diffraction of wave

as
excluding wave shoaling and
breakingbut
expressed in the significant
YrltfrJ
V= 50(6080) be
5280 heig
ht
e
v =57.58mph a) Deep-water wave
H=0.17fvF ~ b} E~ulvalent deep-water wave
c) H~hest wave ·
H=0.17 Js7.58(500) d} Significant wave
H=2B.84ft.
[3.17O Proble111
~ Wind Pressure 1~~..
Themaxi~um value of significant
wave
P=cV1: height dunng acertain period is
known as:
where: Iii" a) Max. wave height
P=wind pressure in psf b) Highest waveheight
c~constant (0.00256) c) H1110 significant wave
he~ht
V=velocity of wind in mph d) H113

~3.1 i4
:
Problem
_J'
of wav• resulting from the G
Ive the
dlfftrtnt types of breaking WIY• •
':.CW tr1ntftr 11 governed by the
..,, tilt
I. Spilling
breaker
,,..~~. fldOl'I:
~ng of the wind II. Plunging
breaker
'/~ distance OYtrWhlch the wind
L fetch or
Ill. Heaving
breaker
IV Collapsing
breaker
i blO'd of time that the wind blows
v.. Pitching
breaker
111
,.. ou~cy
frt(IU.. • of wave action
VI. Surging
breaker
~· a)
I, II, Ill and IV only
,1 •}
n,
I, ind Ill only b)
II, IV, V and VI only
II and IV only Q" c)
I, II, IV ind VI only
b) 1
c)
ii.Ill and IV only d)
Ill, V and VI only
d)
All of the above
I
Residual _Water Lev!!.I

,,,--------~~------
12
'1 -
Problem . _ l ·····
•• · (Gravity Type) · · ··- -'
' tinue to grow after they reach a

t1ait5 conual to _ of the wind speed-but
[ 3.175
CE Board Nov. 2(1'6 J
~ :aslng rate. Energy losses from Determine the
elevation of ttle residual
;. •. deCtransfer of energy into currents water level
(RWL) for a gravity type if the
friCUO"· development of white caps means following
data are as follows:
me WI'II not grow until the wave speed
,nd.ave Elev. of
MLLW =0 m (datum)
!ht the wind speed. Elev. of
HWL =+1.26 m
Elev. of
LWL =• 0.23 m
,..chlS 2/3 c) %
a) d) % Solution:
'1' b} 113 HWL::
+l.26 ~.s.
-:--'
~=~~ -.......~
'
- - Q:
0 0
0
#' •
- ~ .. - - ... - ...
§ 73 _Pr~blem · ] H
RWL ~··
'
-- q _
When waves enter a shallow water:
MLLW>t0.00 WJ· ~ -
- .. - -..· -.
i - - - - - - .-i-
L Wave speed de.creases
Darum
H l3=050
l Wave length decreases LWL::-

013 WJ·
013
I. wave speed increases
~. wave height increases H =1.26 +
0.23
v. wave length increases
H=1.49
\1. wave period does not change
li' a} I, II, IV and VI only

!:!3 =~3
(1 .49) =0.50
b) Ill, IV, Vand VI only y =0.50 -
0.23
c) I, II, and IV only y=0.27m
d) II, Ill, and VI only
Elev. of RWL
= +0.27 m
... -. - .
g
•·•
\ 3.17~_ Problem
:a : : : a ;;,
.] __ .. .._
--
78
Rl'll
.. ..
Determine the elevation of the design low
tide (DLT), which II the water tevel that
guarantees aboUt 98% of tide, which I• safe
to the ships using the gravity type.
Elev. of HWL • +1.~ m (Highest water ltYelJ
Elev. of RWL • +0.25 m (Rdldual WINf leVel)
.. · L----~T
.. O.Sm
Solution:
HWl.-l.4S m'\.i ' •
4m
;"-· -··......... -·.
___
ItWI, -+-0.2Sm "rl' ·
..
_,, ~ :: .. ~-..-...~
Solution:
~.
H v ,::0.25
/llU.W.() 'U·
...__·- ;-
H f3
t5m HWL=+l.JO D
DLT•? "'..;'·
I.Sm
·= ~ ""- ~
Sl.
...
,,.,,,-
__- __-
,RWLn ...
.. ..
MUWo
H=l.80 -
030~ =113{1
113(ff )
.8)
0.30m ·-=~ ..._--.-:-"' 0 .30_
=0.6
H =1.45+h
:iI .,,.,,,.#
· = ~""-""'~
LWL:-OJO
H
- =h+0.25
3
D =3-0.30
1.45 + h =h + 0.25
D= 2.70m
3
1.45 + h =3h + 0.75
2h =0.7
A Residual Water Level •
h =0.35 m. < 0.40 m. ok
_ . (Sheet Pile Type) _ .
Elev. of DLT = • 0.35 m.
\ 3.178 Problem
I3.177 Problem
Determine the elevation of the residual
water level (RWL) for a sheet pile type if the
following data are as follows:

From the figure shown, compute the
Elev. of MLLW (datum)= 0.00 m

distance from the top of the structure
(quay) to the residual water level (RWL).
Elev. of HWL + 1.26 m =

Use gravity type method.
Elev. of LWL 0.23 m =.
...
-~---
-- - = = = = = = = =----
ET ;;
- -- - -
soJUllon:
Allowable h =0.16 to 0.40 m
2
Hlff•..+1.26 m"'.J·
. ~ · · .......,,. .
-
3 H=h +0.74
H =1.30+h
2
.. ..
()
~· ... 0
3 (1.30 +h) =h +0.74

'
'
2H/3.0.99 m 2.60 + 2h =3 h +2.22
.23
h =0.38 m. below MLLW (ok Jess than0.40 m)
H: 1.26 +1).23
Seismic Forces Acting on
ti= 1.49m
- - Marine Structures ..,
~ H= ~ (1.49) =0.99 m
I3.180 Problem
3 3
y=0.99 -0.23
In design of port and harbor facilities,
y=+0.76 m. (elevtiion d IMtJ
seismic effects must be taken Into
consideration. If A Is equal to the dead
weight, B Is equal to surcharge, and C Is
equal to design seismic coefficient, find

~.179 Problem
the seismic force using seismic coefficient
method.
According to the tide table (1991) of
NAMRIA, the port of Cebu has a frequency
of tide below MLLW is 213 times/year. The
~ a} ( A+~)c c) ( ~ +B) C
present data observed by the PPA reveals
the following results:
Elev. of HWL =+ 1.30 m (High water level)
b) (A; B) C d) (A+ 28) C
Elev. of RWL =0.74 m (Residual water leveQ
Determine the present elevation of tide
below MLLW using a sheet pile type
e
analysis.
13.181 Problem
Solution:
The magnitude of surcharge during
earthquake In designing port and harbor

HWL.=+1.30 m'Y·
facilities.
_ .......
<"·
0 0
a) Double the surcharge considered
without earthquake
RWL.=+0.74m'W·
. ... ~ =:~ --·-~
b) Times 3 of the surcharge
H -... c.. ...
,j
C• 0.74
considered without earthquake

ML.L.W:IJ 'W·
t - - - - - ..;J
- -t
IF c) y, of the surcharge considered
213H
without earthquake
h
d) 1/3 of the surcharge considered
Dl.T=? 'W·
without earthquake
(/Hsign lowtidd
Problem
Q?G? G
J Surcturge
=2.50(3.5)(1)
Surcharge
=8.75 tf
Thi cross aection of a quay ii shown in the
ftgurt.
Seismic
force = ':tr , DL + Surcticwg
Design (
2.._
9)
Design
seismic coeff. =0.15(0.80)( 1.20)
Design
seismic coeff. =0.14
- -
~. '""° ll/ftll
-· Ai,zl.70
,
Seismic
1orce =0.14( 42.41 + s;s)
Seismic
force =6.55 tf Im
o.s
~f3~·..;:..:18::.:3:.,___P_ro_b_le_m_ _ __-...
· .:J
3.20
- The cross-
section of the quay plays a very
3.SO important
role from earthquake disaster in
- ~
I..
4111 the port
of Onnoc City.
L•c•U th""•''°" of rui'••I w•lu '"" (RWl Horizontal
seismic coefficient= 0.14
Coeff. of
friction at the base = 0.60
Regional seismic coeffecient • 0.15 Weight of
rocks above the residual water
Factor for sub soil condition =0.80 level
(RWL) =156 kN
Coefficient of importance =1.20 Weight of
rocks below the RWL 179 kN =
Unit weight of concrete =2.45 tf/rn2 Weight of
the entire concrete structure =89 kN
Estimate the design seismic force. Surcharge=
87.5 kN
Compute
the design seismic force for
Solution:
checkin~
of sliding of the structure as
RWI.. =~ (y) recof!
1mended by the Phil. Ports Authority
(PPA).
.
i
RWI.. = (1.8) =0.60 Seismic
fon:e =(DL +Su~arge) S::,C
Deat load: COf1Sic1er 1 meter length of quay
Wt of ooncrete =[4(0.50)(2.45)
+ 5.50(0.3)(2.45)] 1
Wt of concrete =8.94 tf
'
'
Wt. of rocks above RWL =1.80(2.7)(3.2)(1) 2.70m
Wt of rocks above RWL =15.55 tf

~ W1= 156 kN
RWL
~'-
Wt of rocks below RWL =2.8(3.2)(2)(1)
Wt of rocks below RWL =17.92 tf
2.80 m
Total DL =8.94+15.55+17.92
Total DL =42.41 tf
~-==::==-o..-======~~~
poRTS AND HARBOR . _
----= - _____.-::- -
::::;: ::::·I:; : ·:
- :
Angula Frequency
of a
~ checking of sliding of the structure, Wave
':~urc/J81gB load is considered behind the
slflldUr9 only.
1
Surcharge = 87 .5 kN
oo=K{gd - ,__
l..
where:
z}Om
'w,=156kN ro =angular frequency
K =wave number
K= 21C
tSO m L
L =wave length in
meters
d =depth of water
Seisl'riC force =( DL + Surcharge)
2
SeiSITllC
·
r.oeff.
SlJCharge =0
( ·3.185 Problem
OL=156+ 179+89
OL=424kN PAG·ASA issued a gale
warning in the
$eisrTiC foroo =(424 + 0)(0.14) =59.36 kN Eastern Seaboard of
the country. PAG·ASA
forecast estimates
that the wave length will
be 144 m. long.
Determine the angular
frequency of the wave
if the depth of the
[3.184 Problem water at that
particular location is 19 m.
Design of piers in an area of
seismographic disturbance must be Solution:
designed to resist seismic forces. ro=KJQd
Determine the seismic force in kN/m that
must be used in the design if it carries the K= 21t
following loads: L
Dead load =424 kN/m
Live load =188 kN/m , K = 21t
Regional seismic coefficient =0.14 144
Factor for subsoil condition =0.80 K =0.04363 (wave
number)
Coefficient of importance =1.20
ro =K J9d
Solution:
Seismic coefficient= 0.14(0.8)(1.2) = 0.1344 ro =0.04363 ~R81(19)
1 Seismic force =seismic r.oefficient (DL + ~) (J) =0.596

Seismcforce =0.1344(424+1'-)
Seismic force =68.62 kN / m
·~ Marine Structures ...... 13.190
Problem ::J
I3.~ 88 Problem ]
A dock which
11 similar to 1
often referred
to •• such, is backup bit
Whirt Ind
A term used to describe a marine structure ground 11 It

derives its name from the v
for the mooring or tying up of vessels, for nature or
supporting ground in the btctt.er,
loading and unloading cargo or for
~ . ~
embarking and disembarking passengers.
a)
Bulkhead
a) Dock
~ b)
Groin
b) Pier
c) Wharf c)
Jetty
d)
Breakwater
f 3.187 Problem J f ~.191

Problem
A dock which Is parallel to the shore,
which can be used for docking on one side Marine
structures for mooring vessels.
only.
~a)
Dolphins
a) Bulkhead ~ c) Wharf
b)
Groin
b) Pier d) Jetty
c)
Jetty
d)
Breakwater
f 3.188 Problem
A dock which projects Into the water,
which may be used on docking for both
sides.
a) Bulkhead
f .3.192
Problem
J
Type of dolphins
which are designed to
~ b) Pier take the impa~ of
the ship when docking
c) Wharf a~d to hold the
ship against a broadside
d) Breakwater wmd. Therefore,
they are provided with
fenders to
abs~rbed the impact of the ship
and to protect
the dolphin and the ship
from damage.
J 3.189 Problem
-1
An artificial basin for vessels when the ~ a)
Breasting dolphins
basin is pumped out. b)
Mooring dolphins
c)
Fixed·mooring berth
~ a) Drydock
d)
Bollards
b) Wet dock
c) Quay
d) Jetty
-----
Problem ] Moorin and Bollards

Bollard Is the mooring
fitting for
mooring ships during a storm
Installed
at the outside or outside/inside
of the
berth far from the water line
and •bltt"
is Installed close to the
waterline of
the berth to be used for mooring
ships
a) Breasting dolphins in ordinary condition.
~ b)
Mooring dolphins
c) Fixed mooring berth
d) Bollards
[f194 Problem
l
A marine structure consisting of dolphins
r tying up the ship and a platform for
[-!'@fl' I)•
~~pporting the cargo handling equipment. DOUBLE MOORING Bm'
SINGLE MOORING II/TT
a) Breasting dolphins
b) Mooring dolphins
~ c) Fixed mooring berth
d) Bollards • ~· 1·.3·
•~ •
CORNER MOORING
· POST
[3.195 Problem I TYPICAL MOORING

A breakwater is a structure constructed for ACCESSORIES
the purpose of forming an artificial harbor
with a water area so protected from the
effect of sea waves as to provide safe
accommodations for s~lpping. When a
breakwater supports a roadway, this is
called: I I
DOUBLEBIIT
BOUARD
a) Quay
b) Pier
B" c)
d)
Mole
Jetty
'"'"'
CLEAT
?7
~OPEN CHOCK
C) Sloping Lobe:
CO/tNl;'lt AIOO/tJNG
l'0.';7 CWSEDCNOCK
POWElf CA,.ETAN
All general
mooring BPPflcatior,
including steep rope
angles. Lines fro s
two ships may be
attached With~
interference.
L- MOORING BOLLARDS
1
A) Single and Double Pillar:
f 3.19~ Problem
._D. 0..
*G
-
Generally when bollards are

pulled Uf>Ward
as shown, then what type of
bollards are
used?
I
n ·a I
General mooring applications Where

rope angles is not steep. Single pillar type
should be used with lines from one ship
only. Suitable for warping ships along
berths, etc.
B) Tee-head:
a) Single mooring bitt

~ b) Tee-head shape
c) Sloping lobe
d) Single pillar
All general mooring applications
including steep rope angles. Any one
bollard should preferably be allocated to
line from one ship only.
,111 Proble~ ~
] [ 3.200
• all quay wall where the mooring
Problem
I
~ • sm y not be pulled upward, then what : type of moortng boll1rd
which 1s suitable
~;1:,nards are used? · or warping •hips llong
berths • •Ingle
pU11r type Is Ulld with
lln11 from one ship
only. Gen1r11 mooring
•ppllcatlon where
rope angle ts not •teep.
It hn • nonntl
i
I
max. working capactty of
200 tons.
l ~ •)
b)
Single ind
double plllir
Tee-head
r
c) Sloping lobe
d)
I
None of the
above
a) Single mooring bitt

f 3.201 Problem
b) Tee-head shape
Sloping lobe
1
c)
A type of mooring bollard
where all general
« cl} Single pillar type
mooring appllcatJons
Including steep rope
angles. Any one bolla'rd
should preferably
be allocated to lines
from one ship on~. It
[3.198 Problem has a normal maximum
working capacity
of 150 tons.
The mooring fitting for mooring ships
during a storm installed at the outside or a) Single and
double pillar
outside/inside of the berth far from ~e ~ b) Tee-head
water line is called: . c) Sloping lobe
a) Bitt d) None of the
above
~ « b) Bollard
c) Cleat
d) Closed chock ( 3.202 Problem
A type of mooring bollard

where all general
mooring applications
Including steep rope
angles and lines from two
ships may be
attached without
Interference. It hn a
The mooring fitting for mooring ships normal max. capacity of
200 tons.
{ during a storm installed close to the water
[ line of the berth. a) Single and
double pillar
b) Tee-head
"" a) Sitt ~ c) Sloping lobe
b) Bollard
c) Cleat d) None of the
above
d) Closed chock
::;; :: :::
~ Marine Structures ,. .. t 3.206 Problem
( 3.203 Problem A platform built

parallel to the shore or
breakwater within the
harbor to berth
The structure that protects the harbor from
stormy waves and permits calm In the
vessels is called:
Sea -
harbor is called: a)
Dock .
~_,B~~~,
15 lt>fU trtrap<tdJ ~ b) Wharf
j : ::wfuu1~1
fl9.50 m
- . fl.6 .50 m HARBOR c) Quay
- · ~ -- - -=--=--·---
-.- .-.-
d) Jetty
Shore ·
I 3~207_ . Problem
J
A rubble mound and or •
concrete
a) Dock ~ c) Breakwater structure that protects
the harbor area
b) Wharf d) Jetty from wave action.
1j IOttJ
UtrapotU
El.9.SO m
-~El-.=6.SO m HARBOR
I3.204 Problem
~~· ~ u mi-<°OflrsrJ blnrb
A solid structure, which projects into the

sea perpendicular to the shore to berth
vessels, is called:
cover stone a) Groin
~ c) ·Breakwater
b) Bulkhead
d) Jetty
I 3.208 Problem
.I
a) Dock c} Breakwater A structure for
retaining or to prevent earth
b) Wharf ~ d) Jetty or fill from sliding
Into water.
I 3.205 Problem
A platform built in the harbor parallel to the
shore and backed up by ground is called:
BULKHEAD
SUPPOllTt:D BY TRI: aoll5
AND
Al'ICllOa WALL
a) Dock
b) Wharf a) Breasting
dolphin
&@" b) Bulkhead
~ c} Quay
d) Jetty c) Breakwater
d) Berth
structure
~ Problem ] [ 3.213
z
Problem
rm
physical configuration of the seabed, A berth structure

projecting out from the
Th'measurements of depths of water in the shoreline.
:~an, etc. and also information derived
frO'" such measurement. a) Groin
c) Breakwater
b) Wharf
~ d) Pier
~ a) Bathymetry
b) Oceanography
c) Hydrology ( 3.214 Problem
d) Fathomology
A sheltered place where
the ship may
receive or discharge
cargQ. It Includes the
@.210 Problem harbor with its
approach channels and
anchorage places.
A vertical post to which the eye of a ~a) Port
mooring line can be attached.
c) Basin
b) Harbor
d) Quay
~ a) Bollard
b) Dolphin
£l
c) Gravity wall Problem

d) Tetrapods
A sheltered place where
the ship may
receive or discharge
cargo. It Includes the
harbor with Its approach
channels and
[ 3.211 Problem anchorage places.
A shore protection structure usually built a) Groin

c) Breakwater
perpendicular to the coastline to retard ~ b) Quay
d) Jetty
littoral transport of sedimentary materials.
B' a)
b)
Groin
Bulkhead
c)
d)
Breakwater
Jetty
J i.21 & Problem
A platform or deck
structure built below
5 s
the top deck level and
supported on
[ 3.212 Problem bearing piles. The main
function of the
.platform is to ·reduce
the lateral soil
pressure over the upper
portion of the
A berth structure which projects.out into sheet wall.
the water from the shore, or a berth
structure at some distance from the a) Sea wall
,.
shoreline Is called: b) Quay
~ c) Relieving
platfonn
a) Groin c) Breakwater d) Revetment
b) Bulkhead ~ d) Jetty
316 PORTS ~ND HA~~OR -
l3.217 Problem
Problem GF? -
A berth structure with no direct connection At the berths where the

movement of the
to the shore, at which the ships can berth. largest ships to be
accommodated takes
Berthing can take place on either one or place at the higher
states of the tide, the
both sides of the structure. underkell clearance may
be achieved by
dredging a berth box In
front of the berth
~ a) Sea island
structure. If the
length of the largest ship
c) Relieving platform
that uses the berth is
180 m., compute the
b) Breakwater
area of the berth box
in sq.m. The beam of
d) Revetment
the ship is 32 m. wide.
Solution:
·~- Navi ation Channels 1 ~~-
L =1.2 .lship
w= 1.5 (8)
I 3.218 Problem L = 1.2(180)
w=1.5(32)
L = 216
W=48
For good manoeuvering control, the ship
requires deeper water depth than the Berth area= 216(48)
absolute minimum requirement from Berth area = 10368 m2
loading of the ship, tidal variations, trim,
etc. If the speed of the ship is 5 knots,
Note: The berth box
should have a length of
determine the required depth of the
1.2 times the overall
length of the largest ship
channel If the ship has a max. daft of 7.8 m.
and a width of 1.5
times the beam of the
Solution: largest ship that will
use the berth.
Desired ratio of channel depth to max. draft of
the ship =1.3
13 = Depth of channel (for a speed of j 3.221
Problem
· Draft of ship less than 6 knots)
Depth =1.3(7.8) =10.14 m. For ships above 40,000
ton displacement,
the surge should not
exceed:
I3.219
G.~6~
ti ...~~
Problem
-.. . : .. 1 -
; ·--- -· •- , ,. _- .. -- ...._
A ship having a speed of 8 knots is floating '• •
• d
.I I
on a channel depth of 15 m. It is required to I. o
. •
. · . ·I
-,
determine the approximate draft of the ship Im
under this speed.
Solution:
For a speed greater than 6 knots :
• I <j 0
I .I
1.5 = Depth of channel "
Draft of ship
Q> a)
1.0m c) 0.80 m
15 b)
0.7 m
Daft= -1.5 =10m•
d) 1.2 m
; :
-; ! :r
{ 3.224 Problem
When the type of dock and

its general
features have been
determined, It will be
necessary to establish
the lateral load for
which the pier is to be
designed. Lateral
loads from the mooring
lines pull the ship
l into or along the dock
or hold It against the
a) 1.0 m force of the wind or
current. The maximum
'
~
J§' b)
c)
d)
0.5m
o.8m
1.2m
wind force will be
equal to the exposed
area of the broadside
of the ship in a light
condition multiplied by
the wtnd pressure
to which a shape factor
of 1.3 has been
applied, which is a
combined factor taking
I[3.223
into consideration the
reduction due to
height and the
Increase f.or suction on the
leeward side of the
ship. Compute the
Problem design wind pressure
in Pa of the pier
when ships are berth
on both sides of a
\ From a certain point along the Sulu Sea, pier. Wind velocity
is 78 mph.
the elevation of the sea level having an
. atmospheric pressure of 14.8 mbars is Solution:
~ 58.5 m. If the atmospheric pressure is only Wind pressure:
l 6.6 mbars, what will be the elevation of the
sea level at the same point? p =0.00256V2
p =0.00256(78)2
Solution: p = 15.575 psf
For every 1 mbar increase in pressure, . · Design wind pressure

= 15.575(1.3)
sea level will decrease by 0.9 cm or 0.009 m. Design wind pressure =
20.25 psf = 971.33
For every 1 mbar decr~ase in pressure, Design wind pressure=
971.33(1 + 0.50)
sea level will increase by 0.9 cm or 0.009 m.
Design wind pressure=
1457 Pa
Elev. of sea level= (14.8 - 6.6)(0.009) + 58.5 Note: When ships are
berth on both sides of
the pier, the total
wind force act~ng on the pier
Elev. of sea level= 58.574 m as a result of wind
on the ships, should be
increased by 50% to
a/tow for wind against the
second ship.
: :::
I3.225 Problem
Solution:
p = 0.00256\12
An ocean-going vessel, MV Sebastian, has p =0.00256(75)2
a displacement tonnage of 46,400 long p =14.4 psf
tons and a loaded draft of 37.5 ft. and has p = 14.4(1.2) =17.28 psf
an exposed area of 30000 sq.ft. when the Wind force which one ship exerts
against the
ship is berthed on the on the pier. The
vessel will dock without the aid of pier= 17·2~) := 219.93 tons
tugboats. If the max. wind velocity Is 70
mph In a direction normal to the pier, what .
second ship
Additional wind force of the
is the total wind force (tons) which the
vessel exerts against the pier considering =~ (219.93) = 109.96 tons
2
a factor of 1.3 to allow for suction on the
Total horizontal wind force on
the pier
leeWard side of the ship.
Hint: p =0.00256V2 (wind pressure in ps~ =219.93 + 109.96
=
1 ton 2200 lb. =330tons
V= velocity in mph
Solution:
Velocity pressure:
. ~ Maximum Width of •
p =0.00256\12
p =0.00256(70)2
Channels and Waterwa s
p = 12.54 psf
p =12.54(1 .3) =16.31 psf A) Single Lane Channel
Total wind force which one ship exerts against
the pier in tons:
F=pA Rank
&n/c
Clearance ...,........:.:..:c
M~::.:..:
"'=
oe1:.:..:..:
'"e::.:...:
ri;_:0,
11 ~ la=
11e~ Clearance
F = 16.31 (30000)
F =489300 lb.
489300
F= =222.41 tons
2200
f 3.226 Problem
The wor!d's largest tanker from Ireland has
Cha1111e/ width
a DWT of 326000 tons. It has an exposed
area of 2aoooft2 when it is berthed on the Width of manoeuvering lane =
ranges
pier. The max. wind velocity is 75 mph in a from 1.6 to 2.0 times the
beam width of
direction normal to the pier. If a second largest ship using the
channel
ship is berthed on the opposite side of the
pier, compute the total horizontal wind For large ship, an angle
of yaw of s·
force on the pier considering a factor of 1.2 can add an extra width
equivalent to half
to allow for suction side on the leeward the beam to the manoeuvering
lane, due
side of the ship. Hint: p =0.00256V2 (wind to the effect of cross
current and or
pressure in psf and V In mph) winds.
Bank clea,..nc1 =2 times
the beam of
the largest ship using the
channel.
M,1noeuver1ng lane =2 times
the beam
of the largest ship using the
channel.
/earance =ranges from 1.0 to 2.0 Channel with curves should
have
larger Width of channel
compared to a
. times e beam of the largest ship using
sank cth
straight channel .
the channel.
Recommended total channel' bottom Width of manoeuvering lane
for a
·dth for single lane channel should be curve channel should be
increased to 4
IYI6 to 6 times the beam of the design times the beam of the largest
ship in the
~ip depending on the sea and wmd
curve channel.
condition. Width of harbor entrance
should be
For oil and gas tankers, a minimum equal to the length of the
design ship.
bottom width chan~el should be 5 times Max. current velocity
through the
the beam of the ship. harbor entrance should not
exceed 1.5
mis or 3 knots.
B) Two-Lane Channel
Sliip
Cll'arunu
d/
<D For ships in ballast =3 to 5

times the
ship's length
® For a loaded ship such as oll
tanker
=7 to 8 times the ship's
length
Min. Diameters of Turning

Chann~/ width
Area During Manoeuvering
'
.. on the Harbor Basin -~.·..
To avoid excessive interaction
between two ships traveling past one
<D For ships without tugboat
assistance
another, either in the same direction or in
the opposite direction in a two-lane =4 times the length of the
ship
channel, it is necessary to separate the ® For ships having tugboat
assistance
two manoeuvering lanes by a ship =2 times the length of the
ship
clearance lane. @ With the use of main propeller
and
The clearance lane =min. of 30 m. or · rudder and the bow thrusters
= 1.5
the beam of the largest ship should be times the length of t~e
ship
provided. © Where the ship is turned by
warping
Recommended total channel width around a dolphin or pier and
will vary between 6.2 to 9 times the usually with tugboat
assistance
beam of the ship under calm conditions =1.2
times
length of the ship
I
J ( ,,3 .2_
~--
28
------.J
Problem ----,
The width of a restricted channel should be
measured at the bottom of the dredge bed
with a manoeuvering lane depending on
wind, current and the manoeuverability of

0
Q)
~~-~:;:.::__.,_,_
··'--.••.•••. ·.:(\
ll tfhoto I
I
Ulm tm1n I
the ship wherein container ships, car

>---~,,·
carriers, passenger ships present
considerable windage area and . may
therefore require more ~hannel width than
their beam would suggest Ships displaced

Length of dredge area= 1.25 times length of
from the channel centerline towards the
largest ship to use the berth, with
banks of the channel will experience a
tugboat assistance
bank suction effect due to the
Length of dredge area =: 1.5 times the length
asymmetrical flow of water around the ship
• of largest ship to use the berth, without
and this will cause a yawning movement
tugboat assistance
To counter act this, an additional bank
clearanc' must be added to the

Width of dredged tidal berth = 1.25 times the
manoeuvering lane on both sides.
beam of the largest ship to use the berth
Determine the minimum wtdth of the single
lane channel if the beam of the largest ship
is 24 m. wide. ·
I 3.227 Problem
To avoid excessive interaction between
Solution:
two ships traveling past one another, either
in the same or in the opposite direction in a
Batrlr. Manoe1111erin lane Banlc
Clearance ~===c..:.=---'--l Clearanu

two-lane channel, it is necessary to
separate the two manoeuvering lanes a
ship clearance lane. What would be the
distance of the clearance lane provided if
the beam of the smaller ship is 24 m. and
the beam of the larger ship is 28 m.
Slup
ClttlrllnCt'
di
&mk /.fanOt'lltYri11g Mam>t'u,·~nng ---
&Jn;
Clt<1rurr~ ~==~'-+-'-'=--'--'~
Ctr uranc·r
la11r '" '"
w
~
r!r_,,,,.....
...
Channel width
Min. manoeuvering lane = 1.68

8 =28
Min. manoeuvering lane= 1.6(24)
Min. manoeuvering lane= 38.40 m

--~~~-- ~~---I
Channel wid1li
Bank clearance = B = 24 m.
Solution:
Total width of channel = 24 + 38.40 + 24

d = ship clearance beam of largest ship but
nqt less than 30 m.
' Total width of channel = 86.40 m.
d =30 m > 28 Use d =30 m.
~9 Problem ] [3.230
Problem
iwo-lane channel with two ships using

The cargo ship
Is manoeuverlng thru a
A channel moving In opposite directions
th•5 beam width of smaller ship equal to one-lane
channel. The beam of the ship Is
36 m.
Considering the manoeuvering lane
h• m. and a beam width of the largest ship
~ 36 m. To avoid excessive Interaction the bank
clearance on both sides and
allowance for
yaw of the ship when the
~tween two ships trav~ling past. o~e channel Is
exposed to crosscurrent and
another in opposite direction, it ts wind, compute
the minimum width of the
ecessary to separate the two single lane
channel.
n anoeuverlng lanes by a ship clearance
:ne. To minimize the suctio{l and Solution:
repulsion forces between the ships, a
clearance lane not less than 30 m. or the
Bank
1>eam of the largest ship should be
Clearance
provided. Compute the minimum width of

the two-lane channel considering a bank
clearance lane on both_sides assuming the
channel is not exposed to crosscurrent or
winds. The width of the two-lane channel
should be measured at the bottom of the
dredged bed and should be the sum of the
lanes.
Solution:
Channel width
Ship
Ckartmce
d)
Ballk Man<Nuw rins MCJNHJA•ain~ 8anJ:
c1...rafll't Ckaranct Bank clearance
= B (beam of the largest ship)
"'"" Bank
clearance= 36 m.
Manoeuvering
lane =1.6 B + B (wlh aJowance
2
for yaw d the ship)
36
Manoeuvering
lane =1.6(36) + =75.60 m.
2
Channel width Min. width of
channel =36 + 36 + 75.60
Min. width of
channel =147.60 m.
Min. bank clearance = B = 36 m. (beam of
largest ship)
Manoeuvering lane is 1.6 times the beam of
the largerst ship. j.3.231
Problem
Manoeuvering lane = 1.6(36) = 57.60 m.
Ship clearance = 36 m. (not less than 30 m. A four-berth
pier and slip is shown in the
or beam of largest ship) figure. The
length of largest ship Is 180 m.
Total width of two-lane channel and that of
the smaller ship is 120 m. only.
=36(2) + 57.60 + 36 Compute the
minimum length of the pier. .
= 165.&0m.
lt.f-t: :: :
Sli
Determine the following:
ljm <D Total length, L of the
pier
~
Total width, Wof
the pier
~ ~
~ Width of slip, S
e ,ffff
i 0
II
.:J
lllO
f!tq L
.J
II
6
~6 B
B
y
2Sm Solution:
<D Length L of the pier
Solution:
..-r---il~t.
'.....r.1.:--._ _____,..................
Clearance = 0.1OL1 (length of largest ship)
Clearance= 0.10(180) = 18 m. 12.8
Total length of pier= 180 + 120 + 18 + 25 + 25

T-0tal length of pier = 368 m.
~m
I 3.232
,____---~-~
Proble1n J B W
II
(22m)
30mB
(22m)
The length of the cargo vessel afloat has a L = 180 + 25 + 25

length of 180 m. It is required to determine L = 230m.
the dimensions of the two-berth pier
shown using the following data:
® Width of the pier "W"
Width of apron on the sides for two-way
Area of transit shed:
traffic: a =8 m.
A= 840q(2) for 2 berths
(ship)
Width of apron on the truck loading
A= 16800 rn2
area: e • 12.8 m.
Width of apron on the truck loading 128 + y + 26 =230
area: c = 26 m. y =191.20
Beam (width) of ship: B =22 m. A= by
Area of transit shed = 8400 mz for one 16800 =b(191.20)
berth b =87.87 m.
8m 8m
.... ..,..-. ·····-r···-

_Problem
Compute the approximate

length of the
anchor chain of a ship
having a length of
120 m.
Transit
Sh~d
26m1 [ LW -- ··· " So/Ution:

,__3ro.i!. _ _-H3m ~
_-, l_::-_::-
L-
Length of anchor chain
=1.5 length of ship
103.87
Length of chain =
1.5(120) = 180 m. long
Width of pier:
w =87.87 + 8 + 8
W= 103.87m.
St~rtt
@ Width of slip S
s =28 + 30 1
lknhfrunt
S =2(22) + 30 =74 m.
BoM·tr Brw \
._,_
&M·~r s1~rn
'
Spring ,,....---... Spring
[ 3.233 Problem
w_)
When .more than one ship is to be
accommodated along the berth, determine Breast mooring lines are
used to reduce the
the minimum clearance length between the sway and yaw motions
and should be
adjacent ship If one ship has a length of perpendicular to the
ship.
180 m. and the other ship has a length of Spring mooring lines are
usecf to reduce the
200 m. surge motion of the
ship along the berth
front. They should
be as parallel as
possible to the
berth front. The angle
between the berth
front and the .shipside
should be equal to
or less than 10'.
PIER Head and stem lines
=these can be used in
addition to the
spring and breast lines to
. Solution:
reduce the ship's
motion.
Clearance =0.10 of the longest length of ship
Min. clearance =0.10(200) = 20 m.
: - : ::: : : -= :
3~._23_B___P_ro_b_le_m________~j
Elements of Standard Ships
in Relation to its Depth of
Lf
The
reduction of under keel clearance due
;
. ._ . Floatation - --- -- - to the
suction effect induced by the higher
current
velocity between the sea bottom
13.235 Problem I and the
ship.
The maximum distance from the water ~a)
Squat c) Aft
level to the highest point of the ship at the b)
Trim d) Keel
prevailing draft.
Q" a) Air draft I3.239

Problem
b) Scantling draft The difference
between the aft and the
c) Designed draft
forward draft.
d) Ballast displacement
lt1 • ll1=1rim
I3.236 Problem
The draft for which the structural strength
of the ship has been designed.
o,,,..,, ,,,.,,,,
Port rid~
~ b)
a)
c)
Air draft
_ _ )~
d)
~ a)
Trim c) Stem
b)
Bow .. d) Astern
f 3.240
Problem I
The point at
the backend of a ship is
f 3.237 Problem J called:
111 • llz=trim
The draft for which the fundamental design

parameters of the ship are based.
ht
a) Air draft
b) Scantling draft
~ c) Duigned draft
d) Trim draft
S1<1r/#>ard mfr
,. Kea
--
Widdl d"-n
-- ~
!
a)
Trim ~ c) Stem
b)
Bow d) Astern
[~.243 Problem 1
The backward motion of a ship ls called:
•1 • •1 ~1rim
o ....,, ,..,,,,
, Swrboonl •*
a) Ahead
b) Bow
a) Portside
~ c) Astem
~ b) sow
d) Aft
c) Stem
d) Starboard
Problem· \.
@42 ·Problem
I The right side of the ship when facing
towards the bow of the ship ls called:

The distance from the stem to the
midships.
lt1 • ll1=1rim
Bow
,.,1·.
............--:;~···· ··· .\ "'
• A/I
o..,.,, ,..,,.
F11r,••r'
, Aft
Pon sid'
-
0Hrlll/ fUJlli
/
Purl silk
[QJ Alvad
_______/
~~
Starboard silk
a) Portside
b) Aft
a) Forward
c} Astern
b) Bow
~cl)
c) Astern
Aft
" d) Starboard side

... :: :: - ':
[~!1•1·!•1 f 3~248 Problem
The movement of littoral

drift.
J
l 3.245 Problem
~a) Littoral
transport
A littoral drift that moves by tumbling, b) Foreshore
sliding or bouncing along the surface of c) Offshore
the sea floor through the direct action of d) In-shore
waves and currents.
a)
b)
Offshore sediment
On-shore sediment
f 3.249 Problem
J
c) Suspended sediment
The movement of littoral
drift parallel to the
Q> cl) Bed load sediment
shore.
a) Foreshore
transport
I3.246 Problem ~
b)
c)
Off-shore
transport
Long shore
transport
d) On-shore
transport
A littoral drift that is ·suspended in
seawater by turbulence of breakers and
others and transported by currents.
j 3.250 Problem
a) Offshore sediment
b) On-shore sediment The movement of
littoral drift
I& c) · Suspended sediment perpendicu.lar to the shore.
d) Bed load sediment
a) Foreshore
transport
b) Off-shore
transport
c) Long shore
transport
j 3.247 Problem · ~ d) On-shore
transport
Refers to the sedimentary material mov~d

in the littoral zone under action of wave
and current.
I3.251 Problem
a) Littoral transport A littoral drift'that moves as

a layer of high·
density flow near the bed
surface.
~ b) Littoral drift
c) Long shore transport ~ a) Sheet now
d) On-shore transport b) . On-shore sediment
c) Suspended sediment
d) Bed load sediment
.. - ..-. .. -.. ...

,~s2
problem
~------~---
J [3.255 Problem
• t r zone are classified Into the The region of •hallow.water
the sand movement differs
for~:':
,uow-wa e .
Sii w1ng regions.
fOllO wave run up and down flow.
During the
()ffshore zone time of wave run-up sand Is
put I
1. surf zone suspension by the agitation at
the front o~
u. swash zone a wave and transported by the
running-up
111. on-shore zone water.
rJ.
a) Offshore zone
~ a) 1, 11, and Ill only b) Surf zone
b) 1, 11 and IV only B'" c) Swash zone
c) I, 111, and IV only
d) On-shore zone
d) All of the above
f. 3.256 Problem
§s3 Problem
Long shore sediment moves In
either left
Th region of shallow-water zone where or right along a coast,
corresponding to
1eh-density suspension of sediment Is the direction of Incoming
waves. The
:o~d by the severe agltat~on and action direction with the larger
volume of
of 8 large-scale vortices that are generated movement during a year Is
called:
by the breakers.
Q> a) Predominant
direction
a) Offshore zone b) Long shore
direction
c) Off shore
direction
~ b) Surf zone
d) On shore
direction
c) Swash zone
d) On-shore zone
I3.257 Problem
[ 3.254 Problem The zone from low tide
shoreline to the
location of the upper limit of
wave wash at
The regions of shallow-water zone wherein high tide Is called:
which in order for sand to be moved by the CtHJSI Backsht:wt
For11shor~ lruhotY •horr
action of fluid motion (oscillatory
movement) the current velocity of the fluid
must exceed a certain value.-This condition
Is generally called the threshold of
movement
B> a) Offshore zone

b) Surf zone
a) On shore
c) Backshore
c) Swash zone
d) On-shore zone b} Inshore
~ d) Foreshore
: :;: :
[ 3.258
3.260 Problem
Problem
The zone from landward boundary of

1
The area between the offshore and the low
tide shoreline, where waves break and long
=
foreshore to the coastline, where waves
will reach during stormy weather 11 called
shore bars or steps.are formed Is callect·.
CtJ<UI L1<1dshorr Forrshorr /ruliort

Coast Backslw>rt forrslwJn
blujf1
bllljfs j
Mmn fl/1111 '4t11rr
!' ~ : -~'- : '"" ""-~
1 "'·'· /l.fr01t ~ Mlltrr
HIKh tide sh;Jrtlint
ltJw tide short/int'
a) On shore
a) On shore
Q" b) Inshore
b) Inshore
c) Backshore
q:- c) Backshore
d) Foreshore
d) Foreshore
3.261 Problem
J
, 3.259 Problem
When a model beach is constructed with
natural sand In a wave channel exposed to
The area on the ocean side where waves
waves over a long period of time, the
do not break normally. In many cases, the
beach profile will approach an equilibrium
' bottom slope is comparatively gentle is
condition corresponding to the waves
called:
acting upon it. This equlllbrlum condition
of the beach is classified into two types.
bluffs
Fore beacli · ·
srorp
~.-~
..... -~-
..-;.~
! "-'· M • ur• ltiu lfott r

.. '-')-~
Step type beach
(11ormal beach)
a) On shore
b) Long shore
..
Fore beac:fl. ·
q:- c) Offshore
d) Fore shore
Bar type beac:h
.·
(stonn ~ach)
SteP type beach and bar type D) fft'..AVING Md DIPPING
'1' •) beach
step type beach and shallow type
b) beach
ear type beach and shallow type
c) t>each
Shallow type and trough type
d) beach
E) SWAYING
~otion of Ships Caused by

. - seawater Waves .._,
t) SUllGING
~.~~~-
.
4 •
")
. .I·~
I .
. . .
~ ~I ~~
81rrrculNG
~~e~~0-
.
o . o.
.
• 1' '1 0
-
" .
\ 3.2&2 Problem
The movement In the horizontal plane

of a
ship moving forward or backward at
sea
under the Impact of current, waves,
and
wind gusts moving is called:
CJ YAWING
a) Pitch
~ b) Surge
c) Sway
d) Yaw
::: ::: : :
[_ _ _Problem
3.263 ______1J I3.267
Problem :::::J
The horizontal motion of
the ship along Its
The movement In the horizontal plane of a longitudinal axis caused
by ••awater
ship which tends to rotate the ship about waves is known as:
its vertical axis due to Impact of current,
waves and wind gusts Is called: a) Yawning
Q" c) Surg1no
b) Pttching
d) Heaving
a) Pitch c) Sway
b) Surge ~ d) Yaw
( 3.268 Problem
.]
I3.264 Problem J
The vertical motion ·of
the ship up and
down caused by seawater
waves is known
as:
The movement In the vertical plane of a
a) Yawning
c) Surging
ship, which tends to move It up and down
due to impact of current, waves, and wind b) Pitching
B" d) Heaving
gusts is called:
a)
b)
Pitch
Surge
~ c)
d)
Heave
Roll
f 3.269 Problem
The motion of the ship,
which tends
to
rotate the ship about its
longitudinal axis
due to seawater waves is
known as:
~f3_._2&_s___P_ro_b_l_em
____~~]
B" c)
a) Yawning
Rolling
The movement in the vertical plane of a b) Pitching
d) Heaving
ship, which tends to rotate the ship about
its transverse axis due to the impact of
current, waves and wind gusts, is called: j 3.270 Problem
]
The motion of the ship,
which tends to
~a) Pitch c) Heave
rotate the ship about its
traverse axis
b) Surge d) Roll
caused by seawater waves is
known as:
a) Yawning
c) Rolling
I3.266 Problem I@> b) Pitching
d) Heaving
The motion, which cause the ship to rotate

about the vertical axis of the boat, which is j 3.271 Problem
]
caused by seawater waves.
The motion of the ship, which
tends to
move horizontally on its sides
caused by
~a) Yawning
seawater waves.
b) Pitching
c} Surging a} Yawning
~ c) Swaying
d) Heaving b} Pitching
d) Heaving
:
. . al Dimensions of
pr1nc1p B) Container Ships
~vesse 1 ~
_ Letrgth IN,;;,, per1>endiculars

On•rnll length L-
..
Dead Weight
Full
• Tonnage Overall
Molded
Length
Breadth Load
(DWT)
Draft
30000 tons 218m
30.2m 11.1 m
Molded Depth
40000 tons 244m
32.Jm 12.2m
50000 tons 266m
32.3m 13.0m
60000tons 286m
36.5m 13.8m
Molded Breadth
A) cargo Ships '

C) Passe~ger Ships
-~:jz
Dead Weight Full
Overall Molded
Tonnage Load
Length Breadth
D Draft
1000tons 67m 10.9m 3.9m
2000tons 83m 13.1 m 4.9m
5000tons 109m 16.8m 6.5m Gross
Full
Overall
Molded
10000 tons 137m 19.9m Tonnage
Load
8.2m Length
Breadth
12000 tons 144m
(GTI
Draft
21 .0m 8.6m
30000 tons 185m 20000tons 180m
25.7 m 8m
27.5m 11.0 m
40000 tons 30000tons 207m
28.4m 8m
200m 29.9m 11.8 m
90000tons 249m 50000tons 248m
32.3 m Sm
38.1 m 14.7 m
100000 tons 70000tons 27&m
35.2m 8m
256m 39.3m 15.1 m
150000 tons· 286m 44.3m 16.9m·
&.1-: ;: :
O) Small Cargo Ships
DT Is displacement tonnage of •hips
A) Cargo Ships
Dead Weight Full
Overall Molded
Tonnage Load • Less than 10000 DWT
Length Breadth
D Draft log(DT) =0.550 + 0.889
log(DWT)
500 tons 51 m 9.0m 3.3m ·
700tons 57m 9.5m 3.4m • 10,000DWTormore
log(DT) = 0.511 + 0.913
log(DWT)
B) Container Ships
log(DT) =0.365 + 0.953 log(DWT)
E) Roll-on/Roll-off Vessels
C) Ferries
• Long distance
log(DT) = 1.388 + 0.683
log(GT)
• Short to medium distance

log(DT) = 0.506 + 0.904
log(GT)
-
D) Roll-on/Roll-off Vessels
Dead Weighj Overall Molded
Full =
l0g(DT) 0.0657 + 0.909 log(DWT)
Tonr.a~a Length Breadth
l oad
DWT; Draft E) Passenger Ships (Japanese)
400 tons_.___ !Ts m 13.6 m 1.1 m
---- -··
1500 tons
=
log(DT) 0.026 + 0.981 log(GT)
- --- -·- 97 m 16.4 m 4.7m
2500 tons 115 m 18.5 m 5.5m F) Passenger Ships (Foreign)
4000tons 134 m 20.7m 6.3m
6000tons 154 m 22.9m 7.0m log(DT) =0.021 + 0.891 log(GT)
10000 tons 182m 25.9m 7.4m
G) Car Carriers
=
log(DT) 1.915 + 0.588 log(GT)
H) Oil Tankers
=
log(DT) 0.332 + 0.956
log(DWT}
( 3.273 Problem
. ht of the ship is the
]
. a1weig f A foreign passenger ship has a gross
f11B v1rtu . /acement tonnage o
of the ~~S:added weight. tonnage (GT) of 30000 tons. It has 1
length
:ship and of 207 mwith a molded breadth of 25.
7
If the full draft Is 8 m, determine
the virtu~i
.Wld ~;ght: weight of the ship.
1
!fir W:!02 LWO . Use log (DT) =0.031 + 0.891 log (GT)
• 4
Solution:
Displacement tonnage (DT):
~~weight (tons) log (OT) =0.031 + 0.891 log (GT)
~...draft of ship (m}
o:: ~ofship(m} log (DT) =0.031 + 0.891 log (30000)
L:: . weight of seawater (1 ton!m3) OT= 10474 tons
Wo::unl Added weight :
~------~~~~-
-----~---------=~~~~
~Problem W=7t02 LW
'. 4 0
0 ship having a dead weight tonnage

A~ of 12000 tons has a daft of 8.6 m. If
w. =: (8) (207)(1)
2
(0 length of the ship and is molded W1 =10405 tons

~ are 144 m. and 2~ m. respective~y.
diefll\lne the virtual weight of the ship. Virtual weight of the ship =OT + W
I
USelog (OT): 0.511 + 0.913 log (DWT)
Virtual weight of the ship =10474 +
10405
Solution: Virtual weight of the ship =20879
tons
DWT =12000 tons
Displacement tonnage: (OT)
bJ (OT)= 0.5f1 + 0.913 log (OWT)
bJ (OT)= 0.511 + 0.913 log (12000) Relation Between the Dead
OT= 17191 tons i Weight Tonnage (DWT)
.f and the Gross Tonnage 1
Virtual weight =Displacement tonnage plus
added weight (Wa) (GT) for the Different Type
Added weight : .._..... of Vessels--.._...
W:.!!.02 LW
I 4 0
Cargo Ships: GT= 0.514

DWT
i
w.= (8.6) (144)(1)
2
Container Ships: GT= 0.880
DWT
w. =8365 tons Oil Tanker: GT= 0.553
DWT
,
VrtJai weight= 17191 + 8365 Roll-on/Roll-off Vessel: GT= 0.808
DWT
'frtuai weight= 25556 tons
.. Design Water Depth ~
[ 3.274 Problem J
standard Basin Depth for
Different
An oil tanker has a displacement tonnage Types of Vessels:
(DT) equal to 27800 tons. The length of the
Design Low Tide (DLT) • •
0.3 m.
oil tanker is 158 m. Determine the gross
tonnage (GT) capacity of the oil tanker. constructional allowance
for no •tour
Use log (DT) =0.332 + 0.956 log (OWT) protecting rlprap Is 0.5
m.
GT= 0.553 DWT If there Is scour
protecting rlprap, there la
no construction allowance
needed.
Solution:
log (DD =0.332 + 0.956 log (DWT)
log (27800) =0.332 + 0.956 log (DWT)
DWT =20012.53 tons
Gross tonnage (Gn =0.553 DWT
GT= 0.553(20012.53)
Design
GT= 11067 tons
water
depth
0.5 m
Value of Full Loaded Draft
(in meters) I ·3.21& CE Board

May 201&]
where: Plan~ed water depth is

considered as
DWT =dead weight tons follows for a ship with ·a
draft of 7.50 m.
Assume that there is a
scour protection
riprap layer.
· Standard water depth of
berth for the
ship= ·7.5 m
Design low tide =-0.35 m
A cargo ship having a total weight of Determine the design water
depth.
50,000 DWT (dead weight tons) including
its cargo floats on seawater having a
specific gravity of 1.03. Determine the Solution:
value of the full loaded (max.) draft.
Solution:
FuH loaded draft = Jowr

1000
+s
Full loaded draft

•
J50000
= 1000
=
+ 5 12.07 m
7.85m
7.S m (draft)
0.35 m (low tide)

....,,............._.~~~-
-J..-
-
F'oFl-rs AND HARBOR '
= standard water depth
~
ter depth
nned wa . + design low t1 e
'd
b6rth for ship th =-7.5 + (-0.35)
[ 3.278 CE Board Nov. 2016
I
o ed water dep A rectangular barge Is 20 m long,
12 m
Piann ed water depth =• 7.85 m
wide and 8 m deep. It ente" the
harbor of
f'ISnn i's no scour protecting Cebu City having a design low
tide (DLT)
e there ·
e: In cas he allowance for extra ~redgtng equal to - 0.30 m. The harbor
facility Is
~,,,/ayer, t . red, usually 0.5 m. ts taken
,;prsfd be cons1de
protected by rtprap to prevent
scouring.
sh011 • The weight of the barge when
empty is
fOT this nem. equal to 1000 tons. Assuming
sp.gr. of
seawater to be 1.03 and that the
max. depth
of water In the harbor Is 6.4 m
deep,
determine the maximum weight In
tons that
r
3.277_ -~p~~=bl~em
__~~---l the barge can carry safely based
on the
specifications of the (PPA) Phil.
Port
. en data shown below, it Is Authority regarding standard
water depth.
from the g1vcompute the design water
required to hip having a 40,000 DWT (dead
depth for as
ightton). Solution:
well load drop of the ship =• 11 m
~lgn Low Tide (~LT) =. 0.3 m
construe't.on allowance for no scour
protecting riprap = 0.5 m
Sm
solution:
6.4m
0.30m
12 m
llm
11.8 m BF= 12(6.1)(20)(-1.03)(1000)
05 m1l...J--- -.- -
0.3 m BF .= 1507920 kg
W=BF
w= 1507.920 tons
Design water depth
Max. weight it could carry =
1507.920 - 1OOO
= - 11 - 0.3 • 0.5
= • 11.8 m Max. weight it could carry
=507.920 tons
- : :: :; :
Vol. displaced in seawater.
3.279 CE Board May 2015,
W = V (sp.gr.) Yw
May 2~16
20000(1000) =V1(1 .03)(1000)
A ship having a displacement of 20000 V1 = 19417.48 m3
metric tonn enters a harbor of frnh water.
The ship captain recorded a draft of 8.4 m. Vol. displaced in fresh water:
while the ship was still In seawater (sp.gr.
=1.03). Obtain the draft in meters of the 20000(1000) = V2(1000)
ship In frnh water if the horizontal section V2 =20000 m3
of the ship below the water line ii 3000 m3 V2-V1 = h(A)
in both instances. 20000 - 19417.48 = h(3000)
h=0.194m
Solution:
Draft in fresh water = 8.4 + 0.194
=
Draft in fresh water 8.594 m.
A cargo vessel weighing 200,000 kg

Is 14 m
long, 8 meters wide and 4.5 meters
deep. It
will transport to Cebu 20 mm
diameter by 6
meters long reinforcing steel bars.
· Sea water (sp . gr.= 1.03)
(i) If a draft (submerged depth
of the
cargo vessel) is to be
maintained at 3
meters, how many pieces of
the bars
can it carry if density of
salt water
equal to 1026 kg/ml and steel
weighs
7850 kg/ml.
~ What is the draft from the

cargo vessel
when one half of its cargo is
unloaded
in fresh water?.
BF2 ~ If the draft of the cargo vessel

In frnh
Fresh water water is equal to 2 m.,
determine the
number of bars that it can
carry.
so1utJon:
When the cargo vssset is 8f
the fresh
water the total weight is only
w2.
W2= 200,000 + 1«J36
W2 =272368 kg
B.F. =W2 =272368
272368 =d(8)(14)(1000)
Salt d =2.'3 m. (draft in fresh wate~
water
@ Number of bars that It can carry:

Sm
(2)(8)(14)(1000) =200,000 + 14.79x
x =1623 bars
( 3.281 Problem
d Fresh A container ship 122 m. long and 12 m.

water wide displaced 8500 cubic meter1 of fresh
water. It Is placed in a lock 137 m. long
and 15 m. wide and then loaded with 3640
tons of steel.
<D Pieces of bars:
'
x=no. of bars
2
W2 =.n(0.02) (6)(7850) x
4
W2 = 14.79 x kg (wt. of steel bars)
W1+ W2=BF
200,000 + 14.79x =3(8)(14)(1026)
x = 9786 no. of bars
® Draft from the cargo vessel: (1) Determine the draft of ship before
the
steel Is loaded.
Total weight= W1 + W2 ~ Determine the draft of the ship
after the
W= 200,000+14.79(9786) . steel Is loaded.
·
~ Determine the Increase In depth of
w=200,000 + 144736. water In the lock after the ship
has
W= 344736kg been loaded with steel.
. -
I 338
L
- -- PORT~ A~D HARBD_R
- -~
Solution: f 3.282
Problem :
A ship of 7064
sq.m. horizontal cro1s-
sectlonal area at
the water line has a draft
of 12.35 m in sea
water when loaded to a
capacity. In the
fresh water at the entrance
of the Panama
Canal, it is observed that
the ship draws
12.6 m. Sp.gr. of sea
water =1.03.
~ l· - -·- -·----- I
>-+-~~~~~~~~~; •
~ (I) Determine
the weight of the ship and
cargo in
tonnes.
122 m
- ~ Determine
the shlpi displacement in
IJ7 m
cu.m. for
fresh water.
~ With an
available water depth in the
canal, what
weight of cargo must be
lightered
tFO that the ship can barely
pass into
the locks with 0.1 m
l :U m -<t I clearance
below the keel?
ll7 tn
Solution:
<D Draft of ship before the steel is loaded:
122(12) d1 =8500
d1=5.806m.
® Draft of ship after the steel is loaded:

~ the steel is loaded: •
- 3640(1000)
d2 - 5·806 + 1000(122)(12)
d2 =8.292 m.
Sea water
Ji Increase in the depth of water:
122(12)y = [ 137(15) - 122(12)] x
1464 =591x
y= 0.404x
x + y + 5.806 =8.292
x+ y= 2.486
y= 2.486-x 12.60
0.404x =2.486 - x
1.404x =2.486
x= 1.71 m.
Fresh water
[ 3.283 Problem
& .
A boat going from salt water

(Ip.gr. Is 1.03)
to fresh water (sp.gr. • 1)
sinks 7.62 cm.
\.....u.U-..q.~-r--t10.2 and after burning 72,730 kg. of
coal rises
up by 15.24 cm.
~12, ~ Find the original draft In

salt water.
~ Find the original draft In
fresh water.
~ Find the original displacement
of the
boat In sea water.
. ht of the ship and cargo in tonnes: Solution:

<Y Weig
© Original draft in salt water.
V=vol. displaced in sea water
In figure A:
V+ 7064(12.6-12.35) =vol. displaced
in fresh water
V+ 1766 = vol. displaced in fresh water
~~:
'~
u::~
--
= ~~ - ~
W= B.F. = 1030V in sea water ··-t:=- - . : :: ; .:
::::t-- ;,
W= B.F. = 1000 (V + 1766)
r.,,,
BF1 = W
1030V =1000 (V + 1766)
Assume that the cross-
sectional area of
v= 58,867 cu.m. the ship is uniform =A
W= (58,867)(1000) BF1= WVo
W= 58,867,000 kg, 8F1 =1000(1.03) [Ay]
w=58,867 tonnes BF= 1030Ay
In figure B:
® Ships displacement in cu.m. for fresh
water:
V= 58,867 cu.m. in sea water
V= 58,867 + 1766
V= 60.633 cu.m. in fresh water
BF2=W
1000(1) [A (y+ 0.0762)) =W
@ Change of weight from a height of 12.6 m. W= 1000 A (y + 0.0762) •
to 12.4 m.
wt. of cargo to be lightered: In figure C:
-~~
W= 7064(0.2)(1000)
W= 1412.800 kg
W= 1412.8 tonnes
l'timwwww-
- .t...
~
• =:
.,.
o•on
. '
t~
o • ..
_ 1, .0.076.2
.
: :::: ;: a
W= 1030 Ay Solution:
1030 Ay = 1000 A {y + 0.0762)
1.03y =y + 0.0762
0.03y =0.0762
y= 2.5'
4.669
® Original draft in fresh water.
4.969 m
Draft =2.54 + 0.0762 OJ m
Draft =2.6162 m.
in 1• 0 wot"
@ Original displacement of the boat in sea
water.
In 0 W= 1030A (2.54)
W= 2616.2A 0
BF3 = W- 72730 4.8 m
1000(1) [A {y- 0.0762)) =W- 72,730

1OOOA (y- 0.0762) =W - 72, 730 e
in tit•
P011a11U1 Canal
In e 1000A (2.54 - 0.0762)

=2616.2A- 72730 1marine ton =2240 lb. =9.988
kN
2463.SA = 2616.2A - 72730 1
Vol. displaced in seawater=
0000(9·988)
152.4A = 72730 .
1.02(9.81)
A= 477.23 m2 Vol. displaced in seawater=
9994.80 m3
In 0 W = 261 6.2 (477.23)
w= 1,248,529 kg
W= 12,248 kN
Vol. displaced in Panama Canal
=10000(9.988)
1.0(9.81)
Vol. displaced in Panama
Canal= 10181.45 m3
I3.284 Problem
. d aft (10181.45
- 9994.80)
Differ.ence in r =- -- - - -
A cruise liner having a constant cross·
1800
sectional area of 1800 sq.m. crusied Difference in draft= 0.131 m
Atlantic Ocean to the Pacific Ocean taking
the Panama Canal route. The ship has a Draft in seawater= 4.8-0.131
displacement of 10000 tons and an
observed draft of 4.8 m. in the Gatun Lake Draft jn seawater =4.669 m
Lock of the canal. What should be the
specified depth in Philippine standards of a Specified depth in Phil.
Standard
refuge harbor in the Pacmc due to a strong
typhoon. Sp. gr. of the seawater is 1.02 and =4.669 +0.3
assume 1 marine ton = 2240 lb. The design = 4.969m.
low tide is - 0.3 m.

Transportation Highway Engineering by Besavilla

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Transportation Highway Engineering by Besavilla

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

- -..---.

21. Plate Load Test 87-88

25. Geometric Shape of Traffic Signs 125-126

26. Types of Crack and Wearing of Concrete Pavements 126-127

27. Practical Problems of Highway Costing 128-130

6. Peak Hour F~ctor 161-

22. Passing Sight Dist

11. Seismk Forces Acting on Marine Structures

12. Ang1~ ar Frequency of a Wave

13. Mooring and Bollards

All of the above

The elements to consider when planning

National Roads are:

I. Limited frontage access

II. Development set well back from the

a) I, II, IV and V only

Ill. Road narrowtng

expansion or development of the ~

as it passes through the community or

road• wtth no "blind Through crowded

" or boulevards clear of

tr ts" or boulevards clear of

[ 1.12 Problem~ \ \ 1.16

~-\;.--:. a) 40kph c) 35 kph

distance between The pavement

fhe following are vulnerable road users:

following minimum distances from the When considering parking adjacent

11. The loll of capacity during ptrklng

1ct1 by 1t1rtlng to apply th• bnik" to

The provision of safety sight distance

c) I, II and Ill only

safety design is _ seconds. This value

Tangent run off ·

[---- --- -- -~- ~-~~'~'=~~,r:i~

Types of curb that - - - _J

The most important criteria to consider to

' c) Diverge lanes

Turnout Is a very short section ,of f~ll

a) I, II, Ill and IV only

,,,: ;. --- - I ~~=--- c)

The figure shown is one type of

pos1lblltty of conflict and

a) I, II and Ill only

b) I, Ill and IV only

c) 11,·111 and IV only

a) rotary Intersections roundabout

Traffic can be controlled at Intersections by

traffic control device such as

""d) All of the above

1.77 Problem S<I

b) partial clover leaf

the major road.

a) thru street signs

All of the above

th8 number of conflict

The speed of vehicles through an ~ a)

a) I, II and Ill only

I. Gulde traffic Into defined paths Roundabouts may be appropriate In the

I. High entry angle slip lane 11.87 Problem

Some typical road

a) roadside poles J 1.97 Problem

[t .106 Problem / · Devices which may

:;1 111 Pro~~m .. ] I[ 1.1 14

I.1._1_7 6_ ~_o_b_l,_m